Technical Specification VamCong

P1\CKAGE CW3A
IDDI됐{해 IDOCυ 1\'111봐협TS

VOLUME 11: SPECIFICATION
Volume 11.2: .Technical Specification
Stàge: Detail Design
Cuu Long CIPM
JOINT VENTURE OF
DASAN CONSULTANTS CO., LTD.,
KUNHWA ENGINEERING & CONSULTING CO., LTD.
AND PYUNGHWA ENGINEERING CONSULTANTS LTD.
P몫9멤맹 I핍
’
kunhwa i를C 얻밸@센뺑
HOCHIMINH CITY, May 2013

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORKS
Section 2.1 Site Clearing 2.1

Demolition and removal of existing structures and
Section 2.2 2.2
obstructions
DIVISION 3 - NOT APPLICABLE
DIVISION 4 - LANDSCAPING
Section 4.1 Landscaping 4.1
DIVISION 5 - SLOPE PROTEεTION
Section 5.1 Slope Protection 5.1
DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFAεE
Section 6.1 Prime Coat and Tack Coat 6.1
Section 6.2 Asphalt Concrete Surface Courses 6.2
Section 6.3 Waterproofing 6.3
뼈 IVISION 7 - MISCELLANEOUS
Section 7.1 Traffic sign 7 .1
Section 7.2 Pavement Markings 8.2
DIVISION 8 - STRUεTURE 찌'0RKS
8.1 Stmcture Excavation and Backfi 낀 ~ 1
Sect lOl1 8.5 Concrete Structures 8‘ 5
Section 8.6 Reinforcing Steel 8.6
Section 8.7 Prestressing 8.7
Sectioll 8.8 Steel Structurc 8‘ g

Section 8.9 Painting 8.9
Section 8.10 Bridge Bearings 8.10
Section 8.11 Bridge Deck Expansíon Joints 8.11
Section 8.12 Rai1ings 8.12
Section 8.13 Not Applicable 8.13
Section 8.14 Miscellaneous Metal 8.14
Section 8.15 Not Applicable 8.15
Sectio i1 8.16 Cable Stayed Bridge Constmctioll 8.16
Section 8.17 Stay Cable 8.17
Section 8.18 Wind Cable 8 .1 8
Section 8.19 Not App1icable 8.19
Section 8.20 Cable Vibration Test 8.20
Section 8.2 1 Bridge Health Monitoring System 8.21
Section 8.22 Bridge Drainage 8.22
Section 8.2 3 Not App1icable 8.23
Section 8.24 Shock Transmissioll Units 8.24
R갯 IVISlor애 앵 -E흉」용EεT짧효CAL 댐10짧짧§
Section 9.1 Electrical 찌10rks 9.1

Section 9.2 Civil Works 9.2
Section 9.3 Diesel Engine Generator 9.3
Section 9.4 Automatic Transfer Switch 9.4
표HVISION 1 뼈 - 1갱 AY쨌10RKS
DIVISION 2
SITEWORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.1 - Site Clearing ............................................................................................................... 2.1
2.2 - Demolition and Removal ofExisting Structures and Obstructions ........................... 2.2
DIVISION 2 - SITE WORKS Site Clearing and Grubbing - Section 2.1
SEεT훌ON 2.1- SI멜E εLEARINGA!얘DGR윈 BBH‘g
1. 1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of clearing, gmbbing , removal of top soil, and removal and disposal of
all vegetatioll and debris within the project limits , excepting those objects designated to
1'emain in placε 01' to be removed in accordance with other sections ofthese Specifications.
This wo1'k also includes the preservation from injury 01' defacement of all vegetation and
objects designated to remain.
1.2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMEN경‘S
1.2. 1. Genel'al
The Engineer wil1 establish the limits of work and designatε all trees , shrubs , plants and
other things to remain. The Contractor shall protect and preserve all items designated to
remam.
1.2.2. Clearing and Grubbing and 1다'ee Removal

(a) A l1 surface objects and all trees , timber, rotten wo。강， stumps, roots , snags , brush ,
other vegetation , rubbish, and other p1'otruding obstructions , not designated to
remain, shall bε cleared and/or gmbbed, including disposal as required.
(b) In areas under roadway embankments , from which top soil or unsuitable materials
are to be removed or which are designated to be compacted, all stumps and roots
shall be re1l10ved to a depth at least 50 cm below the o1'iginal ground surface and at
least 50 cm below the bottom ofthe designed lowest pavement layer.
(c) 1n roadway cut areas , all stumps and roots shall be removed to a depth of not less
than 50 cm below the finished subgrade level.
(d) Clearing and gmbbing of pits , chmmel changes , and ditches shall be made only to
the depth necessitated by the excavatioll within those areas.
(e) Voids left after removal ofroots shall be fiUed with suitable material and compacted.
1.2.3. Topsoil Stripping
(a) In areas under roadway embankments or where designated by the Engineer , the
Contractor shall re1l10ve the topsoil and dispose it of as directed by the Engineer.
(b) 1n general the removal of topsoil shall Ïnclude only the removal of soil which is
sufficiently fertile to encourage or sustain the growth of vegetation.
(c) Removal of topsoil over any designated area shall be to the depth as directεd by the
Engineer, and the topsoil that in the Engineer ’ s opinion can be re-used shall be
stockpiled separately fì'om other excavated material.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - mVISION 2 2.1-1-of8

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORKS Site Clearing and Grubbing - Section 2.1
(d) Where topsoil is to be used fo 1' dressing of the slopes of embankment 01' othe1' a1'eas
as di 1'ected by the Enginee1' 01' as indicated on the drawings , the wo1'k of topsoil
stripping wil1 be deεmed to in c1 ude stockpiling of topsoil when necessary as well as
1'emoval , placing and sp1'eading of topsoil in a1'eas designated by the Enginee1'. In
which case , the wo 1'k shall be measured and paid only unde1' Specification of Top
Soiling. Afte1' sp1'eading , the topsoil shall be raked to form a smooth surface free
from weeds , roots , sods and large stones.
1.2.4. Protection of Areas Designated to Remain

1n areas designated by the Engineer, the Contracto1' shal1 be responsible for the protection
and routine maintenance of existing shrubs , trees and g1'assed areas. On completion of the
W orks these areas shall be returned to the Employe1' in the same condition as befo1'e and
any damage due directly 01' indirectly to the Contracto1'’s operations shal1 be made good at
the Cont1'actor’ s own expenses.
1.2.5. Disposal of Cleared Material
(a) The Cont1'actor shall have the 1'ight to use un-saleable timber (or saleable timber
when permission is granted in w1'iting by the app1'op1'iate govemment agency 01'
autho1'ity) for his own purposes in connection with the Contract; always provided
that he has ascertained and complied with the requi1'ements of the 1'elevant
govεrnment agency 01' autho 1'ity.
(b) Saleable timbe1' shall be neat1y sto1'ed in an app1'oved accessible place within 01' nea1'
the right-of-way as directed and shall be t1'immed and stacked in accordance with the
requi 1'ements ofthe relevant govenunent agency.
(c) All other timber , except timber to be used , and all brush , stumps , 1'oots , logs , and
other refuse from the clearing and g1'ubbing operation shall be disposed of at
locations p1'ovided by the Contractor.
(d) The adjacent areas shall be left with a neat and finished appea1'ance. No
accumulation of debris shall 1'emain on or adjacent to the project.
1.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1.3. 1. Method of Measurement

Clearíng and grubbing , demolition and 1'emoval of existing structu1'es and obstructions ,
topsoil stripping and protection of designated areas , inc1uded in the work for Site Clearing,
shall be measured in square meters. Quantities wi1l be based on the field measurements and
volumεs approved by the El1 ginee1'.
Removal or protection of trees , 1'egardless of thei1' size 01' nature , shall 110t be measu1'ed or
paid separately, and shall be deemed incI uded in the wo1'k of Site Cleari l1 g.
한뚫폈휩쿄동끊닮퍼뚫끊펀똥팩歸뚫륜끓후힘힐E텀효품짧풍끊헬참패꿇짧즙Ifé~s~
bon'ow pit sites , haul roads and temporary constructiol1 areas shall not be paid for when
such sites are outside the areas designated fo 1' c1 earing and grubbing. The Contractor is
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 2 2.1 - 2 - of8

DIVISION 2 - S!TE WORKS Site Clearing and Grubbing - Section 2.1
pel1lùtted to exercise his own option as whether to use such disposa1 sites or borrow pit
sItes.
1.3.2. Basis of Payment
The work shall be paid for in accordance with the applicab1e Unit Prices as indicated in the
Bil1 of Quantities and given be10w. Payment shal1 be fu l1 compensation for fumishing all
1abour, materia1s , to01s , equipment and incidentals necessary to do the work specified.
Payment shal1 be inc1usive of all necessary, remova1 and proper disposa1 of materia1s
Description Unit
m‘?
Site Clearing and Grubbing
TECHNICAL SPECIFIεATIONS - mVISION 2 2.1-3-of8

Dl VISION 2 - SITE WORKS Di version & Protection of Existing Utilities - Section 2.2
SECTION 2.2 - DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING

STRUCTURES AND OBSTRUCTIONS
2. 1. DESCRIPTION
Demolítíon and Removal of Exístíng Structures consist of the removal , wholly or in part,
and satísfactory disposal of blocks of masomy of an indivídual size greater than 1 cubic
meter, of all buildings , hedges , fences , structures, pavements , curbs , and any other
obstructions which are not designated or pennitted to remain. Demolition includes the
salvaging of designated materials and proper backfilling (in accordance with specification
requirements) of any and all trenches , holes and pits resulting from demolition and removal
work.
Right of way acquisition may 110t be completed in all areas at the start-up of the
const1'uction period and the Contractor shall schedule the wo1'k associated with this
Specification section accordingly.
Obstructions or other items that are designated fo 1' removal and disposal elsewhere in the
Contract Documεnts shall be dealt with in accordance with so stipulated requirements.
2.2. WORK REQUIREMENTS
2.2.1. General
Demolition and Removal of Existing Structures by the Contractor shall be providεd， within
and a이 acent to roadways , and on the right-of-ways , as shown on the D1'awings or as
directed by the Engineer.
(a) The Engineer may instruct that materials recovered from demolition work shall
remain the property of the EmpJoye1' unless specifically provided otherwise in the
Contract Documents.
(b) All designated saleablε material shall be removed, without mmecessary damage , in
sections or pieces that may be readily transported , and shall be stored by the
Contractor at specifiεd places on the project as directed by the Engineer.
(c) Basements 01' cavities left by structu1'e 1'emoval shall be back-filled with acceptable
mate1'ial to the level of the surroundíng g1'ound and , if within the prism of
construction, shall be compacted. The1'e wíU be no sepa1'ate payment for backfilling
and compaction the resulting cavíties.
(d) Demolition and Removal of Exis디ng Structures íncludes salvage of materials

removed , their custody , preservation, and sto1'age on the right-of-way 0l' any other
locations as may be designated by the Engineer 01' the Employer, 01' disposal as
provided hereín.

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORI'엉 Di version & Protection of Existing Utilities - Sectiolll 2.2
2.2.2. Removal of Drainage Structures
(a) Bridges , culverts and other drainage structures in use by traffic shallnot be re l110ved
until satisfacto1'Yarrange l11ents have been made to accon1l11odate traffic.
(b) The removal of existing culverts within el11bankment areas wil1 be requi1'ed only as
necessary for the installation of new structures. Abandoned culverts shall be broken
down , crushed and sealed or plugged.
(c) Al1 culvert sections removed, which a1'e not designated fo 1' stockpiling or 1'elaying ,
shall becol11e the property of the Cont1'acto1' and be 1'emoved from the project or
disposed of in a malU1er approved by the Engineer.
(d) Unless otherwise directed , the substructures of existing structures shall be removed
down to the natural st1'eam bottom and those parts outside of the st1'eam shall be
removed down to at least 300 rnm below natural ground s따face.
(e) Where portions of the existing structures lie wholly 01' in pa1't within the limits fo 1' a
new structu1'e, thεy shall be rernovεd as nεcessary to acc01llmodate the construction
of the p1'oposed structure. Whe1'e only a section of the existing structure is to be
demolished , the Cont1'actor shall execute this work in such a way as to avoid damage
to the section designated to rel11ain. All deta i1 s of the Cont1'acto1'’s proposed worlcing
method shal1 be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
(f) Any structures designated to beco l11e the property of the Contractor shall be 1'ernoved
f1'om the 1'i양lt-of -way.
(g) Blasting 01' other operations necessary for the 1'emoval of an existing structure or
obstruction, which l11ay damage new construction , shall be completed prio1' to
placing the new work, unless otherwise app1'oved by the Engineer.
(h) Steel bridges and wood bridges , when spεcified by the Enginee1' to be salvaged, shall
be ca1'efully dismant1 ed without damage. Steel members shall be match-marked,
uniess the Enginee1' waives such match maricing. All salvaged material shall be
sto1'ed as 1'equested by the Enginee1'.
(i) Unless waived in w1'iting by the Engineer, all concrete 1'emoved that is of suitable
size fo 1' rip-rap and not needed fo 1' such use on the Project , shall be stockpiled at
locations designated by the Enginee1', fo 1' use by the Employe1'.
2.2.3. Removal of Curbs
(a) Existing curbs designated for removal , inc1 uding their bases , shall be broken into
pieces , the size of which shallnot exceed 300 mm in any dimension and stockpiled
at designated locations on the site for use of the Ernployer, or otherwise disposed of
as directed by the Engineer.
TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 2 2.3 - 5 - of 8

DIVISION 2 - SITE 、NORKS Diversion & Protection of Existing Utilities - Section 2.2
(b) Removal of existing curbs shall be undertaken in such a ma1111εr as to avoid damage
to existing pavements and curbs which are designatεd to remain.
2.2.4. Removal of Pavements, Footpaths, etc.
(a) Irrespective of thickness , all asphalt or concrete pavements , footpaths , or other hard
surfaces designated for removal , shall be broken into pieces , the size of which shall
not exceed 300 mm in any dimension and stockpiled at designated locatio11s 011 the
site for use of the Employer, or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
(b) Removal of pavement shall be carefully undertaken to avoid damage to abutting

sections of pavement or structures designated to remain.
(c) If removal of sections of old pavement, footpaths or other hard surfaces of an

individual size less than 10 cubic meters or excavation of ballast, gravel or sirnilar
sub-base or base material is necessary , this work shall be considered as Common
Excavation , and shall conform to the requirements of Specification “ Common
Excavation" , for construction, measurement and payment.
2.2.5. Removal of Traffic Signs
(a) Where directed , traffic signs including steel frames shall be carefully dismantled,
removed and stored where directed by the Engineer.
(b) Concrete foundations shall be broken into pieces removed and stockpiled at
designated locations 011 the site for use of the Employer or shall be otherwise
disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
2.2.6. Removal of Buildings and Structures
(a) Upon receipt of notification by the Engineer, the Contractor shall take over all
responsibility for the building 01' buildings then acquired and vacant and shall
proceed with the removal thereof as specifiεd.
(b) Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, the
Contractor shall complete the demolition and removal of buildings and structures
together with all foundations and 1'etaining walls , piers , partitions and colurnns down
to a plane 30 centimetres below the ultimate grade in the area.
(c) Walls shall be broken into pieces not exceeding 60 square centimetres fo 1' any area
of surface , mixed with previous backfill material and placεd in basement areas.
(d) Basement f1 00r slabs shall be broken and displaced into pieces not exceeding 60
square centimetres for any area of surface and shall be left in place. Excess debris
shall be removed and disposed. All other foundations , concretε f1 00r slabs , sidewalks ,
펴필밸날꿇잃패한짧옳꿇훈월앓흐르 and all other i많앓앉앓흥많 C이lateral W앞뇨:
necessary to fully complete the removal of the buildings and appurtenances shall be
removed and disposed.

DIVISION 2 - SITE WO없‘s Diversion & Protection of Existing Utilities - Section 2.2
(e) The Contractor sha11 inspect each building he is to 1'emove and detennine for himself
the wor1‘ involved and the equipment and the materials required for such demolition
wo1'k.
(f) The Contractor sha11 anange for the discontinuance of a11 utility services that se1've
the buildi11g or buildi11gs in accorda11ce with the respective requi 1'ements a1펴
regulations ofthe app1'opriate govemment age11cies , and the utility agεncies involved.
(g) The Contracto1' sha11 disco1ll1ect and p1'oper1y seal , in a mmmer app1'oved by the local
govenunent agency 01' agencies responsible and the Enginee1', a11 sewe1' outlets that
se1've any bui1ding 01' buildings that the Cont1' acto 1' is di 1'ected to 1'emove.
(h) The Contractor sha11 keep the Enginee1' infonned of his plans fo 1' the pe1'fonnance of
any wo1'k in connectÎon wÎth the sealing off of such outlets in o1'de1' that proper
inspection may be p1'ovided at the time the work is performed.
(i) The Contractor sha11 conduct his operations in such a ma1ll1er as to avoid hazards to
pe1'sons and vehicles. After work is sta1'ted on any building , the work on that
building sha11 be continued to completion, promptly and expeditiously.
G) Al1 deb1'is 8ha11 be removed from basement areas and concrete floors broken. The
area 8ha11 then be fi11ed with previous backfi11 material simultaneously with the
breaking of the foundation wa11s so t11at the p1'evious backfi11 matetial wi1l be we11
integrated with the pieces ofbroken concrete.
(k) Concrete slabs 1'esting on earth and forming walks , driveways , 01' the first floo 1' slabs
of buildings without basements except as indicated on the D1'awings sha11 be broken
up and 1'emoved f1'om the site.
(1) The Contracto1' is 1'esponsible fo 1' 1'emoving any additional sma11 “ out ’ buildings 0 1'
misce11aneous structures which have not been i11dicated 011 the Drawings.
(m) Existing unde1'ground sto1'age talùCS on the site 01' within the buildings sha11 be
1'emoved and disposed by the Contractor. The Contracto1' sha11 take a11 necessary
p1'ecautions during the 1'emoval of the fluid withÎn the talÙCS and the removal of the
existing tanks. Whe1'e tanks a1'e removed , the Contractor sha11 backfill with fine
agg1'egate. This backfi11 sha11 be in accordance with this Specification section 03700.
(n) Structu1'es designated to become the prope1'ty of the Contractor sha11 be removed
from the right-of-way.
(0) Operations necessary fo 1' the 1'emoval of an existing structure 01' obstruction, which
may damage new construction, sha11 be completed p1'io1' to placing the new work,
unless otherwise p1'ovided in the Contract.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 2 2.3 - 7 - of8

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORKS Diversion & Protection of Existing Utilities - Section 2.2
Demolition and removal of existing structures and obstructions shall not be measured for
payment and shall be included in the pay item of Site Clearing and Grubing.
Demolition and removal ofpavement, regardless ofits nature (asphalt , concrete , etc.) under
this Specification section is applicable only when pavement rεmoval is required in
conjunction with site clearing.
1n locations where pavement removal is required along with the removal of base , sub-base
anψor sub-grade materials , pavement demolition and removal shall not be paid separately,
but be included in the cost of excavation in accordance with the provisions of Specification
Section 8.1 “ Structure Excavation and Backfill".
TECHNICAL SPECIFJCATIONS - DIVISION 2 2.3 - 8 - of8

D훌VISION 3
NO’훌’ APPL훌CABLE
‘
DIVISION 4
LANDSCAPING
DIVISION 4 - LANDSεAPING Section 4.1
SECTION 4.1 - LA엠합gεAPING
TABl.필 OF εor써r훌‘훌~r에 TS
1. DESCRIPTION ………….....................................…………………......……………………......... 2
2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS …………....……………….... ………………… ...•…·……….2
0
3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS …....…………..• 0 ••• …………………...……… ….. 5 0 .. 0 . 0
4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ……………………...•。……… 0 …………(1 ……….. 10

•••• 0 ...
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 4 4.1 - I - of 11

DIVISION 4 - LANDSCAPING Section 4.1
SECTION 4.1 - LANDSCAPING
1. DESCRIPTION
This work consists of the provision and planting of grass , flowers , shmbs and trees at locations
shown 011 the Drawings , or as indicated by the Engineer.
2. MATERIAL REQUlREMENTS
2.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be paπicularly applied.
• ASTM C602-07 Agricultural Lirning Materials
• 22 TCN 271-2000 Standard for Constmction ofBitumious Surface Road
• 22 TCN 334-06 Standard for Constmction and Acceptant of Aggregate in

Road Pavement.
2.2 GRASSING, TREES AND SHRUBS FOR PLANTING
2.2.1 GRASSING
(a) Grass seed
The Contractor shall submit for the Engineer ’ s approval a selection of available suitable seed
for grass cover. Seed shall be free from disease , rnildew or mould and clean of any noxious
weed seed. All selected seed shall be obtained from a reputable approved source.
(b) Sodding
The speciεs of grass selected shall be rapid spreading, free of disease and noxious weeds and
shall be deep rooted. The source of sods will be approved by the Engineer before cutting and
delivery to the Project and the Contractor shall notify the Engineer not less than 3 days before
cutting of sods begins. Sods shall be planted with their root system substantially undamaged
and cut into blocks with moist earth in which they have grown. Sods shall be laid within 5
days of cutting. Sod blocks shall be hauled and stored in such m aImer that they will be
protected fì'0 ll1 di 1' ect sunrays , provided with air circulation, and prevented against drγing.
(c) Sprigs
These shal1 be healthy living stems (stolons 0 1' rhizomes) with attached roots or pεrennial turf
fonning grasses such as Buffalo , Kikuyu , Paspalum , Carpet grass harvested without adhering
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA Tl ONS - DIVISION 4 4.1 - 2 - of 11

DIVlSION 4 - LANDSCAPING Section 4.1
soil. They shal1 be obtained f1'om app1'oved sources which a1'e quick spreading and capable of
fO r1TIÌ ng a thickly matted growth.
2.2.2 TREES AND SHRUBS FOR PLAN Tl NG
The plants shall comply with the following requirements:
- Height oftrees on both bridge sides sha l1 be between 1. 5 m and 3.0 m. T1'ees shall be good
sunshine , less ca1'e, so should choose “ Fortune Pink" t1'ees with height <2m, or othe1' similar
types that approved for use by the Engineer.
- Height of trees unde1' the bridge shall be not exceed than 1. 0m. Trees unde1' the
bridge shall be “ Troc bac" , and some “ ltalia Orchid" ... to inc1'ease the beautiful fo 1'
lanscaping, 0 1' other simila1' types that approved fo 1' use by the Enginee1'.
- Plants must be able to thrive. And shall be free of disease , infestation and shall have
good healthy b1'anches.
- When dispatching trees to the site the trees shall be tied to suppo1't posts or simila1'
in order that the trees are not damaged.
- Whe1'e planting is in pots the pots shall be of a size suitable fo 1' the plant at maturity
and of a type app1'oved by the Enginee1'.
2.3 FERTlLIZERS
Fertilizer shall be standard cOlmne1'cial fe 1'tilize1' supplied separately or in mixtures

containing pe1'centages of total nitrogen , available phosphoric acid , and wate1'-soluble
potash based on the so i1 composition and shallmeεt Vietnamese and applicable local
laws. They shal1 be fumished in standa1'd containe1's with name , weight , and
guaranteed analysis of contents clearly ma1'ked thereon.
No cyanamide compounds 0 1' hydrated lime shall be pennitted in mixed fertilizers.
The Cont1'actor shal1 have his proposed sod planting beds tested by an acceptable
agricultural laboratory fo 1' available nut1'ients. Based on results of tests , the type ,
contents and application rates of fe11ilizer and the need and application rates fo 1' lime
shall be established by the laboratory.
Fertilizers may be supplied in one ofthe following fonns:
• A dry , free-flowing fe 1'tilize1' suitable fo 1' application by a common fe 1'tilize1'

sp1'eade1';
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVIS lO N 4 4.1 - 3 - of 11

+ A finely-ground fertilizer soluble in water, suitable for application by power

sprayers; or
+ A granular or pellet fon11 suitable for application by blower equipmen t.
2.4 LIME
If the use of lime is required, it shal1 be ground limεstone containing not less than 85% of
total carbonates , and shall be ground to such fineness that 90% shall pass through a 250 μm
mesh sieve and 50% shall pass through a 150 μm mesh sieve. Dolomitic lime or a high
magnesium lime shall contain at least 10% of magnesium oxide. Allliming materials shall
confon11 to the requirements of ASTM C602-07.
2.5 TOPSOIL
Topsoil shal1 be the surface layer of soil with no adrnixture of refuse or any material toxic to
plant growth , and it shall be reasonably free from subso i1 and stumps , roots , brush , stones (50
mm or more in diameter) , c1 ay lumps or sirnilar objects.
Brush and other vegetation that will not be incorporated into the soil during handling
operations shal1 be cut and removed.
Ordinary sods and herbaceous growth such as grass and weeds are not to be removed but
shall be thoroughly broken up and inten11ixed with thε soil during handling operations.
The topsoil or so i1 mixture, unless otherwise specified or approved, shal1 have a pH range of
approximately 5.5 to 7.6.
The organic content shall be not less than 3% but not higher than 20%.
The material passing the 0.075 llli11 sieve , as detennined by the wash test in accordance with
AASHTO Tll , shall be 110t less than 20% but not higher than 80%.
The Contractor may ame l1 d natural topsoil with approved materials and methods to meet the
above specifications.
2.6 OTHER MATERIALS
- Concrete shall be of the class il1 dicated on the Drawings and Ìll accordance with the
requireme l1 ts of Section 8.5 “ Concrete Structures" of these Specifications.
- Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requirements of Section 8.6 “ Reinforcíng Steel" of
- Aggregate shall confonn to the requirements of Standard 22 TCN 334-06
TECHNICAL SPECIFJCATIONS - DIVISION 4 4.1 - 4 - of 11

‘ • 、
Dl VISION 4 - LANDSCAPING Section 4.1
- Construction of Bitumious 1ayer shall confonn to the requirements of Standard 22 TCN

271-2000
- Bitumious Tack Coat shall confonn to the requirements of Section 6.1 “ Prime Coat and
Tack Coat" ofthese Specifications.
2.7 SUBMITTALS
Prior to the commencement of the work for this item, the Contractor shall submit the
following to the Engineer for approval:
(a) Detai1s of his proposed sources for sod evidencing that the sod is heavy and thickly
matted and does not contain any objectionab1e grass , weeds , or other det1'imental
material;
(b) Details of his p1'oposed sou1'ces fo 1' shrubs and trees evidencing that all the shrubs and
trees are in optimal conditions to be p1antεd as indicated on the Drawings;
(c) Detailed description of the sod, shrubs alld trees including the name , type , size and
major characteristics regarding thε εllvirot1ment and thεír maintenance;
(d) Detai1s regarding the fertilizer suppliers proposed by the Contractor for the Project;
(e) Test results , and laboratory ’ s proposed fe 1'tilizer contents and application rates; and
(f) Test results of lime , if its use is allowed by the Engineer , confirming that the Quality
of the proposed lime sources comply with this Specification Section and providing
enough infonnation to the Engineer regarding the lime properties for respective
approval;
(g) Details regarding the Concrete, Reinforcing Steel, Aggregate, Bitummious Tack Coat
to the Engineer for approval.
3. CONSTRUCTION REQUI표E뼈ENTS
3.1 HARVESTING
The Contractor shallnotify the Engineer at least 5 days before sods are to be harvested,
and the source shall be approved by the Engineer before harvesting begins.
To begin harvesting, grass and woods shall be mowed to a height of 50 to 75 mm and

all clippings removed. Sods shall then be loosened by cross-disking , shallow
ploughing or other acceptable methods. After being loosened from the soil, sods shall
be gathered in small piles or windrows , watered and kept moist until planted.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 4 4.1 - 5 - of 11

Not more than 24 hours shall elapse between harvesting and planting, except that
when weather or other uncontrollable condition interrupts the work, in which case
additional time may be permitted, provided that the sods are still moist and viable.
Sod, shrubs and trees that have heated in stockpiles , pennitted to dry out or otherwise
seriously damaged during harvesting or delivery shall be immediately rejected and
disposed of as directed by the Engineer.
3.2 ADVANCED PREPARATION AND CLEANUP
After grading and before applying fertilizer and ground limestone, the areas to be
sodded shall be racked or otherwise cleared of stone larger than 50 mm in diameter,
sticks , stumps and other debris which might interfere with sodding , growth of grass , or
subsequent maintenance of grass-covered areas. lf any damage by erosion or other
causes has occurred after grading of a1'eas and befo1'e the application of fertilize 1' and
ground limestone , the Contractor shall repai1' such damage. This may include filling
gullies , smoothing il1'egula1'ities , and repai1'ing other incidental damage.
3.3 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT
The areas to be topsoiled are shown on the Drawings 01' as indicated by the Enginee1'.
lf topsoil is available on the site, the Engineer will approve the location of the
stockpiles or areas to be stripped of topsoil and the stripping depths.
Suitable equipment necessary for p1'oper preparation and treatment of the ground
surface , st1'ipping of topsoil , and fo 1' the handling and placing of all 1'equired materials
shall be on hand and in good condition.
hmnediately prior to dumping and spreading the topsoil on any area (except directly
on a rock surface) , the su1'face shall be loosened by discs 01' spike-tooth hal1'0ws , or by
other approved means , to a minimum depth of 50 mm to facilitate bonding of the
topsoil to the covered subgrade soi l. The su1'face of the area to be topsoiled shall be
cleared of all stones larger than 50 mm in any diameter and all litter 01' other material
which may be dεtrimental to proper bonding , the rise of capil1ary moisture , or the
proper growth of the desired planting. Limited a1'eas , as shown on the D1'awings , which
are too compact to 1'espond to these ope 1'ations , shall receive special scarification.
Grades 011 the area to be topsoiled , which have bεen established by others as shown on
the Drawings , shall be maintained in a true and even condition. Whe1'e g1'ades have not
U<OÇlT흥하a=uri 'ð표çU，-U-~ νg운동fTiUT깅-ç-:C-MFl1ì.7\n-IP Õ"I--a\Iv‘f깅간"*'τHε 용"'1"1:강{“V"îvrli':z1~ur-ε prVlS~Uεg
grades in an even and prope1'ly compacted conditioll to prevent, insofar as practical, the
fonnatio l1 of low placεs or pockets whεre water w i1l stand.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 4 4.1-6-ofl1

DIVISION 4 - LANDSCAPING Sectioil 4.1
Ar eas to be topsoiled that require filling material to reach the lines and levels described
on the D1'awings , sha11 be filled up to a level that top- soiling can be applied p1'operly as
specified in this Specificatio11 Section.
Topsoil sha11 be evenly sp1'ead 011 the p1'epared a1'eas to a u11ifonTI depth of 150 mm
aftc1' compaction, unless otherwise showl1 on the D1'awings. Spreading sha11 not be
done when the ground or topsoil is excessively wet, 01' otherwise in a condition
detrimental to the wo1'k. Spreading sha11 be calTied out so that seeding ope1'ations can
proceed with a minimum of soil p1'eparation or tilling.
After spreading, any large , stiff clods and hard lumps sha11 be broken with a pulverizer
01' by other effective means , and a11 stones 01' rocks (50 mm 01' mo 1'e in diamete1'), 1'oots ,
sp1'eading is completed, topsoil sha11 be satisfactorily compacted by 1'olling or by other

approved means. The compacted topsoil surface sha11 confonTI to the required lines ,
grades , and cross sections. Any topsoil 01' othe1' di 1't falling upon pavements as a result
of hauling 01' handling of topsoil sha11 be promptly 1'emoved.
3.4 ApPLYING FERTILIZER AND GROUND L!MESTONE
Fo11owing advance preparation and cleanup , fertilizer sha11 be unifonnly spread at a

1'ate app1'oved by the Engineer.
If the use of ground limestone is requi1'ed, it sha11 be spread at a rate app1'oved by the
Enginee1'.
Materials sha11 be incorporated into the soil to a depth of not less than 50 rnrn by
disking , 1'ackìng , 01' other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Stones la1'ge1' tha11
50 mm in diameter, large clods , roots , and other litte1' brought to the surface by this
ope1'atio11 sha11 be removed.
011 steep slopes where fertilizer and ground limestone cannot be incorporated
effectively by mechanical equipment , they may be applied with power sprayers ,
blower equipment 01' other approved method and need not be incorpo 1'ated illto the
soil.
TECHNICAL SPEεIFICATIONS - DIVISION 4 4.1 .. 7 .. of 11

3.5 PLANTING
(a) General
Works shal1 not take place until tree planting in the area has been completed. Surfaces
shall be scarified and shaped after removing debris , gravel and weeds. All stones of
more than 3 cm diameter shal1 be removed. The surfaces shall be made up as
necessary with good quality topsoil so as to ensure that the finished thickness of the
work (in c1 uding any sod or top drεssing) is not less than 30 cm. For grassing on
embankments made of erodible material , a cohesive material shall be incorporated
with clay content at least 25% and plasticity index at least 20%. The Contractor will
be responsible for ensuring a healthy growth in soddedl sprigged areas and necessaη
treatments before or after sodding will be at the Contractor’s own expense. This may
include lime to neutralize any existing sour condition of the soil and subsequently
Urea or NPK fertilizer , to promote growth.
(b) Seεding
The area for seeding shall be lightly ril1ed to a depth of between 6 mm and 12 mm.
The pattem of r i11ing shall be as dirεctεd by the Engineer. The area shall be damp
before rilling commences and the seed is broadcast across the surface area.
Broadcasting of seed must not be caITied out during windy or heavy rain periods.
Seed shall be distributed in an even layer at the cover rate as recommended by the
Engineer. Within 2 hours of seeding the surface shal1 be lightly ro l1ed but extreme
care l11ust bε taken that the surface is 110t picked up by the roller.
(c) Sodding
Sod blocks shall be placed so as to cover 50% of the surface by fom1Ìng sod strips at
the interval of 30 cm (this w i11 be called "Strip Sodding") , or to cover entire surfaces
(which shall be called "Solid Sodding") , as noted in the Drawings or directed by the
Engineer. In strψ sodding, joints shall be staggered to fonn a broken bond. Joints
between adjacent sod blocks shall not exceed 0.5 cm. Sod blocks shall be placed in
smooth finish and compacted by a ro l1 er of 100 kg weight or by tamper plate. Sand
shall be spread over the grass sods already laid and into the joints and the whole area
shal1 be watered twice daily until the grass has taken firm roo t. Sufficient bamboo
stakes shall be used to prevent the sod blocks slipping when sodding is provided 011
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS - DIVISION 4 4.1 - 8 - of 11

‘ 、
mVISION 4 - LANDSεAPING Sectioll 4.1
(d) Sprigging
Before harvesting of the sprigs , the grass sha11 be 1l10wed to a height of 50 to 75 lilln
and a11 clippings and waste materials removed. Sprigs sha11 then be loosened by cross
disking sha110w ploughing or other acceptable 1l1ethods. After loosenil1g the sprigs
from the soil they sha11 be promptly gathered into sma11 piles or windrows , watered
and kept moist u11til they a1'e planted. The ti1l1e between harvesti l1g and planting sha11
110t exceed 24 hours. Sprigs that have been heated in stockpi1es , pennitted to dry out
01' othe1'wise damaged sha11 be 1'ejected.
Sp1'igging sha11 not be done du1'ing windy weather, 01" when the ground is dry ,
excessively wet, or otherwise u11t il1 able. The method sha11 be app1'oved by the
Enginee1' cOl1sidering the location and condition of the a1'ea to be treated, but will
genera11y be one , 01' more , of the following:
(i) Broadcast Sprigging: Sprigs sha11 be broadcast by hand or by suitable equip1l1ent in

a uniform layer with spacing between sprigs not to exceed 150 111m. The sprigs sha11
then be forced Înto the soil to a depth of 50 to 100 l1:nn with a straight spade or similar
too1 , or with a disk haπow or other equipment set to cnver the sprìgs to the required
depth.
(ii) Row Sprigging: Fuπows sha11 be opened a10ng the approximate contours of the
slopes at a spacing and depth approved by the Engineer. Sprigs sha11 be placed
without delay in continuous rows along the opel1 furrow with successive sprigs
touching. The sp1'igs sha11 the11 be cove1'ed immediately.
(iii) Spot Sp1'iggÎng: Spot spriggil1g sha11 be pe1'fonned as specified unde1' 1'ow
sp1'igging except that instead of planting in continuous rows , g1'oups of fou 1' sprigs 01'
more sha11 be spaced 450 mm apart in the rows.
Within 24 hours of sprigging the area sha11 be lightly ro11ed 01' tamped but this work
sha11 not be d011e ifthe soil condition is such that it is picked up by thε equipme11t.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 4 4 .1 - 9 - of 11

3.6 COMPACTING
After planting of sods has been completed, and prior to compacting, the surface shall be
cleared of stonεs larger than 50 mm in diameter, large clods , roots and other litter brought to
the surface during sodding.
Sodded area shall be compacted within 24 hours from the time sodding has been completed,
1n weather and soil conditions pennitting, by cultipackers , rollers or other satisfactory
equipment operated at right angles to the slopes. Compaction shall not be done when the soil
is in such condition that the equipmεnt Ca1illot practically be operated. Clay shall not be
compacted if so directed by the Engineer.
3.7 MAINTENANCE OF PLANTED AREAS
The Contractor shall protect areas of sod against traffic by waming signs or barricades
approved by the Engineεr. Surfaces gullied or otherwise damaged following sodding shall be
repaired by re-grading and re-sodding as directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall water
and otherwise maintain sodden areas of sod and all other planting in the median or in pots in
a satisfactory condition until final inspection and the Acceptance of Work.
3.8 OTHER WORKS
- Concrete: shall conform to the requirements of Section 8.5 “ Concrete Structures" of these
Specifications.
- Reinforcing steel shall cOl1form to the requirements of Section 8.6 “ Reinforcing Steel" of
these Specifications.
- Aggregate shall confonn to the requirements of Standard 22 TCN 334-06
- Constructìon of Bitumious layer shall confonn to the requirements of Standard 22 TCN

271-2000
- Bitumious Tack Coat shall COnfOl1l1 to the requireme l1 ts of Section 6.1 “ Prime Coat and
Tack Coat" of these Spεcifications.
4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.1 METHOD OF MEASURE!\1ENT
Sodding will be measured for payment by the number of square meters , measured 011 the
? τ • ;•] 각걷:흔=갇마~잉~._.응~"'- "'- τ : • • • τ=손 i ι : •
ground surface , completed and accepted. The area covered by the shrubs or trees planting
work shall be excluded from the area calculated for payment of sodding.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - Dl VISION 4 4.1 - 10 - of 11

DIVISION4 - LANDSCAPING Sectlon 4.1
Planting of shrubs and trees shall be measured for payment by the number of shrubs or trees
counted on the ground surface , completed and accepted.
4.2 BASIS OF PA YMENT
Payment sha11 be made in accordance with the applicable unit prices of the pay items of the
Bill of Quantities listed below. Payment sha11 be full compensation for the completed and
approved work, including fumishing and placÍng a11 materials , any required mulching of
sodden areas , labor, equipment, to01s and any other incidentals to complete the work in
accordance with the Drawings and Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.
Topsoil placement sha11 be measurement and paid by the number of cubic meter.
，ι
Precast concrete C25 for curb sha11 be measurement and paid by the l1umber of cubic meter.
Bitumious Surface Treatment, rate 3kg/m2 sha11 be measurement and paid by the number of
square meter. Bitumious Prime Coat (lkglm2) sha11 not be measured and paid separately, but
it’ s deemed to be included in unit price of Bitumious Surface Treatment.
Aggregate Type 1 with the thickness of 20cm sha11 be measurement and paid by the number
of cubic meter.
Pay Item Description Unit
4.01-01 Grassed Area, Solid sodding m2
4.01-02 Tree Each
4.01-03 Structural E:lt.cavation by manpower m3
4.01-04 Earth base fi11 K90 m3
4.01-05 Topsoi1 m3
4.01-06 Precast concrete C25 for curb m3
Bitumious Surface Treatment, rate

4.01-07 m2
3kg/m2
4.01-08 Aggregate Type 1, thickness 20cm m3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 4 4 .1 - 11 - of 11

DIVISION 5
SLOPE PROTECTION
、 ‘:
mViSION 5 - SLOPE PROTECTION
SECTION 5.1 - SLOPE PROTECTION
TABLE OF CONTEN멸‘S
1. DESCRIPTION …..…….............................................….............……… ....•.…............................... 2

2. MA'τERIAL REQUIREMENTS …… ...•.…... 0 ••••••••••••• (1 • • 06 • • • • 0 • • • • • • • • " • • • • • • …..…............"…........... 2
3. CONSTRUCTION .....….........."..•.......…..•..……".....................................…....•.. 6 •• ……..•.........•.. 3
4. MEASUREMENT ...............…… •..• ………………•..………...••.....•....• IICÞ • • ……................................…6
5. PAYMENl‘ “ “ •••••••• “ i ‘ ••••••… i …… •••• … •• “ 6 ••••• “ ••••••••••• ‘…… •• ‘""""…… i ‘“‘ 7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 5 5.I-l-0 f7

DIVISION 5 - SLOPE PROTECTION Section 5.1
SECTION 5.1 - SLOPE PROTECTION
1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of the construction of bank and slope protection. Th ese provisions shall
apply to riprap, concrete slope paving, and precast concrete slope paving.
Slope protection shall he constructed as shown in the Drawings and as directed by the Engineer.
2 MATERIALS REQUlREMENTS
2.1 Concrete
Concrete shall be class C20 concrete, either pre-cast or cast in-situ as indicated on the
drawings.
2.2 Crushed aggregate
Crushed aggregate shall be placed in layers and compacted to 95% of the maximum dry
density determined according to AASHTO T99
The material shall be well-graded crushed or uncrushed gravel, stone, rock-fil1 or natural sand
or a well-mixed combination of any of these. Grading requirements for Granular Backfill shall
be as fo l1ows:
Maximum size 5cm

Passing 4.75 mm sieve 25%to 90%
Passing 0.075 mm sieve 0% to 10%

Liquid limit AASHTO T89 or TCVN4197-95 30%max.
2.3 Sod
Sod shall confonn to the requirements for sodding under Technical Specification Section 4.1 -
Lan dscaping.
2.4 Aggregate
Aggregate for riprap shall conform to the requirements in the drawings.
2.5 Filter Fabric
Filter fablic shall meet the requirements as follow:
• Longitudinal and lateral tens i1e strength (ASTM D4595): :2: 12kN/m;
• Ri tched tensile strength (ASTM D4632): :2: 1,0 kN;

，、----’----- -“.ö.........+1-. f A C' T ‘ I f T、 A" 'l'l 、. ,>(1':1 lr l\.T.
- .
‘ ’ ‘ - - ‘ ’-0-- .... - 0 - 、 ------~- -" .._-~-~’ "- -~
• Puncture resistance strength CBR (BS 6906-4): 1500-5000N;
TECHNJCALSPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 5 5.1- 2 - of7

DIVISION 5 - SLOPE PROTECTiON Section 5.1
• Elongation at break (ASTM D4595): ~ 65%;
• Diameter offilter (ASTM D4751): 090 ~ 0,125mm và 090 ~ 0,64 D85;
• Where D85 is diameter of backfilling mate11als consisting of size less than 85%
• Penetration coefficient (BS 9606-3): 으 1,4 10-4m/s;
• Ultra-violet (UV) resistance capacity: after 3 months of being affected by UV (ASTM

D-4355): >70%.
2.6 Grout
Grout sha11 consist of one part of Portland cemεnt and three parts of s없ld， thoroughly mixed with
water to produce a workable mix.
2.7 Portland Cement Concrete
Portland cement concrete for cast-in-place slope paving sha11 conforrn to the provisio11S 111
Section 8.5 "Concrete Structures"
2.8 Precast of Portland cement Concrete Blocks anù Shapes
Precast of POliland cement concrete blocks and shapes sha11 meet the requirements of "Prεcast
C011crete Members."
2.9 Reinforcing Steel

Reinforcement sha11 confonn to the provisions in Section 8.6 "Reinforcing Steel."
2.10 Timber Pile

- Timber piles must be hard enough, st1'aight to avoid being broken unde 1' installation progress.
- Length of piles must be large1' the length limit defined in Engineering design document.
- Diametεr of sma11 cap > 5cm 01' as show in the drawing.
2. í1 BackfIHi ng Soil at Abutmcnts

Backfi1ling Soil at Abutments sha11 conform with the Drawings and the Requirements of
Backfilling in Specification of Approach Road.
3 CONSTRUCTION
3.1 Preparation of Siopes
Where required , slopes sha11 be shaped to a110w the full thickness of the specifiεd slope
protection and any bedding or filter grave l. Slopes sha11 not be steeper than the natural angle of
repose ofthe slope specified in the contract documents. Where the slopes cannot be excavated to
undisturbed material , the underlying material sha11 be compacted to 95 percent standard density
as specified in AASHTO T 99.
3.2 Bcdding
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 5 5.1-3-0 f7

When called for in the contract documents , a layer of filter gravel or filter fabric shall be placed
on the slope immediately prior to placement of the riprap or slope paving. T:Q.e layer of filter
gravel shall be shaped to provide the minimum thickness specified in the contract documents.
3.3 Filter Fabric

When specified in the contract documents , filter fabric shall be spread uniformly over the
prepared slope or surface. The fabric shall be unrolled directly on the surface to the lines and
dimensions shown in the contract documents. The filter fabric shall be lapped a minimum of 300
nun in each direction and shall be anchored in position with approved anchoring devices. The
Contractor shall place the riprap in a manner that will not tear, puncture, or shift the fabric.
Tracked or wheeled equipment shall not be permitted on the fabric-covered slopes.
3.4 Hand Placing Stones

Where hand placing of stones is specified in the contract documents , the larger stones shall be
placed first with close joints in the footing trench. Stones shall be placed with their longitudinal
axis normal to the embankment face and arranged so that each stone above the foundation course
has a 3-point bearing on the underlying stones. Bearing on smaller stones that may be used for
chinking voids shall not be acceptable. Placing of stones by dumpillg shal1 not be permitted.
Interstices shall be fi l1ed with smaller stones and spal1s.
3.5 Machine-Placed Stones

3.5.1 Dry Placement
Machine-placed stolles shall be so placed as to provide a minimum of voids, and the larger
stones shal1 be placed in the toe course and 011 the outside surface of the slope protection. The
stone may be placed by dumping and may be spread ill layers by bulldozers or other suitable
equipment. At the completion of slope protection work, the footing trench shall be filled with
excavated material, and compaction willll0t be required.
3.5.2 Underwater Placement
When placed ullder water, fi:ee dumping shall not be permitted without wrÎ tten permissioll of the
Engineer. Placement shall be by controlled methods using bottom dump buckets or wire rope
baskets lowered through the water to the point of placemellt.
3.6 Grouted Ri prap
Stolles shall be placed on the slope as specified in Article 3.4, "Hand Placing Stones," and shall
be thoroughly moistened with water after placement. Grout shall be applied while the stone is
moist and shall be worked into the interstices to completely fill the voids.
Where the depth is in excess of 300 mm, the stone shall be placed in 300-mm lifts and each lift
얄미~때r tQ p!qÇfl<went ofthe next lift. Succeeding lifts shall be constl'Ucted and grouted
before grout in the previous lift has set.
Grout shall be placed only when the weather is suitable and shall be protected from freezing for
TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 5 5.1-4-of7

at least four days. The surface shall be cured by covering with moist earth, wet rugs , or curing
blankets for at least three days after grout placement.
Weep holes shall be provided through the riprap as shown in the contract documents or as
3.7 Concrete Slope Paving
3.7.1 General
This work shal1 consist of constructing cast-in-place and precast Portland c히.nent concrete slope
pav1l1g.
3.7.2 Cast-In-Place Slope Paving
Concrete sha11 be mixed and placed in confolmance with the provisions in Section 8.5 ,
-“
"Concrete Structures," and shall be spread and tamped unt i1 it is thoroughly compacted and
mortar flushes to the su1'face. If the slope is too steep to permit the use of concrete sufficiently
wet to flush with tamping, the concrete shal1 be tamped unti1 consolidated and a mortar surface 6
mm thick troweled on immediately. The mortar shall consist of one palt p01tland cement and
three paπs fine aggregate. The mortar surface shall be considered as a part of the concrete and no r~눈τ?
separate payment will be made therefore. ，~←
After striking off to grade , the concrete shal1 be hand floated with wooden floats. Edges and
joints shall be edged with a 6-mm radius edger prior to the brooming. The enti1'e surface shall be
broomed with a fine-texture hair push broom to produce a uniform surface with the broom marks
parallel to the edges of the panel.
Cast-in-place concrete shall be cured as provided in Sections 8.5 "Concrete Structures"

respectively.
Weep holes shal1 be provided through the slope paving as shown in the contract documents or as
Pervious backfil1 material, if required by the contract documents , shall be placed as shown. 0.06
m3 of pervious backfill material wrapped in filter fabric shall be placεd at each weep hole and
drainhole.
At the completion of the work, footing trenches shal1 be filled with excavated material and
compaction shal1 not be required.
3.7.3 Precast Slope Paving
Blocks and shapes shal1 be thoroughly rammed in placed to provide a unifonn1y even surface
and solid bedding under each block or shape.
In the areas where grouting is specified in the contract documents 01' required by the Engineer,
the blocks shall be laid in running bond with the length parallel to the slope and with 6-m111 -
joints. Fol1owing the laying of the blocks, in the area to be grouted , sufficient 1110rtar sand shall
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 5 5 .1 -5 -0 f7

be spread over the surface and swept into the joints to fill the latter to 100 mm from the surface.
The blocks shall be wetted to the satisfaction of the Engineer before any grout is placed. The
joints shall be filled with grout f1 ush with the top ofthe block.
After grouting has been completed and the grout has su:ffi ciently hardened, the blocks shall be
wetted, covered, and cured with curin.g blankets or covers for the first seven days after grouting.
Grout shal1 not be poured during freezing weather.
4 MEASUREMENT
4.1 Cut-off wall of Revetment at Top and Bottom
Cut-off wall of Revetment at Top and Bottom shall be measured by the linear meter. The
dimension shall be that actually placed to the limiting dimensions shown in the contract
documents , or the dimensions as may have been revised by the Engineer, measured along the
upper surface. Cut-off wal1 of Revetment at Top and Bottom includes Stone Masonry or
Concrete, Reinforcement concrete beam, Blinding concrete, blinding aggregate, wood pile,...
that show in the drawing. Th ese items wi1l not be measured and paid separately but shalI be
deemed to be included in unit price ofCut-offwal1 ofRevetment at Top and Bottom.
4.2 Body of Revetment (Rock chip layer areas)
Body of Revetment (Rock chip layer area) shall be measured by the cubic meter. The quantity
shal1 be that actually placed to the limiting dimensions shown in the contract documents , or the r.
dimensions às may have been revised by the Engineer, measured along the upper surface. Body
of Revetment includes Rock chip layer, Handed Rirap, Geotextile layer, ... that show in the ι
drawing. These items w i1l not be measured and paid separately but shal1 be deemed to be
included in unit price of Body of Revetment.
4.3 Bank Protection of Revetment (Precast concrete block area)
Bank Protection of Revetment shall be measured by the square meter. The area shalI be that
actually placed to the limiting dimensions shown in the contract documents , or the dimensions as
may have been revised by the Engineer, measured along the upper surface. Bank Protection of
Revetment in c1 udes Precast concrete block, Blinding Aggregate, Geotextile layer, ... that show
in the drawing. These items willnot be measured and paid separately but shal1 be deemed to be
included in unit price of Bank Protection of Revetment.
4.4 Slope Protection for Abutment
Slope Protection for Abutment shall be measured by the square meter. The area shall be that
actually placed to the limiting dimensions shown in the contract documents , or the dimensions as
may have been revised by the Engineer, measured along the upper surface. Slope Protection for
Abutment ineludes Perforated Brick, Sod, Crushed Stone, D50 PVC Pipe , Cover Filling, Sand
Filling K95 , Geotextile layer, ... that show in the drawing. These items w i1l not be measured and
~ • þailI 용흘pnrnt하yη따힐mrrηe 야하nea<uruσ mcm찌ça<TII ωlπ.pm:;c.ur-ooup여TUWι ‘1VIC.Yl3rl""lvutTtt냥I‘·
4.5 Cut-off wall of Abutment
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - DIVISION 5 5.1-6-of7

Dl VISION 5 - SLOPE PROTECTION Section 5.1
Cut-off walI of Abutment shall be measured by the linear meter. The dimension shall be that
actually placed to the limitingdimensions shown in the contract documents , or the dimensions as
may have been revised by the Engineer, measured along the upper surface. Cut-off wall of
Abutment includes Concrete cut-off dike C20 , Blinding concrete CI0 , Timber Piles, Excavation,
Backfilling ... that show in the drawing. These iterns will 110t be measured and paid separately
but shall be deemed to be included in unit price of Cut-off wall of Abutment.
5 PAYMENT
Payment for slope protection of the various classes at the unit prices bid shall include full
compensation for alllabor, materials , equipment, or other incidentals in con-nection with the
preparation of subgrade; excavating and backfilling toe trenches where required; 뼈rnishing alld
placil1g the stones, slabs, blocks , shapes, grout, m01iar, portland cernent concrete, plleumatically
applied mortar, reinforcing steel, wood pile, geotextile, burlap bath asphalt alld expansiol1 joint
filler, if required; al1d all other work and incidental material required to complete the work as
specified in the COl1tract documents.
Pay Item No. Description Unit of Measurement
5.01-01 Cut-off wall of Revetment at Top m

!
5.01-02 Cut-off wall of Revetment at Bottom m
5.01-03 Body of Revetmel1t (Rock chip layer areas) m3
5.01-04 Bank Protectiol1 of Revetment (Precast m2

concrete block area)
5.01-05 Slope Protection for Abutment m2
5.01-06 Cut얘ff wall of Abutment m
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 5 5.1 -7-of7

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE
DIVISION6
WEARING SURFACE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - D1 VlSION 6 -1- of38

800 -z- I' 9 9 NOISIAIO - SNOUγ::>I.n:J:il dS 'IV:JINH :J:iI.1
6'" ……………………••.•………•.•••………………………… ••.•••••••••••••••.… •••…....... JU3WÂUdjO S!sug (.",

8 ......•.•...……·… ••.•… ..…••••••.…..……·……·……•.•••…••.•••…· 에.10M. P핸피Jall jO Juawa.l nsuaw Z''''
8 .•••.•..•••....……••.••.••.•.•.••.••••...••••……… ...…...“ .••.••……·…..…·…… Juawa.lnSU3 W jO poqJaW 1''''
8 ........… ...………………••••••••.………………………••••…………..... .!N:t(WÁVd (lNV ~N:t(Wnαsγ:t(W .",
8 ..•..•.••......•..••.…•..•••…………••••.••••••.•.• …………………… .~U!JS3~ puu 10.llUO::> Â쩨unö Pla!와 S'(

L •••••……..…… .••••••…••••.•.•••• 계.10M. μOlJ짝SnUSUf1 jO uo빼짜!JJall puu 원OM. JO ÂJ!lunÖ ""(
L ............................................................................................... reo:) ~따FdJO ∞ Ulm~+u뼈 W 9τ'f
L ........................................................................................... …… ........... n;’ E u띠뼈마lddYJo 와tI~
9 ................................................................................................................................. 씨명웹 γt'f

9 ................... … .........................….......…............….............….....…… ........ ~Uptl~H ~시 SS~oxg: fTf
9 ...................................................................................................... S~.ltQ따~dw~~ 없다샤ldS Z'f'f
ç ...................................................... …........ …............................................. uopeltld~ld ~까 S I' t'f
s .••••.•.••••……·………·……..……•••.• …… ••••..•.……·…•••••… ...………·…••••…spoqlaw uo따폐ddγ ('(
ç ................................................................................................. 끽없따d!nbg: ~Iq없d~ooeun γZ'f
17 ............................................................................................... E’ Z'f uO 때찌땐 3띠이뼈 lU~UJ따lS따
17 ......... … ............................…...........................................…................................ lOlnqFlS!G Z'Z' f

17 .............................................................................................................................. I'Z'f Itll~U~Ð
þ ••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••… .•..•.••..••••••…•••••.•..•••••…•..•.••..•..…•••••••...••.••••…......... lUawd!nb:t( Z'(

b ……… ..••••“ ••••……...
……….………….…….•.… ……
..……
..…………... ………….
••.“ …
•.…
….•…•• “”……”……
•.……”..…
..…...………”…….“••.
……
“….•••
…………...…….…”……
••…••••…
...……”…….……”.•……...………………”……...…… …”……
..…..“...…
……... …”
…
", .....…
…
...•.•…
…
•••••.…
...…
...….………………..….•••••.•.………….•••.…………… S~N:t(W::nII.fl Ùn NOI..L::>f1l1.LSNO::> '(
E ……………………………”“•••••....••..••••.••… ..…•••••••••••…… •••••. ('Z ………………”…·………sl와꾀mqns
E “·… •••..••… ..••………•.•••••.••••••••.•.…••.•..•••…..…..••…….••••…•.••••.••.•.•.•••••……·…….....sIupalUW Z'Z

( ......……••••…………..……·“…•.•••••…..……...…“..……..…… ••••.••••………"sp.lUpUUJs 3JUa.l3JalI l'Z
("…… •••••••….•..•…..…•••••••….••••…………...…•••.••…·……”“•••.•…... S~N:t(W:t(lIIf1Ö표1I WnI:t(J:γw 'Z
í: ...........“………………… ••••…………………..••…••.••••••……………”…·……................…"'NOI..Ld nI::>S:t(Q '1
‘LVOJ)IJV.L αNV J.VOJ 3:WRId - 1"9 NOI.LJ 3:S
1'9 UOH33S -l80:J >(38.1 pU8 180,:) 3W!.Id :iI:JV，파lIflS ÐNnI￥:iIA\. - 9 NOISIAIO
DIVISION 6- 씨'EARING SURFACE Prime Coat and Tack Coat - Section 6.1
SECTION 6.1 - PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT
1. DESCRIPTION
Prime coat sha11 consist of supplying and app1ying emulsified or cut back asphalt to previously
prepared absorbent surfaces such as sub-grade , granular sub-base 0 1' aggregate base course; p1'io1'
to placing subsequent bituminous layers. P1'ime Coat shall be applied to the fu11 width and in the
locations indicated on the D1'awings. Where indicated in this specification the use of cover
aggregate may be required.
Tack coat shall consist of fumishing and applying emu1sified or cut back asphalt to a p 1'evious1y
p1aced asphaltic base or binder course and concrete bridge decks , approach slabs and other
concrete su1'faces to receive asphaltic concrete wearing course.
2. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Reference Standards
The following Standards in their latest edition sha11 be particu1arly applied to the works covered
by this Specification Section:
• 22TCN319-04 Polymer asphalt - Technical 1'equiremεnt and testing method.
• 22TCN23 1-96 Procedures for asphalt samples for highway, airport and
statlOn.
TCVN 7493-05 Bitum-Technical requirement and testing method.
‘ AASHTOM81 Cut-back Asphalt Rapid Curing Type
‘ AASHTOM82 Cut-back Asphalt Medium Cu1'ing Typε
‘ AASHTO M226 Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement
•‘ AASHTO T1 79 Effect of Heat and Air on Asphalt Materials (Thin-film Oven

Test)
2.2 Materi aJ s
Prime coat material sha11 be either AC-IO grade asphalt cement (which is approximately
equivalent to 80/100 Pen.) or AC-20 grade (which is approximately equivalent to 60 /7 0 Pen.) ,
confonning to AASHTO M226 - 80 diluted with kerosene. The proportion of kerosene used for
dilution of the asphalt cement shall be as directed by the Engineer, following trials on the
completed base course surface. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, the proportio~l of
kerosene used in the initial trials shall be 80 parts of kerosene per 100 parts of asphalt cement
(80 pph - approximately equivalent in viscosity to MC-30 grade rεfinery produced cutback).
Tack coat material shall be either AC-I0 grade asphalt cεment (which is approximately
εquivalent to 80/100 Pen.) or AC-20 grade asphalt cel11ent (which is approxi l11ately equivalent to
60170 Pen.) confonuing to AASHTO M 226 - 80 , cut-back with between 25 and 30 parts of
kerosene per one hundred parts ofbitul11en.
2.3 Submittals
Thε Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval the following items. These items
shall be su“itt굶파éü ln ~dÝanê~onl1εC()rÎlr"äCfòf’S 뼈gl'am바èClStlírfTôt tmS풍뿔E짝~
(a) A 5-1itre sal11ple of any Bitumen that the Contractor proposes to use in the works together
with a certificate from the Manufacturer. The certificate must state that the materials
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 6 6.1 -3- of38

DIVISION 6- 찌TEA RlNG SURFACE Prime Coat a l1d Tack Coat - Sectio l1 6.1
comply with a11 the specification and grade 1'equirements fo 1' the prime coat and the tack
coat given in this specification.
(b) A satisfactory record of the calib1'ation ce1'tificates of a11 instruments and gauges ,
inc1uding the dipstick fo 1' the bitumε11 distributor, sha11 be submitted not less than 30 days
befo1'e construction begins.
(c) A spray cha1't meeting the 1'equirement of sub-section 3.2.3 of this specification. The
spray chart w il1 also be required to enable equipment checks to be carried ou t.
(d) Samples ofmaterials used in each day’ s work sha11 be submitted in acco1'dance with Sub-
section 3.5 of‘ this specification. Daily 1'eco1'ds of sealing wo1'ks done and material
application rates sha11 be submitted in accordance with this specification, the D1'awings or
as required by the Engineer.
3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Weather Li mitation
P1'ime Coat and Tack Coat sha11 be applied only on dry surfaces , and sha11not be applied during
high winds , rainκ1，’ mist 아l'
01 fog 01' if‘ 1'ain 엄
i s iI띠
llU
끄n
피ine
히11tπt a11띠
d피liike
려ly to 띠
irnte
며11π1'U
3.2 Equipment
3.2.1 General
The equipment to be used by the Contractor sha11 include a power broom andlor a power blowe1',
a pressurized bitumen distributo1' and equipment fo 1' heating Bitumen. The Enginee1' will not
permit the use of gravity distributo1's.
3.2.2 Distributor
The distributor shall have a minimum capacity of 1,000 liters.
The distributor sha11 be so designed , equipped, maintained and ope1'ated that Bitumen at even
heat may be applied unifonnly on variable widths of su1'face , at a contro11ed 1'ate of transversε
and longitudinal spread within :t 10 percent of the 1'equired rate of application.
The distributor equipment sha11 include a tachometer , pressure gauges , a calibrated tank dipstick,
a thennometer fo 1' measuring the temperature of the tank contents , and an instrument for
measuring the speed of travel at low speed. All measuring equipmεnt on the distributor sha11
have been recently calib1'ated and an accurate and satisfactory reco 1'd of such calibration sha11 be
supplied to the Enginee1'.
3.2.3 Instrumentation/Calibration
The distributo1' sha11 bε equipped with a sp1'ay chart and operation manual which sha11 be in
good condition and carried with the spraye1' at a11 times.
The operation manual sha11 illclude pipe flow diag1'ams and full instructiollS fo 1' a11 operations of
the distr:ibuto1'.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 6 6 .l -4- of3 8

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Prime Coat and Tack Coat - Section 6.1
The spray chart shall show the relationship between speed and application rate for the bitumen
distributor being used as wel1 as the relationship between pump speed and the number ofnozzles
in use , based on a constant bitumen output per nozzle. The constant nozzle output (liters/min)
and the spraying pressure shal1 be noted on the spray chart.
The spray chart shall also show the height of the spray bar from the surface and the correct
horizontal angle of the spray nozzles to ensure triple over1 ap of the nozzle fans (i. e. the width of
road coated by each nozzle is exactly three times the spacing bεtween nozzles).
3.2.4 lJ nacceptable Equipment
Equipmel1t used for the spraying of prime coat al1d tack coat shall be fit for purpose and il1
sound condition. Al1 equipment shall be operated by trained and experienced operators and work
shal1 be carried out by skilled and experienced labour.
Unsatisfactory work produced as a consequence of inadequate equipment and labour shall be

rejected. W ork wi1l not be allowed to proceed until such time as the Contractor provides suitable
equipment and experiellced labour and operators able to produce satisfactory work in
accordance with this specification. In such case the Engineer may at his discretion instruct the
COlltractor to carry out further trial sεctions to demonstrate the capabi1ities of the replacement
equipment and labour.
3.3 Application Methods
Prior to the start of work on site the layer to which thε prime coat or tack is to be applied and
the Contractor ’ s proposed materials , method statement and equipment shall have been
approved by the Engineer and a satisfactory tríal shall have beel1 completed.
3.3.1 Site Preparation

Prior to the application of the bitumen , loose diπ and other 0피 ectionable materials shall be
removed from the surfacε by means of power broom or blower or both. lf this does not provide
a uniform1y clean surface, additional sweeping shall be done by hand using stiff brooms.
Sweepíng shall extend at least 20 centimeters beyond each edge of the area to be sprayed.
Adherent patches of objectionable materials shall be removed from the sUlface by steel scraper
or other approved method and where the Engineer so directs , the scraped area shall be washed
dOWl1 with water and hand brooms.
Application of Bitumen shall not be made unti1 the pavεment has beel1 prepared to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer wi11 not pennit the application when there is free
water present on the surface
The work shall be can-i ed out to offer the least inconvenience to traffic and without damage to
the work.
The Contractor shall be respo l1sible fìor all the consequences of traffic bei l1 g admitted too early
머풍ewly laid Pr峰 Cüat흐뿔햄돼ãIrþroñîl5현寶혐號활￦禮혐廳爾랩rpIUV퍼Tng-흩
detour or by half-width cOl1structíOll.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - Dl VISION 6 6.1 -5- of3 8

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Prime Coat and ’I' ack Coat - Section 6.1
The Contractor sha11 a11 necessary precautions to ensure that surfaces of structu1'es or t1'ees 0 1'
p1'ope1'ty a이jacent to the a1'eas sha11 be p1'otected against matTÌng and spatte1'ing and that
bituminous mate1'ial sha11 not be discharged into any side ditch , drain or watercourse.
3.3.2 Spraying Temperatures
Spraying temperatures shall comply with Table 1.
TABLE 1: SPRAYING TEMPERATURES (PRIME COA멋‘)
Type ofMaterial SPRAYING TEMPERATURERANGE

Cutback , 50 pph kerosene 70 + 100 C
-… ‘ …… "(M.ç,:Z9.. g~~d..e:"~.니!Þll~!() ..
Cutback, 75 pph keroselle 45 + 100 C
‘ “ ‘ ’ ‘ " .. ，_…(MÇ_:~.Q s.!:뻗e: (;l，!!Þ.ll~~). . ……‘ …… “ ‘ ” “ ‘._H_' “ “ …”‘ “ “ “ … ‘ ’ ………-‘ _', _'H' … .. -ι
→‘“…… C꺼tb욕Q‘.~?… I.QQ".PE!~.I↑erosene “”’ H"'_~ …‘- …… ‘ ι’‘ .... "?Q.tJQo.ç ‘ ’ “” ‘ ..... -" ‘
Cutback, more than 100 pph kerosene Not heated
TABLE 2 SPRAYING TEMPERATUR.E S (TACK COAT)
Type of Maíerial Spraying Temperature Range
-으딴쁘띤ι25 pph J.∞rosene 110 + 100 C
Note: The words pph in Table 2 means the content ofkerosene in 100% oftack
coat as each type.
3.3.3 Excessive Heating

Heating in excess of the requirements or prolonged heating at high temperatures sha11 be
avoided. Any material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, has been damaged by
overheating sha11 be 1'ejected and sha11 be 1'eplaced at the Contracto1'’ s expense.
’‘
3.3 .4 Saîety
At the heating site the Contracto1' sha11 provide and maintain adequate fire prevention atld
controlmeasures and first aid supplies and fac i1ities.
Ext1'eme care should be taken when heating any cut-back asphalt cement. Open flames or
sparks sha11 not be permitted close to these materials. Controlled heat should be applied in
heating kettles , mixers , distributors , or other equipment designed and approved for the
purpose. Open flames sha11 not be used to inspect 0 1' examine drums , tank ca1's or other
containers in which these materials are stored. All vehiclεs transporting these materials sha11
be properly vented. Only experienced personnel sha11 be permitted to supervise the handling
of these mate1'ials.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 6 6.1-6-of38

Dl VISION6- 찌'EARING SURFACE Prime Coat and Tack Coat - Section 6.1
3.3.5 Rate of Application

The Contractor shall carη out field trials under the supervision of the Engineer to establish the
appropriate application rate for each type of bitumen and for each type of surface to which
bitumen is to be applied.
The r없e of applic없ion of Ta앙 Coat shall be 0.5 kg/m2 for each layer or as otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
The transverse distribution of bitumen application rates produced by the distributor shall be
tested by passing the spray bar over a test area laid with 25cm x 25cm sheets of absorbent
material with a binder-proof backing, which are weighed before and after the spray
application. The difference in weight shall be used in determining the spraying rate actually
applied to each sheet and the variation from the mean rate for any sheet across the full width
sprayed shall not exceed 15 percent.
Check the uniform level of the emulsion spread onto the road pavement by the following
method: place the box with 25x40cm bottom area on the pavement to collect emulsion when
the spreader is passing by. Then weigh the box to determine the col1ected amount of emulsion,
it is the volume of emulsion per O.lm2. The difference between the actual amount of spread
emulsion and the required emulsion amount shall be less than 100g/m2.
3.3.6 Maintenance of Prime Coat

The Contractor shal1 maintain the coated surface to the specified standard until it is overlaid
by the subsequent course.
Traffic shall not be pen띠tted 011 the coatεd surface until the Bitumen has penetrated and <
dried and, in the opinion of the Engineer, will not pick up under traffic.
In exceptional circumstances where it becomes necessaη to permit traffic on prime coat prior
to that time, but in no case sooner than 4 hours after the application of the prime coat, clean
cover aggregate shall be applied as directed by the Engineer and traffic may be permitted to
use the lanes so treated.
Cover aggregate shal1 be spread from trucks in such a manner that no wheel will travel on
uncovered wet Bitumen. When applying cover aggregate to a treated lane that adjoins a 1ane
yet to be treated, a strip at least 20 cm wide along the a이 oining edge shall be left uncovered,
or if covered shal1 be uncovered when the second lane is being prepared for treatment , in
order to permit an overlap of Bitumen as required above. The cover aggregate shall be used
to the minimum extent possible.
3.4 Qualiη of Work and Rectification of Unsatisfactory Work
The finished coat shall completely cover the area treated and have a uniform appearance,
without missed areas or streaks or “ rich" areas of accumulated bitumen.
•AIte r cunng<rδí;'4-ro15<ñσurs，- m흥힌îñãëf-sIí없rnave- <smr앉%ηmr ‘lne -cmπ옆 wnεreu-was
applied leaving behind only sufficient binder to ensure that the surface is unifonnly black or
dark grey in color and non-porous.

DIVISION 6 - WEARlNG SURFACE Prime Coat and Tack Coat - Section 6.1
Rectification of unsatisfactory Prime Coat or Tack Coat shall be conducted as directed by the
Engineer. Minor poth01ing shall be prompt1y patched. ~
3.5 Field Quality Control and Testing
A bitumen samp1e and certificate shall be provided for each delivery of bitumen to the site of
the works.
Samp1es ofthe Prime Coat shall be taken from the distributor as directed by the Engineer.
The bitumen distributor shall be inspected and tested as follows:
• Prior to the commencement of spraying works under the Contract;
Every 6 months or every 150,000 liters of binder sprayed by the distributor,

‘ whichever is the more frequent; 1 ’;
i
‘‘
,‘!
• Following any acèident or modification to the distributor that , in the opinion of ’’
i
the Engineer, warr없11s rechec1dng the distributor. r
,,
The res u1t of the wet sieve testing of any proposed cover aggiegate shall be submitted to the ,,
‘‘ .
Engineer for Approva1 prior tö any use of the materia1.
A.detailed written record of dai1y surfacing operatioi1s, inc1uding the 10cation, binder used on
each sprayer run, applica:tion rates achieved, and.area covered shall be prepared and submitted
to the Engineer.

/‘
4.1 Method ofMeasurement ‘
The quantity of aspha1tic and Bituminous shall be measured for payment by square meter
coverage accepted.
‘
Any cover aggregate used shall be considered incidenta1 to the work for achieving a
satisfactory Prime Coat and shall not be measured or paid for.
The work of preparing and maintaining the formation on which the Prime or Tack Coat is to
be placed is not measured or paid for under this specification section.
Fina1 cleaning and prepara디이1 of the surface and maintenance of the completed prime or tack
coated surface shall bε considered incidental to the work for achieving a satisfactory Prime or
Tack Coat and shal1 not be measured or paid for separately.
4.2 Measurement of Rectified.Work
No payment shaU be made for the rectification and re-testing of Prime Coat or Tack Coat
rendered unsatisfactory due to unacceptable materials or wodαnallship provided by the
Contractor.

DIVISION 6- 찌1EARING SURFACE Prime Coat and Tack Coat - Section 6.1
4.3 Basis of Payment
Payment shall be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section including fumishing
and placing all the material , includil1g any cover aggregate , and for fumishing al1 labor,
materials , to01s , tests , equipment and any il1cidel1tals to complete and maintail1 the work as
shown on the Drawil1gs and as required by these Specifications, subject to confinuation by the
Enginεer.
Pay Item Description Unit
6.01-01 Bituminous Tack Coat, rate 0.5 k g/m2 rn2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 6 6.1 -9- of3 8

80 0 -0 [-l ’ 9 9 NOISIA Ia - SNOI.LV::>I.1 I:J 3dS 'Iγ:J INH :J3 .L
6Z ..................................................................................................................... UOIloud따 0;) ε6'γ
6Z .................................................................................................. íì띠 IIS!띠 d puu íì따pualds Z'6'v

6Z ..............................................................................pa.1aAO;) Qq Ol aouJ.m s JO l109UltldQld 1' 6'17
6Z …·…“…....……·“…....…....…............"..…·…… '''3.1 nlX!W Qql JO uO!laudwo;) puu í} upuld 6'17
6Z ................................................................................찍띄 01 JÚa사 lQQ puu uO !lu :)Jods 때묘 ζ8γ
8Z .................................................................................................... a.1n1X!WJo UO때.1udQ.1 d v'8'v

8Z .................................................................................. sQ1uíìQlíìíìγ lu찌띠 WJO UOHU.1udQ1d t'8'γ
“.... “.... “...... “”“

LZ .......................................................................... UQumn 8: JO uO !luludQld Z'8'V
LZ ...................................................................... 씨I :l udu;) 1uuld íì띠XIW 10J QW~I wnwI따W I' 8'v
LZ'" ….................….................................….......... "….............…....... 3.1 nlX!W JO uOHanpo.ld 8'17
L" ......…................…......……............…………...….................… ........................... 00샌 a3S Iuμ1. L' 'þ
9Z ..................................................................... 'saxIW IU!l.L κq SUOH.1od01d xIW íìuHsnφY Ç' 9'v
9Z ................................................................................................... xIW-qO[Jo uO !lu야 lddy 17 '9' γ
9Z ............ “..............“”““ ........................................................ XIW 찍낌 o 1UQlUO;) uawnn 8: ε 9'17
ÇZ ...................................................................................................................lUQ1UO;) .lQU!d Z'9'V

ÇZ ................................................................................. suo!llodo.1d 1UQuodulO;) Q1uíìa.1íìíìγ 1' 9γ
17" ..........“ …….....…·……..…..........…
0010 • • ...…….....….................…………..… 'uInWJo.iI xrW-qor 9'17
17Z ................................................................................................. 딩아μQdOld X 꽉.'{ pa져nbaìí ZTv
γ Z .................................................................................................... SQru단‘ a.lßlXIW nuqdsγ I' Ç' v
…
17" ....................................……….... saJn}x!w l{U 얘dsγ .1 0 uO }lanpo.ld puu 3.1 npuJnuBW S'γ
…………....."........…………………........…………..............
tZ ............... lU3wd!nbJI ~띠pudruo;) 17'17
f 'l'"……....……………………………………………………….. lQ 3rud!nbJI 융U띠S!U퍼 짱 ~U!PB3.1dS f' 'þ
tz ... …
...........…................…………………...…...……..............…
...….......... lU3Wd!nbJI ~U!InB묘 Z' J?
ZZ ................................................................................................................ 씨M민 SS 잉 oy t rI ‘#
I Z ...................................... 'lno 1U"!.ld 엠객3江 야뼈UIolny ql!M m~lSκSl픽:å IQM O!UOJlOQlH tT Iγ
I Z .............................................................................................. QUI!.l íì따 X!WJO yo껴UO;) ZIT17
rz ............................................................................................................. JOlOQHO;) lsnQ I1'1'v
IZ ........................................................................................... lU <lUld!nb g: OI끄aUlOuuaq .l 01'1'v
1Z ................................................................................................. nU[l lOJlUO;) snOUIWnl!H 6' 1γ
OZ ............................................................................................................................... .lax!w 8'1'v

OZ ......................................................................................................JQddoH .10 X0 8: 며떠M LT17
OZ .............................................................................................................................. UQQ.lOS 9' I'17
OZ ................................................................................................................................. 잉 PQ ÇT17
OZ ............. ““.~ .... ““ ....................................................................................
JQPQ JOJ .lQPQ<l d γ I' 17
61 …............................................................................................................................... ET17
s 따8:
61 .................................................................................. 없따m띤 JO 얘없 OlS J.밍 luaUI따nbg: ZTγ

61 ...................................................................................................................... S<l yu::>S luuld 1'1'17
8 1I ....................... … ...............……...…........................…......… ...… ................… lBJ3U3~ lUBId n'
…..............……...................………
8 1I .......... ')ffiOM. XIW .1'1VHdSV "80퍼 GJISfl 1. N표WdIαÙ :tl '17
다 ….........….....….......……......…...…."……......……..…...….....…………......…........ L'f
… 'Slu꽤 wqnS
SlI ...……“ ..... ……。....……"................…………..……………….......................… .. sa 용 Un 9'f

1. 뼈μ3 :j.BW
뼈 “..................................………………………………......… ....... … 'S따따X!W 찌B 때 dsγ .I 0J S'f

뻐 awn씨a
￦1 ..........……… ...............… ..……….... …................. S3.1nlxU
0 •••••••••••••••••• JOJ
I\T 째 BqdsV P'f
.Ia매!.iI
171 ........… ........…...........…......…......................………………..............…...,..… .. au!.iI
alB~3.1융~V f'f
fI ........................................................……… .....… ....………………...... aS.l BO;)
… '''3lU~aJ~융γ Z' f
n ....………....……………..................… ....………………………................... -IU .laU3~ l' f
salu~3.1~~V
fI .....................................……………..............……"SIDIfUXIW "H 0 .iI S'lVnI JI1.VW
J띠 VHdSγ 'f
ZI ...............……………… ...… ........….....……............….........… .... t ••• … S ffiI￥ GNV1， S :!I ;)NIDIJI.iI표"H 'Z
n “·……………......................… ...….....……................………………….....………...….... NOI.Ldffi;)S:![([ '1
S~SlI[lO;)
:tI::lV많HIl S ~J.표lI ;)NO;) .L'IV묘dS￥ -l’ 9 NOI.L ;)~S
~'9 UO!paS - saS.l ilO :J ;)J탱.I ilS ;)~;).I JUO :J W!때 dsγ 'JI:)V‘.flIαS ~NnIV3M - 9 NOISIAIa
D1 VISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Asphalt Concrete Surface Courses - Section 6.2
4.9.4 Joints ...................... …...................................................…..…… ....…...........................…… .31

4.9.5 A/C Surface Course for Bridges ...........… ..…… .......................................................…...…31
4.10 Quality Control And Testing…………………………....……....………………•. ,.………••..……….31
4.10.1 Mixture Sampling and Quality Contr이 ....................................................................... 31
4.10.2 Testing frequencies ...................................................................................................... 32
4.10.3 Surface Test ofthe Pavement ..................................................................... ;................ 32
4.10 .4 Core Sampling ofthe Pavement at Site .......… ............................................................. 36
4.11 Asphalt Concrete Tolerances for Acceptance ...………………………………………•...… ••..…32
4.11.1 Rectification of Unsatisfactory Asphalt Mixtures ….................................................... 33
5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .............................................................…..……..•.....•...... 33
5.1 Method ofMeasurement ........................................ …
........................…
33 .........................
5.2 Basic of Payment......…...........…............……………………….....….•....……….......••….....…... 33
-~-~，~
•• ‘ ~ι ←-’“{“ ~~ν~ ‘""-~-，‘<_.~~- ~~._-‘~- “ ι← ι ←ττ→τ=-""
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 6 6.2 -11- o f3 8

DIVISION 6 - ，νEARING SURFACE Asphalt Concrete Smrface Courses - SectiolU 6.2
SECTION 6.2 - ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACE COURSES
1. DESCRIPτION
The work of asphalt Concrete Binder and Surface Courses under this specifícation consists of
the supply, spreading and compaction ofhot asphalt mixtures produced in a central mixing plant
capable ofproviding dense durable surface COlu'ses.
2. REFERENCE STANDARDS
The following Standards in their latest edition shal1 be patticularly applied to the works covered
by this Specification.
• 22TCN249-98 Technology process for construction and approval of asphalt

concrete surface course - Technical requirement.
용 22TCN345-06 Teclmology process for construction and approval of the thin
covering layer of high roughness asphalt concrete. ~
• 22TCN319-04 Polymer asphalt - Teclmical requirement and testing method.

• '1‘CVN 7493-05 Bitum-Tecr..nical requirement and tεsting method.
• 22TCN271-01 Technical specifications fo 1' construction and approval of asphalt
pavement.
• 22TCN277-01 Standard for checking and evaluating of smoothness of road surface
according to the Inte111ational Roughness lndex (IRI)
• 22TCN278-01 Testing p1'ocess for detennination of the 1'oad surface ’ s roughness by
sand method.
• 22TCN318-04 Testing process for determination of abrasion of aggregate by Los
An geles Method.
• AASHTOM17 Mineral F i1ler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
• AASHTOM20 Penet1'ation G1'aded Asphalt Cement
• AASHTO M226 Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement
웅 AASHTO T1 1-05 Materials Finer Than 75-μm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates
by Washing.
• AASHTO T27-99 Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coa1'se Aggregates. ASTM C 136-96
• AASHTOT49 Penet1'ation of Bitumen
• AASHTOT50 Float Test fo 1' Bítumen
• AASHTOT51 Ductility of Bitumen
• AASHTO T 53-96 (2004) Softening Point of Bitumen (Ring-and-Ba l1 Apparatus).
ASTM D36-95 (2000)
• AASHTOT96 Resistance to Degrading of Smal1 -Size Coarse Aggregate by
Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
• AASHTO T1 04 Soundness of Aggregate by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesiu111
Sulfate
• AASHTO T1 64 Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen fr0111 Bituminous Paving
Mixtures
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 6 6.2 -12- of3 8

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE AspbaIt Concrete Surface Courses - Section 6.2
• AASHTO T165 Effect ofWater on Cohesion ofCompacted Bituminous Mixtures

• AASHTO T 166 Bulk Specific Gravity of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using
Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens
• AASHTO T168 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures
• AASHTO T1 70 Recovery of Asphalt from Solutioll by AbsOll Method
• AASHTO T1 76 Plastic Fines ill Graded Aggregates and Soils by Use of the Salld
Equivalent Test
• AASHTO T 179 Effect ofHeat and Air on Asphalt Materials (Thill Film Ovell Test)
• AASHTO Tl 82 Coating and Stripping of Bitumen-Aggregate Mixtures
• AASHTO T209 Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity alld Density of Bituminous
Pavillg Mixtures
• AASHTO T230 Method B. Standard Method of Test for Determinillg Degree of
Pavεment Compactioll of Bituminous Aggregate Mixtures
• AASHTO T245 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures using Marshall
Apparatus
• ASTME950 Stalldard Test Method for Measuring the Longitudil1al Profile of
Traveled Surfaces with all Accelerometer Established Inertial
Profiling Reference
• Americall Asphalt Institute Mallual MS-2
3. MATERIALS FOR ASPHALT MIXTURES
3.1 Aggregates - General
All sources of supply of aggregate alld mineral filler shall be approved by the Ellgineer prior to
the delivery of any materials. Samples of each material shall be submitted as directed.
Aggregates to be used in the work shall have a retailled strength of not less than 75 % whell
tested for loss of cohesion resulting from the action of water in accordance with AASHTO T 165
and AASHTO T245.
Fine aggregates shall be stored under cover to provide protection from rain.
Aggregates of each type shall be fed into the mixing plant via a separate cold feed bin. Pre-
blelldillg of aggregates of different types or from differellt sources willnot be perrnitted.
The Contractor shall take into account the bitumell absorption properties of aggregates when
selecting his proposed material sources. Variations in bitumen content rεsulting from varyillg
degrees of bitumen absorptio l1 by the aggregates wi11 in no way be considered grounds for
renegotiating the unít príce of the asphalt mixture
3.2 Coarse Aggregate
The aggregate shall consist of clean , tough , durable crushed stone free from dirt or other
t때풍픔풍龍풍픔풋행￦휠gr행af양1farr~때강강emffg앙바￦I:1<l'F‘7f'fW."mMeth끓~錫짧싫훌t
revolutions when tested in accordance with 22TCN318-04.

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Asphalt Concretε Surt'ace Courses - Section 6.2
The aggregate sha l1 have a weight 10ss not greater than 12% when subjected to five cyc1 es ofthe
sodium sulphate soundness test in accordance with AASHTO TI04
The aggregate shall have a coated area of not 1ess than 95% when subjected to Coating and
Stripping Tests in accordance with AASHTO T1 82 ,
3.3 Fine Aggregate
The aggregate shall be free from 1umps or balls of c1ay and other objectionable materials and
shall consist of clean, tough durable particles of natural sands or crushed stone screenings.
Crusher dust shall be produced by crushil1g c1eal1 stone having no clay or silt content and shall
be stockpiled separately. To ensure a high degree of fine aggregate intemal frictioll and rutting
resistance the fine aggregates shall have minimum void content shal1 of 45% as detennined by
AASHTO T304-96 (2000)
3 .4 F iHer for Asphalt Mixtures
Filler fo 1' Asphalt Mixtures shall fully confonn to the particu1ar provisions of 22TCN249-98 and
these following instructions.
F il1 er shall consist of limestone dust , dolomite dust , Portland cemεnt， fly ash , cement ldln dust
or other non-plastic milleml matter from sou1'ces approved by the Engineer. It shall be free fro111
foreign or other objεctionable material.
Filler shall be d1'Y and free fro111 1umps and when tested by wet sieving shall contain not less
than 75% (preferably not less than 85%) by weight ofpalii c1 es passing a 75-micron sieve.
3.5 Bitumen for Asphalt Mixtures
Bitumen fo 1' asphalt mixtures shall meet the requirements of a) Performance Grade requirements
as stated on the Drawings, and b) Vietnamese standard TCVN 7493-05.
Perfonnance Grade. Performance Grade (PG) bitumen shall meet the requirements of both
AASHTO M320 and Asphalt Institute (U8A) guide 8P l. The Bitumen shall meet the
‘、
requirements of PG 70-10. When proposing a bitumen source , the Cont1'actor shall provide a
supplier’s certificate giving evidence that the proposed p1'oduct complies with the required
pe1'formance grade.
Nonnal Bitumen: Bitumen shall be asphalt cement which is app1'oximately equivalent to 60 /7 0

Pen, comply with “ Technical requirement and testing method of solid asphalt" TCVN 7493-05.
Other asphalts wi11 be pemlitted only with the prior App1'oval of the Engineer.
lf required by the drawings and subject to the approval of the Engineer, an adhesion and anti-
stripping agent shall be added to the Biturnen. The additive shal1 be of a type approved by the
Engineer and the requi 1'e d pe1'centage of additive shall be tho1'oughly mixed with the Bitumen in
accordance with the manufacturer ’ s instruction subject to the app1'oval of the Engineer fo 1' such
time as is necessary to p1'oduce a homogeneous mixture.

DIVISIÚN 6 - WEARING SURFACE Asphalt Concrete Surface Courses - Section 6.2
TABLE 1. Bitumen properties Requirement (referred table 1 ofTCVN 7493-05)
·때
않뼈-π
Reference
No. Properties Unit Grade 60170
-뼈
standard
~T.:~았ion at
w
쩨
TCVN 7495:2005
O.lmm 60 -70 mm
(ASTM D 5-97)
TCVN TCVN 7496:2005

2 I Ductility at 25 0C cm Min.100
7493-05
(ASTM D 113-
99)
Softening point (ring and ball Oc TCVN TCVN 7497:2005
3 Min46
method) 7493-05 (ASTM D 36-00)
TCVN TCVN 7498:2005

4 I Flash point Oc Min.232 (ASTMD 92-
7493-05 02b)
Loss on heating for 5 hours at TCVN TCVN 7499:2005
5 % Max.0.5
163 0C (ASTMD 6-。이
때
7493-05
n빼
t
때
~Jn nm r
야
뼈 따‘
이
m
LM t “n]
않 따
」
써띠
@ 5 ho s % TCVN
없
/0 evi r
’ TCVN 7495:2005
Min.75
Uω
” m
샤마
3 C
「ν
U aU
7493-05 (ASTM D 5-97)
TCVN TCVN 7500:2005

Solubility in Trichloroethylene
7 % Min.99 (ASTM D 2042-
C2CL4 7493-05 01)
TCVN TCVN 7501:2005
8 I Specific gravity at 25 0C g/cm3 1 - 1. 05
7493-05 (ASTM D 70-03)
Effect of water on bituminous -
9 I coated aggregate using boiling I grade I Min. 3 rd grade
TCVN
7493-05
TCVN 7503:2005
water
TCVN
10 I Wax paraffin contεnt % Max.2.2 TCVN 7504:2005
__--J'--_. ‘ -
7493-05
An adhesion and anti-stripping agent shall be added to the bituminous material when the
Engineer so directs or approves. The additive shall be of a type approved by the Engineer and
the required percentage of additive shall be thoroughly mixed with the bituminous material in
accordance with the manufacturer’ s instruction and as directed by the Enginee1' fo 1' such time as
is nεcessary to produce a homogeneous mixture.
3.6 Material Testing
All testing necessary to detennine confonnity with the 1'equi1'ements of this specificatiol1 and for
purposes of acceptance shall be performed in accordance with clause 4.10 of this specification.
The Contractor shall provide a onε-litre sample of all bitumen that he proposes to use together
with a certificate confinning their source test data giving their properties both befo1'e and after a
Thin Film Oven Test in accordance with AASHTO Tl 79) and including:
• Penetration at 25 0 C
• Viscosity at 60 0 C
• Viscosityat 135 0 C

、 ‘ i
DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURF'ACE Asphalt COllcrete Surface Courses - Sectio l1 6.2
Aggregates shall comply with the requirements of table 2A below
Table 2A. Requirement of Aggregate

---_
I Standards 22TCN249-98
No. Properties Testing
I Surface εourse
method
1 I Coarse aggregate for asphalt mixtures

Stable Compression limit of rock,
daN/cm2 Min.l000
TCVN 7572-
1 I - Aggregate of magmatic and
06
metamorphic rock I Min. 800
-…._. . ~←-싼ß.~~熙te ofse뱃~~_1_1.~~~2:쁘햇…- ……-~." . _.~. . “I." “ …… ~““ -……’“ “ “ ” “ ‘ ~ ” …“ “
22TCN318-
Abrasion of aggregatε by use of the Los 04
2 Max.30
An geles machine (LA) , % AASHTO
T96
TCVN7572-
3 I Diamond-shaped grain content, % 06
3 )ercent by weight) , %
Clay contentm (percent
f@ by d aggregate
1
I
I 8
I
5I TCVN 7572-
O{
?
weight) , % I I 06
Fraction rate of crushed gravel is not I
higher than, % I
TCVN 7572-
1 slag
7 1'" :....-.. " . - 0 I 06
- Type I
- Not higher than , % I 15
Broken rate of gravel by weight is not By visual
8 100
higher than (%) observation
By visual
observation
Crushεd rate oÍ Gravel Rc = Dmin/Dmax is
9 4 and percent
not higher than
pass11lg Sleve
method
n I Physical properties of sand

’‘…-_.~‘-했쁘~셋.P~._……-“. _".- …k…‘_.~--……“‘…~. _-… 1…… -??SP;앤. 했!연:ted) s셋ld ………•.,……’ “ ‘
TCVN7572 ..
1 I M = 0.01 (A2.S+A l.25 +Ao.63+Ao.315+Ao.l 4) Min.2
06
AASHTO
2 I Sand Equivalent Coefficient (ES) , % Min.50
T1 76-02
TCVN 7572-
3 I Content of dust , mud, clay by weight , % Max.3
06
TCVN 7572-
4 I Content of clay by weight, % Max.0.5
06
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . DIVISION 6 6.2 .. 16- of38

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE
---,-
No. Properties
F Aspha It Concrete Surface Courses - Section 6.2
짧쐐 22TCN249-98
Surface Course
Testing
method
_，!!_!_."L~!I.x센~~~!"P-E~.P~E!~~~_ ，?_f. ~.i.~얀al낀!탠r …… ……… ……?‘ ... …_.-…-……~ __'~'M_…-""…

Sieve Designation (mass percent
22TCN63-90
passing) , %
< 1.251mn 100

< 0.315mm 95 - 100
<0.071mm 70 -100
2 I % by weight I Max.l I 22TCN58-84
I
~~pans~~ely .of mixtu:e ~e:~~enT ~neral I Max.2.5 I 22TCN58-84
…_~. _J펠ller w뺏 ，P?Jx~~한-~.~P_뱃!~~.. ~Y.~.?J… .. _.....1......,.......... …‘………… …… . . ~니 _._…-…~……-…‘‘…‘-..‘ _…
4 I1_.Plasticity
.. "
index , %
^'
II II .AASHTO
T
돼89 ， 900
5 I Com삐c않ss하ive limit 따
d aN/ιcm2 I Min.200
6 I Void by weight, % I ~ 35 I 22TCαα1'-‘、”‘
I ~~:~맹u뼈
l
-… ‘l맺~~Þ:?P，}. ?J~!쁘F핏!쁘쁘111'싼os at 월:Rd?-???LQ…，1...… -……-~-~ … ...'…-…-“ _'~'_，H'_…-… ... L ‘ ……… …“
lmprovement of BT hardness supported
by the filler (discrepancy of liquid BT
temperature limit between a mixture of 100~ ßTNDM
8 22TCN58-84
BT and Filler (at rate of 4 and 6 by weight ~ 20 0C
rεspectively fo 1' BT and Filler) and BT
grade 60 /7 0 only.
짚와월，;. A 2 ‘ 5 is retain accumulation on sieve size of2.5mm
3.7 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit to the Engíneer for his approval the following:
(a) A detailed schedule for materials submissions and testing , the preparatioll and submission
a Job-Mix design fo 1' each type of Asphalt Concrete layer and the cOllstructioll of trial
sections. This schedule shall be submitted well before the Contractor’ s programmed start
for this work and shall allow for all source materials to be approved ptior to the staIi of
job mix design.
(b) Samples of all mate1'ials approved for use. These samples will be retained by the Engineer
for refer뻐ce purposes throughout the contract period.
(c) A bitumen sample and an approp끼ate certificate for each delivery of bitumen to the site
subject to approval ofthe Engineer;
(d) Written reports containing all the test 1'esults for each material in accordance with the
requirεments of c1 ause 3.2 “ Bitumen for Asphalt Mixtures" and clause 4.5 “ Manufacture
and Production of Asphalt Mixtures" ofthis specification;
~썼
찍짝용 t앙'''~"'''K￦~당portMj+.a짜싫r화싫찮:싫응~뀔~싫εn양깐벤~얀건a껴 Íll.ll싫짧짧앓‘:

with the requirements of clause 4.5 “Manufacturε and Production of Asphalt Mixtures"
and clause 4.9 “ Placing and Compaction ofthe Mixtu1'e" ofthis specification;
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 6 6.2-17-0 f3 8

mVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Asphalt COlllcrete Surface εourses - Section 6.2
(f) A written report for all surface test measurements il1 accordance with clause 4.10 “ Qua1ity
Contr01 and Testing" ofthis specification Section;
(g) Written reports on the density of the p1aced mixtures , as specified in clause 4.10 “ Quality
Cont1'ol and Testing" of this Specification Section;
(h) Checldng the calib1'ation and accuracy of the weigh sca1es and of the labo1'atory testing
equipment and p1'ocedures;
(i) Labo 1'atory and field test data as specified in Sub-section 4.10 “ Quality Control and
Testing" of‘ this Specification Section, for daily cont1'ol ofmix batching and mix Quality,
in wri. tten report form;
G) Written 1'ecords of layer thickness and pavement dimension measure1l1ents as specified in

Sub-section4.11 “ Asphalt Mixture Tolerances" of this Specification Section;
ln addition, when changing the Job-Mix Fonnula , or in any event from time to time as directed
by the Engineer , additionaI samples of (i) to (iv) shal1 be taken to enable detennination of the
buIk specific gravity of the hot bin aggregates and the 1l1aximum theoretical density of the
bituminous mixture (AASHTO T209).
4. EQUIPMENτ USED ￥‘OR ASPIIALT 1\맴X 햄TORK
Equipment and plant used fo 1' the p1'oduction, placing and compacting of the asphalt binder and
surface courses and the asphalt roughnεss 1ayer be fit for purpose and in sound condition. All
equipment shall be ope1'ated by trained and experienced ope1'ators and wo1'k shall be carried out
by sldlled and expe1'ienced labour.
Unsatisfactory work produced as a consequence of Í11adequate equipment and labour‘ shall be

rejected. Work w i1l not be allowed to proceed until such time as the Contractor provides suitab1e
equip1l1ent and experienced labour and operators ab1e to produce satisfactory work in acco1'dallce
with this specification. In such case the Enginee1' may at his discretion instruct the Contractor to
caπY out furthe 1' t1'ial sectiolls to demonstrate the capabilities of the replacement equipmellt and
labour.
4.1 Plant General
The mixillg plant shall be of weigh-batching type and shall have a capacity sufficient to ellsure
the finisher(s) can without interruption when spreading the asphalt mix at a nonnal speed and
the required thickness. The p1ant shall be capable of producing a mixture within the job mix
tolerances.
The plant shall be provided with Automatic 01' Computer Contro l1ed batching systems able to
print 1'ecords for each batch. The plant must comply with applicable environmental standards of
Vietnam and the requirements for the Contractor ’ s EnvironmentaI Management P1an given in
section 01300 ofthe Specification.
The Contractor shall ensure that at all times the process of mixing asphalt materia1 is carried
out in a safe 1l1anner. The Contractor shall provide and maintain adequate fire prevention and
control measures and first aid supplies and facilities at the site ofthe 1l1ixing plant.
The Contractor shall provide safe and secu1'e access to al1 inspection, sarnpling and 1l1easuring
points on the mixing plant and for the samp1ing and checldng of materia1s contained in the
delivery trucks
TECHNICAL SPECJFICATIONS - mVISION 6 6.2 -18- of38

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Asphalt Concrete Surface Courses - Section 6.2
4. 1. 1 Plant Scales
Scales for all weigh boxes or hoppers shall bε of the spring-less dial type , load cell , or
equivalent subject to the approval of the Engineer, shall be of standard make , shall have an
accuracy of within O.5%of the maximum expected load and shall be located so that they are in
plain view of the operator at all times. The value of the minimum graduation shall not be
greater than one ldlogram.
Pointers on dial scales shall be set close to the face of the dial to avoid excessive parallax.
Dial scales shall be provided with adjustable pointers for marldng the weight of each material
included in the batch.
Scales for weighing the Bitumen shall confonn to the specifications fo 1' scales for aggregate.
The calib1'ation of all scales shall be checked in accordance with the manufacture1'’ s
recommendations 0 1', SU비 ect to the approval of the Enginee1', when it is apparent that the scales
are in error. The Contractor shall keep on site such equipment as may be necessary fo 1'
calibrating the scales.
4.1.2 Equipment for Storage of Bitumen

Tanks for storage of Bitumen shall be equipped with heaters with effective and positive control
capable ofkeeping the bitumen within the temperature range specified at all times.
The circulating system fo 1' the Bitumen shall be capable of ensuring proper and continuous
circulation during the entire operating period. Suitable means shall be provided, either by steam
jackets or other insulation , for maintaining the specified temperatu1'e ofthe Bitumen in the pipe
lines , meters , weight buck<εts， spray bars , and other containers in the flow lines. Subject to the
approval of the Engineer, Bitumen may be partially heated in the tanks and brought to the
specífied temperature by means of booster heating equipment between the tanks and the mixer.
The total storage of the tanks shall be sufficient to provide 10 hours of full operation of the
asphalt mixing plant. If more than one storage tank is used, they shall be so connected to the
circulatory system that each tank can be isolated without interference to the circulation of
bitumen to the mixer.
4. 1.3 Bi ns
The plant shall include storage bins of sufficient capacity to supply the mixer when it is
operating at full capacity.
(k) Bins shall be divided into at least four compartments and shall be arranged to ensure
separate and adequate storage of appropriate fractiolls of the aggregate , not including
mineral filler.
(1) Each compartment shall bε provided with an over렌 ow pipe that shall be of such size al1d
at such location as to prevent any backing up of material into other bins.
뺨\j ~m'lS→ shaH w .'S'O" ι~따넓 갚~뇨~하뚱 s4응좌~않l숙깅싫"，.장lij;lles .C얻土‘p_ l~P깐건i~
obtained.
TECHNJCAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 6 6.2 -19- of3 8

‘• 、 “
DIVlSION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Asphalt Concrete Surface εourses - Section 6.2
4. 1.4 Feeder for Drier

A separate feeder shall be provided f‘or each aggregate to be used in the mix.
The walls to the co1d feed bins shall be of sufficient height and width to prevent intenning1ing
of materia1s from a며 acent bins.
All feeders shall be ca1ibrated and the gate opening and speed settings for each approved job
tnix c1early indicated on the gates and on the plant contro1 panel. Once established, the feeder
settings shallnot be altered without the approval of the Engineer.
A system of “ No Flow" switches shall be installed on each aggregate feeder to stop the plant if
110 material is f1 0wing from the feed bin after 30 seconds.
4.1.5 Drier
A rotary drier of any satisfactory design for drying and heating the mineral aggregate shall be
provided.
4. 1.6 Screen
Screens shall ensure that the aggregate deposited in 없1y bin shallnot contain more than 1.0
percent of oversized or undersized materials.
4. 1.7 Weigh Box or Hopper

The equipment shall include a means to accurately weigh each aggregate size and be large
enough to hold a full batch without hand raking or rum1Íng over.
There shall be sufficient clearance between hoppers and their supports to prevent
accumulations offoreign materials.
The discharge gate of the weigh box shall be so hU11g that the aggregate willnot be segregated
when dumped into the mixer and shall c10se tightly when the hopper is empty so that no
material is allowεd to leak into the batch being mixed during the process of weighing
aggregate for the next batch.
4. 1.8 1.\쉽xer
The batch mixer shall be of a twin pug-mill type.
The n1Íxer capacity shall be not less than a one-ton batch and shall be so constructed as to
prevent 1eakage of contents. If 110t enclosed , the tnixer box shall be equipped with a dust hood
to prevent 10ss of dust by dispersion.
The design shall pennit visual inspection ofthe mix.
It shall be heat-j acketed with steam, hot o i1, or other means subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
The tnixer shall have an accurate time clock to control the operation of a complete mixing
cycle and shall be capable of locking the weigh box gate between the charging of the mixer
and the closing ofthe mixer gate at the completion ofthe cycle.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 6 6.2 -20- of 38

Timing contr이 shal1 be flexible and capable of being set at intervals of not more than 5
seconds throughout cycles of up to 3 minutes. A mechanical batch counter shall be installed
as a part ofthe timing device.
꺼le mixer blades clearance shall have a clearance from all fixed and moving parts not
exceeding 2 cm.
4. 1.9 Bituminous Control Unit
The metering device shall be designed and constructed to automatic a11y measure the required
amount ofliquid asphalt into each batch within a tolerance of 0 .4%.
The meter shall have a capacity of at least 10% in excess of the volume of Bitumen used in
any batch.
If an automatic volumetric meter is used, it shal1 be constructed so that any dial setting may be
locked and it will automatical1y reset after the addition of Bitumen into each batch.
4. 1.10 Thermometric Equipment
An armored thermometer reading from 1000C to 2000C shall be fixed in the bituminous feed
line at a suitable location near the discharge valve into the mixer unit.
A thermocouple or resistance bulb shal1 be mounted near the bottom of the fine aggregates bin
to measure the temperature of the material before it enters the mixer.
The thermocouple used for discharge and for the fine aggregate bin shall be wired to a
temperature recording apparatus. Charts showing time and temperature :from the temperature
recording device shal1 be provided to the Engineer daily.
The plant shal1 be further equipped with either an approved dial scale mercury thermometer or 'r
an electric pyrometer 0 1' öther approved thermometric instrument at the discharge chute of the
drier to automatically register or indicate the temperature of the heated aggregates.
The bume1' to the drier fo 1' aggregates shall be equipped with automatic temperature controls.
4. 1. 11 Dust Collector
The plant shall be equipped with a dust collector capable of storing dust to be disposed of as
waste or 1'etuming dust unifonnly to the elevator.
4. 1.12 Control of Mixing Time
The plant shall be equipped with a positive means to cOlltrol and consistelltly maintain the
mixing time unless a change to the timing has been approved by the Engineer.
4.1.13 Electronic Weight System with Automatic Ticket Print Out
(a) General
The asphalt plant shal1 be equipped with electronic weight systems capable of automatically
j_1 ! …_. ‘:‘ 1._‘
F‘&-~‘.~~__....-.-“ ~J ‘----_. '"rl..~ ‘:싸 øt C'hal1 r、r、1 、 t!l 11' thp
"-.. ‘_.-.-~---，.."""_..-~.-~__..~...，-，.""....
,,.•
ln .fr、nn"t;nn
------_ •
I、p.lnw
「τ
"" 껴 minimllm
subject to the approval of the Engineer, and a copy of each ticket shall be provided to the
Engineer.

(n) SequentiallO. ad numbe1',
(0.) Date and time ,
(p) Name 0.1' lO.catiO.n O. fplant ,
(q) Type O.f mix,
(r) Truck numbet,
(s) GrO.ss , tare, net weight O.r batch weight (as applicable) ,
(t) Accumulated t O.tal O.f mix (fO.r that day , the year t o' date O. r tO. tal f O.r j O. b subject to' the
apprO. val O.fthe Engineer) ,
(u) Tεmperature O. fmix at the plant and site (may be hand rec O.rded) ,
(v) PavementJ ayer,
(w) L O. catiO.n (chainage O.r statiO.n) O.fplacing mix,

(x) Signatures subject t o' the apprO. val O.fthe Engineer.
(b) Automatic Printer System for Batch Plant
The batch plant ’ s autO. matic printer system shall print the individual weight O. f aggregate and
Bitl1filen delivered t o' the pug-mill and the total wcight O.fbatches contaÎned În a lruckload.
The autO.matic printer system shall be used O.nly in cO. njunc:ti O. n with autO.matic batching and
mixing cO.ntrO.l systems which have been apprO.ved by the Engineer.
In the event O.f a printer 0.1' O. ther equipment failu 1'e , the apprO. val O.f the Engineer will be
required f O.r the delivery h O.t mix t O. site. In n O. case shall this cO.ntinue f O.1' m O.re than 12 h O. urs.
(c) Truck Sc떠es Weight House
πle weight h O. use shall be O.f sufficient size, sha11 be cO.mpletely enclO. sed and weathe1'p rO.O. f
and shall be equipped with ai1' a cO. nditi O.nerlheater.
4.1.14 Accessibility
Access sha11be prO.vided t O. all sampling, measu1'ing and inspectiO.n p O. ints O.n the mixing plant.
Access t O. the to'p O.f truck bO. dies shall be p1'O.vided by means O.f a platfO.rm built t o' the length
and height O.f the truck’ s dump b O. dy t O. enable the Engineer tO. O.btain samples and mix
temperatures.
The CO.ntract O.r shall prO. vide all necessary facìlities t O. enable the safe cO. llectiO. n and lifting O.f
samples and the safe cO. llectiO. n O. f O. ther data as necessary frO.m all sampling, measuring and
inspectiO. n p O. ints O.n the mixing plant.
Ample and unO. bstructed space sha11 be maintained at all times in and arO. und the truck lO. ading
space and this space shall be kept free frO.m materials spills and O.ther waste materials.

4.2 Hauling Equipment
Trucks for hauling bituminous mixtures to site sha11 have tight, clean and smooth metal beds
that have been sprayed with a minimum amount of soapy water, vegetable oil , or lime solution
to prevent the mixture from adhering to the beds. Fuel or oil shall not be used for this
purpose.
Any truck which due to its condition causes excessive segregation of material , spills materials
or has leaks of oil or other fluids detrimental to the work not be used for the hauling
bituminous mixtures until such conditions have been conected.
A1l 10ads shall be covered with a canvas or other suitable material sufficient to entirely cover
the mixture and protect it from the weather. The cover shall be securely fixed to the truck
body during hauling.
4.3 Spreading & Finishing Equipment
Paving equipment for the spreading and finishing of asphalt layers shall be approved
mechanical , self-powered pavers , capable of spreading and finishing the mixture true to the
lines , grades , levels and cross sections given on the Drawings or as sU히ect to approval by the
Engineer.
The pavers sha11 be equipped with screed controls which can be a이usted for manual , semi- υ
automatic and fully automatic operation, to ensure that a smooth asphalt surface can be placed
within the required tolerances regardless of inegularities in the surface being paved. The ‘
screed controls shall be capable of detecting the required grades and levels from either a taut
piano wire guideline or a sliding ski of a sufficient length subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
Pavers shall be equipped with activated screeds of either the tamping or vibrating type , and
devices for heating the screeds to the temperature required for the laying of the mixture
without pul1ing or m없ring.
4.4 Compacting Equipment
The Contractor shall provide equipment capable of compacting asphalt mixtures to the
requirements of clause 4.5 "Manufacture and Production of the Asphalt Mixture" and 4.9
“ Placing and Compaction of the Mixture" of this specification. The Contractor shall provide the
fo11owing minimum equipment for each paving operation:
• One tandem steel wheel ro11er for breakdo Wl1 ro l1ing weighing 4.5 to 11 tons.
• One pnεumatic tired roller for secondary rolling weighing 5 to 11 tons. This
roller w i11 have at least 7 smooth tread tires of equal size and diameter .
• One tandem steel wheel roller fo l' finish rolling weighing 7 to 11 tons.
A11 rollers sha11 be equipped with a watering system to prevent sticking of the asphalt mixture
.,..",.
UJ'UI~' p1."X‘“”““‘ ~-~_. h . " .............
All rollers must be selfpropelled.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - D1 VISION 6 6.2 -23- of 38

, 111':;'
The Contracto1' may use less compaction equipment 0 1' othe1' equipment types subject to thei1'
use in satisfactory trial sections completed to the app1'oval of the Engineer.
The method for compaction of the 1'oughness course shall be confirmed by the 1'esults of
compaction obtained in the trial sections. Compaction shall be ηpical1y two or three passes of
tandem steel wheel rol1e1's only with a weight of 6 to 10 tons
4.5 Manufacture and Production of Asphalt Mixtures

4.5.1 Asphalt Mixture Typ es
The type of hot asphalt mixtu1'e shal1 be as indicated on the D1'awings 0 1' as dirεcted by the
Engineer.
4.5.2 Required Mix Properties

The bituminous mixture shall confo1'm to the requirements given in Table 3. ~
Table 3. Properties ofbituminous mixtu1'e

Wearing
Properties Binder course
course
5,0%
% Asphalt cement of total mix by weight (%)
“_.• _--~~，~_ ..,-_.....‘-_.__.•_---“--…---“‘………---,., -…·…‘ “·… ·“‘’“... ...“_... . ."...“_. . ,,-‘
Min.
~“ L--겼5% “‘._' γi
Max. ‘- 6,0% 6,5%

’“…………………._*--……----‘’_ ... ~--’‘_ ...... -~_._--
._A _ _ ....
“.“““…·…“...‘‘’”‘“““‘... ’-….... ’‘.-‘........ . . ..". . . “._-
~“‘ ~~ ---"~…_
Asphalt cement to be absorbed Max. 1,7% 1,7%

. . . _.……‘.- __.“‘ .•. ‘·‘·‘.. _.. .‘"“-.-..
..“‘*、~~-~-‘-". ‘"'‘._.--~._.’“_._*-‘.-
Marshall specimen
_.‘---………_.‘……~'"， __,,_"M“- 1----‘_..._-’ .. -“”“……‘"'‘......__.… …“’”‘*“‘{ _.‘’.•‘-‘--‘.“-_.--‘.“ ‘ .... i H ___“
Number of compaction blow on specimen'’s Min. 75 75
surface
._-‘--‘...._._.-_--‘_.…----…--------..._----‘· ‘"' ___ A"… “•““‘’ ‘’ ““‘...‘._. . M.~.M_ ..... ““‘...“ ._.‘
Stability Min.
-“”“ M___‘...._..‘
8,OKN 8,OKN _._.-._- .....
“--_.--~_ ....-...-‘_..._--_..........-.-“’‘·‘. -…“....... ，，--"“-……·“~" .. _~_.
i
“..-...".... “ ..“·…...“‘…“.....‘.-‘.... _....... ’‘’ß.
Flow Min. 2mm 2mm

._... _-‘-~_.‘’‘-_._-……._---‘ ........_..-.........._ ..._-‘--.‘.-‘-......_“‘........-“ .'…,‘-…‘· .........-‘·…-‘-.......‘………“‘..‘“‘*‘’‘、. . . . _...“‘,-......-“*“““……‘ _n....…--
Max. 4rnm 4mm
.... _.-“---“‘…ι---“‘ ....,_--_. .‘’-- “‘---………’“-.. ‘------~-‘- ... ，-_.~_.~ -----_. “---‘.-“.‘· ‘·…...‘. . .- ‘ ...’ __.. _“._--~ -_“‘’---~…“，'"-.““_ ..…“ “‘--
Air voids
--…‘..._----..‘…’“·‘_.…-‘i““·……·“‘~.-<<._"‘“---“‘’“…*‘-_-.-’._.…‘’‘
_._-_..._“..…·“’. __... 3% ”““’-- ‘,_...
. __...Min
-“{‘’‘’…--、
3%
....“‘-‘_.".“--'"‘”‘--“_'"
~-
…-‘_._…_.-… ..………-‘..... . . .__..._ ...- … -‘..._,.._......

Max 6% 6%
__ "_"_M'" ~_ -~‘ … ’‘…...‘ ...‘……‘ ’‘’ ‘_............…‘’ ‘…”‘'.'"’“ ..._----…………“-
Voids in Mineral Aggregates (VMA Min 13 14
Voids filled with Aspha1t (VFA) Min 65 65

Max 78 78
Retained Marshall Strength (AASHTO-Tl 65) Min. 75% 75%
Marshal specimen shall have flow value equal to 70% of its asphalt cement, and have a minimum
elongation of 40cm according to AASHTO-T49 and T51.
Asphalt cement shal1 be separated from the mixtu1'e in accordance with AASHTO T-164. The fine
fraction shall be separated by centrifuge from a condensed volume of 200m1. The separation of fine
fraction sha11 be considered acceptable wh없1 dust content (by buming) of total collected asphalt
cement is less than 1 % by weight. Asphalt cement shall be collected in accordance with AASHTO-
Tl 70.
4.6 Job-Mix Formula
The Contractor shall submit al1 proposed Job-Mix Formulae to the Engineer fo 1' his app1'oval well
before work is p1'ogrammed to sta1't on site.

DIVISION6- 찌'EARING SURFACE Asphalt Concrete Surface Courses - Section 6.2
For each proposed Job-Mix the formula shal1 stipulate the aggregate source, a combined grading
showing the percentage of each material to be used in the mix expressed as percentages by weight of
the total mix , the temperature at which the mixture is to be emptied from the mixer, and the
temperature at which the mixture is to be delivered at the laying site, all of which shall fall within the
specified ranges of the general composition and temperature limits.
Each proposed Job-Mix formula shall be supported by laboratory trial mix testing data. In approving
the job mix , the Engineer may request the Contractor to perform additional trial mix tests or to
investigate altemative aggregates.
Approval of proposed Job-Mix Fonnulae shall subsequently be confirmed by the preparation and
testing of “ Trial Sections" as specified in clause 4.7 ofthis specification.
4.6.1 Aggregate Component Proportions

Aggregate for hot asphalt mixtures shall confonn to Table 4 subject to approval by the
Engineer.
Table 4 : Aggregate proportion for asphalt (Table No. 11-1 of 22TCN249-98 adapted)
ISt때d없d Sieve Sieve Size

Percent Passing by Weight
Surface Course
(std. No.) (mm) MlN. MAX.
0,25 31 ,500 - -
25 ,000 - -
0,75 19,000 - -
5/8 16,000 - -
0,5 12,500 100 100
5/16 8,000 95 100
NO.5 4 ,000 43 57
No.10 2,000 31 44
NO.18 1,000 22 33
NO.35 0,500 16 24
NO.50 0,300 12 18
No.100 0,160 8 13
NO.200 0,075 6 11
4.6.2 Filler Content

Filler (particles passing the sieve No.200) may be added to the nominal mix to meet the criteria
contained in this specification subject to approval by the Engineer.
On no account shal1 the ratio of filler to total bitumen exceed 1: 1 for As phalt Concrete Surface Course
and 1:4 for Asphalt Concrete Binder Course.
If the mix strength does 110t meet the specified requirements with a filler/b itumen ratio within these
ranges the strength shall be adjusted by changing the aggregates.
~
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA Tl ONS - D1 VISION 6 6.2 -25- of3 8

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Aspbalt Concrete Surface Courses - Section 6.2
4.6.3 Bitumen Content of the Mix
The laboratory trial mixes shall be prepared accörding to Marshall Mix Design procedures.
For each mix variant to be tlied, at least three samples sha11 be prepal'ed and tested by the Marsha11
testing method, and the mix properties of each trial sha11 be calculated on forrns subject to approval by
the Engineer.
The Contractor may optimize the mix proportions for economic reasons provided the bitumen content
is within the al10wable limits specified in Tables 3 of clause 4.5.2.
The percentage of bitumen actually added to the mix will depend on the percentage absorbed by the
aggregates. The estimated amount of bitumen absorbed by the combined aggregates in the nominal
mix will be assumed to be 50% of the measured water absorption. The value of the measul'ed water
absorption will be based on test data supplied by the Contractor. The absorbed bitumen so calculated
sha11 be taken into consideration in establishing the total bitumen content for the trial mixes which
shall be not less than the minimum value specified in Table 3 and sha11 be subject to approval by the
Engineer.
4.6.4 Application of Job-Mix
(a) Forrnula and Allowable Tolerance:
All mixtures supplied to the site shall confonn to the Job-Mix Fonnulae approved by the Engineer
subject to the tolerances specified below:
Asphalt binder and surface layers.
Passing aggregate mixture 4,75mm +/- 7% according to mixture weight

Passing aggregate mixture 0 ,15mm +/- 2% according to mixture weight
Passi맺맺맺g맺‘엔F따'e 0핀75:옛띠_H._~ … …- “~ ....~._ .. ~"“‘ …-- fhg??떤:cor렌1~P.:~.~.?_~센‘뱃 w판gpr--
Asphalt content tolerance 0.1 % according to total mixture
-----…-…._--‘’‘’_.~ ....._-- “‘“ -….-~".-.--~‘ ._.…_'_' _.~..‘…‘ m ,_ _ •__ .• __ ••.. _ ••• _ •• _ , .. ,,_… …--.._'~…_ •... _-'1쁘q딴K…_._-… •... _... _,--…
Temperature tolerance ofmixture at the plant +/- 100C
Temperature tolerance ofmixture whenlaying +/- 100C
(b) Continuous Control:

Samples shall be tal{.en of the materials and mixture each day as outlined in Sub-section 4.10 “ Quality
Control and Testing" or as considered necessary by the Engineer for checking the requil'ed unifonnity
ofthe mixture.
.
4.6.5 Adjusting Mix Proportions by Trial Mixes
The Contractor shall demonstrate the suitability of all proposed Job Mix fonnulae by making and
testing trial mixes in the laboratory and by testing trial mixes in the mixing plant immediately prior to
lying of the mix.
Laboratory trial mix testing shall be carried out in accordance with the Marshall Mix Design method
defined by AASHTO or in the As phalt ln.stitute Manual MS-2.

A nominal mix recipe appropri따e to the proposed theoretical job mix formulae shall be determined.
The nominal aggregate blending proportions, bitumen content and added filler content shall be used as
the basis for the mix variations investigated in the laboratory trials.
The calculation of the nominal mix-batching recipe from the design mix components shall be recorded
as directed by the Engineer.
Trial mixes shall be made under the same conditions as those applied in the mixing plant immediately
prior to batching. For weigh-batching plants , this means using aggregate samples taken from the plant
hot-bins.
Job mix formulae c011firmed by laboratory trials shall be subroitted to the Engineer for his approval.
Should a change i11 a material be encou11tered or should a change in a source of material be made, a
new Job-Mix Formula shall be submitted a11d approved before the mixture containing the new material
is produced and delivered. Job materials will be rejected if they are found to have voids , or other
characteristics, requiring greater bitume11 content or less than the specified range.
4.7 Trial Section
Following approval ofthe proposed Job-Mix Formula by the Engineer, the Contractor shall caπyouta
trial section for each pavement layer in accorda11ce with his proposed method statement.
The test section shall be of a sufficient length to allow the laying of 50m after the paver has reached a
stable condition and shall be in a location subject to the approval of the Engineer. The trial section
may be included in the permanent works su히 ect to satisfactory testing and subject to the approval of
the Engineer.
The trial sectioll shall be tested in detail and in accordance with the requirements of this specification. “
」‘
If the trial section fails to confonn to the specifications in any respect, necessary adjustments shall be
made and the trial repeated. Perrnanent paving work shall not commence u11til a satisfactory trial has
been made a11d the E11gineer has approved the final Job-Mix Formula. Where an u11satisfactory trail
section has been laid in the area of the penηa11ent works it shall be removed entirely and the surface 011
which it was laid shall be reinstated to the satisfaction ofthe E11gineer all to the cost ofthe Contractor.
Testing for accepta11ce of trial sections for the roughness layer shall include measurements of the
Intemational Roughness 111dex (IRI) along several sections in order to determine the representative
average index ofthe el1tire Trial Sectiol1.
4.8 Production of Mixture

4.8.1 Minimum Rate for Mixing Plant Capacity
There shall be no batching when there is insufficient hauling, spreading, 01' finishing equipment, or
labor, to assure progress at a rate ofnot less than 60 percent ofthe capacity ofthe mixing plant.
、!륙---，- - - ，~.~-'"" 48.2 PreDaration of Bitumen

• τr γ~
The following temperatures shall be applied:

’“”
“
DIVISION6- 찌'EARING SURFACE Asphalt Concrete Surface Courses - Section 6.2
60170 Bitumen
~.1:l1~ . ê.!Q!:t.1:.&~ .•. ‘ -‘… ..... ~.~ ‘깊0 0ζ ‘:갚130 0 C …
.… Mi앤씌센i셋젠~!맺응r엔!1E~함:ral
한한한t쁘:e “ “aAS￠E;lqp?g~ ‘’
‘~~Y.!.I~g IC?~~P.e.!!l~E~. ‘ 1
Where bitwnen is kept in bulk storage for periods exceeding 8 hours before use storage temperature
may be reduced to 300C + 400C
Local overheating shall be avoided and the bitumen shall be continuously fed to the mixer at a uniform
temperature.
There shall be at least one full day’ s supply of heated bitumen ready for supply to the mixer before
any mixing operation begins. However bitumen shall not be stored for a period 10nger than 30 days
between manufacture and placing.
~ i
4;8.3 Preparation of Mineral Aggregates
Mineral aggregates for the mixture shall be dried and heated. Burner f1 ames shall be adjusted to avoid
damaging the aggregate and to avoid forming a coating of soot on the aggregate.
At the time of mixing with bitumen, the aggregate shall be dry and within the temperature range
~
.
r-←즐T
specified for the bitumen but not more than 140 C above the temperature ofthe bitumen.
l ‘
Additional filler , ifrequired to meet the grading requirements , may be added separately from a small t
hopper mounted directly over the mixer.
4.8.4 Preparation of Mixture

The combiIied mineral aggregate shall be thorough1y mixed before the bitumen is measured and
introduced into the mixer.
The “ Dry" and “ Wet" mixing times of shall be subject to the approva1 of the Engineer and regulated ‘ ;
r
by a suitab1e timer.
The temperature of the mixture when emptied from the mixer shall be within the limits indicated in
Table 5. No tolerance shall be pem너tted.
TABLE 5: SPECIFIED LlM lTS FOR BlTUMEN ASPHALT MIX

TEMPERATURES
Construction Procedures Asphalt Mix Temperature (OC)
~효강건강끊AC-20 Bit.
(Approx. eQuiv. to 60/7 0 Pen)
값!뺏~$..~~~~~현!LM!~..~p~.~i!민en“- ……“…‘…‘…‘-‘…-…‘…-………‘……’……‘……-“’… 15햇5 ….“…‘‘…‘
‘앉힘뺑p~뺏싼i낀I맺팩펄 Ma한햇
r핸F뺨깐뱃며맺ll\뺀!헨i했x~p.쁘얻엔연;쁘뺏en……-…‘…-‘ … ‘ - ‘…‘ ” ‘ 1，옛o …‘ …‘-“…*‘……”‘…‘-
조l1a엣핏민.~.M.~~i~.~.T~_IEP~~뺏ure … ‘’ ‘ …… -…‘ < 165 …-… ι ‘•• …………- “
-“Di샌s셋
ch웰3웰월p
맺훌핀i샌션싼셋‘ 셋!깐쁘
1 oTn꺼lC센!진(…… ft._~.~…ι‘-……-
D브liver캔1-tM?F 뤘온Y쁘?한r ….……“…‘ ……’ ………‘”‘- …_.‘-…‘”…
i . ‘…‘…".M
‘…B
맺Brl쁘§완햇뺏
k앨q뺏ow뱃 9찢뺏뱃 q밴I뀔틴젠맺~，，(않F쁘만 Dr엔!뺏r챙p핏뱃l."."
……….“.. "~'~. _"'~‘-………-… 12.및5-二-‘꾀p …_..,,- ‘…”‘‘‘‘……--"…‘……-……-“…‘“‘‘‘.…-…
-ι
판
S ec연?낀밴da딴F엇Y..~웰01밴!낀i맺r !뿔~(껏
Ru맺p뱃
뱃며"T
p 뭔P뱃
r쁘'~L.……‘……‘ ‘…••‘ -……-“… ..... -.~……
. . 110.
Finishing Rolling (βStee려1 Drum) 0
95 - 80
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 6 6.2 -28- of 38

4.8.5 Transportation and Delivery to Site
The mixture shall be delivered to the paver at the temperature indicated in Table 5 above.
No materials shall be sent to the site such that spreading and compaction are completed outside of the
normal working hours without the written approval ofthe Enginεer.
4.9 Placing and Compaction of the Mixture
Placing and compaction of the asphalt layers shall be can'ied out using the methods and procedures
used for the approved trial sections.
4.9.1 Preparation of Surface to be Covered
The sUlface to be covered shall meet the requirements of Specification Section 6.1 “ Prime Coat and
Tack Coat" , as applicable.
Immediately before placing the bitumi110us mixture , the surface shall be cleaned of loose or
deleterious material.
If rain commences at the paving locatio11 during the paving operation the batching and lying of further
material shall cease until the rain stops. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, material already
batched and loaded may be delivered and placed provided that there is no freestanding water 011 the
surface to be paved.
4.9.2 Spreading and Finishing
Before the start of paving opεrations the screed of the paver shall be heated to the correct working
temperature.
Care should be taken to prevent the mixture from collecting and cooling at the sides of the hopper 01'
elsewhere in the paver.
The paver shall be operated at a speed which does 110t cause surface cracks , tearing , 01' any other
irregularities in the surface.
lf any segregation, tearing or gouging of the sUlface OCCU1'κ the paver shall be stopped and the cause
determined and remedied before paving re-starts. Patches of rough or segregated material may be
COl1'εcted by spreading fines and gentle raldng, however raki l1 g shall il1 general be avoided.
General cor1'ectiol1 to the surface by the spreading 01' “ casting" of mater때 shall not be pennitted.
The maximum depth of a single layer of Asphalt Binder 01' Surface Course shall not be greater than 8
cm subject to the approval of the Engineer.
4.9.3 Compaction
Compaction shall be in accordance with the Contractor’ s approved method statement confirmed by the
completion of satisfactorγ trial sections and is expected to be within the requirements given below.
&
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - DIVISION 6 6.2 -29- of38

DIVISION6- 에'EARING SURF'ACE AsphaIt Concrete Surface Courses - Section 6.2
lmmediate1y after the mixture has been spread and struck off, the surface shall be checked and any
inequa1ities adjusted. The temperature of the 100se 1aid mix shall be monitored and rolling shall be
carried out within the temperature 1imits given in Tab1e 5 above.
lt is expected that rolling ofthe mix shall consist ofthree separate operations as follows:
끄파욕따L뀔펙;Jg
Initia1 or breakdown ro l1ing 0- 10 min
Secondaη or intennediate rolling 10 - 20 min
Fina1 or finish rolling 20 - 45 min
The initia1 or breakdown rolling and the fina1 or finish rolling shall be carried out with stee1-whee1ed
rollers. The breakdown roller shall operate with the drive rollnearest the paver.
The secondaly or inte1'mediate 1'olling shal1 be calTied out with a pneumatic tired 1'olle1' rolling and
’
shall follow as c1ose1y as practica1 behind the b1'eakdown 1'o1ling.
The initia1 transverse joint shall be 1'olled fi 1'st in a t1'ansverse direction using boards of the required
thickness at the edge of the pavement to provide for off.the-pavement movement of the roller. Where
the initia1 transverse joint is to be made next to a previous1y paved lane , the fïrst pass shal1 be made for
a sho1't distance alo낀g the 10ngitudinaljoint.
Rolling shall be carried out 10ngitudinally and parallel with the road centerline starting at the joint
followed by the outside edge and subsequently moving towards the cente1' of the pavement. Howeve1'
on super-elevated sections rolling shall begin at the 10w side and progress toward the high side.
Successive passes of the roller shal1 overlap by at 1east one half of the width of the ro l1 er and passes
shall not tenninate at points within one meter ofthe end points ofp1'evious passes.
The speed of the 1'ollers shall not exceed 4 ki10meters per hour fo 1' steel wheeled 1'olle1's and 15
kilomete1's pe1' hou1' fo 1' pneumatic ti1'ed rollers. The1'e shall be no sudden changes in di 1'ection 01'
1'eversals in the line of 1'olling.
Rolling shall p1'ogress còntinuously while the mixture is in wo1'kab1e condition to obtain unifonn
compaction and until all 1'ol1e1' ma1'ks and othe1' irregularities are e1iminated.
The 1'ol1er wheels shal1 be kept properly moistened to p1'event adhesioll of the mixture. Excess wate1'
shall not be perrnitted.
Heavy equipment 01' ro l1ers shall not be pennitted to stand on the finished surface until it has
tho1'oughly cooled and se t.
Pavements contalninated by spills 01' leaks of any petroleum p1'oducts f1'o m the Cont1'acto1'’ s equipment
shall be 1'emoved and 1'eplaced at the Contracto1'’ s expense , subject to the app1'oval ofthe Enginee1'.
Su1'faces afte1' compaction shall be smooth and true to the 1'equi1'ed lines levels and grades. Any high
spots , high joints and dep1'essions shall be corrected in acco1'dance with methods approved by the
Engineer.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 6 6.2 -30- of3 8

DIVISION 6- 찌'EARING SURFACE Asphalt Concrete Surface Courses - Section 6.2
Surfaces that are loose , broken or contaminated or which are defective in any way , shall be removed
and replaced with fresh hot mixture, which shall be compacted inunediately to confonn to the
sUlTounding area.
All edges shall be trimmed neatly to line while the surface is being compacted and finished. Any
excess material shall be cut off square after final rolling.
150-millimeter diameter co1'e samples shall be taken from the compacted pavement according to
、 Method B, AASHTO T230. Core holes shall be filled with asphalt concrete and duly compacted
immediately after core extraction is completed. The co1'es shall be used fo 1' routine testing to monito1'
specific g1'avity; thickl1ess; compaction and such other tests as may be approved by the Engineer.
Compaction shal1 be not less than 97 percent of the density of laboratory compacted specimens
composed of the same materials
4.9.4 Joints
Both longitudinal and transverse joints in successive cou1'ses shall be staggered.
Longitudinal joints shall be aπanged so that the final longitudinal joints in the top surface shall be at
the locatioll of the line dividing the traffic lanes.
Transve1'se joints shall be stagge1'εd by a minimum of 25 centimeters.
P1'eviously completed surfacing at all jOillts shall be cut back to a vertical face. A brush coat of prime
coat shall be applied to the cut vertical face before the adjacent surface is laid.
4.9 .5 A/C Surface Course for Bridges

The asphalt concrete surface course for bridges shall be placed in one or two layers based on the
、 finishing conditions of the concrεte slab and su셰 ect to the approval ofthe Engineer.
4.10 Quality Control and Testing

4.10.1 Mixíure Sampling and Quality Conírol
The following samples of shall be taken daily at Mixing Plant subject to the approval ofthe Engineer.
Records of all daily sampling and testing shall be kept and submitted to the Engineer on the following
day.
ê.~IPP~댄 다OI뜨 ” …’ “ … ” ….-" "",, ,.,.•• , '-', ，'_.'~ •• ‘ ......... f\(:Qll.e.I1E.Y、

Each cold bin
got bi.l1 .llgê~eg<ltes . 2 times a day
Grading by wash method
Combin여 agg~~g~te. •........•...
TI딴~P.e.r.':l:tl.l~.e.•• …•... '.......... _•..•.., _ •• _ once p.e~' hour, ........
Extraction ofbitumen
Loose bituminous mixture
j.맺.SHTOτ1. ~'!2
every 200 tons
- ‘ Qradil1g ‘
At Plant lab. Density

Mixture from Mixer Temperature once p~r hour / truck

DIVISION 6- 빠'EARING SURFACE Asphalt Concrete Surface εourses - Section 6.2
Bitumen content and the ma1'shal stability test shall be detenllined f1'om samples taken at the mixing
plant and before compaction. Co1'e samples shall 110t be used.
4.10.2 Testing frequencies
Testing f1'equencies sha11 be acco1'dance with Vietnamese Standa1'd: 22TCN 249-98 01' othe1'
intemational standa1'd subject equivalence being demonst1'ated by the Cont1'actor to the
satisfaction of the Enginee1':
~-
Item - T묘e않짧s앙않tD
않 e않sc1'빼
따빼빼
iψ
띠빼
pt띠
tiion -~___.______Lμ」탤택빨쩍쁘쁘쁘빨y _l태 R‘te앉얹
entnm1 e
22TCN 249-98: Aspbalf concrete surface - Code of Execution. and acceptanc
procedure.
-
Mate1'ial testing & p1'eparahon work before
a const1'uction: (fo1' mate1'ial & quarries approval)
Article 6.2.3 : fo 1' cru~h agg1'egate & sand
Article 6.2 .4 : fo 1' filler
•---
Article 6.2.5 : fo 1' bitumen
Table VI-l & Table
A1'ticle 6.2.6 : fo 1' Asphalt conc1'ete at mixing plant VI-2
b During construction period:
Article 6.3 : Asphalt _c ollc1'ete guality to sit~
‘-
Article 6.4 : Asphalt concrete quality during sp1'eading
& compactioIl P응1'iod
Afte1' constructlOn period: (Fo1' acceptance of
c construction wo바엽j ----- -
Article 6.5
4.10.3 Surface 1‘est of the Pavement
During and after fina1 ro l1ing , the smootlmess of the .course sha11 be checked and any
iITegu1arity of the surface exceeding the limits and any area defective in texture , compaction
or composition sha11 be cOITected.
Within 14 days of completing the surface course , the roughness of the surface sha11 be
measmed. F‘ or tl1is p꾀1'pose the Cont1'acto1' sha11 provide equipmεnt simi1a1' 01' equivalεnt to a
Multi-purpose Profiling System (including a11 necessaη ancillary equipment, hardware and
softwa1'e) for calcu1ation ofthe Intemational Roughness Index (IRI)
4.10.4 Core Sampling of the Pavement at Site
The Contractor sha11 take core samples at Site after the compaction of Asphalt Concrete. The
spacing and location of the cores in any section sha11 be subject to the approval of the
Engineer and in accordance with requirements ofthis specification. The method of sampling
sha11 be in accordance with AASHTO T1 68.
4.11 Asph a1 t Concrete Tolerances for Acceptance
Acceptance of surface course and binder course sha11 be based on the total evaluation results
ofthe items shown in Table 6, which sha11 be certified through quality control and acceptance
test process.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATlθNS - DIVISION 6 6.2 -32- of3 8

Lot size shall be proposed by the Contractor’ s QC Plan.
Table 6: Tolerances of Items to be applied to decide Payment Factors

,-
Normal Surface
Center-side Location :t 5mm
Surface levels :t 5mm
Width :t 10 mm
Thickness by Site Core Sample :t 5mm
Density by Síte Core Samples**
Mín.97%
(AASHTO T 166)
Density by Plant Sa뾰es** 100%:t3%
,
Marsh üstability by Plant Sample** 100%:t 8%
!!it~en C()1!t(~J1ts hy Plant Sample ** :t 0.3%
~urfaceJ_rregularityby 펴팩웰띄뿔 :t 3mm
IRI values (m Ikm) Max.2.00
~e11'!1e~bility (Cl띠/sec)
** means the basic value shall be taken as that confirmed by the Contractor ín trials su비 ect to
the approval of the Engineer.
4.1 1. 1 Rectification of Unsatisfactory Asphalt Mixtures
Areas of unsatisfactory binder or surfacing course will not be paid for until rectified by the
Contractor. Rectification may include removal and replacement of the layer, adding of a
supplementary layer or any other measure which may be necessary subject to the approval of
the Engineer. No payment will be made for any additional work necessary to correct the
unsatisfactory work.
All holes made as a result of taking cores or other test procedures shall be filled with asphalt
concrete without delay and compacted to the density and surface tolerance requirements of
this specification all at the Contractor ’ s own cost.

5.1 Method of Measurement
Areas for asphalt concrete courses shall be measured for payment in square meters in
accordance with the lines , levels and grades given on the Drawings and confirmed by the
Contractor’ s shop drawings for all work in place , completed and accepted.
The width of asphalt courses to be used for quantity checking shall be taken every 20 meters
subject to the approval of the Engineer. Measurements shall be taken at light angles to the
road centerline and the length shal1 be measured along road centerline. Where the average
road width actually placed is less than that defined with allowance being made for the
tolerance , this average may be applied to the calculation of the area to be paid subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Where the average width actually placed exceeds that defined no
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA T1 0NS - DIVISJON 6 6.2 -33- of 38

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Asphalt CO l1 cl'ete Surface Coul'ses - Sectio l1 6.2
The accepted quantities , measured as p1'ovided above , shal1 be paid at the contract price per
unit of measurement fo 1' the pay items of the Bill of Quantities listed be10w, fo 1' each
pavement 10t accepted fo 1' inclusion in the Works.
Payment shall be fu l1 compensation for the work prescribed in this Section inc1uding
fumishing , producing, mixing and p1acing al1 materia1s , testing and tria1 sections, and for
fumishing all 1abor, materia1s , tests , to01s , equipment and any incidenta1s to comp1ete the
work as shown on the Drawings and as required by these Specifications, and/or as directed by
the Engineer.
Payment fo 1' the asphalt conc1'ete surface course fo 1' bridges shall be deemed to inc1 ude all the
necessary 1'equi1'ements to keep the wate1'p roof membrane (measured separately) applied to
the conc1'ete surface of the deck free from damage during all surfacing work.
Pay Item Description
6.02-01 I Asphalt Concrete Surface Course ( 7cm thick)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - DIVISION 6 6.2 -34- of38

Dl VISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Waterproofing - Section 6.3
SECTION 6.3 - WATERPROOFING
1. DESCRIPTION
The work under this Specification Section consists of the supply, transport and installatíon of
waterproofing membranes in accordance with the infonnation , procedures and details stated
in this Specification Section and in confonnance with the drawings , and as required by the
Enginee1'.
The Contractor shall apply bituminous membranes and deck waterproofing membranes to all
surfacεs as indicated on the drawings , including but not lirnited to wing walls , retainíng walls ,
abutment walls , and similar foundations , and to the bridge dεcks.
2. SUBMITTAL
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a certification by the manufacturer that the
waterproofing conform to all the requirements shown on the drawings and given here. The
certification shall be supported by a certified copy of the result of tests performed by the
manufacture1' upon samples of waterproofing.
The Contractor shall also submit the Engineer manufacturer ’ s installation requirement,
manual , etc. for use as the installation specifications.
3. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 Reference Standards
The followíng Standa1'ds in their latest editioll shall be particularly applied to the works
covered by this Specification Section.
Field Appliεd Coating of COITugated Metal Structural Plate for Pipe,

AASHTOM243
Pipe Arches , and Ar ches
----_.
ASTM D41-05 Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Damp proofing , and Waterproofing
ASTM D173-03 Bitumen Saturated Cotton Fabrics Used in Roofing and Waterproofing
(Type III) Standard Specification fo 1' Asphalt Used ìn Damp proofing

ASTM D449-03
and Waterproofing
r----
ASTM D517-98
~t t;H'\ 서!:t rr1 ~np"'1 f'.i，... ~t‘ (\1，\ -f(、r !J. C' 1、h" 1t Pl"nlr
(2003)
------ ._--
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS - Dl VISION 6 6.3 -35- of 38

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Waterproofing - Sec때 01116.3
3.2 Deck Waterproofing Membrane
Al l the rnaterials to be used for fumishing and installing the deck waterproofing membrane
shall be certified by the manufacturer and shall be approved by the Engineer before they are
used in the Works.
3.3 Bituminous Waterproofing Membrane
(a) The Contractor shall fumish to the Engineer certification fr‘ om the manufacturer that the
bituminous waterproofing membrane system has been used successfully in sill1ilar
applications during the preceding five years.
(b) The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer evidence that the applier of the material is a
qualified, experienced applier and is approved by the manufacturer to apply his materials.
(c) Primer: The fumished primer material shall be in accordance with ASTM-D41 , or as
(d) Mastic: The furnished primer material shall be ín accordance wíth AASHTO-M243 , as
applicable and as approved by thε Engineer.
(e) Asphalt: Asphalt for mop coat shall be in accordance with ASTM D449 , Type III.
(f) Waterproofing fabric: Asphalt saturated fabric shal1 be in accordance with ASTM D173.
(g) Asphalt plank: Material for asphalt plank, if used or if approved by the Engineer, shall be
in accordance with ASTM D517.
3 .4 SubmiUals
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three samples of each type of the rnaterials he
proposes to use in accordance with pertinent requirements of the Speciñcations.
For bituminous mastic and prirneζ one-pint containers shal1 be submitted.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer certification that l11aterials to be provided
comply with the requirements of this specification.
4. CONSTRUC TlON REQUIREMENTS
4.1 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
(a) The Contractor shall deliver products to the job site in their originàl unopened containers
clearly label1ed with the manufacturer's nal11e, brand designation, type and class as
applicable.
(b) The Contractor shall store products in an approved dry area and shall protect the l11 from
contact with soil and from exposure to the elements. Products sha l1 be kept dry at all
tímes.

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Waterproofing - Section 6.3
(c) Products shall be handled in a manner that wi11 prevent breakage of containers and
damage to products.
4.2 Preparation of Surface
(a) The surface to which the waterproofing is to be applied shall be cleaned of allloose and
foreign materials , dirt, grease or oil and shall be dry. When necessary the Engineer may
require the surface to be scrubbed with water and a stiff brush , after which the sUlface
shall be allowed to dry before application ofthe primer.
(b) Concrete to which the deck waterproofing membrane is to be applied shall be prepared in
accorda l1ce with the manufacturer ’ s recommendations.
4.3 Application
4.3.1 Deck 끼Taterproofing Membrane
The dεck waterproofing membrane shall be a proprietary waterproofing system of the

thickness indicatεd on the drawings and as approvεd by the Engineer, al1d shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer ’ s recommendations.
4.3.2 Bituminous Waterproofing Membrane
The Contractor shall fumish and install the bituminous membrane as specified herein to all
surfaces indicated on the Drawings including , but not limited to , abutment, wing-walls ,
retaining walls , and similar foundations where directεd by the Engineer. The work shall
in c1 ude the supply and application of bituminous membranes on all surfaces specified to
receive waterproof membrane.
Concrete or other surfaces , which are to be protected by bituminous membrane , shall be

thoroughly c1 eaned before the primer is applied.
They shal1 then be brush or spray painted with two coats of tar or asphalt primer for
absorptive treatment. Below ground 110t less than two coats shall be applied at a rate of 0.56
litters per square mεter of surface.
On the well-primed surface one application of tar or asphalt seal coat shall be applied by
brush at a rate of 0.4 5 litters per square meter. Care shall be taken to confine al1 paints to the
areas to be waterproofed and to prevent disfigurement of any other parts of the structure by
drípping or spreading ofthe tar or asphal t.
(a) Deck waterpro(퍼ng membranes shall be measured for payment by square meters actually
compIe없 fnþ짧éel꾀 a강cöréIãTI풍때m τñeDñlWrffgs~a1ñífñêstn 훨ITfffC1H~pecrtrcafföns
and accepted by the Engineer. The measurement shall include the length for vertical
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS - Dl VISION 6 6.3 -37- of3 8

mVISION 6 - WEARING SURFACE Waterproo애Jllg - Sectio Jll 6.3
bent at sidewa1k curb , cel1ter median and expansiol1 joil1t showl1 on the Drawings ,
however, the 10ngitudina1 al1d t1'al1sve1'se over1 appi l1g 1el1gth 1'equired for the satisfactory
comp1etion of the work shall not be measured fo 1' payment. Any smal1 openings , such as
those fo 1' catch pits or drai l1age pipes , sha l1 not be deducted from the covered area.
(b) No measurement and paymel1t shal1 be made fo 1' bituminous memb1'anes applied on othe1'
cOllcrete structu1'es. All costs associated with this wo1'k shall be considered as a
subsidiary ob1igation and requirement under the applicable concrete pay items in the Bi1l
of Quantities.
(a) The accepted quantities , measured as provided above , shall be paid at the contract price
per ullit of measuremellt fo 1' the pay items of the Bi11 of Quantities listed be10w.
(b) Payment shall be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Sectioll for the supp1y
and installation of all the required membranes for waterproofing inc1uding all 1abour,
materia1s , tests , too1s , equipment and any incidenta1s to comp1ete the work as ShOWll on
the Drawings and as requi 1'ed by these Specificatiolls , an dJor as directed by the Engineer.
The items ofwork payable under this provision a10ng with thεir ut1its shall be as follows;
Unit of
Pay ltem No. Description
R생 easurement
,--
Deck slab Waterproofing for Cable Stayed
6.03-01 m2
Bridge
6.03-02 Deck slab Waterproofing for Approach Bridge m2

L_ ι •
‘

DIVISION 7
MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
‘ -역연~용-‘~
--’
DIVISION 7 - MISCELLANEOUS WORKS Traffic sign - Section 7.1
SECTION 7.1-TRAF훤IC SIGN

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ - 2 -
2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... - 2 -
3. MATERIA돼 ................................................................‘ .......................................................... - 2-
3.1 Concrete .................................................................................................................................... - 2 -

3.2 Reinforcing Steel. .................................................................................................................‘ .... - 2 -
3.3 Paint .......................................................................................................................................... - 2 -
4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ..................................................................................... - 3 -
4.1 Method of MeaSUrell1ent ........................................................................................................... - 3 -

4.2 Basic of Payrnent …................................................................................................................... - 3 -
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 7 7.1-1-of3

DIVISION 7 - MISCELLANEOUS WORKS Traffic si~n - Section 7.1
SECTION 7.1 - TRAFFIC SIGN
1. DESC Rl P Tl ON
(a) This item shall consist oftraffic sign , navigation lantem and installed in accordance with
this Specification at the locations , and in confonnity with the sizes , dimensions and
design , shown on the Drawings , or as required by the Engineer.
(b) This Specification section also includes markings of paint where shown on the Drawings
or required by the Engineer.
2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Construction or fabrication and installatio11 of posts shall be as ShOW11 011 the Drawi11gs a11d shall
i11clude the painting of posts , as required. Each post shall be set accurately at the required
location al1d elevation al1 d il1 such manner as to i11S내'e its beil1g held finnly in place. Posts that
are warped sball be r멍 εcted. Tbe exposed surface of the finished posts shall be ul1ifOlm , of evel1
texture , and sball be free from holes , cracks and chipped edges. The precast monuments shall
not be tral1sported to the work unti1 the C011crete has been cured.
The supply al1d Installatiol1 of Navigatiol1 Lal1tem shall be as showl1 011 the drawil1g and
il1structed by the E11gi l1eer.
3. MA TERIALS
3.1 CONCRETE
C011crete shall be of the class il1dicated 011 the Drawi11gs and in accordance with the
requirements of Section 8.5 “ Concrete Structures" of these Specifications.
3.2 REINFORCING STEEL
Reinforcing steel shall conform to the requireme l1ts of Sectio11 8.6 “ Reinforcillg Steel" of these
Specificatiolls.
3.3 PAINT
(a) Paints , as rεquired， shall confonn to the requirements shown on the Drawings.
(b) All coatings , paints a11d e11amels used in the preparation of the posts and fittings shall be
of the best quality , specially made for the purpose they serve and of types and brands
(c) Depending on the required fUllction of the paint and the type a11d surface condition of the
material to bε painted , the paint used for each item of road fumiture shall comply with the
provisions AASHTO specifications as directed by the Engineer.

DIVISION 7 - MISCELLANEOUS woru. ‘s Traftic sign - Sectio l1 7.1
(d) To ensure compatibi1ity, p녀mεrs， undercoats and finishing coats sha11 be fì'om the same
manufactu1'e1'. All mate1'ials sha11 be used within the time limits specified by the
manufactu1'e1'.

The quantities to be paid fo 1' sha11 be the actual numbe1' of t1'affic sign (including sign post) ,
Navigatioll Lantem placed and accepted by the Engineer.
4.2 Basic of Payment
Payment sha11 be paid fo 1' in acco1'dance with applicable Unit Prices as indicated on the Bid
P1'ice Schedule, fo 1' each of the pa1'ticular Pay Item listed below. Payment sha11 constitute fu11
compensation for fumishing , painting of required c010rs and quality, and p1acing a11 materials ,
including a1l 1abor, equipment, to01s and incidentals necessa1'y to complete the work prescribed
in this Item.
Unit 01'
PayltemNo. Description
Measurement
Square Sign 1200x1200 (for water

7.01-01 cach
traffic)
7.01-02 Rectangula1' sign 400x600 each

-_._._--- -_. . ._--…_._----
7.01-03 Circle sign D70 each
-
7.01-04 Triangle sign D70 each
Supp1y al1d Installatiol1 ofNavigation

7.01-05 each
Lal1tem BH-140D
TECHNICAL SPECIFICAτIONS - DIVISION 7 7.1-3-of3

DIVISION 7 - MISCELLANEOUS 찌'ORKS Pavement Markings - Section 7.2
SECTION 7.2 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. DESCRIPTION ........................................................................................................................ - 2 -
2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... - 2 -
2.1 Preparation of Road Surface ..................................................................................................... - 2 -

2.2 Application ofPavement Marking Paint... ................................................................................ - 2 -
3. MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... -3-
3.1 Paint for Pavement Markings .................................................................................................... - 3 -

3.2 G1ass Beads for Reflective Road Markings .............................................................................. - 3 -
4. DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP .............................................................. - 4 -
5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ..................................................................................... - 4-
5.1 Measuremen t. ............................................................................................................................ -4-

5.2 Paylnent .................................................................................................................................... - 4 -
r ~
~
-
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 7 7.2 - 1 - of 4

DIVISION 7 - MISCELLANEOUS 찌10RKS Pavement Markings ~ Section 7.2
SEC옛ION 7.2 - PAVEMEN멜 R않A훌앵&표NGS
1. DESCRIPTION
(a) This Specification sectiol1 addresses procedures and requirements for providing and
placing markings on the finished pavement. The work sha11 include the fumishing of
reflective pavement marking paint, sampling and paclång, preparing the surface , and
applying the paint to the pavement surface, all in accordance with provisions of this
Specificatíon section.
(b) The paint sha11 be applied to the size , shape and location of the marlångs shown on the
Drawings , or as required by the Engineer.
2. CONSTRUCl‘ION REQUIREMENTS
2.1 Preparation of Road Surface
The painting of lane markers and traffic stripes sha11 incIude the following:
(a) The c1 eaning ofthe pavement surfaces.
(b) The application, protection and drying ofthe paint coatings.
(c) The protection ofpεdestrians ， vehicular 01' othe1' t1'affic.
(d) The protection of all pa1'ts of the road structu1'e and its appu1'tenances against
disfigu1'ement by spatte1's , splashes 01' smirches ofpaints 01' ofpaint mate1'ials.
(e) The supplying of a11 tools , labour and traffic paint necessary fo 1' the entire work.
The paint sha11not be applied during 1'ain 01' wet weathe1' or when ai1' is misty , 01' when in the
opinion of the Engineer, COll강itiollS are unfa、10urable for the work. Paint sha11 not be applied
upon damp pavement su1'faces , 01' upon pavement which has absorbed heat sufficient to cause
the paint to blister and p1'oduce a porous film of paint.
2.2 Application of Pavement Marking Paint
(a) A11 cold-applied paint sha11 be field mixed in accordance with the ll1anufactu1'er s’
instructions just prio1' to application in order to keep the pigments in unifonn suspension.
(b) Paint sha11 not be placed on sealed surfàce only after sufficient time has elapsed to e11SU1'e
that damage willno be caused to the painted surface by volatile substances evaporating
from the bitu11Ùnous su1'facing. 1n 110 case sha11 1'oad marking be applied withot approval
of the Engineer 01' until at least 48 hou1's after completio11 of bituminous surfacing.

DIVISION 7 - MISCELLANEOUS 찌'ORKS Pavement Markin~s - Section 7.2
(c) The precise dimensions and position of all Pavement Markings shall be set out and
marked on the pavement before the paint is applied.
(d) Pavement marking paint shall be applied to centre lines , lane lines , edge lines and zebra
crossing lines by means of an approved self-propelled mechanical machine which has a
satisfactory cut off valve capable of applying broken lines automatically.
(e) Where machine laying is impossible, the Engineer may allow paints to be applied by
hand brushing , spraying, or screening according to the marking configuration and the
type of paint approved for use.
(f) Paints conforming to AASHTO M 248 shall be applied to produce an even uniform
coating of 0.38 mm thickness (exclusive of the glass beads applied to the surface).
(g) Glass beads shall be applied to the surface of the road paint immediately after it has been
laid. The glass beads shall be applied by pressure or spray application at a rate of 450
gm/m2.
(h) All Pavement markings shall be protected from traffic until the markings have hardened
sufficiently so that there is no pick up of the paint on tyres nor any imprint on the paint of
tyre marks.
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Paint for Pavement Markings
The paint to be used on pavεment surfaces shall be thelIDoplastic paint conforming to the
requirements of AASHTO M 249-79. The paint shall be reflectorised by incorporation into the
paint mix of Type 1 glass beads and by application to the surface of the paint of Type 1I glass
beads. Both types of glass beads shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M 247-08.
3.2 Glass Beads for Reflective Road Markings
Glass beads shall be of good quality, optically clear, lead-free glass and not less than 90% shall
be reasonably spherical and free from flaws. The beads shall contain not more than one percent
of sharp angular particles and not more than one half percent of foreign matter and shall be free
flowing under normal atmospheric conditions. The grading of the glass beads shall be as
follows:
US Standard Sieve Percentage Passing

Mm Altemative By Weight
1.180 No .l 6 100
0.850 NO.20 65 -75
0.600 NO.30 45 - 55
0.300 NO.50 15-25
0.180 NO.80 0
The proportion ofthe glass beads to paint shall be not less than 500 grams per litre ofpaint.

DIVISION 7 - MISCELLANEOUS WORKS Pavement Markings - Section 7.2
4. DEF'ECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORKMANSHIP
Materials which are defective or have been applied in an unsatisfactory matmer or to incorrect
dimensions or in a wrong location and do not have a unifonn satisfactory appearance both day
and night sha11 be moved, the road pavement made good and rnateria1s replaced, reconstructed
and/or proper1y 10cated, a11 at the Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
5.1 Measurement
The quantity of pavement rnarkings to be paid for sha11 be made in squa1'e meters (area of
markings) as shown on the Drawings fo 1' 1ane separ따ion， symbo1s 1ettering, hatching and the
like , completed in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications and accepted by the
Engineer.
5.2 Payment
Payment sha11 be in accordance with applicab1e Unit P1'ices as indicated on the Bid Price
Schedule. Payment sha11 constitute fu11 compensation for fumishing and placing a11 mater:i als , 、쩔
sampling and packing, fo 1' the preparation of the surface , and fo 1' a11 1abour, equipment , too1s
and Íllciden1als lleceSSary to completε the Item. Payment w i11 he made lI ncier:
Unit of
Pay ltem No. I Description
Measurement
7.02-01 I Reflective Pavement Markings (2nun thickness) m2

DIVISION 8
STRUCTURAL WORKS
-•
DIVJSION 8 - STRUCTURAL WO없않 Table of COIltents
DIVISION 8: STRUC및URAL 쩌TORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 8.1 - STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL .... …•...…................…

......… …
..... 1 0.0"
1.1 GENERAL .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 WORKING DRAWINGS ................................................. ‘ ...................................•.•....... …1
1.3 MATERl ALS ..................................................................................................................... 2
1.4 CONSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................ 2
1.5 MEASUREMENT ANDPAYMENT .................................................................................. 4
SEετION 8.2 - NOT APPLICABLE ………...........…

........ 00 . . . . . . . . . . . ……............". .………………..........…......….6
SECTION 8.3 - NOT APPLICABLE …
..…•..............…fI.. …
.................….......…
II • • • ......................…
......... 7
SECTION 8.4 - CAST-IN-PLAεE BORED PILE ........... …….....… 00 • • • • • • • • • • • • • • …
.......……..................... 8
4.1 DESCRlPTION ...................... ….......................................................................................... 8
4.2 WORKING DRAWINGS .................................................................................................... 8
4 .3 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................ 9
4 .4 CONSTRUCTION .............................................................................................................. 9
4.5 DRILLED SHAFT LOAD TESTS AND PILE DYNAMIC ANALYSIS ............... ……… 17
4.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .............................................................................. 20
SECTION 8.5 - CONCRETE STRUCTURES ………....…

....…
........……...….......................................24
5.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 24
5.2 CLASSES OF CONCRETE …..........................................................................................27
5.3 MATERl ALS .................................................................................................................... ‘ 29
5 .4 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE ............................................................................... 31
5.5 MANUFACTURE OF CONCRETE ................................................................................. 34
5.6 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE FROM ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS .............. 38
5.7 HANDLING AND PLACING CONCRETE ..................... …........................................... 39

5.8 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS .............................................................................................. 44
5.9 CURING CONCRETE ...................................................................................................... 46
TECHNICAL SPECIFIC~τIONS - mVISION 8 -- -

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Table of Contents
5.10 FINISHING FORMED CONCRETE SURFACES ..................... …•••••••.••••••••••••• …… •••••••• 47
5.11 PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS ........................................…………… •••••••••••••••••••••••• 48
5.12 MORTARANDGROUT ................................................................................................... 되
5.13 APPLICATION OF LOADS ……… •••••.•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 53
5.14 CHECKING QUALITY OF CONCRETE ........................................................................ 54
5.15 SPECIAL PROVISIONS .................................................................................................. 57
5.16 MEASUREMENT ANDPAYMENT ............................................................................... 58
SECTION 8.6 - REINFORCING STEEL ..........…...…… ••••••••••••••••…••••• …••••••••••••••••••••••••• …………… .62
6.1 DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................ 62
6.2 MATERIAL ...................................................................................................................... 62
6 .3 BAR LISTS AND BENDING DIAGRAMS .................................................................... 64
6 .4 FABRICATION ................................................................................................................ 64
6.5 HANDLING, STORING, AND SURFACE CONDITION OF REINFORCEMENT ....... 64
6.6 PLACING AND FASTENING .......................................................................................... 65
6.7 SPLICING OF BARS ........................................................................................................ 66
6.8 SUBSTITUTIONS ............................................................................................................ 66
6.9 MEASUREMENT ...... …....................................................................................................67
6.10 PAYMENT ............ …..........................................................................................................68
SECTION 8.7- PRESTRESSING …•••••••••…•••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• ,..•.…•••••••••••••••• ……………… 73
7.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................... 73
7.2 SUPPLEMENTAYDRAWINGS .................................................................................... 74
7 .3 MATERIAL …… .................................................................................................................75
7 .4 PLACEMENT OF DUCTS , STEEL, AND ANCHORAGE HARDWARE ..................... 77
7.5 IDENTIFICATION ............................................................................................................ 80
7.6 PROTECTION OF PRESTRESSING STEEL.. ................................................................ 80
7.7 (Not used) ……

..…
....“……
……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
.. ……
..“………...…“…….……
..“……
…..………
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……...“…….“………
..….……
..“…………
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……’
.. ……
..”………
..………’..“…….“………
..….“……
..…………...“…….“…….“……….
..….“…“… ….……
..“……
..…………
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
.. ……
..“………
..………
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……’
.. ……
..”………
..………
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…… ..……….“.“
..……... “…….……
..“…… .. .입 81
7.8 DUCTS …
.....“…•••.…
…
..…...“….“……
...“……...“….“….“……
...“……
..…
..…...“….…
..“……...“….…...“…“….“….“….“….“….“….“……
...“……
..…...“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
..…...“….“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…...“…...… “…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….…...“…“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…...“…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..… ..“……...“….“….“….“….“…..“ 81
..…...“….…
7τ.9 GROUT …
..••••…
••••…
...“…....
“ ….“...….“….“……
...“……
..…...“….“….“…’”….“……
...“……
..…...“…
..……
..…...“….“….“….“….“……
...“……...“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…’..”…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….…
..“……
••…"…
.. …
..…
..… ..…’..”..… 82
..…
7.10 TENS잉lONING.“….“..“….…
“..…….“…
.. …
..…
..…...“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
••….“…
.. …
..…...“….“….“….“….“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
..…
..…’..”…
..……
..…
..……
..…
..…
..…’..”…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…...“….“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
..…
..…...“……
...“……...“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….“……....“…“……
...“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
••…
..…...“….…
..“…….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..… .... 85
..…
7.12 MEASUREMENT ANDPAYMENT ................................................................................ 95
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 -2-

gg、
Jlmaz ∞ m‘얘엉얻〔‘『k
{f〕F
걷엉@웅용∞ 4 @*-(μ‘@엽웅영양
「성흥@
l
i냉
::e
00
00
zQO
F임
...예
。。
벼
t잉
벼
Z영
얻
벼
--lI
t"'
、.0
@
@
∞
g
L'
cn
trl
trl
∞
잊
trl
;。
잉3
.}
∞ k「
∞、 rZ
〕{〉엉[m
〕krZ
디 m}〕며〔{
{꺼nk
밍f。j
Z ∞ :·:::::::·:·::::::::::·:::냐:::::··::::::C
·N
∞ iZmiμ커
{{ω。
z
n kf녁 }〕k
「rn며 。벅 벼krm{{{
〔n{k
。zf
-j----------------------
잉-냐--------------
·]
∞·휴 엄며n、섭。
{Zm 커}*π
z ∞JR 「껴
n。ZJ kr、
n「。∞--·::::::::::::::::::·;:::∞
·::·::::::·:::C
∞이
g
。
결
옆
。
;。
..a
∞
m
η1
ν3
디
;J>
L'
s.......
00
trl
건
며
닙
「
。
안1
。
〈킥
옆 r녁
「
:디
。
‘。。。
n
∞·냐 〉-녁-커
7A m머 쩌 여머 n。zm{
녁。。 π껴여。 ∞JR
커}{{
ηω。 Z커쩌파〔커。∞
---------------。
---------------
∞·∞ 7i닝
k며r양{k
「Fkr。
z록。∞ 77A}ω
∞보Z면 :---------------------------。
J
---------------
∞·。 커f
m녁krz。〉쩌디∞벼。∞ 7Ak 머엽kr
「m ·-----------------------------
。--------------
∞
·}
cn
-‘
.......
1:"""
여
。
ζ〉
-
• i
∞.i
cn
L'
;J>
r껴
;。
응
낙
「끽
엽
。
건
;。
π1
π1
ζ〉
$::
trl
trl
"Tj
Z
i
∞
N
겁
i
.
:::::::::::::::·:::::::::·::::·::
∞ 닝
·{
‘
뿔
ζ〉
::>
L'
cn
trl
커
。
。
깐j
。
꺼1
ν3
;•:l>
‘
∞
·}
A
ζ〉
cn
:r:
;J>
걷
윗
~
-디
Z
‘2
∞ 이
·i
trl
L'
cn
녁
。
않
trl
n
z
o
N
∞ ω디{Z
걷 {「。 {〕쩌。〔며。견
}껴。
ω {k
〕r[
변{L(
{U녁k
{fz 녁J{‘
。 ω「m-
∞-------------------
--이---------------
------------------------------------------------------------------------}Na
{}
.}
∞ 냐
·i
L'
cn
。
π1
ζ〉
、。
;J>
ë:
>-3
m
~
몇
α
깐j
;。
r익
P
Z
>
-----‘------------------------------------------------------------------------] <
∞·∞
{ 。며
의‘[ ι성KFZ며
η% 벼。쩌 %녁{ω「
mm녁∞디n셔己영]ωm iS
잉
pZ[
∞ 잉 ∞}〕。껴
녁껴krZ 매커-。Z
쩌krZ〕{「izm ∞‘커。껴
(〉}}ω---------------------------------
·}
{
]
∞ 。
.N
trl
trl
'"0
업
녁
。
;。
。
엽
ν3
e
z
n
‘ J
[
∞
·N
업
"Tj
tr1
π7
녁
。
n
N
F
i
∞
·N
N
u)
(1j
#‘
δ1
다〉
디
짧
~
앓
π1
~
'\~
;J>
z
o
z
-
>
.....
I-ò
"tj
-‘
z
엽
。。
z녁
g、
I-ò
n
00
벼
Z
Z
‘a
@
·{
짤
L'
。
π1
π1
o、1
Z
잉 {k
〕r{
녁Z{Zα응며、k
넉rF
m] η커디영mm
「껴디 ]녁
·N
。 t{
})k녁 {Z
Z
。。kr{L<K머
R덩Z∞
{디 kr며
N쩌벼 nm
. ]
::e
.....
I-ò
cì
'"""
F언
@。
ζ:
t엉
뽑
봄
F언
얻영
F견
@。
í.fl
Z
F
N
Z
·i
(}
ζ1
반1
π1
강
P z r‘
Z
j
i
’
ε
·N
cn
(":
록
;。
。
다〉
;영
륙
、J
、c
。
{
Z
닝
a
cn
I-j
ë:
tr1
즘
νj
ζ〉
「
i
.
녁l
야〔업ZI〔 PF mi l벅i(u
닝여〔 녁klf
()∞
Z ggi
、〕Z ∞
lmg
. νj
’
DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Table of Contents
10 .4 FABRICATION TOLERANCE ....................................................................................... 134
10.5 PACKAGING, HANDLING, AND STORAGE OF MECHANICAL BEARINGS ........ 136
10.6 DOWEL BAR .................................................................................................................. 136
10.7 RIGID FORMED PLASTIC SHEET .............................................................................. 137
10.8 INSTALLATION ............................... …… ........................................................................ 137
10.9 TESTING OF BEARINGS .............................................................................................. 138
10.10 MEASUREMENT ........................................................................................................... 140
10.11 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................... 140
SECTION 8.11- BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINTS .......…… .....…....……........•.....•.....……… .142

11.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 142
11.2 WORKING DARWINGS ................................................................................................ 142
11.3 MATERIAL …… ............................................................................................................... 146
11 .4 MANUFACTUREANDFABRICATION ....................................................................…146
11.5 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................. 148
SECTION 8.12 - RAILINGS ..................................................….............…... ".....•.......•..…………....... 154

12.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 154
12.2 METAL RAILη.JG ........................................................................................................... 154
12.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .............................. ’ ............................................... 156
SECTION 8.13 - NOT APPLICABLE …….......•.....................…....…."..….....….••......•.........•.……… ... 157
SECTION 8.14 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL ........…… .....••...•..……… .....…....•..........•…....……….. 158

14.1 DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................... 158
14.2 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................... 159
14.3 FABRICATION ……… ...................................................................................................... 159
14 .4 GALVANIZING …........................................................................................................... 159

14.5 MEASUREMENT ........................................................................................................... 160
14.6 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................... 160
~ECIION "s.lS - rs: aI APPUCABLE ... ~굉… .....…………… ....……… .... ………… ...………………… ......... 161
SECTION 8.16 - CABLE STAYED BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION ...........…•..........……… ...........…162

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Table of Contel[l ts
16.1 GIRDERCAMBERAND PYLONH0R1 Z0NTALADJUSTMENT ............................ 16 2
16.2 GENERAL QUALITY REQUlREMENTS FOR BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION ............ 162
16.3 MEASUREMENT IN THE COURSE OF WOR1( ......................................................... 163
16 .4 VERIFICATION MEASUREMENTS ............................................................................ 163
16.5 DEFORMATION AND DISPLACEMENTMEASUREMENTS ........................ ……… .164

16.6 ERECTION METHOD STATEMENT ........................................................................... 164
SECTION 8.17 - STAY CABLE .... …….........………..........…............…........……………………………….... 167

17.1 DESC R1PTION ............................................................................ ‘ .................................. 167
17.2 MATER1AL REQUIREMENTS - STRAND STAY CABLES .......... …………… .............. 167
17 .3 CONSTRUCTION REQUlREMENTS - STRAND STAY CABLES ............................ 171
17 .4 DURABILITY AND CORROSION PROTECTION. ‘ .................................................…176
17.5 MEASUREMENT ANDPAYMENT .............................................................................. 178
SECTION 8.18 - WIND CABLE ….................…….....………....…….............…......………......………....... 179

18.1 GENERAL ....................................................................... ‘ ............................................... 179
18.2 MATERIALAND TESTING …....................................................................................... 179
18.3 MEASUREMENT ANDPAYMEN’r .............................................................................. 179
SECTION 8.19 - NOT APPLICABLE …….... …."...…

100 ..……..................…….......................…............. 180
SECTION 8.20 - CABLE VIB뾰ATIONTEST ...... …….....……....…........……......….........….......…….. 181

18 .4 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 181
18.5 CONTENTS 0 F TEST '" ................................................................................................. 181
18.6 PROCEDURES AND S UBMITTALS ............................................................................ 181
SECTION 8.21 - BRIDGE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM ........... …....…………...…............. 182

21.1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................... 182
2 1. 2 OBJECTIVES AND WORK SCOPES .................................................. …… .................…182

21 .3 BHMS IN VAM CONG BRIDGE ................................................................................... 182
21 .4 INSTALLATION OF THE DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT .......................... …… ........... 189

2 1. 5 SPECIFICATION OF THE DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT .......................................... 191
2 1.6 ‘
MEASUF EMENT FREQUENCY AND INSTALLATION TIME ................................. 197

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Table of Contents
2 1. 7 DATAPROCESSING AND ANALYSIS ...….............................…......…..................…·… 197

21.8 SPECIFICATIONS OF BHM SOFTWARE .................................................................... 198
21.9 MON1TORING CRITERIAAND PHASED PLAN .....................……… .............…......... 201

21.10 REPORTING ................................................................................................................... 202
21.11 HANDOVER .................................................................….....……........……·……………...... 202

SECTION 8.22 - BRIDGE DRAINAGE ……………………………………………………………....…•...•...…… 204

22.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 204
22.2 WORKING DRAWINGS ................................................................................................ 204
22.3 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................... 204
22 .4 FABRICATION, GALVANIZING AND PAINTlNG OF METAL ................................. 205
22.5 ASSEMBLY OF DRAINAGE PIPES AND FITTINGS ..................……·……… .......…..... 206

22.6 MEASUREMENT ........................................................................................................... 206
22.7 PAYMENT ....................................................................................................................... 207
SECTION 8.23 - NOT APPLICABLE …....…....…......…......•..…...•...…………...•.………………………….208

SECTION 8.24 - SHOCK TRANSMISSION UNITS ...…………•..•.....•.………...•....•...….....•...•.•.…... 209
24.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................... 209
24.2 WORKING DRAWINGS ................................................................................................ 209
24.3 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................... 210
24.4 TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE ..................................................................................... 211
24.5 MANUALS ..................................................................................................................... 낀 3
24.6 MEASUREMENT ANDPAYMENT .............................................................................. 낀 4
!틀등~.-~~~，"~~"

F ‘
DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WOR.KS St ructu l'e Excavation and Backfill- Section 8.1
DIVISION 8: STRUCTURAL WORKS
SECTION 8.1 - STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
1.1 GENERAL
Structure excavation shaIl consìst of the removal of aIl material, of whatever nature, necessary
for the construction of foundations for bridges except P25 through P29 and pylon PYl , PY2
in accordance with the contract documents or as directed by the Engineer.
If not otherwise provided for in the Contract, structure excavation shal1 include the furnishing
of al1 necessary equipment and the construction and subsequent removal of all cofferdams,
shoring, and water control systems which may be necessary for the execution ofthe work. i
「
If not otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, it shal1 also include the placement of aIl
’ ‘
necessary backfin~ including any necessary stockpiling of excavated material which is to be
used in backfiU, and the disposing of excavated material which is not rεquired for backfi Il. in
roadway embankment or as required by the Engineer for excess and unsuitable material.
If the Contract does not in c1 ude a separate pay item or items for such work, structure
excavation shall include all necessary clearing and grubbing and the removal of existing
structures within the area to be excavated.
Any excavation works already defined under any other Sections in these Specifications shall ‘.
:,
‘
、
not be considered as paπ ofthe structural excavation.
1.2 WORKING DRAWINGS
Whenever specified in the Contract Drawings, the Contractor shall provide working drawings ,
accompanied by calculations where appropriate , of excavation procedures, embankment
constrl1ction, and backfilling operations. This plan shall show the details or sh야ing， bracing,
slope treatment, or other protective system propösed for use and shall be accompanied by
design calculations and sl1pporting data in sufficient detail to permit an engineering review of
the proposed design.
The working drawings for protection from caving shall be submitted sufficiently in advance of
proposed use to allow for their review; revision , if needed; and approval without delay to the
work.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 까'ORKS St ructure Excavation and Backfill- Section 8.1
Working drawings sha11 be approved by the Engineer prior to perform뻐ce of the work
involved, and such approval sha11 not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility under the
contract for the successful completion ofthe work.
1.3 MATERIALS
Material used for backfi l1 shal1 be free of frozen lumps, wood, or other degradable or
hazardous matter and sha11 be of a grading such that the required compaction can be
consistently obtained using the compaction methods selected by the Contractor.
Embankment construction, ifany, sha11 conform to the requirements ofthe Engineer.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION
1.4.1 Depth of Footings
The elevation of the bottoms of footings , as shown in the Contract Documents, sha11 be
considered as approximate only and the Engineer may order, in writing, such changes in
dimensions or elevation offootings as may be necess없Y to secure a satisfactory foundation.
1.4.2 Foundation Preparation and Control ofWater
1.4.2.1 General
Where practical , a11 substructures shall be constructed in open excavationιand， where

necessary, the excavation sha11 be shored , braced, or protected by co많rdams constructed in
accordance with the requirements contained in Technical Specifications, Division 1, Section
1.16, “ Temporary Works". When footings can be placed in the dry without the use of
cofferdams , forms may be omitted with the approval ofthe Engineer and the entire excavation
shall be fi11ed with concrete to the required elevation of the tip of the footing. The additional
concrete required shall be fumished and placed at the expense of the Contractor. Temporary
water control systems shall conform to the requirements contained in Tec1mical Specifications,
Di visi on 1, Secti on 1.1 6, “ Temporary Works".
1.4.2.2 Excavations Within Channels
When excavation encroaches upon a live streambed or channel , unless otherwise permitted, no
excavation shall be made outside of caissons, cribs , cofferdams, steel piling, or sheeting, and
the l1atural streambed adjacent to the structure sha11 not be disturbed without permission from
the Engineer. If any excavation or dredging is made at the site ofthe structure before caissons,
cribs , or cofferdams are sunk or are in place, the Contractor shall, without extra charge, after
the foundation base is in place, backfill a1l such excavation to the original ground surface or
riverb려 with material satisfactory to the Engineer. Material temporarily deposited within the
.........
tlÔWareäof strêam훈rrorn- rounaanon or omet excavatlOir 'S Mii tπ l 'i;i UIVY 'i:l U -aT fU u n;;;; ~J ‘aUJ
f1 0w area freed from obstruction thereby.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DlVISION 8 8.1-2-of214

’ DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS St ructure Excavation and Backfill- Section 8.1
1.4.2.3 Foundation Not on Rock
When a foundation is to rest on an excavated surface other than rock, special care shall be
taken not to disturb the bottom of the excavation, and the final removal of the foundation
material to grade shall not be made until just before the footing is to be placed.
Under footings supported on piles, the over-excavation 01' disturbed volumes shall be replaces
없1d compacted as directed by the Engineer.
1.4.2.4 Approval of Foundation
After each excavation is completed, the Contractor shall noti폐 the Engineer that the
excavation is ready for inspection and evaluation, and no concrete 01' other footing material
shall be placed until the Engineer has approved the depth of the excavation and the character
ofthe foundation material.
1.4.3 Backfill
‘ -.""
Backfill material shall confonn to the provision of Article 1.3, “ Materials" of this section. If
sufficient material of suitable quality is not available from excavation within the project limits,
the Contractor shall import such material as directed by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Doc l1 ments, all spaces excavated and not occupied
by abutments , piers, 01' other permanent work shall be refilled with earth up to the sl1rface of
the surrounding ground or as stated in the Contract Documents, with a sufficient a110wance for
settlement. Except as otherwise provided, all backfill shall be thoroughly compacted to the
density of 95% in accordance with AASHTO T1 80. The surrounding ground and its top
surface sha11 be neatly graded. FiIl placed around piers shall be deposited on both sides to
approximately the s없ne elevation at the s없ne time. Rocks larger than 75mm maximl1m
dimension shall not be placed against the concrete surfaces.
No backfill shall be placed against any concrete structure until pennission has been given by
the Engineer. The placing of such backfill shall also conform to the requirements of Division 8,
Section 8.5 , Atticle 5.1 3.2, “ Earth Loads". The backfi l1 in front of abutments and wingwalls
shall be placed first to prevent the possibility of forward movement. Jetting of the fill behind
abutments and wingwalls will not be permitted.
Adequate provision shall be made for the thorough drainage of all backfi11. French drains ,
consisting of at least O.06m3 of penneable material wrapped in filter fabric to prevent
clogging and transrnission of fines from the backfill , shal1 be placed at each weep hole.
Backfi l1ing of metal and concrete culverts shall be done on accordance with the requirements
of other Part ofthese Specifications.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Structure Excavation and Backfill- Section 8.1
1. 5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
1.5.1 Measurement
The quantity to be paid for as structure excavation shal1 be measured by the cubic meter. The
quantities for payment wi1l be determined as specified below or as determined by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise determined by the Engineer, pay limÍts for structure excavation shall be
taken as:
For Structure Excavation wÍth Sheet Pi1i ng
• The horizontal limits shal1 be vertical planes lOOOmm outsÍde of the neat lines of
footings or structures without footings ,
• The top limits shal1 be the original ground or the top of the required grading cross-
section , whichever is lower, and
• The lower limits shall be the designed bottom of the blinding concrete or designed
base ofthe structure , 0 1' the lowe1' limit of excavation ordered by the Engineer.
For Structure Excavation without Sheet Piling
• The horizontal plane shal1 be lOOOmm outside the neat lines of footings or structures
without footings ,
• The side surface shall be extendεd from the horizontal plane with the slope of 1: 1 to
the original ground surface regardless of the slope actuaIJy constructed by the
Contractor taking account of the soil characteristics 011 the Site,
• The lower limits shall be the designed bottom of the blinding concrete 01’ designed
base of the structure, or the lower limit of excavation o1'dered by the Engineer.
Measurement fo 1' structure excavation with sheet piling as above mentioned is applied to a
closed cofferdam with sheet piling. In case of a unclosed cofferdam or a cofferdam with self-
standing sheet piling, the quantity of structure excavation shall be determined by the Engineer.
Structure backfilling without sheet p i1i ng shal1 be calculated based on the assumption that the
slope of the side surface Ís 1: 1 as assumed for the excavation mentioned above.
The quantity of excavation in the Bid Schedule is estimated based on an assumed cOl1struction
plan. The quantity shall be recalculated based 011 the actually applied cOl1 struction method.
1. 5.2 Payment
Unless otherwÍse providεd ， structure excavation , measured as provided in Article 1.5.1 ,

4"M_.~11 L_ ~ __ ~...] .c' i • ~→_.‘L.:‘·‘--ι~4~ .C'~‘~-~. -’~-~--
.. -ι“1‘_ ~~:1
~γTvn치W'tt'R강 FroIT{';"---;''VV'lTF~~““ f‘~τ~흥~~、ι'-T-T-F‘ ε'iiii4~'-U;C-FT'7'응흥iι‘a나‘앙←“““'c-'-_'~，~Æ~=_- ι r← γ
Payment for structure excavatÍon shall include full compensation for all Iabor, materiaI ,
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - Dl VISION 8 8.1 - 4 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 뼈10없KS St nllct l.l re Excavation and Backfill- Section 8.1
equipment , and other items that may be necessary or convenient to the successful completion
of the excavation to the eJevation of the bottom of footings 0 1' base of structure.
Payment for structure excavation with sheet piling shal1 cover a l1 relevant works such as steel
sheet piIes , driving and lifting up of the piJes, supporting system and soiJ disposaJ at a
regulated place.
Full compensation for controlling and removing water from excavations and for fumishing
and insta l1i ng or constructing a l1 cofferdams, shoring, and all other facilities necessary to the
operations , except concrete seal courses that are shown in the Contract Documents , and thei 1'
subsequent removal , shall be considered as in c1 uded in the contract price for structure
excavation, unless the Cont1'act Document provides for their separate payment.
Unless otherwise specified on the Contract Documents, the contract p1'ice for structure
excavation shall in cJ ude full payrnent for all handling and sto1'age of excavated materials that
are to be used as backfi l1, including any necessary drying, and the disposal of all surplus or
unsuitable excavated material. Any clearing , grubbing, 0 1' structure 1'emoval that is 1'equired
but not paid fo 1' unde1' other items of the Contract Documents wi l1 be considered to be
included on the price paid for structure excavation.
When it is necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to carry the foundations below the
elevations shown in the Contract Documents, the extra excavation shall bε paid at the same
contract unit price for relevant structure excavation no matter what the additional excavation
level is.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents , the contract price for structure
backfilling shal1 include fu l1 compensation for the placing and compacting of structure backfil1.
The furnishing of backfill material from sources other than excavation wiJl be paid for at the
same contract unit price for the structure backfilling.
Payment for blinding stone shal! include fu !l compensation Dα. all labor, material , equiprne앉，
and other items that may be necessary 0 1' convenient to the successful completion ofthe work.
The items of work payable under this provision along with their units shal1 be as fo l1 ows:
8.01-01 Structure excavation with Sheet Piling m3
8.01-02 Structure excavation without Sheet Piling m3
8.01-03 Structure backfi l1i ng m3

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Not Applicable - Section 8.2
SECTION 8.2 - NOT APPLICABLE
TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.2 - 6 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Not Applicabie - Section 8.3
SECTION 8.3 - NOT APPLIεABLE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - .DIVISION 8 8.3 -7 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Cast-in-place Bored Piles - Section 8.4
SECTION 8.4 - CAST-IN-PLACE BORED PILE
4.1 DESCRIPTION
4. 1. 1 General
This work sha Jl consist of constructing drilI ed foundation piles and shafts including the
placing of reinforcing steel and concrete all in accordance with the Contract Documents and
these Specifications. The term “ shafts" , as used in this section , shall mean “ CIP Pile(s)" as
used in the Drawings under this Contrac t.
4. 1. 2 Reference Standards
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be particularly applied to the works
covered by this Specification
• TCVN 326-04 or 22TCN 257-2000: Construction and Measurement ofBored Piles
• TCXDVN 269-02: Plie - Testing Method by Load Test
• TCXDVN 358-2005: Bored Pile - Method for ultrasonic pulse for determination of
homogeneity of concrete
• TCXDVN 359-2005: Pile - Test for checking defects by the motive method with
small deformation
• ASTM D4945: Pile - Test by the motive method with large deformation PDA
4.2 WO RKl NG DRAWINGS
When required by the Contract Documents, at least four weeks before work on shafts is to
begin , the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval , an installation plan
for the constructiol1 of driJJ ed shafts. The submittal shall include the fo lJ owing:
• Li st of proposed equipment to be used , including cranes , drills , augers , bailing buckets ,

final cleaning equipment, desanding equipment , slurry pumps , sampling equipment,
tremiεS 0 1' concrete pumps , casings , etc.
• Details of overal1 construction operation sequence and the sequence of shaft construction
in bents 0 1' groups.
• Details of shaft excavation methods.
• When slurry is required , detailed method proposed to mix , circulate , and desand slurry.
• Details ofmethods to clean the shaft excavation.
-깐liÜaiJs Qfreinro rcP1η 。 nt r、 1<> ，、，，_menLinc11J세 nO SlJ nno Ji and cen tra1izationmetho서 q
;ε ...，，.，，，，，‘’"，'""""，’‘’""，...-"""，，-=→=-=←
-.....，-，--~‘" τ 't'"τττ~~"^~-~-"-#--~--" • ~ ‘→ ;~-"I'，-~，~;，，"_~ ,,,", h'-_C_' ,'__ '_"_ • ‘ ε →J
• Details of concrete placement, curing, and protection.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS εast-in-place Bored Piles - Sectio i1 8.얘
• Detai1 s of any required Ioad tests.
• Other information shown in the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer.
The Contractor shaIl not start the construction of driII ed shafts for which working drawings
are required untiI such drawings have been approved by the Engineer. Such approvaI wiIl not
reIi eve the Contractor ofresponsib iIity for resuIts obtained by use ofthese drawings 01" any of
the Contractor’s other responsib iI ities under the Contract Documents.
4.3 MATERIALS
4.3.1 Concrete
Concrete shaIl conform to the requirements of Division 8, Section 8.5 “ Concrete Strllctures".
The concrete shaIl be Class in Table 5.2.2-2 ofthese Technical Specifications lInless otherwise
specified in the Contract Documents.
4.3.2 Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcing steel shall COnf0I111 to the requirements of Section 8.6 “ Reinforcing Steel'’.
4.3.3 Casings
Casings that are required to be incorporated as part of the permanent work sha!l confo!"m to
the requirements of Section 8.8 “ Steel Structure". Steel shaIl be AASHTO M270M (ASTM
A709M) Grade 250 unless otherwise specified in the contract documents.
4.4 CONSTRUCTION
4.4. 1. Protection ofExisting Structures
All reasonable precautions shalJ be taken to prevent damage to existing structmes and uti Iities.
These measures shall in c1 ude , but are not limited to , selecting construction methods and
procedures that wil1 prevent excessive caving of the shaft excavation, monitoring and
contro lIing the vibrations f1"om the driving of casing or sheeting, dri1I ing of the shaft , or [rom
blasting, if permitted.
4 .4.2. Construction Sequence
Al1 excavation ofthe foundation in which dri1I ed shafts are to be constructed shal1 be complete
before shaft construction begins.
Unless shown otherwise in the Contract Documents where drilled shafts are to be instal1 ed in
conjunction with embankment pJacement, it shall be constructed after the placement ofthe fill.
4.4.3. General Methods and Equipment
Excavations required for shafts shal1 be perfo l111ed through whatever materials a1"e
encountered, to the dimensions and elevations in the Contract Documents 01" ordered by the
Engineer. The methods and equipment used shaIl bε suitable for the intended purpose and
materials encountered. The Contractor shall excavate the shaft using temporary casing. For
pile construction on water, the equipment and/or temporary facilities such as pontoons ,
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVIS][ON 8 8.4 - 9 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 씨'ORKS Cast-in-place Bored Piles - Section 8.4
platforms , barges , etc. , adequate to ensure the construction on water shall be used.
4.4.4. Alternative Construction Methods
The Contractor may propose alternative methods to prevent caving and control ground water.
Such proposals , accompanied by supporting teclmical data, shall be submitted in accordance
with Article 4.2 , "Working Drawings."
• Piling Sequence
The Contractor shall check the bearing capacity of soil by standard penetration test and so i1
analysis as directed by the Engineer.
Piling work shall be started at a location agreed with the Engineer. The first shaft in a group of
a pile cap will be constructed to demonstrate the suitability of construction methods and
quality of works.
Piling sequence shall be determined not to give harmful effects to the shafts already completed.
4.4.5. Excavations
If the Engineer determines that the foundation material encountered during excavation is
unsuitable 0 1' diftìεrs from that anticipated in the design of the dri11 ed shaft, the bottom
elevation of the dri1l ed shaft shown in the Contract Documents may be adjusted during
constructlO n.
The Contractor shall take soil samples 0 1' rock co 1'es when shown in the Contract Documents
0 1' as directed by the Engineer to determine the cha1'acter of the material di1'ectly below the
shaft excavation. The Engineer wi1l inspect the samples 0 1' cores and detennine the final depth
ofrequired shaft excavation.
Excavated materials which are removed from the shaft excavation and any dr i1l ed f1 uids used
shall be disposed of in accordance with the Contract Documents or as directed by the Engineer.
4.4.6. Casings
The shaft shall be excavated with a temporary steel casing through water and upper soillayers.
The steel casing shal1 be approved by the Engineer prior to the installation.
Casings shall be metal , smooth, clean, watertight, and of ample strength to withstand both
handling and driving stresses and the pressure of both concrete and the surrounding earth
materíals. The outside diameter of casing shall not be less than the specified size ofthe shaft.
The top of temporary casing shall be kept a minimum of 0.30 m higher than the ground leve l.
The tip ofthe casing shal1 be penetrated to a level ensuring pressure of slurry inside the casing
exceeds active pressure of soil , hydrostatic water pressure and surrounding construction load.
Temporary casings shal1 be removed while the concrete remains workable. Generally, the
~
•
ι •
4 _] _ _ _ _ ~ __ 4- !_ ‘1- __ 1__ .a. ! __ ‘ •
'femuvaF'UYreI‘ 11'이<lTy"\'Jü:5Tf!흘 려'mfl"H않 u양"ðfaJ~<lTF""_~풍&‘inT'l~_'~9Tf'''lrfκ，，~.장 ._<“~
above ground surface. Movement of the casing by rotating, exerting downward pressure and
tapping to facilitate extraction or extraction with a vibratory hammer shall be permitted.

mVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Cast-in-place Bored Piies - Section 8.4
Casing extraction shall be at a slow, uniform rate with the pull in line with the shaft axis.
A sufficient head of concrete shall be maintained above the bottom of the casing to overcome
the hydrostatic pressure ofwater or drilling fluid outside ofthe casing.
4.4.7. Slurry
The shaft shall be excavated so that the stability of the bore hole wall is ensured and , when
necessary, using bentonite sJurry.
Slurry llsed in the drilling process shall be mineral sJurry. The slurry shall have both a mineral
grain size that wi1l remain in suspension and sufficient viscosity and gel characteristics to
transport excavated material to a suitable screening system. The percentage and specific
gravity of the material used to make the suspension shall be su퍼cient to maintain the stability
of the excavation and to allow proper concretε placement. The level of the slurry shall be
maintained at a height sufficient to prevent caving ofthe holε. The level of slurry sha11 be kept
minimum 2.0m higher than surrounding water leve l. When unusual loss of slurry occurs , the
Contractor shaIl report the fact to the Engineer immediately and take an appropriate solution
urgently. If the Engineer determines that stable conditions are not being maintained, the
Contractor shall immediately take action to stabilize the bored hole. When instructed by the
-
Enginccr, the Contractor shaIl submit a rεvised pile insîallaîion plan which add l'esses the
problems and prevention of future instability. The slurry to be used shall not cause harmful
effects to the soil and w없er in a이 acent area.
The mineral slurry shall be premixed thoroughly with clea11 fresh water, and adeqllate time
shall be allotted for hydration prior to introduction into the shaft excavation. Adequate slurry
tanks shall be reqllired when specified. No excavated slurry pits shall be allowed when slurry
tanks are required 011 the project without written permission of the Engineer. Adequate
desanding equipment will be required when specified in the Contract Documents. Steps shall
be taken 잃 necessary to prevent the slurry from "setting up" in the shaft excavation, such as ,
agitation, circulation, and a예 usting the propeπies ofthe slurry.
Control tests using suitable apparatus shall be carried out by the Contractor on the mineral
slurry to determine unit weight (density) , viscosity, and pH. An acceptable range of values for
those physical properties is shown in Table 4 .4 .10-1.
Table 4 .4 .10-1 Range ofbasic values

(Table 1 - TCVN 326:04)
Name of properties AlI owabJe values Test method
Density 1.05 - 1.1 5 glcm3 Mud balance (ASTM D4380)
Viscosity 18 - 45 seconds Marsh funnel (ASTM D691 0)
Sand content <6% Sand content set (ASTM D4381)
ColI oid ratio >95% Cup measurement

Water loss <30ml/30minutes Water loss measurement apparatus
Clay layer thickness 1 - 3mm/3minutes Water loss measurement apparatus
1 minute: 20-30m g/cm2.

Static shear force Shearometer
10 minute: 50-100m g/cm2.
Stability <0.03 g/cm2
PH 7-9 PH test paper

'--_
Contractor w iIl base on geologic , hydrologic , underwater and dri Jli ng equipment conditions to
select appropriate method to remain borehole wall and bentonite slurry. Bentonite slurry is
chosen basing on calculating accordingly to the principle of horizontal stress balance among
f1 uid column inside the borehole and stress of base ground and water around the hole’ s wall.
Contractor shall submit physical propeπies of the appropriate slurry for Engineers ’ approval
before implementing the construction
Tests to determine unit weight (density) , viscosity, and pH values shall be done during the
shaft excavation to establish a consistent working pattern. Prior to placing shaft concrete ,
sluD'y samples shall be taken from the bottom and at intervals not exceeding 3000 mm for the
full height of slurry. Any heavily contaminated slurry that has accumulated at the bottom of
the shaft shall be eliminated. The mineral slurry shall be within specification requirements
immediately before shaft concrete placement.
Before concreting, if sample of slurry taken at level O.5m from bottom of borehole has some
properties such as density > 1.25 g/cm3 , sand content >8% , viscosity >28 seconds, the
appropriate method for cleaning bottom of borehole is required to ensure quality of shaft
concrete.
4.4.8. Excavation Inspection
The Contractor shall provide equipment for checking the dimensions and alignment of each
shaft excavation. The dimensions and alignment shall be determined by the Contractor under
the direction ofthe Engineer. Final shaft depth shall be measured after final cleaning.
The toe of the shaft shall be free f1'om slime 0 1' other debris du1'ing excavation before casting
concrete.
No more than 50mm of loose or distu 1'bed material shall be present for all shafts just prior to
placing the concrete. No more than 50 mm of loose or disturbed material shall be present for
side f1‘ iction shafts. End bearing shafts shall be assumed unless otherwise noted in the plans.
The excavated shaft shall have the approval of the Engineer prior to proceeding with
~ π L__ ~ __ _L L~r、 ... ,: ...................
. _ - ‘ --_ .... ~--“ '"r l‘~ -1':-‘ 1
uutJStltftltltJJt;."f'llε'tevtmY"e￥ ~tlrt';._t-v Cà--"6tLI-GWr-f --lff ， \--!-i CZ;;---Ð-lU-V'Y_lfi용ιF-aT--'iiT~‘l.''F:t-~__vw~..''''-，~~W_~，'~ “1!;'Ç용~
ofthe shaft toes shall be determined by the Engineer.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCτURALW。없‘s εast-in-place Bored Piles - Section 8.4
4.4.9. Reinforcing Steel Cage Construction and Placcment
The reinforcing steel cage , consisting of the steel shown in the Contract Documents plus cage
stiffener bars , spacers, centralizers , and other necessary app U1ienances , shall be completely
assembled and placed as a unit immediately after the shaft excavation is inspected and
accepted and prior to shaft concrete placement.
The steel cage units are Ii fted down into the borehole by crane 0 1' other suitable method. The
methods for connecting cage segments such as fastening by steel wires for short piles , U shape
bolts 0 1' couplers for upper segments of long piles may be applied. The connecting method
shall be shown on the working drawing for the Engineer ’ s approval.
The reinforcing steel in the shaft shaIl be tied and SUppOI‘ ted so that the reinforcing steel w il1
remain within allowable tolerances of its intended position until the concrete w ilI support the
reinforcing stee l. When concrete is placed by tremie methods , temporary hold-down devices
shaIl be used to prevent uplifting of the steel cage during concrete placement. Concrete
spacers 0 1' other approved non-corrosive spacing devices shall be used at su짧 cient intervals
not exceeding 1500 mm along the shaft to insure concentric location of the cage within the
shaft excavation. When the size of the longitudinal reinforcing steel is larger than D25 bar,
such spacing shaIl not exceed 3000 mm.
4.4.10. Concrete Piacement, CU l"Ìng , and Profection
Concrete shall be placed as soon as possible after reinforcing steel cage placement. Concrete
placement shall be continuous in the shaft to the top elevation of the shaft. Placement sha lI
continue after the shaft is fu lI unt iI good quality concrete is evident at the top of the shaft.
Concrete to be placed in water or slurry shalI be placed through a tremie or concrete pump
using methods specified in Division 8, Section 8.5 , Arti cI e 5.7.5 "Underwater Placement".
For shafts Iess than 2400 mm in diameter, the elapsed time from the begirming of concrete
placement in the shaft to the completion of placement shalI not exceed 2 hours. For shafts
2400 mm and greater in diameter, the concrete placing rate shall bε not less than 9000 mm of
shaft height per each 2 hour period. The concrete mix shal1 be of such design that the concrete ‘、
remains in workable plastic state throughout the 2 hours placement limi t.
When the top of shaft elevation is above ground, the portion of the shaft above ground shaIl be
formed with a removable form 0 1' permanent casing when specified in the Contract Documents.
The shaft concrete shall be vibrated or rodded to a depth of 1500 mm below the ground
surface except where soft uncased so iI 0 1' sIurry remaining in the excavation wi lI possibly mix
with the concrete.
After placement, the temporarily exposed surfaces of the shaft concrete shall be cured in
accordance with the provisions in Division 8, Section 8.5 Aliicle 5.10 "Curing Concrete".
No construction operations that would cause soil movement a，때 acent to the shaft, other than
mild vibration , shaIl be conducted for at Ieast 48 h after shaft concrete has been placed.
TECHN1CAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.4 - 13 - of214

DIVISION 8.- STRUCTURAL WORKS Cast-in-place Bored Piles - Section 8.4
Portions of driIJ ed shafts exposed to a body of water shall be protected from the action of
water by leaving the forms in place for a minimum of seven days after concrete pJacement.
The piles under construction on water shall be protected against boat collision and floating
debris. Damaged piles shall be repaired , replaced or supplemented by the method approved by
the Engineer at the Contractor’s expenses.
The Contractor shall plot a graph indicating the relation between volume of placed concrete
and level of concrete surface during placement. The Contractor shall check the stability
maintenance method of excavation if the actual volume of poured concrete exceeds 20% of
specified volume.
4.4.11. Test Shafts
Test shafts shall be constructed when required in the Contract Dòcuments. The construction of
test shafts will be used to determine if thε methods , equipment , and procedures used by the
Contractor are sufficient to produce a shaft excavation which meets the requirements of the
Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall revise the methods and equipment as necessary at any time during the
construction ofthe test shaft hole to satisfactor i1 y complete the excavation.
The location of the test shaft shall be as shown in the Contract Documents or as directed by
the Engineer. The diameter and depth of the test shaft hole or holes shall be the same as those
ofthe production drilled shafts shown in the Contract Documents or directed by the Engineer.
The test shaft holes shall be filled with plain concrete in the same manner that production
shafts will be constructed unless a different backfill material is shown in the Contract
Documents 0 1' specified by the Engineer.
When the Contractor fails to satisfactorily demonstrate the adequacy of the methods ,
procedures 0 1' equipment , additional test shafts shall be provided by the Contractor at no cost
to thε Employer.
4.4.12. Construction Tolerance
The following construction tolerancεs shall be maintained in constructing drilled shafts:
• The drilled shaft shall be within 75 mm of the plan position in the horizontal plane at the
plan elevation for the top ofthe shaft.
• The vertical alignment of the shaft excavation shall not vary from the plan alignment by
more than 20 mm/m of depth.
• After all the shaft concrete is placed , the top of the reinforcing steel cage shall be no more
than 150 mm above and no more than 75 mm bεlow plan position.
•
←
When
ε ~~~←
(、 9 터I1￥갔
cr i~ Il ~e서 it~
•
Ollt이서 edj 꺼 metel'
‘ ι ~친← 、←‘’→
shalLnot he le c;<; th 꺼 11 the c; h l'l ft 서 imnetel'
슨; ξ
야10wn
r
in the Cont J'act Documents.
• The top elevation ofthe shaft shall be within 25 mm ofthe plan top of shaft elevation.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WO없엉 Cast-in-place Bored Piles - Sectioll 8.4
• The bottom of the shaft excavation shall be normal to the axis of the shaft within 60
mmlm of shaft diameter.
Drilled shaft excavations constructed in such a malU1er that the concrete shaft cannot be
completed within the required tolerances are unacceptable. Correction methods shall be
submitted by the Contractor fo 1' the Engineer’s approva1. Approval will be obtained before
continuing with the drilled shaft construction.
Materials and work necessary to effect correction for out-of-tolerance drilled shaft excavations
shall be furnished by the Contractor at no cost to the Employer.
The Contractor shall prepare equipment to measure shaft diameter and verticality. The shaft
diameter shall not be less than the diameter shown in the Drawing. Allowable inclination of
shaft axis shall be less than whichever the smaller one of L/ I00 or 400 mm , where “ L"
represents the length ofthe shaft measured in mm fro lTI the ground leve l.
Allowable deviation ofwall from overal1 line shal1 be less than 20cm.
4.4.13. Integrity Testing
When shaft concrete is placed by the wet construction method , and when called for in the
COl1tract Documents 01' ordered by the Engineer, the completed shaft wil1 be subjected to 110n-
destructive testing to detennine the extent of any defècts that may be present in the shaft.
ln the event testing discloses voids 01' discontinuities in the concrete which indicate that the
drilled shaft is not structurally adequate as determined by the Engineer, the constructiol1 of
additional dri1l ed shafts shall be suspended until the Contractor repairs , replaces , or
supplements thε defective work and the Engineer approves the remedial work. Suspension of
dr il1 ed shaft construction shall remain in effect until written changes to the methods of drilled
shaft construction are approved by the Engineer.
4.4.13.1 Sonic Pulse Testing
The Sonic Pulse Testing shall be used for the purpose of detennining homogeneity of concrete.
Sonic testing shall be done on all shafts. The test shall be carried out using an approved
acoustic apparatus and in accordance with TCXDVN 358:2005. When defect of concrete is
found by this method , attention should be paid tl1at it is warning only 01' indication about
existence of defect in concrete. In order to affirm and identify exactly such defect, the coring
test shall be carried out as specified in Article 4 .4 .13.2.
The Contractor shall install the steel pipes as shown on the Drawings fo 1' the whole length of
the shaft before casting of the shaft. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents ,
the materiaIs shall be AASHTO M270M or equivalent. The sonic pipes are tightly fixed to the
steel cage to avoid 1110vement during concrete placement. Number of pipes shall be as showl1
011 the Drawings. The pipes shall have a round surface free of defects and obstructions ,
including all pipe joints, in order to permit the free and unobstructed passage of source and
receiver probes used for the tests. The pipes 5hall be wateπight and fitted with watertight caps
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.4 - 15 ‘ of214

on the bottom and the top. At the completion ofthe tests , all the pipes shall be grouted by 3:1
sand-to-cement mortar.
Sonic testing shal1 be done by specialized company approved by the Engineer.
The test method and schedule of tests shall be approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall
schedule that the sonic pulse testing for one group of the shaft in one p iJ e cap be completed
within seven calendar days after completion of the shafts in one pile cap. The Contractor shall
also schedule to submit the reports for sonic pulse testing within three calendar days after
completion ofthe tests in one pile cap.
Acceptance criteria of the shafts shall be given by the Engineer before construction of the
shafts. The criteria w i1l be based on specifications and experience records from the equipment
supplier and the specialized company performing the tests and other available infonnation.
The pipes used for sonic testing shal1 be fully grouted after completion ofthe test. The mix of
grout and the grouting pressure shall be approved by the Engineer.
4.4.13.2 Coring Test
If sonic testing indicates defects in the concrete or instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor
shal1 perform core dr i1l ing to take samples for laboratory testing to prove if the quality and
stren망h of the concrete is adequate. The schedule and testing shall be approved by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall execute core drilling of a dr iJI ed shaft if directed by the Engineer with
minimum quantities are 01 pile per each Abutment , Pier. The equipment shall be able to dr i11
full length of the shaft and capable of drilling, sampling and standard penetration test under
the base of the shaft. The Contractor shall install tubes as directed by the Engineer to allow
core drilling at various levels.
Cores shall be a minimum of 100 mm diameter and shall be taken with a double tube core
barre l. Following visual inspection, the Engineer shall instruct the Contractor of a test len망h
ofthe core taken from the pile.
4.4.13.3 Tip Contact Checking Test
ln order to detennine the contact condition between bottom of pile and soil , the coring is
carried out on the I 해gth 100 cm of concrete pile at tip then penetrated 600mm to 1000mm
into the bearing stratum. Number of piles on which the test is conducted as follow: 01 pile per
each Pylon and Anchorage Pier; and 3% of total piles for Approach Bridge ’ s Piers and
Abutments. For this testing purpose , one of 4 pipes for the sonic pulse testing shall be replaced
by a steel pipe with the inner diameter of minimum IOOmm. lf further coring for tip contact
checks are recognized necessary by the Engineer, the Engineer may request the Contractor to
carry out the Tip Contact Checking Test additionally to the satisfaction of the Engineer. No
additional payment and extension oftime for completion shal1 be granted due to the additional
Tip Contact Checking Test works.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.4 -16-of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Cast-in-place Bored PiHes - Section 8.4
Where the Tip Contact Checking Test shows , in the opinion of the Engineer, unsatisfactory
contact condition, the Contracto1' shall prepare a report proposing a repai1' work for the defects
and submit to the Engineer for his approval. The Contractor sha11 , at his own cost, repair or
replace the defective pile as instructed by the Engineer. No .additional payment and extension
oftime for completion shall be g1'anted due to do these works.
4.4.14. Toe Grouting
When the pile tip soil is loosened as determined by the Engineer indicating that the bearing
capacity is not adequately developed , such pile tip soil will be grouted with cement milk as
instructed by the Engineer. Grouting method shall be proposed by the Contractor for the
approval of the Engineer before st없ting grouting.
4.5 DRILLED SHAFT LOAD TESTS AND PILE DYNAMIC ANALYSIS
The contractor shall submit his proposal for conducting P i1 e Dynamic Analysis and Load Tes t.
.~‘ ‘
Y
~ ν
4.5.1. Load Test
Load test by static load method using kentledge , tension pile or grollnd
aιcordance
an야10r
with TCXDVN 269-02 , or using Osterberg cell or equivalent method , with

system in
. r.
minimum vertical Joad equivalent to 1.5 times of design working load (design working load is
the load which the pile is designed to carry)
Unless otherwise directed by the En밍neer the test load shall be applied in the fo11owing
sequence:
a) Apply an initialload of 5% required pile - working load.
b) Remove the initialload and set recording instruments to zero.
c) Increase load to the required pile-working Joad, as shown on the Drawings, by four
equal increments.
d) Deflection shall be read just after each load increment or decrement is applied and at
15 minutes inte 1'vals thereafte1'. The next increment 01' dec1'ement shall not be applied until the
rate of settlement has decreased to 0.05 cmlhour and the load has been sustained for at least
one hou1'.
e) The pile-working load shall be maintained for at least 12 hours.
f) Reduce load to zero by similar equal dec1'ements.
g) Increase load to 1.5 times the required pile-working load by six equal increments and
maintain at this load for at least 24 hours.
h) Reduce load to ze1'o by similar equal decrements.
i) When directed by the Engineer, a third test cycle shall be carried out as follows:
Increase load to 2.0 times the required pi1 e working loads by eight equaJ increments and
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DlVISION 8 8.4 -17 - of214

maintain at this load for 12 hours or as directed by the Engineer.
j) For acceptance , the total pile top displacement under 1.5 times pile working load and
after its subsequent removal shall not exceed the following values:
Loaded; 1.50% ofthe pile diameter;
UnJoadεd; 0.75% ofthe pile diameter
k) Instrumentation shall be installed as directed by the Engineer and readings taken at

each increment, all in accordance with the manufacturer ’ s recommended procedures.
4.5.2. Pile Dynamic Test
a) Description
The work shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment, and labour necessary for
conducting high-strain dynamic tests on cast-in-place piles. Pile shall be selected for testing as
approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall appoint an Independent Specialist to conduct
all testing and shall supply materials , equipment and labour as specified, for work prior to ,
during , and after the tests all to the approval of the Engineer. Testing procedures shall conform
to ASTM D4945-89 unless noted otherwise. The shaft used for the test wil1 be instrumented
and tested by the Indεpendent Specialist, as approved by the Engineer, meeting requirements
outlined in the ASTM D4945-89 specification as weJJ as those outlined below.
b) Equipment and Material requirements
The Contractor shall supply aJl labour, materials and equipment required to prepare and
dynamically load the test p i1 e, and return the pi1 e to a condition suitable for use in the finished
structure. The Contractor ’ s equipment and methods shall inc1ude but not be limited to:
• The extension ofthe pile top if a permanent casing has not been used to construct the pile.
The extension shalJ be fOl'mεd of a thin walJ ed casing or equivalent and shall be at least equal
to two and a haJf (2 \12) piJe diameters such that the extended piJe head can be readily accessed
by the testing engineer at the time of the test. If the pile top is below grade , the Contractor
shaJJ remove the surrounding soil to expose the pile top in a safe working environment.
• A f1 at , JeveJ , and sound concrete top to the pile perpendicuJar to the vertical axis of the
piJe. The top of the concrete should be leveJ with 0 1' above the casing. Prior to the test, four
“ windows" approximateJy 150mm. by J50mm. shall be provided in each quadrant of the
cas ll1 g.
• A drop weight in the l'ange of one and haJfto two percent (1 .5% to 2%) ofthe anticipated

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Cast-in-place ßOI'ed Piles - Section 8.4
• A guide allowing variable drop heights typically between 2 to 3m to be approved by the

Engineer.
• A shaft top cushion consisting of new sheets of plywood with total thickness between
50mm. and 150mm. to be approved by the Engineer.
• A steel striker plate at least 50mm. thick and an area between 70% and 90% ofthe area of
the p i1e top, but not less than the area of the impacting surface of the drop weight , shall be
placed 011 top ofthe plywood cushiol1.
• Where reinforcement protrudes above the top ofthe pile the Contractor l11 ay:
Incorporate the reinforcement into the test area in the l11 anner of a pile extension. Upon
successful completion of the dynamic test the extension can be removed to make the pile
suitable for use in the structure.
Ensure at least 20% of the pile cross sectional area is available for sufficient length such
that the ram impact will not interfere with the reinforcing bars. ln such case steel striker
plates and plywood cushions must be sized so that theycover as much as the impact area
as possible.
• AC Power.
• Surveyor ’s level, laser light or equivalent for measurement of pile set under each impact.
c) Specialist
Testing is to be performed by an experienced engineer or technician from a firm with a

minimum of four (4) year experience in dynamic load testing. The actual test shall be
conducted and/or supervised by a practicing Geotechnical Engineer with at least five (5) years
of dynamic testing experience. The firm selected by the Contractor l11 ust be approved by the
Engineer.
The Specialist must supply the following testing instrumentation in addition to

instrumentation outlined in ASTM specification D4945-89 Section 5:
Pile Driving Analyzer (PDA)
Calibrated Strain Transducers
Calibrated Accelerometer

d. Rep 0l1ing Results
The Specialist shall p1'ompt1 y submit a 1'eport ofthe testing 1'esults to the Enginee1' fo 1' app1'oval.
The field 1'esults f1'om at least one (CAPWAP) analysis (Case Pile Wave Analysis P1'ogram)
shall be submitted. The CAPWAP analysis shall be pe1'fi이med by an expe1'ienced and qualified
Enginee1'. The 1'eport shall also provide the following:
Wave Equation analysis results obtained p1'ior to testing
CAPWAP analysis resul t.
Fo1' each impact the maximum measured force , maximum calculated tension force ,
transferred energy to the gauge location, corresponding stresses, and the Case Method
bea1'ing capacity.
Assessment ofthe test result with respect to both pile capacity and intεg1'ity.
4.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
4.6. 1. Measurement
4.6. 1.1 Drilled Shaft
Drilled shafts , complete in place , shall be measured by the linear meter fo 1' each size of shaft
listed in the Contract Documents. Measurement w i1I be along the cente1'line of the shaft based
on the tip elevation to the bottom level ofpile cap. The tip elevation shall be detennined based
on the measu1'ement of excavated elevation after the Enginee1' made a decision on pile
excavation tennination. No additional measurement shall be made fo 1' the length of pile above
the bottom level of pile cap and it ’ s cost shall be included in the body of drilled shafts.
4.6. 1.2 Load Tests
Load tests shall be measured by the number of load tests perfo 1'med fo 1' each designated pile
load capacity.
4.6. 1.3 Ti p Contact Checldng Test
Tip contact checking test shall be measured by the numbe 1' of piles on which the test is
conducted as specified in Bill of Quantity. T，εst piles as requested by the Engineer as a 1'esult of
unsatisfied quality ofpile tip condition a1'e not included in this measurement.
4.6. 1. 4 Pile Dynamic Analysis (PDA)
Pile dynamic analysis shal1 be measu1'ed by the numbe 1' ofpiles on which the test is conducted.
4.6. 1. 5 Toe Grouting
Toe G1'outing shall be measured by the numbe 1' of piles on whích the test is conducted.

4.6.2. Payment
4.6.2.1 Drilled Shaft
Drilled shafts shall be paid for at the contract price per linear meter for drilled shaft of the
diameter speci잠 ed. Such payment shalJ be considered to be fu lJ compensation for aI1 costs
involved with shaft excavation, disposal of excavated material , and the furnishing anà placing
of concrete and reinforcing steel , sonic pulse testing, coring test , including alllabor, materials ,
equipment, temporary casing, and all other costs relevant to construction of cast-in-place piles
and, if required , the remedial expense except works having pay item in this section. No
additional payment or extension of schedule shall be considered for different geological
conditions encountered such as rock sockets.
Permanent Casing and Temporary Casing sha lJ be included in Bored Piles and shall not be
paid separately.
The items of work payable under this provision along with their units shall be as follows:
‘----------- --
Pay Item No. Description u뼈 it of Measurement
1.5m CìP Pile on lanà for Abutment of

8.04~Ol m
Approach bridge
-
1.5m CIP Pile on land for Pier of
8.04-02 111
Approach bridge
1.5m CIP Pile on river for Pier of

8.04-03 m
Approach bridge
1.5m CIP Pile on river for Anchorage pier

8.04-04 m
of main bridge
8.04-05 2.5m CIP Pi1 e on river of main bridge m

_.l.-_
4.6.2.2 Static Load Tests
The load test shall be paid for at the contract unit price per number of pi1 es on which the test is
conducted. Such payment shall be full compensation for all costs for preparation and
installation of testing devices , testing, analyses and rep01ting including all labor, materials ,
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the static load test. The items of work
payable under this provision along with their units shall be as follows:
8.04-06 Static Load Test on 1.5m CIP pile Nos.
Static Load Test on 1.5m CIP pile

8.04-07 Nos.
(Osterberg Testing)
--- -_._---
DIVISION 8 - STRlJCTURAL WORKS Cast-in-place Bored Piles - Section 8.4
탑:L;:;늪 Static Load Test on 2 .5 m CIP pile

(Osterberg Testing)
Nos.
4.6.2.3 Tip Contact Checldng Test
The tip contact checking test (Dri1l for checking and treatment of bottom bored pile) shall be
paid for at tbe contract unit price per number of piles on which the test is conducted. Such
payment shall be full compensation for all costs for preparation and installation of testing
devices , testing, analyses and reporting including all labor, materials , equipment and
incidentals necessary to complete the tip contact checking tes t.
The items of work payable under this provision along with thεir units shall be as follows:
Unit of
Pay Item No. Description
Measurement
8.04-09 Drill for checking and treatment of bottom bored pile Nos.
4.6.2.4 Pile Dynamic Analysis (PDA)
Pile dynamic test shall be paid for at the contract unit price per number of piles on which the
test is conducted. Such payment shall be full compensation for all costs for preparation and
installation of testing devices , testing, analyses and repOJting including aII labor, materials ,
equipment and incidentals necessary to complete and the PDA. The items of work payable
under this provision along with their units shall be as follows:
---
Unit of
Measurement
8.04-10 Pile Dynamic Analysis on 1.5m Dia. CIP Pile Nos.
8.04-11 Pile Dynamic Analysis on 2.5m Dia. CIP Pile Nos.

'-------
4.6.2.5 Toe Grouting
Toe Grouting shall be paid for at the contract unit price per number of piles on which Toe
Grouting is conducted. Such payment shall be full compensation for a lI costs for cement milk
and grouting including all labor, materials , equipment and incidentals necessary to complete
the Toe Grouting.
The items ofwork payable under this provision along with their units shalI be as follows:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.4 - 22 - 0[214

、
‘
DlVISION 8 - STRUCTVRAL WORKS Cast-in-place Bored Piles - Sectio ll1 8.4
Unit of
Measurement
8.04-12 Toe Grouting on 2.5m Dia. CIP Pile Nos.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 씨'ORKS Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
SECTION 8.5 - CONCRETE STRUCTURES
5.1 GENERAL
5.1.1 Description
This work shall consist of furnishing, placing, finishing, and curing concrete in bridges in
accordance with these specifications and conforming to the lines , grades , and dimensions
specified in the Contract Documents. The work may include elements of structures
constructed by cast-in-place and precast methods using either plain (un-reinforced) , reinforced ,
or prestressed concrete or any combination thereof.
5. 1.2 Reference Standards
It is needed to apply latest versions of following specifications for implemented work in this
Technical Specification.
22 TCN 247-98 Construction technology and Acceptance Procedures for Prestressed

Reinforced Concrete Girder
TCVN 4452-87 Precast Concrete and Reinforced Conc1'ete Structures - Construction
and Acceptance Code
TCVN 5724-93 Conc 1'ete and Reinforced Concrete Structures - Minimum technical
conditions for constructíon and acceptance
TCXDVN 390-2007 Precast Concrete and Reínforced Concrete Structu1'es - Constructíon
and Acceptance Code
TCXDVN 313-2004 Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Structures - Teclmical Guide for
preventing cracks
TCXDVN 318-2004 Concrete and Reinforced Concrεte Structures - Maintenance Work
ManuaJ
TCXDVN 391-2007 Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Structures - Concrete,
Requirements for Natural Curing
TCXDVN 305-04 Mass Concrete - Construction and Acceptance Code
TCVN 7570 : 06 Aggregates fo 1' Concrete and Mortar - Technícal Requirements
TCVN 7572 : 06 Aggregates for Concrete and Mortar - Testing Method
TCVN 2682- 1999 Portland Ciment - Technical Requirements
TCVN 4029 - 4032 và TCVN 6016 - 6이 7 Ciment - Testing Methods
TCVN 4314- 03 Mortar - Technical Requirements
TCVN 3121 -03 Mortar - Testing Methods
TCXDVN 302-2004 Water for Concrete and M Oliar Míxxíng - Technical Requirements
TCVN 3105- 1993 Concrete Mixture - Method , Fabrícation and
TCVN 3106-1993 Heavy Concrete - T，εsting Methods

DIVISION 8 - S’fRUCτURALWO뼈‘s Concrete Structuues - Section 8.5
TCXDVN 391-2007 Heavy Concrete - Requirements for Natural Wet Curing

TCXDVN 325-04 Chemical additives for concrete
TCVN 3994-1985 Corrosion Protection in Construction - Concrete and Reinforced
Concrete Structures - Aggressive environmental classitïcation
TCVN 5438-04 Ciment. Terminology and definitions
TCVN 5439-04 Ciment. Classification
TCXDVN 356-2005 Concrete and Reinforced ConCI앙e Structmes - Design Standard
TCVN 6260-2009 Portland cement mixturεs - Specifications
AASHTO Ml94 Standard Specification For Chemical Admixtures For Concrete
ASTM D6690 Standard Specification For Joint And Crack Sεalants， Hot Applied ,
For Concrete And Asphalt Pavements
AASHTO T23-08 Standard Method Of Test For Making And Curing Concrete Test
Specimens In The Field
AASHTO T26- 79 (2004) Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be used in
Concrete
AASHTO T1 05-08 Standard Method ofTest for Chemical Analysis ofHydraulic Cement
AASIITO Tl 33-98 (2006) Specification for viscosity test of cemenl
ASTM C40 Standard Test Method for Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregates for Concrete
ASTM C295 Standard Guide for Petrographic Examination of Aggregates for
Concrete
ASTM C939-02 Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-Aggregate
Concrete (Flow Cone Method)
ASTM C940-98 (2003) Standard Test Method for Expansion and Bleeding of Freshly
Mixed Grouts for Preplaced-Aggregate Concrete in the Laboratory
AASHTO M148 Standard Specification For Li quid Membrane-Forming Compounds For
Curing Concrete;
AASHTO M235 Standard Specification For Epoxy Resin Adhesives
AASHTO R60 Standard Practice For Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C39 Standard Test Method For Compressive Strength Of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens;
ASTM C78 Standard Test Method For FlexuraI Strength Of Concrete;
ASTM C87 Standard Test Method For Effect Of Organic 1mpurities 1n Fine Aggregate On
Strength OfMortar;
ASTM C88 Standard Test Method For Soundness Of Aggregates By Use Of Sodium
Sulfate Or Magnesium Sulfate
ASTM C91 Standard Specification Ffor Masonry Cement
ASTM C94 Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete;
ASTM C 109 Standard test method for compressive strength of hydraulic cement 11101iars
(using 2-in. or [50-mm] cube specimens)

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
ASTM C 123 Standard Test Method For Li ghtweight Particles ln Aggregate

ASTM C 174 Standard Test Method for Measuring Thickness of Concrete Elements Using
Dr iJI ed Concrete Cores
ASTM C227 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate
Combinations (MOJiar-Bar Method)
ASTM C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systεms for Concrete
ASTM C827 Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of Cylindrical
Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM CI017 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing
Flowing Concrete;
ASTM C 1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates
for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing Agency Evaluation
ACI 315 Details And Detailing Of Concrete Reinforcement
ACI 347 Guide To Formwork For Concrete , ACI - ACI 347 Committee
5.1.3 Related Work
Other work involved in the construction of concrete structures shall be as specified in the
applicable sections of this Specification , especially Section 1.1 6, "Temporary Works" in
Division 1, and Section 8.6 , "Reinforcing Steel" , and Section 8.7 , "Prestressing" in Division 8.
5. 1.4 Construction Methods
Whenever the Contract Documents permit the Contractor to select the method or equipment to
be used for any operation, it shall bε the Contractor's responsibility to employ methods and
equipment which will produce satisfactory work under the conditions encountered and which
wilI not damage any partially completed portions ofthe work.
Falsework and forms shal1 conform to the requirements of Division 1, Section 1.16
"Temporary Works".
Generally, all concrete shall be fully supported until the required strength and age has been
reached. However, the climbing form method may be permiηed for the construction of pier
shafts and railings providing the Contractor’s plan assures that:
’ The results wi l1 be equaJ in a l1 respect to those obtained by the use of fixed forms , and
• Adequate arrangements will be provided for curing, finishing , and protecting the
concrete.
• The climbing form method will be applied to the pylon construction method.
5. 1. 5 Method of Statement
with Sub-Clause 14.1 of Conditions of PaIiicular Application , shal1 submit for the approval of
TECHNICAl‘ SPECIFICATIONS - D1 VISION 8 8.5 - 26 - of214

、
‘
DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Concrete Structures - Sectio i1 8.5
the Engineer the Method Statement detailing with regard to the requirement of this
Specification, and his proposal for the organization of concreting activities at the Site. The
Method Statement shall in c1 ude the fo l1 owing items:
1) Proposed plant.
2) Location and layout of concrete production facility including precast concrete facilities.
3) Size and details of materials storage facilities.
4) Source ofwater supply and origin of aggregates.
5) Proposed method of organization of concrete production facility.
6) Maximum hourly and daily production capacities and an estimate of maximum volume
to be poured monthly.
7) Transport and placing of concrete.
8) Maximum pour size anticipated and specific proposals for large pours including
methods for control oftemperature differences.
9) Handling, placing, finishing and curing procedures.
10) Quality control procedures for concrete and concrete materials
11) Staffing for control ofproduction
5.2 CLASSES OF CONCRETE
5.2.1 General
The class of concrete to be used in each part of the structure shal1 be as specified in the
Contract Documents. If not speci젠 ed， the Engineer shall designate the class of concrete to be
used.
5.2.2 Normal-Weight (-Density) Concrete
Classes of normal-weight (-density) concrete to be used for the Project are listed in Table
5.2.2- 1.
The application of the classes of concretes by structural component in this Contract shall be as
listed in Table 5.2.2-2.
Table 5.2.2-1 Classification of Normal Weight Concrete
Class of Concrete C50 C40 C35 C30A C30B C25 C20 CI0 S
Specified Strenl암h
50 40 35 30 30 25 20 10 -
(MPa)*1

Minimum of
Cement Content 350 300 300 300 350 280 - - -
(k g/m3)
Maximum W/C
40 50 50 50 50 55 - - -
(%)
MaximumAir
3 J껴 3 3 3 J
꺼
- -
Content (%)
Maximum Size of 20 or 40 20 or 40 20 or 40 20 or 40 20 or 40
20 20 40 -
Aggregate (mm) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3)
By bucket: 7.5土2.5 By bucke t: 7.5土2.5

17.5.0土2.5
SJump (c l11)*2 By pumping: 15.0土2.5 By pumping: 15.0土2.5
(tre l11 ie assumed)
By tremie: 17.5土2.5 By tremie: 17.5土2 .5
Note: * 1. Mini l11um 28-day compressive strength by cylinder test

*2. Slump vaJue may be altered upon approval by the Engineer.
*3. 20mm wi1l be used in genet떠. Subject to the Engineer ’s approval , 40mm may be used when;
(1 ) The minimum sectional dimension of the structure 즈 1,000mm , and
(2) The cover and the minimum clearance ofrebars 즈 55mm
Table 5.2.2-2 Class of Concrete and Application
Concrete Class Structure element
- Super - T girdeζ
C50
- Deck slab and Pylon of Cable Stayed Bridge
- Anchor pier of Cable Stayed Bridge

C40 - Headstock ofpier of Approach Bridge
- Bored pi1e of Cable Stayed Bridge
-_.-
C35 CIP deck slab including link slab ,Cross beam , for Super-T girder
C30A Precast concrete plank for Super-T girder, Abutment; Piers , Pile Cap
C30B Bored Piles of Approach Bridge
C25 Parape
앉t ， Ban끼
I
C20 Sealing concrete
CI0 Blinding conct‘ ete
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.5 - 28 - of214

s I Counter w뺑t concrete

(1) 28-day compressive stren암h based on AASHTO T22 and T23
5.3 MATERIALS
5.3.1 Cements
Unless otherwise stated, the P01iland cements to be used conforming to TCVN 2682-1999 and
Compound Portland cements conforming to TCVN 6260-2009.
5.3.2 Water
Water used in mixing and curing of concrete shall be su이 ect to approval and shall be
reasonably clean and free of oi!, salt, acid , alka!i, sugar, vegetable, or other injurious
substances. Water shall be tested in accordance with, and shall meet the suggested
requirements of TCXDVN 302-2004. Water known to be of potable quality may be used
without test. Where the source ofwater is 1'elatively shallow, the intake shall be so en c1 0sed as
to exclude silt, mud , grass , or othe1' fo 1'eign materials.
~.3.3 Flne Aggregafe
Fine aggregate fo 1' concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M6.
The fine aggregate for concrete shall consist of natural sand or, su비 ect to approval of the
Engineer, other ìnert materials with similar characteristics , having c1 ean , hard and durable
particles, and it shall be free f1'om objectionable quantities of dust, silt, c1 ay, organic matteζ
and othe1' impu1'ìties.
The fine agg1'egate shall be uniformly graded and shall meet the grading 1'equirements shown
in Table 5.3 .3 -1:
Table 5.3.3 -1 G1'ading of Fine Aggregate
Sieve Size Pe1'cent Passing
9.5mm 100
- ’ -... _ _.-
.-… i
4.75mm 95-100
2 .3 6mm 80-100
1.18mm 50-85
600μm 25-60
300μm 10-30
150μm 2-10
(Source: AASHTO M6)

5.3.4 Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate for concrete shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M80.
The coarse aggregate shall consist of approved crushed stone and/or gravel or, subject to
approval of the Engineer, other inert materials with similar characteristics, having clean , hard
and durable pieces , and it shall be free from objectionable quantities of flat or elongated
particles, or organic matter and other deleterious matter.
The strength of coarse aggregate shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M80-87
(2003) , Specifications for Aggregates for Concrete and Mortar, unless otherwise approved by
the Engineer. The testing method shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M80-87
(2003) , Testing Method for Aggregates for Concrete and Mortar, Part 10 Determination of
Strength and Softening Coefficient ofthe Original Stone.
The coarse aggregate shalJ be uniformly graded and shalJ meet the grading requirements
shown in Table 5 .3.3 -2:
Tablε 5.3 .3 -2 Grading ofCoarse Aggregate
Max. Size of Aggregate and

Sieve Size Percent Passing
1---페mm 20mm
50mm 100 -
37.5mm 95-100 -
25mm 100
19mm 35-70 90-100
12.5mm - -
9.5mm 10-30 20-55
----
4.75mm 0-5 0-10
뉴_w __.._
2 .3 6mm - 0-5
(Source: ASTM C33)
5.3.5 Chemical Admixtures
Chemical admixtures shall conform to the requirements ofTCXDVN 325-04 or AASHTO M

194. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, only Type A, Type B, Type D,
Type F, or Type G shalJ be used.
Type A: Water-reducing
Typε B: Retar‘ ding
Type D: Water-reducing and retarding
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - D1 VISION 8 8.5 - 30 - of214

DIVISION 8 - SτRUCn.때ALWORKS Concrete Structures - Sectiolll 8.5
Type F: Water-reducing and high-range
Type G: Watel'-I'educing, high-I'ange and I'etarding
Admixtures containing chloride ion (CL) in excess of one percent by weight (mass) of the
admixture shall not be used in reinforced concrete. Admixtures in excess of 0.1 percent sha lJ
not be used in prestressed concrete.
A Certificate of Compliance signed by the Manufacturer of the admixture shall be furnished to

the Engineer for each shipment of admixture used in the wO l'k. Said Celiificate shall be based
upon laboratory test results from an approved testing facility and shall certify that the
admixture meets the above specifications.
If more than onε admixture is used , documentation demonstrating the compatib i1ity of each
admixture with all other proposed admixtures , and the sequence of application to obtain the
desired eff농cts ， shall be submitted by the Contractor.
Air-entraining and chemical admixtures shall be incorporated into the concrete mix in a water
soIution. The water so in c1 uded shall be considered to be a portion of the aI1 0wed mixing
water.
5.3.6 Steel
Materials and instal1 ation of reinfo l'cing and prestressing steeI shall conform to the
requirements of Sections 8.6 "Reinforcing Steel ," and 8.7 "Prestl'essing" in Division 8,
respectively.
5.4 PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE
5.4.1 Mix Design
5.4.1.1 Responsibility and Criteria
The Contractor shall design and be responsible for the performance of all concrete mixes used
in structures. Thε mix proportions selected shal1 produce concrete that is sufficientJ y workable
and finishable for al1 uses intended and shall conform to the requirements in Table 5.2 .2 -1 and
a l1 other requirements ofthis Section.
The mix design shal1 be based on the specified properties. When strength is specified, select
an average concrete strength sufficient1 y above the specified strength so that , considering the
expected variab i1 ity of the concrete and test procedures, no more than one in ten strength tests
will be expected to fall below the specified strength. Mix designs shall be l110dified during 1he
course of the work when necessary to ensure compliance with the specified fresh and
hardened concrete properties.
5.4.1.2 Trial Batch Tests
Satisfactory performance of the proposed mix design shall be verified by laboratory tests 011
τECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.5-31-of214

trial batches. The results of such tests shall be furnished to the Engineer by the Contractor or
the Manufacturer of precast elements at the time the proposed mix design is submitted.
If materials and a mix design identical to those proposed for use have been used on other work
within the previous year, certified copies of concrete test results from this work that indicate
full compliance with these specifications may be substituted for such laboratory tests.
The average values obtained from trial batches for the specified properties , such as stren암h ，
shall exceed design values by a certain amount based on variability. For compressive strength ,
the required average stren양h used as a basis for selection of concrete proportions shall be
determined by a strength test as follows:
One strength test consists ofthree standard-size cylinders.

The average of any three consecutive stren양h tests at 28-day age shall be equal to , or
g ‘ eater than , the specified strength shown in Table 5.2.2- 1.
Any of compressive strengths at 28-day age shall not be less than 85% ofthe specified
strength shown in Table 5.2.2- 1.
5.4.1. 3 Approval
AlI mix designs and any modifications thereto shall be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
Mix design data provided to the Engineer for each class of concrete required shall include the
name , source , type, and brand of each of the materials proposed for use and the quantity to be
used per cubic meter of concrete.
5.4.2 Water Content
For calculating the water/cεment ratio of the mix, the weight (mass) of the water shall be that
。fthe total free water in the mix which includes the mixing water, the water in any admixture
solutions , and any water in the aggregates in excess of that needed to reach a saturated-
surface-dry condition.
The amount of water used shall not exceed the limits listed in Table 5.2.2-1 and shall be
fUliher reduced as necessary to produce concrete of the consistencies listed in Table 5.4 .2-1 at
the time of placement:
Table 5.4.2-1 Normal-Weight Concrete Slump Test Limits
Type ofWork Nominal Slump, cm Maximum Shunp, cm
Formed Elements:
Sections over 300 mm Thick 2.5 -7.5 12.5
Sections 300 mm Thick 0 1" Less 2.5 - 10.0 12.5
- Cast-in-Place Piles and Drilled Shafts 12.5-20.0 22.5
Not Vibrated
Concrete Placed under Water 12.5-20.0 22.5

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Concrete 앉『뻐 ct뼈 res - Section 8.5
IFilli명 for 힘prap 7.5 -17.5 20.0
When Type F or G high-range water-reducing admixtures are used, Table 5 .4.2-1 slump limits
may be exceeded as permitted by the Engineer.
When the consistency of the concrete is found to exceed the nominal slump, the mixture of
subsequent batches sha11 be a예 usted to reduce the slump to a value within the nominal ra
때ng
양e.
Batches of concret않e with a slump exceeding the max

처imum specified sha11 not be used in the
wo
이아rk.
If concrete of adequate workability cannot be obtained by the use of the minimum cement
content a11owed , the cement and water content sha11 be increased without exceeding the
specified water/cement ratio , or an approved admixture shal1 be used.
5.4.3 Cement Content
The rninirnum cement content sha11 be as listed in Table 5.2.2-1 01' otherwise specified in the
Contract Docurnents. For the other classes of concrete , maxirnum cement or cement plus with
rnineral admixture content shall be 110t exceed 475 kglm3 of concr하e. The actual cement
content used sha11 be within these limits and sha11 be sufficient to produce COl1 crete of the
required strength, consistency, and performance.
5.4.4 Air-Entraining and Chemical Admixfures
Air-entraining and chemical admixtures shall be used as specified in the Contract Documents.
Otherwise, such admixtures may be used, at the option and expense of the Contractor when
permitted by the Engineeζ to increase the workability 01' alter the time of set of the concrete.
5.4.5 Test Frequency
Materi a1 s to compose of concrete shall be ensured its quality by the tests specified herein.
Concrete materials shall be tested in accordance with , but oot limited to , Table 5.4 .5-1 and as
Table 5.4.5-1 Material Tests and Frequency
Initial 01' at supplier During

Material ltems Testing Standard
change construction
Specific gravity All items sha Il be tested Every 500t AASHTOT133

누-‘ and the results are
Finelless AASHTO T98/Tl 53
Cemellt submitted to the
Strenl안h Engilleer for his Every 500t AASHT0 T1 06
Chernical approval, at the - AASHT0 T1 05
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - DIVISION 8 8.5 - 33 - of214

DlV ISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
composltlO n submission ofthe mix

design and .at supplier
AASHTO T26
Water Chloride changed. Quarterly
/ASTMD512
Sieve test Every 350m3 AASHTOT27

Fine
Specific gravity Every 350m3 AASTOT84
aggregate
Water absorption Every 350m3 AASTOT84
Sieve test Every 200m3 AASHTOT27
Specific gravity Every200m3 AASHTOT85

Coarse
Unitweight Every 200m3 AASHTO Tl 9
aggregate 뉴----_ .•
Water absorption Every 200m3 AASHTOT85
Abrasion - AASHTOT96
Manufacturer’s
Admix1ure Qua !ity test As appropriate
instructíon
5.5 MANUFACTURE OF CONCRETE
The production of ready-mixed concrete and concrete produced by stationary mixers shall
conform to the requirements of AASHTO C94 and the requirements of this Article.
5.5. 1. Storage of Aggregates
The handling and storage of concrete aggregates shall be such as to prevent segregation 0 1'
contamination with foreign materials. The methods used shall provide for adequate drainage
so that the moisture content of the aggregates is uniform at the time of batching. Different
sizes of aggregate shaJl be stored in separate stock piles sufficiently removed from each other
to prevent the material at the edges ofthe piles from becoming intermixed.
When specified in table 5.2.2-1 or in the Contract Documents , the coarse aggregate shall be
separated into two or more sizes in order to sεcure greatεr unifonnity ofthe concrete mixture.
5.5.2. Storage of Cement
The Contractor shall provide suitable means for storing and protecting cement against
dampness. Cement which for any reason has become pm1ially set 0 1' which contains Jumps of
caked cement shall be rejected. Cement held in storage for a period of over three months if
bagged 0 1' six months if bulk, 0 1' cement which for any reason the Engineer may suspect is
damaged , shall be subject to a retest before being used in the work.
‘ ι추표s"üÍCell1eîítreêõros패때꺼E혐f퍼sne캅 fδll1FEn흥íñ효~er 체owìng;=펀suCfγaêfáî1S효rllié

Engineer may reasonably require , the quantity used during the day or run at each part of the

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS ε‘oncrete Structlllres - Sectio l1 8.5
work.
5.5.3. Measurement of Materials
Materials sha11 be measured by weighing, except as otherwise specified in the Contract

Documents or where provided for weighing the aggregates and cement sha11 be suitably
designed and constructed for this purpose. Each size of aggregate and the cement shall be
weighed separately. The accuracy of a11 weigh devices sha11 be such that successive quantities
can be measured to within one percent of the desired amount. Cement in standard packages
need not be weighed but bulk cement sha11 be weighed. The mixing water shall be measured
by volume or by weigh (mass). The accuracy ofmeasuring the water shall be within a range of
error of not over one percent. All measuring devices sha11 be su피 ect to approval and sha11 be
tested , at the Contractor ’s expense , when deemed necessary by the Engineer.
When volumetric measurements are authorized for pr이 ects ， the weigh (mass) proportions
sha lJ be converted to equivalent volumetric prop Oltions. 1n such cases , suitable a110wance
shall be made for variations in the moisture condition of the aggregates , including the bulldng
effect in the fine aggregate.
When sacked. cement is used, the quantities of aggregates for each batch shali be exactly
sufficient for one 01' more full sacks of cement and no batch requiring fractional sacks of
cement will be peηnitted.
5.5.4. Batching and Mixing Concrete.
5.5.4.1. Batching
The size of the batch sha11 not exceed the capacity of the mixer as guaranteed by the
manufacturer.
The measured materials sha11 be batched and charged into the mixer by means that w i1l
prevent loss of any materials due to effects of wind or other causes.
5.5.4.2. Mixing
The concrete sha11 be mixed only in the quantity required for immediate use. Mixing shall be
sufficient to thoroughly intermingle all mix ingredients into a uniform mixture. Concrete that
has developed an initial set shall not be used. Re-tempe1'ing concrete sha11 not be permitted.
Fo1' other than transit-mixed concrete , the first batch of concrete mate1'ials placed in the mixer
sha11 contain a sufficient excess of cement, sand , and water to coat the inside of the drum
without reducing the required mortar content ofthe mix.
The required mixi l1 g time fo 1' stationary mixers sl1a11 be 110t less tl1al1 90s nor more than 5 min.
The minimum drum revolutiol1s fo 1' transit mixers at the mixingspeed recommended by the
manufacturer shall 110t be less than 70 and not Iess thal1 that recommended by the

man ufacturer.
The timing device on stationary mixers shal1 be equipped with a bel1 or another suitable
warning device adjusted to give a clearly audible signal each time the lock is released. In case
offailure ofthe timing device, the Contractor shal1 be permitted to ope1'ate the mixer whiIe the
timing device is being repaired , provided he furnishes an app1'oved timepiece equipped with
minute and second hands. If the timing device is not placed in good wo1'king order within 24 h,
furthe 1' use of the mixe1' shaIl be p1'ohibited untiI repairs are made.
For small quantities of concrete needed in emergencies 0 1' for smaII non-c1'itical elements of
thε work, concrete may be hand-mixed using methods approved by the Engineer.
Between uses , any mortar‘ coating inside of mixing equipment which sets 0 1' dries shaIl bε
cleaned from the mixe1' before use is 1'esumed.
5.5.5. Delivery
The organization supplying concrete shaIl have sufficient plant capacity and t1'ansporting
apparatus to ensu1'e continuous delivery at the rate required. The rate of delivery of concrete
during concreting operations shall be such as to provide for the p1'oper handIing, placing, and
finishing of the concrete. The 1'ate shall be such that the interval between batchés shalI not
exceed 20 min and shal1 be sufficient to prevent joints within a monolithic pour caused by
placing fresh concrete against conc1'ete in which initial set has occurred. The methods of
delive1'ing and handling the concrete shal1 be such as wiII faciIitate placing with the minimum
of 1'e-handling and without damage to the structure or the concrete.
5.5.6. Sampling and Testing
Compliance with the requirements indicated in this Section shalI be determined in accordance
with the following standard methods of AASHTO or ASTM:
• Slump ofPortland Cement Concrete , AASHTO T 119 (ASTM C143C143M)
• Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method , AASHTO T152
(ASTM C231)
• Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory, ASTM C 192/C 192M
• Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. , AASHTO T23 (ASTM
C31/C31M)
• Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens, AASHTO T22 (ASTM C

39/C 39M)
5.5.7.1 Tests

DNISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Conc l'ete Structur‘'es - Sectiolll 8.5
Compressive test shall be carried out using a cylinder specimen. The len힘h shall be twice the
diameter. The cylinder diameter shall be at least 3 times the nominal maximum size of the
coarse aggregate and not less than 100mm.
A strength test for 28-day age shall consist of the average strength of three compressive
strength test cylinders fabricated from material taken from a single randomiy selected batch of
concrete, except that, if any cylinder should show evidence of improper sampling, molding, 01'
testing, said cylinder shall be discarded and the strength test sha11 consist ofthe strength ofthe
remaining cylinder(s).
For ages other than 28 days , a stren암h test shall consist of the average strength of at least two
compressive test cylinders fabricated from material from a single randomly selected batch.
5.5.7.2 For Controlling Consíruction Operations
For determinÎng adequacy of cure and protection, and for detεrmining when loads 01' stresses
can be appliεd to concrete structures, test cylinders shaIl be cured at the structure site under
conditions that are not more favorable than the most unfavorable conditions for the pOliions of
the structure which they represent as described În AASHTO T23 (ASTM C31/C31M), Artic!e
9.4. Sufficient test cylinders shail be made and tested at the appropriate ages to determine
when operations such as release of falsework, application of prestressing forces , 01' placing the
structure in service can occur.
5.5.7.3 For Acceptance ofConcrete
For determining compliance of concrete with a specified stren땅h， test cylinders shall be cured
under controlled conditions as described in Article 9.3 of AASHTO T 23 (ASTM C 311C
31 M) and tested at the specified age. Samples for acceptance tests for each class of concrete
shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once for a volume shown in It em 5.140f
concrete, 01' once for each major placement.
The probability for compressive stren힐h at 28-day age to be lower than the specified strength
for each class shown in Table 5.2.2.-1 shall be lower than 5%.
Any of compressive stren암hs at 28-day age shall not be less than 85% of the specified
strength. The average working strength of any 3 consecutive results at 28-day age shall not be
less than the specified strength shown in Table 5.2.2-1 for the respective class of concrete. ln
the event of failure complying with this requirement , all of the concrete in all batches
representing by such specimens , including any batches within the sequence , which were not
sampled, shall be deemed not to comply with strength I'equirements ofthis clause.
Any concrete represented by a test that does not conform to the requirements shall be l'멍 ected
and shall be removed and replaced with acceptable concrete. Such rejection sha1l prevail
unless either:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATlONS - DIVISION 8 8.5 - 37 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORI싫 Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
• The Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense , obtains and submits evidence of a type
acceptable to the Engineer that the stren윌h and quality of the rejected concrete is
acceptable. lf such evidence consists of co1'es taken from the work, the cores shall be
obtained and tεsted in accordance with the standa1'd methods of AASHTO T 24 (ASTM
C 42/C 42M) , 01'
• The Enginεe1' determines that said conc1'ete is locatεd where it will not create an
intolerable detrimental effect on the structure and the Contracto1' agrees to a reduced
payment to compensate the Employer for 10ss of durab i1ity and othe1' 10st benefits.
5.5.7.4 For Control ofMix Design
Whenever the average of th1'ee consecutive tests , which were made to determine acceptability
of concrete , falls to less than 1.0 MPa above the specified stren땅h， 01' any single test falls
more than 1.5 MPa below the specifiεd strength, the Contractor shall, at the Contractor'’s
expense , make cOJTective changes in the materials , mix proportions , or concrete
manufacturing procedures before placing additional concrete of that class. Such changes shal1
be approved by the Engineer prior to use.
5.6 PROTECTION OF CONCRETE FROM ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
5.6.1 General
Precautions shall be taken as needed to protect concrete from damage due to weather 01' other
environmental conditions du 1'ing placing and curing operations. Concrete that has been frozen
or otherwise damaged by weather conditions shall be either repaired to an acceptable
condition 01' removed and replaced.
The temperatu1'e ofthe concrete mixtu1'e immediately befo1'e placement shall be between lO oC
and 32 0 C, except as otherwise p1'ovided herein.
5.6.2 Rain Protection
Under conditions of rain , the placing of concrete shall not commence or shall be stopped
unless adequate p1'otection is p1'ovided to p1'event damage to the surface mortar or damaging
f1 0w 01' wash ofthe concrete surface.
5.6.3 Hot-Weather Protection
When the ambient temperature is above 32 0 C, the forms , reinforcing stee1 , steel beam f1 anges ,
and other surfaces which will come in contact with the mix shall be cooled to below 32 0 C by
means of a water sp 1'ay or other approved methods.
temperatu1'e range , at least below 320 C, by any combination ofthe fo lJ owing:

DIVISION 8 - SτRUCTURAL 찌10RKS Concrete Structu l'es - Section 8.5
• Shading the rnaterials storage areas or the production equipment.
• Cooling the aggregates by sprinkling with water which conforms to the requirements of
Article 5.3.2 "Water".
• Cooling the aggregates or water by refrigeration or replacing a portion or all of the mix
water with ice that is flaked 0 1" crushed to the extent that the ice w i1l completely melt
during mixing ofthe concrete.
.. Injecting liquid nitrogen
5.6.4 Special Requirements for Bridge Decks
During periods of low hurnidity, wind, or high temperatures and priol" to the application of
curing materials , concrete being placed and finished for bridge decks shall be protected from
damage due to rapid evaporation. Such protection shall be adequate to prevent premature
crusting ofthe surface or an increase in drying cracking. Such protection shall be provided by
raising the humidity of the surrounding air with fog sprayers operated upwind of the deck, by
employing wind-breaks or sun-shades , additionalI y reducing the temperature of the concrete,
schedulin상 placemenl ùuring lhe cooler times of days or nights , 0 1' any combhlatlon thercof.
5.7 HANDLINGAND PLACING CONεRETE
5.7. 1. General
Concrete shall be handled , placed , and consolidated by methods that wiII not cause
segregation of the mix and wi1l result in a dense homogeneous concrete that is free of voids
and rock pockets. The methods used shall not cause displacement of reinforcing steel 0 1" other
materials to be embedded in the concrete. Concrete shall be placed and consolidated prior to
initial set and in no case more than 1.5 h after the cement was added to the mix. Concrete shall
not be re-tempered.
Concrete shall not be piaced untii t Ï1e forms , aîi materials to be embedded , and , for spread
footings , the adequacy of the foundation material , have been inspected and approved by the
Engineer. All mortar from previous placements , debris , and foreign material shall be removed
from the forms and steel prior to commencing placement. The forms and subgrade shall be
thoroughly moistened with water immediately before concrete is placed against them.
Temporary form spreader devices may be left in place until concrete placement precludes their
need , after which they shall be removed.
Placement of concrete for each section of the structure shall be done continuously without
interruption between planned construction 0 1' expansion joints. The delivery rate , placing
sequence, and methods shall be such that fresh concrete is always placed and consolidated
against previously placed concrete before initial set has occurred in the previously placed

DIVISION 8 _. STRUCTURAL WORKS Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
concrεte.
During and after placement of concrete, care shaIl be taken not to injure the concrete or break
thε bond with reinforcing stee I. Workers shaIl not walk in fresh concrete. Platforms for
workers and equipment shaIl not be supported directly on any reinforcing steel. Once the
concrete is set , forces shaIl not be applied to the forms or to reinforcing bars which project
from the concrete until the concrete is of sufficient stren망h to resist damage.
5.7.2. Sequence of Placement
Whenever a concrete placement plan or schedule is specified or approved, the sequence of

placement shall conform to the plan. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Contract
Documents , the requirements ofthe following paragraphs shaIl apply.
5.7.2.1 Vertical Members
Concrete for columns , substructure and culvert waIl s, and other similar vetiical members shall
be placed and aIl owed to set and settle for a period of time before concrete for integral
horizontal members , such as caps , slabs , or footings , is placed. Such period shall be adequate
to aIl ow completion of settlement due to loss ofbleed water and shall be not less than 12 h for
vertical members over 4500 mm in height and not less than 30 min for members over 1500
mm , but not over 4500 111m in hei 빙1t. When friction collars or falsework brackets are
mounted on such vetiical members and unless otherwise approved , the vertical member shall
have been in place at least seven days and shall have attained its specified stren힘.h before
loads from horizontal members are applied.
5.7.2.2 Superstructures
Unless otherwise permitted, no concrete shaIl be placed in the superstructure until substructure
forms have been stripped sufficiently to determine the character ofthe supporting substructure
concrete.
Concrete for box girders may be placed in two or three separate operations consisting of
bottom slab , girder stems , and top slab. In either case, the bottom slab shall be placed first and,
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the top slab shaIl not be placed until the girder
stems have been in place for at least five days.
5.7.3. Placing Methods
5.7.3.1 General
Concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible in its final position , and the use of vibrators for
extensive shifting ofthe weight (mass) offresh concrete w il1 not be permitted.
Concrete shall be placed in horizontal layers of a thickness not the capacity of the
vibrator to consolidate the concrete and merge it with the previous lift. ln no case shall the

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL wm앙(S ‘
Cor crete Structu l'es - Section 8.5
depth of a lift exceed 600 mm. The rate of concrete placement shall not exceed that assumed
for the design ofthe forms as corrected for the actual temperature ofthe concrete being placed.
When placing operations would involve dropping the concrete mor‘ e than 1500 mm , the
concrete shall be dropped through a tube fitted with a hopper head 01‘ through other approved
devices, as necessary to prevent segregation of the mix and spattering of mortar on steeÌ and
forms above the elevation ofthe lift being placed. This requirement shall not apply to cast-Ï n-
place piling when concrete placement is completed before initial set occurs in the first placed
concrete.
5.7.3.2 Equipment
A Il equipment used to place concrete shall be of adequate capacity and designed and operated
so as to prevent segregation of the mix 0 1' loss of mortar. Such equipment shall not cause
vibrations that might damage the freshly placed concrete. No equipment shall have aluminum
paηs which come in contact with the concrete. Between uses , the mortar coating inside of
placing equipment which sets or dries out shall be cleaned from the equipment before use is
resumed.
Chutes shall be lined with smooth watertight material and , when steep slopes are involved ,
shall be equipped with baff! es or reverses.
Concrete pumps shall be operated such that a continuous stream of concrete without air
pockets is produced. When pumping is completed, the concrete remaining in the pipeline, if it
is to be used , shall be 태 ected in such a manner that there will be no contamination of the
concrete 0 1' separation ofthe ingredients.
5.7.4. Consolidation
A lI concrete, except concrete placed underwater and concrete otherwise exempt , shall be
consolidated by mechanical vibration immediately after placement.
Except as noted herein , vibration shall be interna l. External fOITn vibrators may be used for
thin sections when the forms have been designed for external vibration.
Vibrators shall be of approved type and design and of a size appropriate for the work. They
shall be capable oftransmitting vibration to the concrete at frequencies of not less than 75 Hz.
The Contractor shall pro띠 de a sufficienÎ l1 umber of vibrators to properly compact each batch
of concrete immediately after it is placed in the forms. The Contractor shall also have at least
one spare vibrator immediately available in case ofbreakdown.
Vibrators shalI be manipulated so as to thoroughly work the concrete around the reinforcement
and embedded fixtures and into the corners and angles ofthe forms. Vibration shall be applied
at the point of deposit and in the area of freshly deposited concrete. The vibrators shall be

DNISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
inse11ed and withdrawn out of the concrete slow1y. The vibration shall be of sufficient
duration and intensity to thorough1y consolidate the conc 1'ete but shall not be continued so as
to cause segregation. Vibration shall not be continued at any one point to the extent that
10calized areas of 핑‘out are formed. Application of vibrators shall be at points uniform1y
spaced and not farther apart than 1.5 times the radius over which the vibration is visib1y
effective.
Vibration shall not be applied either direc t1 y to , or through the reinforcement to, sections or
1ayers of concrete which have hardened to the degree that the concrete ceases to be p1astic
under vibration. Vibrato1's shall not be used to t1'anspOJ1 concrete in the fOJIDS.
Special ca1'e shall be taken for compacting concrete especially around py10n anchor box where
the reinforcing bars are dense1y assemb1ed.
Vibration shal1 be supp1emented by such spading as is necessary to ensure smooth surfaces

and dense conc 1'ete a10ng form surfaces and in corners and 10cations impossib1e to reach with
the vibrators.
When app1'oved by the Enginee1', conc 1'ete fo 1' small non-critical e1ements may be consolidated
by the use of suitab1e rods and spades.
5.7.5. Underwater Placement
5.7.5.1 General
On1y conc1'ete usεd in cofferdams to sea1 out wate1' may be p1aced unde1' water, unless
otherwise specified in the Contract Documents or specifically app 1'oved by the Engineer. If
other than C1ass C 20 concrete is to be placed under water, the minimum cement content ofthe
mix shaIl be increased by tεn percent to compensate for loss due to wash.
To p1'event segregation , conc1'ete placèd under wate1' shall be ca1'efully placed in a compact
mass , in its final position , by means of a tremie , concrete pump , 01' other app1'oved method and
shall not be disturbed after being deposited. St i1l water shal1 be maintained at the point of
deposit and the fo 1'ms under water shaJl be watertight.
Concrete placed under water shal1 be placed continuously from start to finish. The surface of
the concrete shall be kept as nearly ho 1'izontal as practicable. To ensure thorough bonding,
each succeeding layer of sea1 shal1 be p1aced before the preceding 1ayer has taken initia1 set.
For 1arge pours , more than one tremie or pump shal1 be used to ensure compliance with this
requí 1'emen t.
5.7.5.2 Equipment
γ→펴대reìTIíe 응짧ff~혀때화정판효패짧헬i홈빠C-tlli효Ìíå\T테효효Oílli까erer"'ÓÍι IfùOì훨s tl'lãJ173tl한lllI짧풍
fitted with a hopper at the top. The tremies shall be suppOJ1ed so 잃 to permit free movement

DIVISION 8 -STRUCTURAL WO없엽 Concrete Structl.l res - Section 8.5
ofthe discharge end over the entire top surface ofthe work and so as to pennit rapid lowering
when necessary to retard or stop the flow of concrete. The discharge end shall be sealed
closed at the staIt of work so as to prevent water from entering the tube before the tube is
filled with concrete. After placement has statted, the tremie tube shaIl be kept fu Il of concrete
to the bottom ofthe hopper. Ifwater enters the tube after placement is started , the tremie shaIl
be withdrawn , the discharge end resealed , and the placement restarted. When a batch is
dumped into the hopper, the flow of concrete sha Il be induced by slightly raising the discharge
end , always keeping it in the deposited concrete. The flow shall be continuous until the work
is completed. When cofferdam struts prevent lateral movement of tremies , one tremie sha11 be
used in each bay.
Concrete pumps used to place concrete under water sha Il include a device at the end of the
dischat'ge tube to seaI out water whiI e the tube is first being fiI led with concrete. Once the
flow of concrete is stalted, the end of the discharge tube sha Il be kept fuIl of concrete at1d
below the surface ofthe deposited concrete until placement is completed.
5.7.5.3 Clean-Up
Dewatering may proceed after test spedmens cl.lred l.mder simiI ar conditions indicate that the
concrete has sufficient strength to resist the expected loads. All laitance or other
unsatisfactory materials shaIl be removed from the exposed surface by scraping, chipping, 0 1'
other means which wi1l not injure the surface of the concrete before placing foundation
concrete.
5.7.6. Mass Concrete
The Contractor sha11 conform with TCXDVN 305-2004 Mass concrete -Code of practice of
construction and acceptance.
The Contractor shaIl provide the detaHed stress analysis by hardening heat of concrete at the
follo、Ning structures but 섬ot liInited to:
• Connection between the pylon Ieg and crossbeam.
• Pile caps , when required by the Engineer
The stress analysis sha Il be re f1 ected for the concrete placing plan to prevent harmful cracks
from hardening heat.
The Contractor shall submit the methods to limit the rise of temperature of hardening concrete
of the above stated structures , for the approval of the Engineer.
5.7.7. Counter Weight Concrete
Dry unit weight of counter weight concrete to be used for the Main Bridge inside the box
girder end floorbeams shall not be less than 23.5 1ιN/m3 • Prior to the execution of casting

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 씨'ORKS Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
counterweight concre,te, the Contractor shall provide the mix design and test data on dry unit
weight for the approval of the Engineer.
5.7.8. CIP Fill Concrete between Precast Deck Panels
Cast-in-place concrete to be filled at gap between precast deck panels shall be expansive
concrete. The concrete shall have the compressive strength equivalent to or higher than that of
precast deck panels, and the mix shall be such that drying shrinkage can be reduced. The
Contractor shall submit the mix design for the approval ofthe Engineer.
Prior to casting the fil1 concrete, the precast deck panel end surfaces to be filled with C1P
concrete shall be roughened. The gap shall be sprayed by water and foreign materials and
stagnant water shall be removed prior to casting.
5.8 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
5.8.1 General
The Contractor shall submit position and details of construction joints not described in the
plan for the approval of the Engineer. The upper surface of lifts of concrete pylon legs shall be
horizontal unless otherwise described in the plan.
Where sections of the work are carried out in lifts , the reinforcement projecting above the lift
being cast shall be adequately supported in order to prevent movement ofthe reinforcing bars
during casting and setting of the concrete.
All planned reinforcing steel shall extend uninterrupted through joints. 1n the case of
eme 1'gency, construction joints shall be placed as directed by the Engineer and , if dirεcted，
additional reinforcing steel dowels shall be placed across the joint. Such additional steel shall
be furnished and placed at the Contractor's expense.
5.8.2 Construction Joints
Construction joints should be only placed in the locations specified in the drawings , as
specified in this document , except in the case of failure 0 1' delay unforeseen and unavoidable.
1n that case, the supervision consultant wil1 indicate c1early to be or not to be connected the
construction joints in the abutment walls , wing walls and the drain pipe must be spaced no
more than 10 mete 1's unless required in the drawings or approved by the supervision otherwise.
Edges of all joints exposed at the visible surface are carefully finished in the right straight line
and elevation. After removal of the transverse bar, cement mOltar wi l1 be removed from the
su 1'face by pressured wate1' 0 1' by shooting sand to reveal the adhesive. After preparing the
the concrete should be soaked in water until new concrete or concrete
4 hours before pouring new concrete. The shear keys are made inside 0 1' outside the surface
layer of concrete which was previously poured or the steel latch w i1l be used when necessary.

" ‘.
DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS εoncrete Structures - Section 8.5
The shear keys inside the concrete will be made by attaching and then remove the wood
skewers , these wooden bars will be soaked thoroughly il1 water before mounting. Size and
distance between the keys and latches will be decided by the supervision consultant.
Always be careful not to damage the concrete or break the connection between steeI and
concrete. When constructing deck where the vertical joints are de:fi ned, a floor will be built
outside the vertical joints and will be supported 011 a lower formwork , and workers are not
aIIowed to stand 0 1' walk on the extending reinforcing bars untiI the concrete has hardened
sufficiently.
5.8.3 εonsìruction adhesiye joints
Unless otherwise specified, linking construction joints wiII be built according to the foIIowing
process when necessary.
After the concrete has hardened to remove the surface paneI and formwork without damage to
the concrete, formwork and the surface panel will be removed and the oId cement will be
washed with pressurized water spray 0 1' sand blasting to clean the surface and good cohesion
between the aggregate parti c1 es. After the surface panel of the formwork or removed
formwork and concrete has been cured in a regular time, the second casting layer must be
cohesive with the first layer by applying a layer of synthetic-Iiquid epoxy-asphalt-polymer
layer to bind to the surface of the concrete joints. Adhesive concrete epoxy must conform to
the requirements of supervision consultant.
Sprayed surface must be cI ean without oil , dirt and old concrete mOliar. AII unsatisfactory
concrete shall be removed until the concrete has hardened , not damaged exposed on the
sprayed surface. Dust, heavy oil left on the sprayed surface must be cI ean out by steel wire
brush 0 1' shooting sand. The surface should not be too wet or too dry before spraying the
adhesive.
Just before mounting, t、7-.fO components of the adhesive ingredients ll1uSt be cOlnbined
associated with the rate specified in the manufacturer’s instructions. The mixture must be
mixed thoroughly by hand 0 1' instrument mixing slow-speed motor. Binder mixture must be
strained by adding and mix soIutes into the adhesive. Amount of binder in a mixing time have
Iimited using period of adhesive.
Adhesive should be applied 10 the concrete according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

concrete can not be poured over the joint unt i1 the adhesive hardens or be prescribed bythe
manufacturer. At the dry positions , before pouring concrete , surface must be covered with a
adhesive layer.
Adhesives can be toxic or cause hea Ith effects that are classified as hazardous materiaIs. The
bidder should have fu I1 instructions from the manufacturer ofthe formula of the materiaI to

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
ensure safety and health precautions in handling materials when the materials are put into use,
and establish the specific steps to be foIIowed when workers exposed to the material. Before
being aIIowed to carry out the work, workers must be informed about the toxic substances that
they are about to be exposed , the steps to prevent or resolve in case of accidental exposure to
the material.
5.8.4 Formwork at construction joints
When formwork at construction joints overlap previous poured concrete, those forms should
be tied before pouring new concrete. Exposed edges of joint w il1 be a이 usted to be straight
with cheek or be finishεd to match the elevation.
5.9 CURING CONCRETE
5.9.1 General
AI1 newly placed concrete shall be cured so as to prevent loss of water by use of one or more
of the methods specified herein. Curing shall commence immediately after the free water has
left the surface and finishing operations are completed. Ifthe surface ofthε concrete begins to
dry before the selected cure method can be applied , the surface of the c이1crete shall be kept
moist by a fog spray applied so as not to damage the surface.
5.9.2 Methods
5.9.2.1 Forms-in-Place Method
Formed surfaces of concrete may be cured by retaining the forms in place without loosening~
for the required time.
5.9.2.2 Water Method
Concrete surface shall be kept continuously wet by stagnant, spraying, or covering with
materials that are kept continuously and thoroughly we t. Such materials may consist of cotton
mats , multiple layers of burlap , 0 1' other approved materials that do not discolor 0 1' otherwise
damage the concrete.
5.9.2.3 Liquid Membrane Curing Compound Method
The liquid membrane method shall not be used on surfaces where a rubbed finish is required
or on surfaces of construction joints unless it is removed by sand bJasting prior to pJacement
of concrete against the joint. Type 2, white pígmented , Ii quid membranes may be used onJy on
the surfaces of bridge decks , on surfaces that will not be exposed to view in the completed
work , 0 1' 011 surfaces where their use has been approved by the El1 gineer.
1Hl、 aη 1'Y'1.Q 1γ‘ 1、l"Q， n~ r>- 111. ， nπ ic l1 C't:Jo 서 thp ，o， V 1"\t"\('t:)，서 '"、 n l' rptp "h" l1 hp thrw'\11 01、 1 、 I ~p.!l 1ρ r1 ;1"\11γ'" 서 ;o::a +øl 、 y
..
=:''''''"'’"'~~;;O;:‘’，_，....-;:; ‘’"'"'~'""'"'?{’-‘~ε~ι ~ν~';?"\'''~';':'0'~~;f''}.'':r;~.&_，c-c •••• ~.__ %,__ ~"，___~~."~，."，ε;ι;ιι τ=-~.;:;ττ-='← v==-~~-;o;~'""τ=‘ - .，--~;>，-.- ", ~---'-~-''""-;;---
after the free water has left the surface. Formed surfaces sh 떠 1 be sealed immediately after the
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - D1 VISION 8 8.5 - 46 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUεTURALWORKS COllcrete Structures - Sectioll 8.5
forms are removed and necessary finishing has been dO J1 e. The solution shall be applied by
power-ope1'ated atomizing spray equipment in one 0 1' two separate applications. Hand-
operated sprayers may be used for coating small a1'eas. Membrane solutions containing
pigrnents shall be thoroughly mixed prior to use and agitated during application. If the
solution is applied in two increments , the second application shall follow the first application
within 30 min. Satisfactory equiprnent shall be provided , together with means to properly
control and assure the direct application of the cu1'ing solution on the concrete surface so as to
result in a uniform coverage at the rate of 1 Ll3.68 m2.
If rain falls on the newly coated concrete before the film has dried sufficiently to resist
damage , or ifthe filrn is damaged in any other ma11l1er during the curing period, a new coat of
the solution shall be applied to the affected portions equal in curing value to that specified
above.
5.9.3 Bridge Decks
The top surfaces of bridge decks shall be cured by a combination of the liquid membrane
curing compound method and the water method. The liquid membrane shall be ’Type 2, white
pigmented, and shall be applied from finishing bridges progressively and immediately after
finishing operations are complete on each portion of the deck. The water cure shall be applied
not later than 4 h after completion of deck finishing or, for portions of the decks on which
finishing is completed.
5.10 FINIS묘ING FORMED CONCRETE SURFAεES
5.10.1 General
The finishing surface of the formed concrete shall be ordinary surface finish as stated below
unless otherwise specified in the Drawings or in the other Contract Documents ‘
5.10.2 Ordinary Surface Finish
Immediately following the removal of forms , fins and irregula1' projections shall be 1'emoved
from all surfaces that are to be exposed or waterproofed. Bulges and offsets in such surfaces
shall be removed with carborundum stones or discs.
Localized, poorly bonded rock pockets or honey cornbed concrete shall be removed and
replaced with sound concrete or packed mortar as specified in Article 5.12 "Mortar and Grout".
If, in the opinion of the Engineer, rock pockets are of such an extent or character as to affect
the stren암h of the structure materially 0 1' to endanger the life of the steel reinforcement , the
Engineer may declare the concrete defective and require the removal and replacement of the
portions ofthe structure affected.
On all surfaces, the cavities produced by fonn ties and all other holes , broken corners or edges ,

DIVISION8 …STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
and other defects shall be thoroughly cleaned and, after having been thoroughly saturated with
water, shall be carefully pointed and trued with a rnortar conforming to Article 5.13. For
exposed surfaces, white cement shall be added to the rnortar in an arnount sufficient to result
in a patch that, when dry, rnatches the surrounding concrete. Mortar used in pointing shall be
not more than 1 h old. Construction and expansion joints in the cornpleted work shall be left
carefully tooled and free of rno11ar and concrete. The joint filler shall be left exposed for its
fulI len!잊h with c1 ean and true edges.
The resulting surfaces shall be true and uniform. Repaired sur없ces， the appear뻐ce of which is
not satisfactory, shall be "rubbed" as specified in Article 5.11.3 "Class 2 - Rubbed Finish".
5.10A CRACKING OF CONCRETE SURFACES
The maxirnum allowable width shall not exceed the values shown in Table 5.1 OA-l.
Table 5.1 OA-l Maximurn Allowable Crack Widths (normal reinforced concrete structure)
Location Conditions Max. Width
Substructure
Where the water level f1 uctuates 0 .3 mm

P i1 e Caps
Other than above O.4 mm
Where the water level f1 uctuates , or

0.2 rnm
Piersl Abutment Walls Where subject to water splash from the road
Other than above 0.3mm
Superstructure(including Upper surface directly exposed to the air 0.2mm
girder end of super-T girder) Other than above 0.2 rnm
Surfaces against the ground shall not contain any leaking cracks, which extend right through
the structure.
Cracks shall be prope꺼y injected or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer using approved
substance and procedure.
Leaking cracks extending right through the structure shall also be properly injected or repaired
using approved substance and procedure.
5.11 PRECAST CONCRETE MEMBERS
5.11.1 General
등--，.，，-퉁톨잊~ 를툴툴"'"릉~
Precast concrete members shall be constructed and placed in the work in conformance with
the details specified in the Contract Documents.

、、
DNISION 8 - Sl'RUCTURAL WORKS Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
The Cont1'acto1' shall submit wo1'king drawings showing construction joint details and any
other information required by the Engineer.
The precast concrete deck panels shal1 be manufactured at least tlu'ee (3) months before
installation 011 the bridge.
All members shall be marked to show the member mark, the production !ine on which they are
manufactured, the date on which the concrete is cast, and if they are of symmetrical section,
thε face which will uppermost when the member is in its correct position. The markings shall
be located in such a way that they are not exposed when the member is in its pennanent
posl Ìl on.
5.11.2 Working Drawings
Whenever specified in the Contract Documents 01' requested by the Engineer, the Contractor
shal1 provide working drawings for precast members. Such drawings shall include all detai1 s
110t provided in the Contract Documents for the construction and the erection of the members
and shall be approved before any members are cas t. Such approval shall 110t relieve the
Contractor of any responsibility under the Contract Documents for the successful completion
ofthe work.
5.11.3 Materials and Manufacture
The materials and manufacturing processes used for precast concrete members shall conform
to the requirements of the other ruticles in this Section except as those requirements are
modified 01' supplemented by the provisions that follow.
When precast members are manufactured in estab !i shed casting yru'ds , the Manufacturer shal1
be responsible for the continuous 1110nitoring of the quality of a l1 materials and concrete
stren밍hs. Tests shal1 be perfonned in accordance with appropriate AASHTO 01' ASTM
methods. The Engineer sha11 be allowed to observe all sampling and testing and the results of
all tests shall be made available to the Engineer.
Precast members shall be cast on rigid beds 01' p떠 lets. Special carε shal1 be used in casting the
bearing surfaces so that they w i11 j oin properly with other elements of the structure.
For p1'estressed precast units , several units may be cast in one continuous line and stressed at
one time. Sufficient space shall be left between ends of units to permit access for cutting of
tendons after the concrete has attained the required strength.
The side fo 1'ms may be removed as SOO I1 as their 1'emoval w i11 not cause disto1'tion of the
cO l1crete surface, providing that curing is not interrupted. Members shall 110t be !i fted from
casting beds until their strength is sufficient to prevent damage.
When cast-in-place concrete will later be cast against the top surfaces of precast beams 01'
TECHNICAL SPECIFIεATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.5 - 49 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 씨'ORKS Concrete Structul"eS- Section 8.5
girders, these surfaces shall be finished to a coarse tεxture by brooming with a stiff, coarse
broom. Prior to shipment, such surfaces shaJl be cleaned of laitance or other foreign material
by sandblasting or other approved methods.
5.11.4 Curing
Curing method of precast members shalJ be proposed in detail by the Contractor in the Method
Statement and approved by the Engineer prior to the concreting work ofthe precast members.
5.11.5 Storage and lIandling
Extreme care shall be exercised in handling and moving precast prestressed con(πcret뼈
emembe
히rs
꺼re
P 야 cast girders shalJ be transported in an upright position and the directions of the reactions
with respect to the member shall be as in the final position. Support points during
transportation and storage should be located within 750 mm oftheir final position; otherwise,
their location shall be shown on the shop drawings.
Prestressed concrete members shall not be shipped unt iJ tests on concrete cylinders,
manufactured of the same concrete and cured under the same conditions as the girders ,
indicate that the concrete of the particular member has attained a compressive stren양h equal
to the specified design compressive stren망h ofthe concrete in the member.
Care shall be taken during storage, hoisting, and handling of the precast. units to prevent
cracking 01' damagε. Units damaged by improper storage or handling shall be replaced at the
Contractor’s expense.
When a metal embedded in a precast member is partiaJly exposed to the atmosphere , the
exposed parts shall be protected from corrosion by a method approved by the Engineer.
When precast concrete deck panels are stored , they shall be firmly supported at bearing
positions that ensure that their induced stresses are always less than the permissible design
stresses. No permanent defonnations are alJ owed to occur in the panels.
Each panel shall be supp01ted on at least four supports in a f1 at condition on finn ground. If
the panels are stored on top the others , the SUpp01ts shall be exactly placed above the supports
below.
Precast concrete deck panels shall be lifted 01' supported only at points described in the plal1 s
and shall be handlεd and placed without twist or impact.
5.1 1. 6 Erection
The Contractor shall be responsible for the safety of precast members during all stages of
construction. Li fting devices shall be used in a manner that does 110t cause damaging, bending,
0 1'
temporary braces shall be provided as necessary to resist wind 이. other loads.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DlVISION 8 8.5 - 50 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS COllcrete Structures - Section 8.5
For precast concrete deck installation for the main bridge , support struts shall be erected and
placed. Chloroprene rubber seal is in place on top f1 ange of steel girders and support struts so
that excessive concrete leakage will not occur.
5.11.6.A Special Provisions for Erection of Super-T Girder
Contractor shall confim1 the location of lifting devices for erection, insert devices fo 1' drainage
system , electric supports and maintenance way, and openings for catch pits conform to the
drawings , before concreting in the casting yard.
Vertical profile of Super-T bridges shall be adjusted to the vertical alignment by the slab
thickness that will be various in longitudinal directions , and the minimum slab thickness
designed 180mm. Pier heights and CIP slab thickness shown in the contract drawings are
those calculated based on an assumed age of concrete. The Contractor shall recalculate pier
height , level of bearings and the slab thickness based on the actual condition and submit the
report to the Engineer for approval.
5.11.7 Tolenmces for Precast Concrete Members
The manufactming tolerances for precast concrete members shaIl. unless otherwise specifìed
elsewhere in these specifications and the plans , meet the following tolerance.
Precast concrete deck

Item Super-T girder Plank Curb
panel (M외nBridge)
Overall height oto +15 111m - -

Overall upper width -10 to +20 mm -5 to 0 mm Note 土 5mm
Overa1l 10wer width 土5mm (transverse direction)

土 10mm
土5 111m Note
Overall length 土20mm 土 10mm
(l ongitudinal direction)
Thickness Oto+6 mm oto +6mm -1 to 5 mm Note
Distortion 11200 土 3mm/m 土3mm/m 土 3mm/m
- 뉴-------_ . _- ------------- -- ----------

Prestressing camber 土25mm - - -
Horizontal straightness 10mm - -
Note: These values wiI1 be reviewed and reestablished by the Engineer.
5.12 MORTARAND GROUT
5.12.1 General
This worI‘ consists of the making and placing of mOltar and grout for use in concrete
τECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.5 - 51 - of 214

structures other than in prestressing ducts. Such uses in c1 ude mortar for filling under masonry
plates and for filling keyways between precast members where shown in the Contract
Documents , mortar used to fi]] voids and repair surface defects , grout used to fill sleeves for
anchor bolts, and mortar and grout for other such uses where required or approved.
5.12.2 Materials and Mixing
Materials for mortar and grout shall confonn to the requirements of Article 5.3 "Materials".
The grading of sand for use in grout or for use in m01iar when the width or depth of the void
to be filled is less than 20 mm shall be modified so that all material passes the No. 8 (2 .3 6
mm) sieve.
Type I A, air-entraining , Portland cement shall be used when air entrainment is required for the
concrete against which the grout or mortar is to be placed.
Unless otherwise specifiεd in the Contract Documents or ordered by the Engineer, the
proportion of cement to sand for mortar shall be one to two and for grout shall be one to one.
Prop Oliioning shall be by loose volume.
When non-shrink mortar or grout is specified, either a non-shrink admixture or expansive

hydraulic cement conforming to ASTM C 845 of a type approved by the Engineer shall be
used.
Only sufficient water sha]] be used to permit placing and packing. For mortar, only enough
water shall be used so that the mortar will form a bal1 when squeezed gently in the hand.
Mixing shall be done by either hand methods or with rotating paddle-type mixing machines
and shaJl be continued until all ingredients are thoroughly mixed. Once mixed, mortar or grout
shall 110t be re-tempered by the addition ofwater and shal1 be placed within 1 h.
5.12.3 Placing and Curing
Concrete areas to be in contact with the mortar or’ grout shall be cleaned of a]] loose or foreign
material that would in al1 y way prevent bond , and the concrete surfaces shall be f1 ushed with
water and allowed to dry to a surface dry condition immediately prior to placing the mortar 01"
grout.
The mortar or grout shall completely fill and shall be tightly packed into recesses and holes ,
on surfaces , under structural members , and at other locations specified. After placing, a]]
surfaces of mortar or grout shall be cured by the water method as provided in Article 5.10
"Curing Concrete" , for a period ofnot less than three days.
Keyways , spaces between structural members , holes , spaces under structural members , and
강유없'"I ocammsυwnereπmπ<lrcuutcrescr펙pe 양i'î'ITl ηe'm옆짧펌휠n δeî'함el'떠C1n節torr원.，......，~~"'7
No load shal1 be al1 0wed on mortar that has been in place less than 72 h unless otherwise

D1VISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS εonc l'ete St ruct때 res - Sectiofl 8.5
permitted by the Engineer.
All improperly cured or otherwise defective mortar or grout shall be removed and replaced by
the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.
5.13 APPLIC.A:τIONOFLOADS
5.13.1 General
Loads shaIl not be applied to concrete structures until the concrete has attained sufficient
stren맑h and , when applicable , suJ앉icient prestressing has been completed, so that damage wilI
not occur.
5.13.2 Earth Loads
Whenever possible, the sequence of placing backfill around structures shall be such that
oveliurning or sliding forces are minimized. When the placement of backfill w ilI cause
flexural stresses in the concrete, and unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer, the
placement shall not begin unt i1 the concrete has reached not less than 80 percent of its
specified strength.
5.13.3 εonsfructioìi Loads
Light materials and equipment may be carried on bridge decks only after the concrete has been
in place at least 24 h, providing curing is not interfered with and the surface texture is not
damaged. Vehicles needed for construction activities and weighing (having a mass) between
450 kg and 1800 kg, and comparable materials and equipment loads , shall be allowed on any
span only after the last placed deck concrete has attained a compressive strength of at least
27.0 MPa. Loads in excess of the above shaIl not be carried on bridge decks unt iI the deck
concrete has reached its specified strength. 1n addition , for post-tensioned structures , vehi cJ es
weighing (having a mass) over 2000 kg, and comparable materials and equipment loads , shalI
not be alI owed on any span untiI the prestressing steeI for that span has been tensioned.
Precast concrete or steel girders shaIl not be placed on substructure elements untiI the
substructure concrete has attained 70 percent of its specified strength.
Load of superstructure shaIl not be placed on substructure elements until the substructure
concrete has attained 80 percent of its specified strength, unless otherwise approved by the
Engineer.
Otherwise, loads imposed on existing, new, or partiaIly completed pOliions of structures due to
construction operations shalI not exceed the load-carrying capacity ofthe structure, or pOliion
of structure, as determined by the Strength II Load Combination in Table 3 .4 .1-1 of the
Specifications for Bridge Design 22TCN 272-05. The compressive strength of concrete (fc) to
be used in computing the load-carrying capacity shaIl be the smaIl er of the actual compressive
TECHNICAL SPECIFIC~τIONS - DIVISION 8 8.5 - 53 - of214

strength at the time of loading or the specified compressive stren망h of the concrete.
5.13.4 Traffic Loads
Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, traffic shall not be permitted on
concrete decks until at least 14 days after the last placement of deck concrete and until such
concrete has attainεd its specified stren암h.
5.14 QUALITY CONTROL OF CONCRETE
5.14.1 General
The quality control of concrete shall be included in the Contractor ’ s Quality Assurance scheme
for the entire Project. The Contractor shall make particular reference to the target mean strength
ofthe foundation concrete in his quality scheme and shall describe clearly all factors relevant to
its determination.
All Quality control tests must be carried out in a manner acceptable to the Engineer and shall be
conducted by an Independent Laboratory or the Contractor’ s laboratory on Site.
5.14.2 Technicians at mixing plant
The Contractor shall designate a competent and experienced concrete technician to be în charge
of the mixing plant and to be responsible for quality control including, but not limited to , the
following:
a) The proper storage and handling of all components ofthe mix.
b) The proper maintenance and cleanliness of plant, trucks , and other equipmen t.
c) The gradation testing offine and coarse aggregates.
d) The determination ofthe fineness modulus offine aggregate.
e) The measurement of moisture content of the aggregates and a에 ustment of thε mix
proportions as required before each day’s production 0 1' more often if necessary to maintain
the required water/cement ratio.
f) The computation of the batch masses for each day's production and the checking of the
plant’s calibration as necessary.
The technician shall be assisted by at least one competent and experienced concrete
technician at the project site responsible for concrete sampling and testing during placing of
concrete.
n~n(ffT~ens갱1~뀔Yfπ5ftffJ를쥬OU tJC1Tdfl 앙F'fI활℃‘::tHl.'l'cl:t:it\:7t . -'ÐT"::U-I;F등q없다 f동uε <1'm;Fl;ffG"~Ui"fIfifflν\Ò} '-Vl
temperature , unit mass , slump , and other tests to verify compliance with the specification before

DIVISION 8 - STRUεTURALWOIU‘s Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
and du1'ing each placement ope1'ation.
He shall ve1'ify that a때 ustments to the mix before discharge comply with the specifications. He
shall ensure completion of the batch ticket , which shall incJude the detail below, the 1'ecording
of the apparent water/cement ratio, and the time discha1'ge are completed; furnishing a
copy of each batch ticket at the time of placement.
a) Concrete supplie1'
b) Ticket serial number
c) Date and truck numbe1'
d) Cont1'actor
e) Structu1'e or location ofplacement
f) Mix-design and conc1'ete class
g) Component quantities and COl1 crete total volume
h) Moisture cOlTections fo 1' aggregate 1110istu1'e
i) Total wate1' in mix at plant
j) Time of batching
k) Til11e at which discharge must be cOl11 pleted
Ensure testing to dete1'mine the unit mass , slump , and tempe1'ature acco1'ding to this
specification.
The provision of copies ofwork sheets and test 1'esults as they a1'e cOl11 pleted.
5.14.3 Sampling of mixed concrete

The f1'equency of sampling and testing shall be included in the quality control plan fo 1' concrete
and subject to the app 1'oval ofthe Engineer.
Samples shall be takεn fi'om each work item 01' batch as in the Cont1'actor's approved quality
control plan and in acco1'dance with AASHTO-T1 4 1. The tempe1'atu1'e and sIump ofthe conc1'ete
shall be tested fo 1' each load at discharge or at such f1'equency as may be approved by the
Engineer. Test wilI not be dee l11ed to have been carried out unless witnessed by the Enginee1' 01'
his representative. The method ofmaking the slump test shall confo1'm to ASTM C143.
SampIing at discharge shall be after at Ieast 0.2 cubic meters are discharged and before placing
any of the batches in the forms.
The initial testing frequency shall be resumed if a test shows a failing temperature 0 1' slump 01'
when required by the Engineer.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATlONS - DIVISION 8 8.5 - 55 - of214

The Contractor shaJJ bear all expenses for obtaìnìng, cuttìng out or sampling all specìmens
and/or component parts for testing.
5.14.4 Compressive strength testing

Testìng to detennìne the compressìve strength of concrete shall be used for the following
purposes:
* To allow early strìppìng of forms.
* pennit the application of post and pre tensionìng force.
* acceptance ofthe completed work
The procedure for strength testing shall be in accordance with ASTM C 1077 or an
equivalent procedure approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor ’s quality control plan shall include detai1s of his proposed procedure for the
determìnation of early concrete strengths. This procedure shall use conventional test cylinder
results to substantìate stren망h predictions for each cJass and location of concrete pours. The
figure below is an example of an acceptable the procedures.
9 Specímens by Cylinder from each 100 cubic meters of concrete when the same
grade is used contínuously, or as dírected by the Engineer
Cylínder numbers 1, 5 and 9 3 Samples from Cylinder

numbers 2&8 , 3&7, 4&6
7 days compressive strength test
if less than X%* from required 28 days

compressive strength
Alternative 2
stop placing concrete and rectify any defect
Alternatíve 1
Remove and replace the defective concrete

without waiting the results of 28 day test
by the responsibility of the Contractor
*Note: This percentage 0 1" strength shaJl be decided in accordance with the sub-
section 5.2 and with the proposal by the Contractor.
5.14.5 Testing frequencies
Testing frequencies shal1 be accordance with Vietnamese Standard: TCVN 4453-95; TCXDVN
305-04 or other international standard subject equivalence being demonstrated by the Contractor
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - D1 VISION 8 8.5-56-of214

DlVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WO없엉 εoncrete Structures - Section 8.5
and to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer:
No Test Descriotion Freauencv Remark

TCVN 4453-95: Monolithic Concrete and Reinforced Concrete Structures -
Codes for Construction and Check
a Material testing & preparation work
before construction: (for rnateriaJ &
quarries approval)
·뉴_.-
+ General requirement Article 5.1

- + Cement Article 5.2
+Sand Al1icle 5.3
+ QualitV_Qfaggregate for concrete Al1icle 5 .4
+ Water for concrete : Article 5.5
+ Others requirement index for concrete ; Al1icle 5.6; 5.7
additive cement ...
+ Formworks and falsework Article 3
-
+ Reinforcemεnt for concrete Article 4 ---_._--
b Durinsr construction oeriod: Article 6
(Note: Article 6.8 has been superseded by TCXDVN 305:2004)
c After construction period: (For acceptance I Arti cI e 7 : Table 19
of constructi OD 뾰m:ksl
2 TCXDVN 305-04: Mass Concrete - Code of Practice of Construction and
Acceptance
a Material testing & preparation work Article 6.9 .1
before construction: (for material &
quarries approval)
+ Cement: Arti cI e 6.2.1
+ Quality of aggregate for concrete Article 6.2.2
(include sand):
+ Water for concrete : Article 6.2.3
+ Others requirement index for concrete Article 6.2 .4
b During construction period: Al1icle 6 .4 ;
Al't icle β 9.2
c After construction period: (For‘ acceptance Article 6.9 .3 ;
of construction works) Article 7
5.15 SPECIAL PROVISIONS
5.15.1 1‘'olerances for Pylon
Tolerances for completed pylons against deviation f1'0111 vel1ical sha11 not exceed 土 6 mm pe1'
each 3 m lift and 土 70 mm per tota 1.
Installation tolerances for guide pipes fo 1' cable anchors on pylons shall not exceed 土 15 mm in
vel1ical and 土 10 mm in horizontal.
5.15.2 Installation of Precast Curb
Precast curbs sha1l be placed on leveling mOl1ar. The alignment shall be finished to the
satisfaction ofthe Engineer.

5.16.1 Measurement
Except for concrete in components of the work for which payment is made under other bid
items , all concrete for structures shall be measured by either the cubic meteζ linear meter or
each sheet for each class of concrete included in the Contract Documents or by the unit for
εach type of precast cO l1 crete member listed il1 the Contract Documents.
When measured by the cubic meter, the quantity of concrete shall be computed from the
dimensions show l1 in the Contract Documents or authorized in writing by the Engineer with
the following exceptions:
• The quantity of concrete involved in fillets , scorings , and chamfers 645 mm 2 or less in
cross-sectional area shall not be includεd or deducted.
• When there is a bid item for concrete to be used as a seal course in cofferdams, the
quantity of such concrete to be paid for shall include the actual volume of concrete seal
course in place , but in no case shall the total volume measured exceed the product ofthe
area between vertical surfaces 300 mm outside the neat lines ofthe seal course as shown
in the Contract Documents and the thickness of the seal course. The thickness of seal
course to bε paid for shall be the thickness specified in the Contract Documents or
ordered in writing by the Engineer.
Quantity of concrete shall be measured based on the Plan, and additional quantities to
compensatε the elastic sh 0l1ening and creep/shrinkage shall not be measured.
No deduction shall be made for the volume occupied by reinforcement steel bars , prestressing
tendons , anchor bolts , structural items or other items embedded in concrete, chamfers, weep
holes , scoring and fillets.
Regarding C40 concrete for Headstock of piers of approach bridge , the volume of additional
concrete required by pat1icular prestressing system used shall be excluded. This additional
concrete , if any, shall be paid by Pay ltems Ii sted in 7.12.2 for Prestressing.
Precast Concrete C50 for Deck slab - Cable stay bridge shall be measured by each sheet, in
two types:
• Type 1: dimension 12.25x3.6xO.26m

• Type 2: dimension 12.25x2.6xO.26m
Concrete C30 for Precast concrete plank for Super-T girder shall be measured by each sheet,
in two types:
9
• Type 2: dimension 0.81 xO.81 xO.035m

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS εoncrete Structu l'es - Section 8.5
The precast concrete curbs for separating, parapet , barrier shall be measured by linear meter
ofthe acceptable curb in the longitudinal direction.
Whenever an altemative or option is shown in the Contract Documents, the quantities of

concrete shall be computed on the basis of the dimensions specified in the Contract
Documents and no change in quantities measured fo 1' payment shal1 be made because of the
use by the Contractor of such alternatives or options.
5.16.2 Payment
The cubic rneters of concrete and the number ofprecast concrete members , as measured above
for each type or cJ ass liste c;l in the Contract Documents , shall be paid for at the contract prices
per cubic meter or the contract prices per each member.
Payment for concrete of the various cI asses and for precast concrete members of the various
types shalJ be considered to be full compensation for the cost of fumishing alllabor, materials
including formworks , equipment , and incidentals; and for doing a lJ the wO l'k involved in
constructing the concrete work complete in place, as specified in the Contract Documents.
Such payment shalJ be taken as to include full compensation fo l' furnishing and placing
expansion joint 윈llers ， sea!ed joints, waterstops , drains , vents , miscelìaneous melal devices ,
the dr i1l ing of holes for dowels and the grouting of dowels in drilled holes , unless payment for
such wo1'k is specified in the Cont1'act Documents to bε in c1 uded in anothe 1' bid item.
Payment for C50 fo 1' pylon includes al1 necessa1'y cost necessary for installation of drainage
pipe for pylons as shown in the Drawings.
Payment for blinding concrete underneath the pile cap concrete shall be measured for payment
separately based on the quantities in cubic meters calculated from the Drawing.
In addition, payment for precast concrete mernbers except the precast concrete deck panels of
cable stayed bridge shall be considered to be fu l1 compensation for the cost of all formwork ,
reinforcing steel, prestressing materials , and othεl' items embedded in the member and for the
erection ofthe members.
Payment for Super-T girder shal1 be considered to be fu l1 compensation for the cost of all
formwo 1'k, concrete, reinforcing steel , prestressing materials , and other items embedded in the
member and for the erection ofthe members including p1'ecast pla따(.
Payment fo 1' the precast concrete deck panels of cable stayed bridge shall be considered to be
fu l1 compensation for the cost of alJ formwork, reinforcing steel and other items embedded in
the panels and for the erection of the panels , but excludes the prestressing steel for post
tensiomng.
Chloroprene fo 1' seating of precast deck panels shall be included in the relevant pay item.

The items ofwork payable under this provision along with their units shaIl be as follows:
Pay Item
Description Unit
No.
Cast-in-place Concrete
8.05-01 Concrete C50 for Deck slab - Cable stay bridge m3
Concrete C50 (non-shrinking) for CIP gaps Deck slab - Cable

8.05-02 m3
stay bridge
8.05-03 Concrete C50 for Pylon and Pile cap of Pylon on river m3
Concrεte C40 for Pile cap of Pylon , Anchorage pier and Pile
8.05-04 m3
cap of Anchorage pier on rivεr
Concrete C25 for Barrier, Parapεt and Separating - Cable stay

8.05-05 m3
bridge
Concrete C20 for Blinding concrete of Pylon , Anchorage Pier

8.05-06 m3
and Pier
8.05-07 Concrete CI0 for Blinding concrete m3
8.05-08 Concrete C35 for Super-T ’ s Cross Beam and Deck Slab m3
8.05-09 Concrete C25 for Approach slab m3

Concrete C40 for PC Headstock of pier on land - Approach
8.05-10 m3
Bridge
--p~-'-
CO l1crete C40 for PC Headstock of pier 011 river - Approach

8.05-11 m3
Bridge
Concrete C30 for Abutment and Pier on land - Approach

8.05-12 m3
Bridge
8.05-13 Concrete C30 for pier on river - Approach Bridge m3
Concrete C25 for Barrier, Parapet and Separating - Approach

8.05-14 m3
Bridge
Pre-cast Concrete
Precast Concrete C50 for Deck slab - Cable stay bridge
8.05-15 Nos.
(Type 1: Dimension 12.25x3.6xO.26m)
Precast Concrete C50 for Deck slab -- Cable stay bridge

8.05-16 Nos.
(Type 2: Dimension 12.25 x2 .6xO.26m)
Precast Concrete C25 for Precast Panel of Pylon and

8.05-17 m3
Anchorage pier - Cable stay bridge
8.05-18 Precast Concrete C25 for Separating - Cable stay bridge m
Concrete C30 for Precast concrete plank fo l' Super-T girder

8.05-19 Nos.
(Type 1: Dimension (1.1 2-d.26)xO.81xO.035m)

DIVISION 8 - STRUC'fURAL WORKS Concrete Structures - Section 8.5
Concrete C30 for Precast concrete plank for Super-T girder

8.05-20 Nos.
(Type 2: Dimension (0.81xO.81xO.035m)
8.05-21 Super-T Girder L=28.2 m Nos.
8.05-22 Super-T Girder L=37.6 - 38 .4 m (all Type) Nos.

-
Concrete C25 for Precast concrete plank for Pile cap -
‘
8.05-23 m3
Approach bridge
8.05-24 Precast Concrete C25 for Barrier - Approach bridge m
8.05-25 Precast Concrete C25 for Separating - Approach bridge m

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Reinforcing Steel- Section 8.6
SECTION 8.6 - REINFORCING STEEL
6.1 DESCRIPTION
6. 1. 1 General
This work shalJ consist of furnishing and placing reinforcing steel in accordance with these
Specifications and in conformity with the Contract Documents.
The following Standards in their latest edition shalJ be particularly applied to the works
covered by this Specification:
TCVN 1651 :2008 Steel for the reinforcement concrete
ASTM A82 Standard Specification for Steel Wire , Plain , for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A 185 Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain , for
Concrete.
6.2 까1ATERIAL
A I1 reinforcing bars shal1 be deformed except that plain bars may be used for spirals and ties.
Reinforcing steel shal1 confonn to the requirements herein.
6.2.1 Uncoated Reinforcing
Plain steel rebar for concrete reinforcement shall comply with TCVN 1651-1: 2008 0 1'
equivalen t.
Deformed steel rebar for concrete reinforcement shall comply with TCVN 1651-2: 2008 or
equivalent.
Reinforcing bars shall conform to the requirements , as a minimum , shown in Table 6.2.1- 1.
Table 6.2.1-1 Mechanical Properties of Reinforcing Bars
Tensi1e Elongation (%)

Yì eld strength
Type Grade stren윌h
(MPa) min A5 (min) Agt (min)
(MPa) min
('Q') Jt(ìT ')(ì(ì 1. Q (ì ')(ì ?
c-_
Plaín
CB300T 300 440 16 2

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 삐'ORKS Reinforcing Steel - Section 8.6
300 450
400 570
The nominal diameter, nominaJ periphery and weight per unit length shall comply with Table
in Article 6.9.
6.2.2 Steel Quality and Supply
6.2.2.1 Rep 1'esentative samples of all reinforcement steel that the Contractor p1'oposes to use in the
Works must be submitted, before work is commenced, to the Engineer for his w1'itten
approval , togethe 1' with manufactu1'er’ s certificates stating c1 ea1'ly fo 1' each sample the place
of manufactu1'e, expected date and size of deliveries to the Site, and all relevant detai! s of
composition, manufactu1'e, st1'engths and other qualities ofthe stee l.
6.2.2.2 ln the event a reinforcement steel sample under test faiJs to meet the specification
requirements at any time , 01' the Engineer considers that samples which were presentεd t。
him for test were not truly 1'ep1'esentative, 01' if it becornes apparent that reinforcεment steeJ
which has ll0t been approved has been used on the Works , the Engineer may instruct the
Contractor to brεak out and remove completely all such sections of the work already
constructed using such suspected reinfo1'cement steel.
6.2.2 .3 All testing of reinforcement steel bars shall rneet the requirements and specification Iimits of
the ASTM/AASHTO designation for the particular size , grade and any additional
1'equirements.
6.2.3 Test frequency
Testing frequencies (using for material testing) shall be accordance with Vi etnamese Standard:
TCVN 1651-2008 or other international standard subject equivalence being demonstrated by
the Contractor and the satisfaction oÎthe Engineer oÎthe Vietnamese standard shali appìy:
Table 6.2.3-1 Material Testing and Testing Frequency
Test않n뼈n 펀
tofc딴 bama*」]
oncr펀ete얀-p,」iIl펀
It em
a
1 TCVN 1561-1: 2008: Steel for reiilforcemell
Mater때 testing: (for material approval)
Sampling & method for testing Article 11.3.2.2

-…-_._-
Other testing & frequency for testing Article 11.3 .3
•---- …-----'-------
2 TCVN 1561-2: 2008: Steel for reinforcement ofconcrete - Ribbed bar.

DIVISION 8 -- STRUCTURAL WORKS Reinforcing Steel- Section 8.6
Ma
없te
리l'때 testing: (for materia1 app 1'ova1)
Sampling & method fo 1' testing Artic1e 8; 9
Other testing & frequency fo 1' testing Artic1e 12.3.3
6.3 BAR LISTS AND BENDING DIAGRAMS
When the Cont1'act Documents do not include detai! ed bar lists and bending diagrams , the
Contractor shall provide such lists and diagrams to the Engineer for review and approval.
Fabrication of materia1 shall not begin unti1 such lists have been approved. The approval of
bar lists and bending diagrams shall in no way relieve the Contractor of responsibility for the
correctness of such lists and diagrams. Any expense incident to the revision of material
furnished in accordance with such lists and diagrams to make it comply with the design
drawings shall be borne by the Contractor.
6.4 FABRICATION
6.4.1 Bending
Bar reinforcement shall be cut and bent to the shapes shown in the Contract Documents. AI1
bars shall be bent co1d , unless otherwise permitted. Bars paltially embedded in concrete shall
not be field-bent except as specified in the Contract Documents.
6 .4.2 Hooks and Bend Dimensions
The dimensions ofhooks and the diameters ofbends measured on the inside ofthe bar shall be
as shown in the Contract Documents. When the dimensions ofhooks or the diameter ofbends
are not shown , they shall be in accordance with Article 5.1 1.2 ofthe Specifications for Bridge
Design 22TCN 272-05.
6.4.3 Identification
Bar reinforcement shall be shipped in standard bundles , tagged and marked in accordance with
the Manual of Standard Practice of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI, 1996).
6.5 HANDLIN G, STORIN G, AND SURFACE CONDITION OF REINFORCEMENT
Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground on platforms , skids , 0 1'
other supports and shall be protected 감om mechanica1 injury and surface deterioration caused
by exposure to conditions producing rus t. When placed in the work, reinfo 1'cement shall be
free f 1' 0111 diπ， 100se rust 01' sca1e , mortar, paint , g1'ease , oi1 , 01' other nonmetallic coatings that
wou1d reduce bond. Reinforcement shall be free f 1'om inju1'ious defects such as cracks and
Bonded rust , surface seams , su 1'face irregularities , 01' mil1 sca1e shallnot be cause
for r태 ection ， provided the minimum dimensions , cross-sectíona1 area, and tensi1e propeliies of
a hand wire-brushed specimen meet the physica1 requirements for the size and grade of steel

DlVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Reinforcing Steel- Section 8.6
specified.
6.6 PLACING AND FASTENING
6.6.1 General
Steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed as shown in the Contract Documents and firmly
held in position during the placing and consolidation of concrete. A lI bar intersections shall be
tied together and the ends ofthe tying wires shall be turned into the main body ofthe concrete.
Bundled bars shall be tied together at not more than 1800 mm centers. If uncoated welded
wire fabric is shipped in rolls , it shall be straightened into flat sheets before being placed.
Welding of crossing bars (tack welding) shall not be permitted for assembly of 1'einforcement
unless authorized in writing by the Engineer.
6.6.2 Support Systems
Reinforcing steel shall be supp Olied in its propεl' position by use of p1'ecast concrete blocks ,
wire bar supports , supplementary bars , or other approved devices. Such reinfo1'cing suppolis
or devices shall be of such height and placed at sufficiently frequent intervals so as to maintain
the distance between the reinforcing steel and the forrned surface 0 1' the top surface of deck
slabs within 6 mm ofthat indicated in the Contract Documents.
Platforms for the support of wo1'kers and equipment during concrete placement shall be
supported directly on the forms and not on the reinforcing stee l.
6.6.3 Precast Concrete Blocks
Precast concrete blocks shall have a compressive st1'ength not less than that of the concrete in
which they a1'e to be embedded. The face of blocks in contact with forms fo 1' εxposed surfaces
shall not exceed 50 mm x 50 mm in size and shall have a color and texture that will match the
conc1'ete surface. When used on veliical or sloping surfaces , such blocks shall have al1
embedded ，λlire for securing the block to the reinforcing stee l. When used in slabs , either such
a tie wire 0 1', when the weight (mass) ofthe reinforcing is sufficient to finnly hold the blocks
in place, a groove in the top ofthe block may be used.
6.6.4 Wire Bar Supports
Wire bar suppolis, such as ferrous metal chairs and bolsters, shall conform to industry practice
as described in Manual of Standard Practice, 1996 , the Manual of Standard Practice of the
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. Such chairs 0 1' bolsters which bear against the fonns for
exposed surfaces shall be Class 1 - Maximul11 Protection (Plastic Protected).
6.6.5 Adjustments
Non-prestressed l'einforcement used in post-tensioned concrete shall be adjusted or relocated

during the installation of prestressing ducts or tendons , as required to provide planned

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS ReinfOl'cing Steel - Section 8.6
clearances to the prestressing tendons , anchorages , and stressing equipment, as approved by

the Engineer.
6.7 SPLICING OF BARS
6.7.1 General
All reinforcement shall be furnished in the full lengths speci턴 ed in the Contract Documents,
unless otherwise permitted. Except for splices specified in the Contract Documents, splicing
of bars shall not be permitted without written approval by the Enginεer. Splices shall be
staggered as far as possible.
Unless othεrwise specified in the Contract Oocuments, lap splices shall be used for 032 and
smaller bars. For bars larger than 032 , other appropriate methods such as mechanical splices
or pressure welding will be used.
6.7.2 Lap Splices
Lap splices shall be ofthe lengths specified in the Contract Oocuments.
1n lap splices , the bars shall be placed and tied in such a manner as to maintain the minimum
distance to the surface ofthe concrete shown in the Contract Documents.
6.7.3 Welded Splices
Welded splices of reinforcing bars shall be used only if detailed in the Contract Documents or
if authorization is made by the Engineer in writing. Welding shall confonn to the
ANSIIAWS0 1.4 Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel , and the Contract Oocuments.
6.7 .4 Mechanical Splices
Mechanical splices shall be used only if pre-approved or detailed in the Contract Oocuments
or authorized in writing by the Engineer. Such mechanical splices shall develop in tension or
compression , as required , at least 125 percent of the specifiεd yield strength of the bar being
spliced. Other requitments shall be complied with TCVN 8163: 2009.
When requested by the Engineer, up to two field splices out of each 100 , or portion thereof,
placed in the work and chosen at random by the Engineeζ shall be removed by the Contractor
and tested by the Engineer for compliance to the required 125 percent of the specified yield
strength of the bars bεing spliced.
6.8 SUBSTITUTIONS
Substitution of different size reinforcing bars shall be permitted only when authorized by the
Engineer. The substituted bars shall have an area equivalent to the design area or larger, and
흥n짧fC'Uef'~Uf' 없cura'ttH\..'e τ쩌m~7'\ftfelε':J'; ε ，y;‘t~(n"u'뽑 ð"f'I"l.)fTKl'없 tUrrec'ftJ.F~'Ð'ft~~' 'UCl5'1훌fr-:.<iι;7'C:N'
272-05
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATlO NS - DIVISION 8 8.6 - 66 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WO없(S Rei Hl forcing Steel - Sectio뼈 8.6
6.9 MEASUREMENT
Steel reinforcement incorporated in the concrete will be measured in ton based on the total
computed weight (mass) for the sizes and lengths of bars , wire , 0 1' welded wire fabric shown
in the Contract Documents 01‘ authorized by the Engineer for use in the work.
The len암hs shall be measured by actual length as shown in the bending schedule approved by
the Engineer
The weight of reinforcing bars will be computed using the weights in Tables 6.9-1 and 2 for
defonned bars and plaill bars, respectively:
Table 6.9-1 없einforcing Bars - Nominal Weights and Areas.
Table 2 - TCVN 1561-1:2008 (Steel for the reinforcement of concrete - part 1: Plain bar)
T‘ itle diameter Cross section area Theory qua뼈 tity of 1m length

d,mm mI뼈2， An
Requirement (kg/m) Tolerance (%)
6 28 .3 0.222 土8
8 50.3 0.3 95 士8
10 78.5 0.617 土6
12 113 0.888 土6
14 154 1.21 土5
16 201 1. 58 土5
18 254.5 2.00 土5
--+-------
20 314 2 .4 7 土5
22 380 2.98 土5
-
25 490.9 3.85 土4
615.8 土4
-
28 4.83
32 804.2 6.3 1 土4
36 1017.9 7.99 土4
40 1256.6 9.86 土4
An = 0.7854 X d2
Unit weight per len암h = 7.85 X 10-3 X An
Table 2- τCVN 1561-2:2008 (Steel for the reinforcement of concrete -part 2: Ri bbed bar)
Title diameter Cross section area Theory quantity of 1m length

d,mm mm 2, An
Requirement (kg/m) Tolerance (%)
6 28.3 0.222 土8
8 50 .3 0.395 土8
-
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIViSION 8 8.6 - 67 - of214
DNISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Reinforcing Steel- Section 8.6
10 78.5 0.617 土6
12 113 0.888 土6
14 154 1. 21 土5
--- 16 201
- 1. 58 土5
18 254.5 2.00 土5
20 314 2 .4 7 土5
1----
22 380.1 2.98 土5
-_----_.._.
25 491 3.85 土4
---~ ...
28 616
._._----~
뉴---‘--
4.84 土4
----
- 土4
32 804 6.3 1
36 1017.9 7.99 土4
_._----_._---
40 1257 9.86 土4
50 1964 15 .4 2 土4
If diameter of Ribbed bar is greater than 50mm , it is recommended to have agreement between
Manufacturer and Purchaser, and tolerance allowable for each ribbed bar must be 土4%
An = 0.7854 X d2
Unit weight per length = 7.85 x 10-3 X An
'---
The weight (mass) of reinforcement used in itεms such as rai1ings and precast members ,
where payment for the rεinforcement is in c1 uded in the contract price for the item , shal1 not be
included. Threaded bars 이‘ dowels placed after the instal1ation of precast members in the work
and usεd to attach such members to cast-in-place concrete shal1 be in c1 uded.
No allowance shall be made for clips , wire , separators, wire chairs , and other materiaJ used in
fastening the reinforcement in place. If bars are substituted upon the Contractor’s rεquest and
as a result more reinforcing steel is used than specified in the Contract Documents , only the
amount specified in the Contract Documents shall be included.
The additional reinforcing steel required for splices that are not shown in the Contract
Documents , but are autho rÏ zed as provided herein , shall not be included.
The additional reinforcing steel required by a particular prestressing system used shal1 be
excluded. This additional reinfo 1'cement , if any, shalJ be paid by Pay Items listed in 7.12.2 for
Prestressing.
6.10 PAYMENT
Payment for the quantity of reinforcement determined under measurement for each c1 ass of
reii1fQrçing_s_teel_sI1 QvvllÍnthe Contract Documents shall be made at the contract price per ton.
Payment shall be considered to be ful1 compensation fo 1' furnishing , fab 1'icating, splicing, and
placing ofthe reinforcing steel , in c1 uding aJJ incidental work and materials required.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8_6 - 68 - of214

‘ ) 이
DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Reiillforcing Steel - Section 8.6
Welding and mechanical splices (coupler) of reinforcement shall not be measured and paid
separately, but shall be deemed to be included in the unit price of Reinforcement Steel Bars.
Erection bars and the length of additional splices 110t provided in the CO l1 tract Drawings shal1
not be payable.
The items ofwork payable ul1der this provision along with their units sl1all be as follows:
Unit of
Measurement
8.06-01 Reinforcement Steel Bars D::;32 ton
8.06-02 Reinforcement Steel Bars D>32 TOI1

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Reinforcing Steel - Section 8.6
Development of Reinforcement
1. Hooks and Bends (5.10.2 - 22TCN - 272 - 05)
+ For longitudinal reinforcement:
(a) 180o-bend , plus a 4.0 db extension, but not less than 65 mm at the free end ofthe bar, or
(b) 90o..bend , plus a 12.0 d b extension at the free end ofthe bar.
+ For translterse reinforcemen t:
(a) No. 16 bar and smaller - 900-bend , plus a 6.0 db extension at the free end ofthe bar,
(b) No. 19, No. 22 and No. 25 bar- 900-bend , plus a 12.0 db extension at the free end ofthe ba r; and
(c) No. 25 bar and la띠 er - 1350-bend, plus a 6.0 db extension at the free end of the ba r.
+ Seismic hooks shall consist of a 1350-bend , plus an extension of not less than the larger of 6.0 d
or 75 mm. Seismic hooks shall be used for translterse reinforcement in regions of expected plastic hinges.
contract documents. Such hooks and their required locations shall be detailed in the contract documents.
+ πle diameter of a bar bend , measured on the inside ofthe bar, shall not be less than that specified in Table 1.!
딩ble 5.10.2.3-1 - Mi미 mum Diameters of Bend :
Bar Size and Use Minimum Diameter
No. 10 through No. 16 - General 6 ‘ o db
No. 10 through No. 16 - Stirrup and 끼 es 4.0 d b
No. 19 through No. 25 - General 6.0 d b
No. 29 , No. 32 , and No. 36 8.0 d b
No. 43 and NO.57 10.0 d b
Rebar Bending Chart

Radius for standard hook
Designation Rebar radius Cuflted line length
Rebar inside center outside 90 deg 180 deg 135 deg
mm mm mm mm mm mm
10 30 35 40 55 110 82
12 36 42 48 66 132 99
14 42 49 56 77 154 115
16 48 56 64 88 176 132
18 54 63 72 99 198 148
20 60 70 80 110 220 165
22 66 77 88 121 242 181
25 75 88 100 137 275 206
28 112 126 140 198 396 297
32 128 144 160 226 452 339
36 144 162 180 254 509 382
40 200 220 240 346 691 518
50 250 275 300 432 864 648
Embedded length for standard end hook Embedded length for

Designation Longitudinal Rebar Translterse Rebar seismic hook
Rebar 90 deg 180 deg 90 deg 135 deg 135 deg
mm mm mm mm mm
10 120 65 60 60 75
12 144 65 72 ‘2 75
14 168 65 84 84 84
16 192 65 96 96 96
18 216 72 216 108 108
20 240 80 240 120
-120
22 264 88 264 132 132
25 300 100 300 150 150
28 336 112
ι~‘”‘~'~3:t~ ""'"‘ “엉§
384 1 ‘
36 432 144
40 480 160
50 600 200
DIVISION 8 - SτRUCTURAL WORKS Reinforcing Steel- Sectioll 8.6
’“ -- …’‘ • •- ‘…‘ _.ι ’‘… … -- .… -‘----_-_.- ~_._ ... -_._ ... -… • ‘“ ‘’·
2. The basic ten성。n development leng엔1， I db: (5.11.2.1 - 22TCN ‘ 272 - 05) i
f' c = Specified compressi엽 strength of concrete at 28 days (MPa)
db Diameter of bar (rnrn)
No
\옳\ 20 25 30
Idb (rnm)
35 40 50
10 300 300 300 300 300 300
2 12 300 300 300 300 300 300
3 14 340 340 340 340 340
4
5
16
18
380
460
380
430 뭘二: 380
430
380
430
380
430
6 20 560 500 480 480 480 480
7 22 680 610 560 530 530 530
8 25 880 790 720 660 620 600
9 28 1100 990 900 830 780 700
10 32 • 440 • 290 1170 1090 1020 910
11 36 1820 1630 1490 1380 1290 • 150
3. Compres혀 ve Development Leng엔1， Idb: (5.11.2.2 - 22TCN - 272 - 05)
-
t'c Specified cornpressive strength of concrete at 28 days (MPa)
db- Diarneter of bar (mm)
\옮. . . . . ., 20 25 30
Idb (mm)
35 40 50
10 210 200 200 200 200 200
2 12
- 260 230 210 210 210 210
3
4
•4
•6
-‘
300
340
「 인
l 27고0 ; 250
280
250
280
250
280
250
딩 80
5 18 390 350 320 320 320 320
6 20 430 380 350 350 350 350
7 22 470 420 390 390 390 390
8 25 540 480 440 440 440 440
9 28 600 540 490 490 490 490
10 32 690 610 560 560 560 560
11 36 770 690 630 630 630 630
4. Lap Splices in Ten의on (5.11.5.3.1- 22TCN - 272 .. 05)

까1e length of lap for tension lap splices shall not be less than either 300 rnm or the following
for Class A, B or C splices:
Class A splice =1.0 Id
Class B splice =1.3 Id
Class C splice =1.71d
Table 5.11.5.3.1-1 - Classes ofTension Lap Splices

Ratio of Percent of As Spliced with Required Lap Length
JA ... ~、tifJ.ed)
50 75 100
(A. as require에
:::2 A A B
<2 B C c
No
~똥\ 20 25
Joint lenqth (mm) - Class A splice
30 35 40 50
10 300 300 300 300 300 300
2 12 300 300 300 300 300 300
3 14 340 340 340 340 340 340
4 16 380 380 380 380 380 380
5 18 460 430 430 430 430 430
6 20 560 500 480 480 480 480
7 22 680 610 560 530 530 530
8 25 880 790 720 660 620 600
9 28 1100 990 900 830 780 700
10 32 1440 1290 1170 • 090 1020 910
11 36 1820 1630 1490 1380 • 290 1150
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.6 -71 - of214
DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAI‘、rVORKS Reinforcing Steel - Section 8.6
No.
\‘dfcb\\、 20 25
Joint length_(rnrn) -Çlass B splice
30 35 40 50
10 390 390 390 390 390 390
2 12 390 390 390 390 390 390
3 14 440 440 440 440 440 440
4 •6 490 490 490 490 490 490
5 18 600 560 560 560 560 560
6 20 730 650 620 620 620 620
7 22 880 790 730 690 690 690
8 25 1140 1030 940 860 8• O 780
9 28 1430 1290 1170 1080 1010 910
10 32 1870 1680 1520 1420 1330 1180
11 36 2370 2120 1940 1790 1680 1500
돼\
No. Joint lenQth (mm) - Class C splice
20 25 30 35 40 50
10 510 510 510 510 510 510
2 12 510 510 510 510 510 510
3 14 580 580 580 580 580 580
4 16 650 650 650 650 650 650
5 18 780 730 730 730 730 730
6 20 950 850 820 820 820 820
7 22 1160 1040 950 900 900 900
8 25 • 500 1340 1220 1120 1050 1020
9 28 1870 1680 1530 1410 1330 1190
10 32 2450 2190 1990 1850 1730 1550
11 36 3090 2770 2530 2350 2190 1960
5. Lap Splices in Compression (5.11.5.5.1- 22TCN - 272 - 05)
No Bar DesiQ’n Joint length (mm)

10 300
2 12 350
3 14 410
4 16 470
5 •8 530
6 20 580
7 22 640
8 25 730
9 28 820
10 32 930
11 36 1050
6. Basic Hook Development Length (5.11.2 .4 .1- 22TCN - 272 - 05)

db = Diameter of bar (mm)
= Specified compressive strength of concrete at 28 days (MPa)
까lÚ’ Idh (mm)

\ \ fdcC\
11,1' 20 25 30 35 40 50
•O 220 200 180 170 160 150
2 12 270 240 220 200 190 170
3 14 310 280 260 240 220 200
4 16 360 320
----- 290 270 250 230
5 18 400 360 330 300 280 250
6 20 450 400 370 340 320 280
7 22 490 440 400 370 350 310
。9
ι。 ~V~
-‘」‘J‘:!.
28 630 560 510 470 440 400
10 32 720 640 580 540 510
455100
11 36 800 720 660 150 570

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WO웹‘s Prestressi뼈 g - Sectio l1 8.7
SECTION 8.7- 맑RESTRESSING
7.1 GENERAL
7. 1. 1 Description
This work shall consist of prestressing precast or cast-in-place concrεte by furnishing , placing,
and tensioning of prestressing steel in accordance with detai!s shown in the Contract
Documents and as specified in these Specifications. It includes prestressing by either the pre-
tensioning 01' post-tensioning methods or by a combination ofthese methods.
This work shall include the furnishing and instaIl ation of any appurtenant items nεcessary f01‘
the particular prestressing system to be used , incI uding but not Iimited to ducts , anchorage
assemblies , and grout used for pressure grouting ducts.
The fo Ilowing Standards in their Iatest edition shall be patiicularly applied to the wo1'ks
covered by this Specification:
• AASHTO M235 Stnndnrd Spccification fo 1' Epoxy Rcsin Adhcsivcs
e 22TCN 272-05 Bridge Design Specifications
• ASTM A 421 Standard Specification for Uncoated Stress Relieved Steel Wire for
Prestressed
• ASTM A416-99 Prestressed cable for concrete
• ASTM A722M-07 Technological specification for round high strength steel in

prestressed concrete
7. 1.3 Detail ofDesign
Where the design for the prestressing work is not fuIl y detai!ed in the Contract Documents , the
Contractor shaIl determine the detai!s or type of prestressing system for use and select
materials and detai!s confo1'ming to these Specifications as needed to satisfy the p1'estressing
requirements specified. The system selected shall provide the magnitude and distribution of
p1'est1'essing force and ultimate strength rεqui1'ed by the Contract Documents without
exceeding allowable tempo 1'ary stresses. Unless otherwise shown in the Contract Documents ,
a11 design procedures, coefficients and aIl owable stresses , friction , and prestress losses , as well
as tendon spacing and clearances, shall be in acco1'dance wÎth eithe1' 01' both the Specifications
fo 1' B1'idge Design 22TCN 272-05 and the Guide Specifications for Design and Construction
of SegmentaI Concrete Bridges , as applicable.
The prestressing may be performed by either pre-tensioning or post-tensioning methods unless

the Contract Documents only specify pre-tensioning detai!s. If the Contract Documents only

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Prestressing - Section 8.7
specify pre-tensioning detai1s , the use of a post-tensioning system shall be a1 10wed on1y if
comp1ete dεtai1 s of any necessary modifications are approved by the Engineer.
Where the effiεctive 01' working force or stress is specified in the Contract Documents , it shall
be considered to be the force or stress remaining in the prestressing stee1 after a11 10sses ,
including creep and shrinkage of concrete, e1astic shortening of concrete, re1axation of steel,
friction and take up or seating of anchorages , and all other 10sses peculiar to the method 01'
system of prestressing have taken p1ace or have been provided for. Where the jacking force is
specified in the Contract Documents , it shall be considered to be the force applied to the
tendon prior to anchorage and the occurrence of any losses , in c1 uding the anchor set 10ss.
7.2 SUPPLEMENTARY DRA찌'INGS
7.2.1 Working Drawings and Shop Drawings
Where the Contract Documents do not inc1ude comp1ete details for a prestressing system and
its method of installation , or where complete deta i1 s are provided in the Contract Documents
and the Contractor wishes to propose any change , thε Contractor shall prepare and submit to
the Engineer working drawings of the prestressing system proposed for use. Fabrication 01'
installation of prestressing materia1 shall not begin unt i1 the Engineer has approved the
drawings.
The working drawings of the prestressing system shal1 show complete details and
substantiating ca1cu1ations ofthe method, materia1s , and equipment the Contractor proposes to
use in the prestressing operations , including any additions or rearrangement of reinforcing
stee1 and any revision in concrete di l11 ensions from that specified in the Contract Documents.
Such details shall outline the method and sequence of stressing and shall inc1 ude complete
specifications and detai1s of the prestressing stee1 and anchoring devices , working stresses ,
anchoring stresses, tendon e10ngations , type of ducts , and all other data pertaining to the
prestressing operation , in c1 uding the proposed arrange l11 ent of the prestressing steel in the
members.
Working drawings shal1 be submitted sufficiently in advance of the start of thε affected work
to allow ti l11 e for review by the Engineer and cOITection by the Contractor of the drawings
without delaying the work.
Where required on the contract drawings or in the Contract Documents , the Contractor shall
prepare integrated drawings for al1 items embedded in the concrete. Ifthis provision includes a
requirement for additional engineering 01' design detailing, that requirement shal1 be c1 early
stated , as noted in Arti c1 e 7. 1. 3.
τ 덩테j5"âF집rrlg"sT6r
→ hδ랍'，:;ú배sÌü폐ñg"ãfíacô뼈합 장찌b"edTIrê섬함댄강lf흉흥흥Xp'ã뼈δ폐￦rfttS';펌elffît1짧←
and anchor bolts submitted by suppliers shal1 be reviewed and approved by the Engineer fo l'
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - D1 VISION 8 8.7 -74 - of214

DIVISION 8 ;_ STRUεTURAL 、，VORKS Prestressing - Sectioll 8.7
conformance with the design concept and compliance with the design drawings and
Specifications. Where Contract Document inforl11ation on post-tensioning systems is modified
by the Contractor, or where Contract Drawi l1gs do not provide detailed dimensional
information on the post-tensioning system, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate
the placement of the post-tensioning system with other embedments , and to correct any
interferences created by the Contractor-supplied PT system or other substitutions. The post-
tensioning layout shall govern the layout of the secondary non-prestressed reinforcement.
Where necessary, location of non-prestressed reinforcement should be adjusted to clear
tendons , su비 ect to the approval of the Engineer.
7.2.2 Integrated Drawings
Where required by the Contract Documents , in addition to all required working drawings , the
Contractor shall prepare composite placing drawings to scale and in sufficient detai! to show
the relative positions of all items that are to be embedded in the concrete, and their embedmení
depth , for the portions of the structure that are to be prestressed. Such embedded items shall
include the prestressing ducts , vents , anchorage reinforcement and hardware , reinforcing steel ,
anchor holts , earthquake restrainers , deck joint seill assernhlies , c1 rilinil B;e systems , utility
conduits , and other such itel11 s. Such drawings shall be in sufficient detail to confirm that there
will be no con f1i ct between the planned positions of any embedded items and that concrete
cover will be adequate. Where the Contract calls for the Contractor to develop drawings for
post-tensioning systems , or where the Contractor makes modifications to the post-tensioning
system(s) shown on the plans , the Contractor shall prepare working drawings for embedded
items or propose changes in the dimensions ofthe work as necessary to eliminate conflicts and
provide proper cover wherever conflicts arise with 01' due to the post-tensioning system.
Resolution of conflicts should follow the provisions of Aliicle 7.1.2. Any such revisions shall
be approved by the Engineer before work on any affected item is started. A lI costs involved
with the preparation of such drawings and with making the necessary l11 0difications to the
work resulting there from shall be borne by the Contractor. This will require integrated
drawings to be detailed to a scale and quality sufficient to show double-line reinforcement and
post-tensioning tendon deta i1 s in either two-dimensional 01' in complete three-dimensional
drawings.
7.3 MATERIAL
7.3.1 Prestressing Steel and Anchorages
Prestressing reinforcement shall be high-strength seven-wire strand, high-strength steel wire,

or high-strength alloy bars of the grade and type ca lI ed for in the Contract Documents and
shall conform to the requirements ofthe following Specifications.

7.3. 1. 1 Strand
High tensile steel strand with low-relaxation shall be weld free and stress relieved after
stranding and shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A416-99 or equivalent Steel Strand,
Un-coated Seven Wire Stress Relieved Strand for Pre-stressed Concrete. About Tensile and
yield strengths please see in Table 7 .3 .1.2 below.
7.3. 1.2 Bars
High strength steel bars shall confirm to the requirements of ASTM A 722M or equivalent for
Uncoated High Stren망h Bars for Pre-stressing Concrete. About Tensile and yield strengths
please see in Table 7.3 .1.2 below.
Table 7.3. 1. 2 - Properties ofPrestressing Strand and Bar
Tensile
Diameter Yield Strength f py
Material Grade or Type Strength
(mm) (MPa)
f pu (MPa)
1725 MPa (Grade 250) 6.3 5 to 15.24 1725 85%of 다u
1860 MPa (Grade 270) 9.53 to 15.24 1860 90%of 다u

Strand
except for low
relaxation strand
Type 1, Plain 19 to 35 1035 85%of 다u

Bar
Type 2, Deformed 15 to 36 1035 80%of 다u
'----- -
7.3.2 Post-Tensioning Anchorages and Couplers
AlI anchorages and couplers shall develop at least 96 percent ofthe actual ultimate stren양h of
the prestressing steel , when tested in an unbonded state , without exceeding anticipated set.
The coupling oftendons shall not reduce the elongation at rupture below the requirements of
the tendon itself. Couplers and/or coupler components shall be enclosed in housings long
enough to permit thε necessary movements. Couplers for tendons shall be used only at
locations specifical1 y indicated in the Contract Documents and/or approved by the Engineer.
Couplers shal1 not be used at points of sharp tendon curvature.
7.3.2.1 Bonded Systems
용판으브서
쳤
~’ l으noth c:: h f' tW f' fm l'I n f'.h ()1꺼2f!잉 꺼 n 서
‘t→~，~~~←으싫썩 ι‘‘ ~~~~ι;ε
the__zo ne_ where full nre야 ressio Q" force_is
←→ ι
required under service and ultimate loads shal1 norma l1 y be sufficient to develop the minimum
specified ultimate strength of the prestressing stee l. When anchorages or couplers are located
TECHNICALSPECIFICATl ONS - Dl VISION 8 8.7 - 76 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Pl'est l'essing - Section 8.7
at critical sections under uItimate load , the ultimate stren)맘h required of the bonded tendons
shalI not exceed the ultimate capacity of the tendon assembly, including the anchorage 01'
coupler, tested in an unbonded state.
Housings shal1 be designed so that complete grouting of alI ofthe coupler components wiII be
accomplished during grouting oftendons.
7.4 PLACEMENT OF DUCTS, STEEL, AND ANCHORAGE HARDWARE
7.4.1 Placement ofDucts
7.4. 1.1 General
Ducts shalI be rigidly supported at the proper locations in the forms by ties to reinforcing steel
which are adequate to prevent displacement during concrete placement. Supplementary
support bars shalI be used where needed to maintain proper alignrnent of the duct. Hold-down
ties to the forms shaIl be used when the buoyancy of the ducts in the fluid concrete 、:vould Iift
the reinforcing steel.
Polyethylene duct and metal duct for longitudinal or transverse post-tensioning in the f1anges
shall be supported at intervals ll0t to exceed 600 111m. Polyethylene duct in webs for
!ongitudina! post-tensioning shall be tied to stirrups at intervals not to exceed 600 mm , and
metal duct for longitudinal post-tensioning in webs shall be tied to stirrups at intervals not to
exceed 1200 mm.
Joints between sections of duct shalI be coupled with positive connections which do not resuIt
in angle changes at the joints and wi1l prevent the intrusion of cement paste.
After placing of ducts and reinforcement and forming is complete, an inspection shalI be made
to locate possible duct damage.
All unintentional holes or openings in the duct shall be repaired prior to concrete placing.
Grout openings and vents shall be securely anchored to the duct and to either the forms or to
reinforcing steel to prevent displacement during concrete-placing operations.
After installation in the forms , the ends of ducts shall at all times are sealed as necessary to
prevent the entry ofwater or debris.
During concrete placement for precast segmεnts ， mandrels shall be used as stiffeners in each
duct and shalI extend throughout the length ofthe segment being cast and at least 600 mm Înto
the corresponding duct of the previously cast segmεnt. The mandrels shall be of sufficient
rigidity to maintain the duct geometry within a 12 mm tolerance within the top flange , 25 111111
in webs , and within a 3 mm tolerance at the segmentjoints.
InstalIation of additional duct may be instructed by the Engineer where the Engineer deems
necessary. The Contractor shall , where instructed by the Engineer, install additional ducts
TECHNIεAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 8 8.7 -77 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Prestressing - Section 8.7
without additional cost to the Employer.
7.4.1.2 Duct Inlets and Outlets
A lI ducts for continuous structures shall be supplied with outlets at the high and low points of
the duct profile , except where the profile changes are small , as in continuous slabs , and at
additional locations as specified in the Contract Documents. Low-point outlets shall remain
open until grouting is started.
7.4. 1.3 Proving of Post-Tensioning Ducts
Upon completion of concrete placement, the Contractor shall prove that the post-tensioning
ducts are free and c1 ear of any obstructions or damage and are able to accept the intended post-
tensioning tendons by passing a torpedo through the ducts. The torpedo shall have the same
cross-sectional shape as the duct , and 6 mm smaller all around than the clear nominal inside
dimensions of the duct. No deductions shall be made to the torpedo section dimensions for
tolerances allowed in the manufacture OI’ fixing of the ducts. For straight ducts , a torpedo at
least 600 mm long shall be used. For curved ducts , the length shall be determined so that when
both ends touch the outermost wall of the duct , the torpedo is 6 mm clear of the innermost
wall. If the torpedo will not travel completely through the duct, the Engineer shall r멍 ect the
member, unless a workable repair can be made to clear the duct, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. Upon completion of the repairs , the torpedo shall pass through the duct easily, by
hand , without 1'eso1'ting to excessive effort 0 1' mechanical assistance.
7.4.2 Placement ofPrestressing Steel
7.4.2 ..1 Placement of Pre-Tensioning
P1'estressing steel shall be accurately installed in the forms and held in place by the stre.ssing
jack 0 1' temporary anchors and , when tendons a1'e to be draped , by hold-down devices. The
hold-down devices used at all points of change in slope of tendon tr메 ectory shall be of an
approved low-friction type.
Prestressing steel shall not be removed from its protective packaging until immediately prior
to installation in the forms and placement of concrete. Openings in the packaging shall be
resealed as necessary to protect the unused steel. While exposed , the steel shall be p1'otected as
needed to prevent corrosion.
7.4.2.2 Placement for Post-Tensioning
A lI prestressing steel preassembled in ducts and installed prior to the placement of concrete
shal1 be accurately placed and held in position during concrete placement.
ει ￥V'frel'f‘ f쯤'e"함용總않~한짧샌~각fl성℃장I￦rete-.ηfi::t정장elf펌~짤왔」장fl~m=SfflifF.
demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the ducts are free of water and debris

mVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Prestressing - Section 8.7
immediately p1'ior to installation of the stee l. The total number of strands in an individual
tendon may be pulled into the duct as a unit , or the individual strand may be pulled or pushed
through the duct.
Anchorage devices or block-out templates for anchorages shall be set and held so that their
axis coincides with the axis of the tendon and anchor plates are normal in all directions to the
tendon.
The prestressing steel shall be distributed so that the force in each girder stem is equal or as
required by the Contract Documents, except as provided herein.
7.4.2.2.1 Protection ofSteel 행er Installation
Prestressing steel installed in members prior to placing and curing of the concrete, or installed
in the duct , but not grouted within the time limit speci잠 ed below, shall be continuously
protected against rust or other corrosion by means of a corrosion irù1ibitor placed in the ducts
or directly applied to the stee l. The prestressing steel sha l1 be so protected until grouted 0 1'
encased in concrete. Prestressing steel insta l1 ed and tensioned in members after placing and
curing of the concrete and grouted within the time Iimit specified below wiIl not require the
use of a corrosion inhibitor described herein and rust which may for l11 during the interval
between tendon installation and g1'outing will not be cause fo 1' r태 ection of the stee l.
The permissible interval between tendon instal1 ation and grouting without use of a corrosion
inhibitor for various exposure conditions shaIl be taken as follows:
• Very Damp Atmosphere or ove1' saltwater 7 days
(Humidity> 70 percent)
• Moderate Atmosphere 15 days

(Humidity from 40 percent to 70 percent)
e Very Dry Atmosphere 2잉 days

(Hurnidity < 40 percent)
After tendons are placed in ducts , the openings at the ends of the ducts shall be sealed to
prevent entry of moisture.
Whenever electric welding is performed on or near members containing prestressing steel , the
welding ground shall be attached directly to the steel being welded. All prestressing steel and
hardware shall be protected from weld spatter or other damage.
7.4.3 Placement of Anchorage Hardware
The Contractor is responsible for the proper placement of all materials according to the design
documents ofthe Engineer-of-Record and the requirements stipulated by the anchorage device
supp Ii er. The Contractor shal1 exercÎ se al1 due care and attentio l1 in the placement of
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.7 -79 - of214

anchorage hardware, reinforcement, concrete and consolidation of concrete in anchorage

zones. Modifications to the local zone details vεrified under provisions of Article 5.10.9.7 .3 of
the Specifications for Bridge Design 22TCN 272-05 shall be approved by both the Engineer-
of-Record and the anchorage device supplier.
7.5 IDENTIFICATION
A l1 wire , strand , 0 1' bars to be shipped to the site shall be assigned a lot number and tagged for
identification purposes. Anchorage assemblies to be shipped shall be likewise identified.
Each lot of wire 0 1' bars and each reel of strand reinforcement shall be accompanied by a
Manufacturer’s Celtificate of Compliance, a mi11 celtificate, and a test report. The m il1
certificate and test report shall include:
• Chemical composition (not required for strand) ,
• Cross-sectional area,
• Yield and ultimate strengths ,
• Elongation at rupture ,
• Modulus of elasticity, and
• Stress strain curve for the actual prestressing steel intended for use.
A lI values certifiεd shall be based on test values and nominal sectional areas of the material
being celtified.
7.6 PROTECTION OF PRESTRESSING STEEL
AII prestressing steel shall be protected against physical damage and rust 0 1' other results of
cOITosion at all times from manufacture to grouting. Prestressing steel shall also be free of
deleterious material such as grease , oil , wax 0 1' paint. Prestressing steel that has sustained
physical damage at any time shall be rejected. The development of pitting 0 1' other results of
corrosion , other than rust stain , shall be cause for l'ejection.
Prestressing steel shal1 be packaged in containers 0 1' shipping forms for the protection of the
strand against physical damage and corrosion during shipping and storage. A corrosion
inhibitor which prevents rust 0 1' other results of corrosion shall be placed in the package 0 1'
form , 0 1' shall be incorporated in a corrosion inhibitor carrier-type packaging material , 0 1' when
permitted by the Engineer, may be applied directly to the steel. The corrosion inhibitor shaJl
have no deleterious effect 011 the steel 0 1' concrete 0 1' bond strength of steel to concrete 0 1' grou t.
Packaging 0 1' fO l'ms damaged from any cause shall be immediately I'eplaced 0 1' restored to
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - D1 VISION 8 8.7 - 80 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WOI해ζg Prestressing - Sectiolll 8.7
The shipping package or form shall be clearly marked with a statement that the package
contains high-stren힘h prestressing steeI , and the type of corrosion inhibitor used , in cI uding
the date packaged.
All anchorages , end fittings , couplers , and exposed tendons , which wilI not be encased in
concrete or grout 1n the completed work, shall be permanently protected against corrosion.
7.7 (Not used)
7.8 DUCTS
7.8.1 General
Ducts used to provide holes 01' voids in the concrete for the placement of post-tεnsioned
bonded tendons may be either fonned with removable cores or may consist of rigid 01' semi-
rigid ducts which are cast into the concrete.
Ducts formed with removable cores shalI be fOllned with no constrictions which would tend to
block the passage of grout. AII coring materiaIs shaIl be removed.
Ducts formed by sheath Ieft in place shaIl be a type that wilI not pe1'mit the intrusion of cement
paste. They shaIl transfer bond stresses as required and shaIl retain shape under the weight
(mass) of the concrete and shalI have sufficient strength to maintain their correct alignment
without visible wobble during placement of concrete.
7.8.2 Metal Ducts
Sheathing fo 1' ducts shalI be metal , except as provided herein. Such ducts shaIl be galvanized
ferrous metaI and shalI be fabricated with either welded or interlocked seams. Galvanizing of
welded seams will not be 1'equired. Rigid ducts shaIl have smooth inner walls and shall be
capable of being curved to the prope1' configuration without crimping or flattening. Semi-1'igid
ducts shall be corrugated and , when tendons are to be inserted after the concrete has been
placed, their minimum wall thic l<..ness shall be as fo!!ows: 0 .4 5 mm f0 1" ducts Iess than 01' equa!
to 66.7 mm diamete1', 0.60 mm fo 1' ducts greater than 66.7 mm diameter. When bar tendons a1'e
preassembled with such ducts , the duct thickness shalI 110t be Iess than 0.25 mm.
7.8.3 Duct Area
The provisions of Arti c1 e 5.4 .6.2, "Size of Ducts," of the Specifications fo 1' Bridge Design
22TCN 272-05 shall apply.
7.8.4 Duct Fittings
Coupling and t1'ansition fittings for ducts formed by sheathing shaIl be of either fe l1'ous metaI
01' P이yethylene ， and shall be air and wateltight and of sufficient strength to prevent distortion
or displacement ofthe ducts during concrete placement and/or tendon grouting.

A l1 ducts or anchorage assemblies shall be provided with pipes or other suitable connections at
each end ofthe duct for the injection of grout after prestressing. As specified in Article 7.4 .1.2,
"Duct lnlets and Outlets" , ducts shal1 also be provided with ports for venting or grouting at
high points and for draining at intermediate low points.
Vent and drain pipes shall be at least 20-mm diameter for strand and at least 12-mm diameter
for single-bar tendons and three 0 1' four strand f1 at duct tendons. Connection to ducts shal1 be
made with metallic or plastic 안
s truc
따tuπra
떠1 삶
fìas안tene
히r’.'s. The vents and drains shall be mortar tight,
taped as necessary, and constructed with either mechanical or slu'i따( wrap connections. Vents
and drains shall provide means for injection of grout th l'ough the vents and fo 1' sealing to
pl'event leakage of grout.
7.9 GROUT
Post-tensioning grout shall meet thε g1'out physical p1'opeliies stated in Article 7.9 .3, "Grout
Physical Properties". Grouts may be either a unique design for the project or supplied in a pre-
bagged form by a grout Manufacturer. Fo1' uniquely designed g1'outs , the cement and
admixtures ut i1i zed in the labo l'atory trial batches of the proposed grout shall not be changed
during the construction without retesting. F1'eshness of the cement should be in accordance
with AASHTO M 85 (ASTMC 150) , except as specified herein. Daily field testing ofthe grout
fo 1' the following propeliies shall be requi 1'ed:
• Fluidity,
• Bleed at 3 h, and
• Permeability.
A pre-approved , pre-bagged grout supplied by a grout Manufacture1' may be used as an

alternative to the required field testing. These grouts shall be p1'e-bagged in plastic Ii ned 0 1'
coated containers , stamped with date of manufactu1'e, lot number, and mixing instructions.
Any change of mate1'ials or mate 1'ial sources shall requi 1'e retesting and certification of the
confo1'mance of the grout with the physical p1'operties requirements. A copy of the Qua!ity-
Control Data Sheet for each lot number and shipment sent to the job site shall be provided to
the Contractor by the grout supplier and shall be furnished to the Engineer. Materials with a
total time from manufacture to usage in excess of six months shall be retested and certified by
the supplier before use , 0 1' shall be removed from the job site and replaced.
7.9.1 Mixing
The material shall be mixed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s recommendations and shall
The water used in the grout shall be potable , clean , and free of injurious quantities of
substances known to be harmful to Portland cement or prestressing stee l.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL woru\:.s Prestressing - Section 8.7
7.9.2 Grout Physical Properties
Grouts shall achieve a non-bleeding characteristic. Grout shall be non-bleeding and non-shrink
type. The Contractor shall propose the material of grout for the approval of the Engineer.
Requirements for grout properties are shown in Table 7.9.2- 1.
Table 7.9.2-1 Grout Properties
Property Test Value Test Method
Tota! Chloride lons Max. 0.08% by weight of cementitious ASTM

material C1152/C1152M
Fine Aggregate (i f utilized) Max. Size <No. 50 Sieve AASHTOM6
Volume Change at 28 days 0.0% to +0 .3% at 24 h and 28 days ASTMC 1090*

Expansion <2.0% f0 1" up to 3 h ASTMC 940
- ._-_._...-.._._---
Compressive Strength 28 day > 41 MPa ASTMC 942
(average of 3 cubes)
Initial Set of Grout Min. 3 h ASTM C 953

Max. 12 h
Fluidity Test** Min.lls ASTMC939

Efflux Time from Flow Cone Max. 30 S or
a) Immediately after Mixing Min. 9 S Max. 20 s ASTM C 939***
b) 30 min after Mixing Max. 30 S or ASTMC 939
with Remixing for 30 S
Max. 30 S ASTM C 939***
Bleeding at 3 h Max.O.O% ASTMC 940****
Permeability at 28 days Max. 2500 coulombs at 30 volts for 6 h AASHTOT277

」

*Modify ASTM C 1090 to include verification at both 24 h and 28 days.
**A대 ustments to f1 0w rates will be achieved by strict compliance with the Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
***Grout f1 uidity shall meet either the standard ASTM C 939 tlow cone test or the modified test
described herein. Modify the ASTM C 939 test by filling the cone to the top instead ofto the standard
leve l. The eftlux time is the time to fi l1 a 1.0-L container placed directly under the tlow cone.
****Modify ASTM C 940 to conform with the wick induced bleed test described below:
a) Condition dry ingredients , mixing wateζ prestressing strand and test apparatus overnight at 21 to
25 0 C.
b) Insert 800 mL ofmixed conditioned grout with conditioned water into the 1000 mL graduated
cy Ji nder. Mark the leve1 ofthe top ofthe grout.
c) Wrap the strand with 5.0-cm wide duct or eJectrical tape at each end prior to cutting to avoid
splaying ofthe wires when it is cut. Degrease (with acetone or hexane solvent) and wire brush to
remove any surface rust on the strand before temperature conditioning. Insert completely a 50.0-cm
Jength of conditioned , cleaned, seven wire strand 12.7-mm diameter into the 1000 mL graduated
cy Ji nder. Center and fasten the strand so it remains essentially paralJ e1 to the verticaJ axis ofthe
cy Ji nder (possibJy using a centraJi zer). Mark the JeveI ofthe top ofthe grout.
d) Store the mixed grout at the temperature range listed above in (a).
e) Measure the Jevel ofthe bleed water every 15 min for the first hour and hourly afterward for 2 h.
f) CalcuJate the bJeed wateζ if any, at the end ofthe 3-h test period and the resu Jt ing expansion per
the procedures outlined in ASTM C 940 , with the quantity ofbleed water expressed as a percent ofthe
initial grout volume. Note ifthe bleed water remains above or beJow the top ofthe grout.

mVI8ION 8-8τRUCTURAL WORKS Prestressing - Section 8.7
7.10 TENSIONING
7.10.1 General Tensioning Requirements
Prestressing steel shall be tensioned by hydraulic jacks so as to produce the forces shown in
the Contract Documents 0 1' on the approved working drawing with appropriate allowances for
alllosses. Losses to be provided for shall be as specified in Article 5.9.5 "Loss of Prestress" of
the Specifications for Bridge Design 22TCN 272-05. For post-tensioned work, the losses shall
also in c1 ude the anchor set loss approp1'iate fo 1' the anchorage systεm employed.
For pre-tensioned members , the strand stress prior to seating Uacking stress) shall not exceed
80 percent of the minimum ultimate tensile strength of the prestressing steel (0.801 's). This
allowable stress , which slightly exceeds the values shown in Table 7.1 0.1-1 (22TCN 272-05 ,
Atiicle 5.9 .3), may be pe1'mitted to offset seating Josses and to accommodate compensation fo 1'
tempe1'ature differences specified in Atiicle 7.10 .2, "Pre-tensioning Requirements."
For post-tensioned members , the standard stress prior to seating Uacking stress) and the stress
in the steel immediately after seating shall not exceed the values shown in Table 7.10.1-1 ,
unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer ofthe tendons or anchorage.
Table 7.10.1-1 Stress Li mits for Prestressing Tendo Tl s (Arti c1 e 5.9.3 of22TCN 272-05)
Tendon Type
-
Condition Stress-Relieved Low Relaxation Deformed High-
Strand and Plain Strand Strength Bars
High-Strength Bars
Pretensioning
I뼈l었e빼o tra뼈] 0.70 fpu 0.75 fpu -

(다t + ~fpES)
At service limit state after all

0.80 fpy 0.80 fpy 0.80 fpy
losses (fpe )
Posttensioning
1-'
Prior to seating - short-term
0.90 fpy 0.90 fpy 0.90 fpy
fs may be allowed
._------_
At anchorages and couplers
immediately after anchor set 0.70 f pu 0.70 f pu 0.70 다u
(fpt +MpES +MpA )
At end of the seating loss 0.70 f pu 0.74 다u 0.70 fpu
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVI8ION 8 8.7 - 85 - of214

zone immediately afte1'

ancho1' set (뮤t +.MpES +l!. f pA )
At se1'vice limit state afte1'

0.80 f py 0.80 f py 0.80 f py
losses (fpe )
Tensioning may be accomplished by pre-tensioning, post-tensioning, 01' the combined method;

as specified in the Contract Documents , 0 1' on the approved working drawings , or approved in
writing by the Engineer.
Du1'ing stressing of strand , individual wire fa i1 ures may be accepted by the Engineer, p1'ovided
not mo 1'e than one wire in any strand is b1'oken and the area of broken wi1'es does not exceed
two percent of the total area of the prestressing steel in the member.
7.10. 1. 1 Concrete Strength
Prestressing fo 1'ces shall not be applied 01' transferred to the concrete unt i1 the conc1'ete has
attained the strenl감h specified for initial st1'essing. ln addition, 때
c as았t.깨-p
미lac
야 e conc
야rete fo 1' other
than segmenta
려lly constructed br끼isges shall 110t be post-tensioned until at least 10 days after the
last conc1'εte has been placed in the member to be post-tensioned.
Longitudinal p1'estressing for conc1'ete deck ofthe main b1'idge shall be perfom1ed as specified
in the Plan.
7.10. 1.2 Prestressing Equipment
Hydraulic jacks used to st1'ess tendons shall be capable of providing and sustaining the
necessa1'y fo 1'ces and shall be equippεd with either a pressure gage or a Joad cell for
determining the jacking stress. The jacking system shall provide an independent means by
which the tendon elongation can be measured. The pressure gage shall have an accurately
reading dial at least 150 mm in diameter or a digital display, and each jack and its gage shall
be caJi b1'ated as a unit with the cylinder extension in the approximate position that it w iJ] be at
final jacking force , and sha J1 bε accompanied by a certified calibration chart 01' curve. The
load cell shall be calib1'ated and shall be p1'ovided with an indicator by means of which the
p1'estressing fo 1'ce in the tendon may be determined. The range of the load cell shall be such
that the lower ten percent of the Manufacturer's rated capacity will not be used in detennining
the jacking st1'εss. When approved by the Engineer, calibrated proving rings may be used in
lieu of load ce l1 s.
Recalibration of gages shall be repeated at least annua l1 y and whenever gage pressures and
elongations indicate materially different stresses.
after stressíng.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCτURALWORKS Prestressiillg - Section 8.7
7.10. 1.3 Sequence of Stressing
When the sequence of stressing individual tendons is not otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents or on the approved working drawings , the stressing of post-tensioning tendons and
the release of pre-tensioned tendons shall be done in a sequence that produces a minimum of
eccentric force in the member.
7.10. 1.4 Measurement of Stress
A record of gage pressures and tendon elongations for each tendon shall be provided by the
Contractor for review and approval by the Engineer. Elongations shall be measured to an
accuracy of 1.5 mm. Stressing tails of post-tensioned tendons shall not be cut o ft'‘ until the
stressing records have been approved.
The stress in tendons during tensioning shall be determined by the gage or load-cell readings
and shall be verified with the measured elongations. Calculations of anticipated elongations
shall utilize the modulus of elasticity, based onnominal area, as furnished by the Manufacturεr
for the lot of steel being tensioned , or as determined by a bench test of strands used in the
work.
All tendons shall be tensioned to a preliminary force as necessary to eliminate any take-up in
the tensioning systern before elongation readings are started. This preliminary force shal1 be
between 5 and 25 percent of the final jacking force. The initial force shall be measured by a
dynamometer or by other approved method , so that its amount can be used as a check against
elongation as computed and as measured. Each strand shall be marked prior to final stressing
to permit measurement of elongation and to ensure that al1 anchor wedges set properly.
It is anticipated that there may be discrepancy in indicated stress between jack gage pressure
and elongation. ln such event, the load used as indicated by the gage pressure shal1 produce a
slight overstress rather than unde1'stress. When a disc 1'epancy betwεen gage p1'essure and
elongation of more than five percent in tendons over 15 000 mm !ong or seven percent in
tendons of 15 000 mm 0 1' less in length occurs , the entire operation shal1 be carefully checked
and the sou1'ce of error determined and cOlTected before proceeding fUlther. When provisional
ducts are provided for addition of prestressing force in event of an apparent force deficiency in
tendons over 15 000 mm long, the discrepancy between the force indicated by gage pressure
and elongation may be increased to seven percent befo1' e investigation into the source of the
error.
7.10.2 Pre-tensioning Requirements
Stressing shal1 be accomplished by either single-strand stressing or multiple-strand stressing.

The amount of stress to be given to each strand shall be as shown in the Contract Documents
or on the approved working drawings.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 、，vORKS Prestressing - Section 8.7
All strands to be stressed in a group (multiple-strand stressing) shall be brought to a uniform

initial tension prior to being given their fuJJ pre-tensioning. The amount of the initial
tensioning force shall be within the range specified in Arti cJ e 7.10. 1.4 "Measurement of
Stress" , and shall be the minimum required to eJi minate all slack and to equaJi ze the stresses in
the tendons as determined by the Engineer. The amount of this force will be influenced by the
length ofthe casting bed and the size and numbe1' oftendons in the g1'oup to be tensioned.
D1'aped pre-tensioned tendons shalJ either be tensioned prutialJ y by jacking at the end of the
bed and prutially by up Ji fting 0 1' depressing tendons , 0 1' they shall be tensioned enti 1'ely by
jacking, with the tendons b비 ng held in thei 1' d1'aped positions by means of ro l1 ers , pins , or
other app 1'oved methods during the jacking operation.
Approved low-friction devices shall be used at a l1 points of change in slope of tendon

t1'며 ecto1'y when tensioning d1'aped pre-tensioned st1'ands , 1'egardless of the tensioning method
used.
If the load fo 1' a d1'aped st1'and , as determined by elongation measu1'ements , is more than five
pe1'cεnt less than that indicated by the jack gages , the st1'and shall be tensioned from both ends
of the bed , and the load as computed f1'om the sum of elongation at both ends shall agree
within five percent of that indicated by the jack gages.
When ordered by the Enginee 1', prestressing steel st1'ands in pre-tensioned members , if
tensioned individually, shall be checked by the Cont1'actor fo 1' loss of p1'estress not more than 3
h prior to placing c이lc1'ete fo 1' the membe1's. The method and equipment for checking the loss
of prestress shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. AII strands that show a loss of
prestress in excess of three percent shall be re-tensioned to the original computed jacking
stress.
Stress on all strands shaJl be maintained between anchorages until the conc 1'ete has reached the
compressive stren망h required at time of transfer of stress to concrete.
When prestressing steel in pre-tensioned members is tensioned at a tempe1'ature more than

14 0 C lower than the estimated temperature of the concrete and the prest1'essing steε1 at the
time of initial set of the conc1'ete , the calculated elongation of the prest1'essing steel shall be
inc1'eased to compensate fo 1' the loss in strεss due to the change in temperatu1'e, but in no case
shall the jacking st1'ess exceed 80 percent of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength
of the prestressing stee 1.
Strand splicing methods and devices shall be approved by the Engineer. When single-strand
jacking is used , only one splice per strand will be permittεd. When multi-st1'and jacking is
spliced. Spliced strands shall be similar in physical propelties , from the same source, and
shall have the same "twist" 0 1' "lay". Al1 splices shall be located outside of the prest1'essed units.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.7 - 88. of214

DlVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Prestressing - SectioIl 8.7
Side and f1ange forms that restrain deflection shall be removed beforε release of pretensioning
reinforcement ‘
Except when otherwise shown in the Con1ract Documents , all pretensioned prestressing
strands shall be cut off f1ush with the end of the member, and the exposed ends of the strand
and a 25-111111 strip of adjoining concrete shall be cleaned and painted. Cleaning shall be by
wire brushing or abrasive blast cleaning to remove al1 dirt and residue that is not firmly
bonded 10 the metal or concrete surfaces. The surfaces shall be coated with one thick coat of
epoxy res ll1.
7.10.3 Post-Tensioning Requirements
Prior to post-tensioning any member, the Contractor shall demons1rate to the satisfaction of
the Engineer that the prestressing steeI is free and unbonded in the duct.
AII strands in each tendon, except for those in f1at ducts with not more than four strands , sha Il
be stressed simuItaneously with a multi-strandjack.
Tensioning shaIl be accomp Iished so as to provide the forces and elongations specified in
design.
Except as provided herein 0 1' when specified in the Contract Documents 01‘ on the approved
working drawings , tendons in continuous post-tensioned members shalI be tensioned by
jacking at each end ofthe tendon. For straight tendons and when one end stressing is shown in
the Contract Documents , tensioning may be performed by jacking from one-end 01' both ends
ofthe tendon at the option ofthe Contractor.
7.10.4 Record of Stressing Operation
A 1'ecord ofthe fo lI owing post-tensioning operations shalI be kept for each tendon instaIl ed:
• Pr이 ect name, number,
G Contractor and/or subcontractor, ‘1
., Tendon Iocation, size and type,
• Date tendon was first instalI ed in ducts ,
e CoiI/reeI number fo 1' strands or wires and heat number for bars and wire ,
• Assumed and actuaI cross-sectionaI area,
• Assumed and actualmodulus of elasticity,
용 Date stressed,
• Jack and gage numbers per end oftendon ,
• Requiredjacking force ,
TECHNICALSPECIFICATl ONS - mVISION 8 8.7 - 89 - of214

• Gage pressures ,
• Elongations (anticipated and actual) ,
• Anchor sets (anticipated and actual) ,
• Stressing sequence (i. e. , tendons before and after this tendon) ,
• Stressing mode (one end/two ends/simultaneous),
• Witnesses to stressing operation (Contractor and lnspector),
• Date grouted , days from stressing to grouting, grouting pressure applied , injection end ,
• Record any other relevant information in c1 uding pourback and bitumastic installation
dates ,
The Engineer shall be provided with a complete copy of all stressing operations , and the jack
calibration forms.
7.10.5 Protection ofTendon
Within 4 h after stressing and prior to grouting, tendons shall be protected against corrosion or
harmful effects of debris by temporarily plugging or sealing all openings and vents; cleaning
rust and other debris from all metal surfaces which will be covered by the grout cap; and
placing the grout cap , including a seal , over the wedge plate unt i1 the tendon is grouted.
7.11 GROUTING
7.11.1 General
When the post-tensioning method is used , the prestressing steel shalJ be provided with
permanent protection and shall be bonded to the concrete by completεly filling the void space
between the duct and the tendon with grout. Grout should be injected from low points
pumping toward the high-point vent. For segmental , span-by-span construction, grout shall be
i매 ected through a grout inlet at mid span.
All grouting operations shall be carried out by experienced superintendents and foremen that
have received instructional training and have at least 3 years of experience on previous
pr이 ects involving grouting of similar type and magnitude.
A grouting operation plan shall be submitted for approval at least 28 days in advance of any
scheduled grouting operations. Written approval of the grouting operation plan by the
Engineer shal1 be required before any grouting of the permanent tendons in the structure.
At a minimum , the following items shall be provided in the grouting operation plan:
ι ‘ ι ;τ _;;W:",,,,,<,, ~~}<;;I<ØV'fg용 ~1'~~l'fIfl￥풍‘...‘."U'''~~학7'oV11:‘션@ε‘* 흥장\'W1iRi'~'R'El' 홍FI3'앙안'ff'g''6T'' 씌5췄R‘r"fH강→ ιrew~=
supervisor in conformance with this Specification.
TECHNICALSPECIFICATl ONS - DIVISION 8 8.7 - 90 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Prestressin똥 - Section 8.7
• Type , quantity, and brand of materials llsed ìn grouting including all required
certifications.
7.11.2 Preparation of Ducts
Each duct shall be air pressure tested prio1' to the installation of the p1'estressing steel into the
ducts. lf leaks are indicated during the test , the duct shall be repai1'ed to eliminate the leakage
or minimize the consequences of the leakage.
All ducts shall be clean and free of deleterious materials that would impair bonding 0 1'
interfere with grouting procedu1'es.
Ducts with conc1'ete walls (cored ducts) shall be flushed to ensure that the concrete is
thoroughly wεtted. Metal ducts shall be flushed if necessary to remove deleterious material.
Water used for flushing ducts may contain slack lime (calcium hydroxide) 0 1' quicklime
(calcium oxide) in the amount ofO.012 kg/L.
After ílushing, all water shall be blown out ofthe duct with oil-free compressed air.
7.11.3 Equipment
The grollting equiprnent for Type R grout materiill sha l1 in c1 11de a high-speed sheilr rnixer
capable of continuous mechanical mixing which wil1 produce a grollt free of lumps and
undispersed cement, a grout pump , and stand-by flushing equipment with water supply. The
equipment shall be able to pump the mixed grout in a manner which will comply with all
req U1 rements.
Accesso1'Y equipment which will provide fo 1' accurate solid and liquid measures shall be
p1'ovided to batch all materials.
The pump shall be a positive displacement type and be able to produce an outlet p1'essure of at
least 1.0 MPa. The pump should have seals adequate to prevent introduction of oil , air, 0 1'
other foreign substance into the grout, and to prevent loss of grout 0 1' water.
A p1'essu1'e gage having a full-scale 1'eading of no greater than 2.0 MPa shall be placed at some
point in the g1'out line between the pump outlet and the duct inlet.
The grouting equipment shall contain a screen having clear openings of 3 .3 5 111111 maximu111
size to screen the grout prio1' to its introduction into the grout pump. If a grout with a
thixotropic additive is used , a screen opening of 4.75 mm is satisfactory. This screen shall be
easily accessible for inspection and cleaning.
The g1'outing equipment shall utilize gravity feed to the pump inlet from a hopper attached to
and directly over it. The hopper must be kept at least partially full of grout at all times during
the pumping operation to prevent air fro111 being drawn into the post-tensioning duct.

Under normal conditions, the grouting equipment shall be capable of continuously grouting
the largest tendon on the project in no more than 20 min.
7.11.4 Mixing ofGrout

Water shall be added to the mixer first , followed by cement grout.
Grout shall be mixed in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions using a colloidal
mixer to obtain homogeneous mixture. A f1 uidity test shall be performed on the mixed g1'o ut
prior to beginning the injection process. Ta1'g et f1 0w rates as a function ofmixe1' type used and
ambient tempe1'atu1'es shall be obtained from the grout Manufacturer. The grouting p 1'ocess
shall not be stalied until the p 1'oper grout properties have been obtained.
Mixing shall be of such duration as to obtain a unifo 1'm , tho 1'oughly blended g1'out, without
excessive temperatu1'e increase 01' loss of expansive propeπies of the admixture. The grout
shall be continuously agitated until it is pumped.
Water shall not be added to increase grout f1 0wability which has been decreased by delayed
use ofthe grout.
7.11.5 Injection of Grout

A I1 grout vents shall be opεned befo 1'e grouting staπs. Injection and 태 ection vεnts with
positive shut-offs shall be provided. Grout shall be al1 0wed to f1 0w from the first i매 ection
vent until any residual f1 ushing water or entrapped air has been removed prior to closing that
vent. Remaining vents shal1 be closed in sequence in the same manner. A continuous f1 0w of
grout at a 1'ate between 10 000 mm and 15 000 mm of duct per min shal1 be maintained.
The pl1 mping pressure at the injection vent should not exceed 1.0 MPa. NormaJ operations
shall be performed at approximately 0.5 MPa. If the actual grouting pressure exceeds the
maximum a l1 owed , the i매 ection vent shalJ be closed and the grout shal1 be i매 ected at the next
vent that has been , or is ready to be c1 osed , as long as a one-way f1 0w is maintained. Grout
shall not be injected into a sl1cceeding vent fi'om which grout has not yet f1 owed.
Grout shall be pumped through the duct and continuously wasted at the 엄 ection vent until no
visible slugs of water or air are ejected. A f1 uidity test shall be performed on each tendon in
accordance with Article 7.9.2 , "Grout Physical Prope1'ties" , measuring the grout f1 uidity from
the discharge outlet. The measured gro l1t eff1 ux time shal1 not be faster than the eff1 ux time
measured at the inlet or the minimum eff1 ux time established in Article 7.9.2. If the grout
eff1 ux time is not acceptable, additional grout sha l1 be discharged from the discharge outlet.
Grout eftlux time sha l1 be tested. This cycle shall be continued until acceptable grout tluidity
is achieved. 0 ensure that the tendon remains fi l1 ed with grout, the ejection and i 매 ection vents
ττ
~~、。 11 h " {、 l{'\ C' A c1 in CPfll1P l'H':"P ... t"A C'.l、。r- tluol ‘，
샤S영~-"，f_'N_ _~.→~영~∞"""~←‘
l1nrlA1. 't、l"ACCJlt"J:' _'u.l hpn_th p, tP，n.r1f\t、 rh ’r- t
ι1 끼~“‘→~"~‘"'-'Cf‘ ~=-~~~_?，~，*，0Mil'"，，.，，，，，，h‘ι~m응용~흥~':"'%Æ_}i\;;;?Æ~-W~WJiitiAÇ잉JW~‘X훌
l C' r- n1、‘ nll::do.lu
γτ
filled with grou t. The positive shut-offs at the injection and 멍 ection vents shall not be
removed or vents opened until the grout has set.
TECHNICALSPECIFICATl ONS - D1 VlSION 8 8.7 - 92 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WO없‘s Presh'cssing - Sectioll 8.7
7.11.6 Temperature Considerations
In temperatures below OOC , ducts shall be kept fì'ee of water to avoid damage dlle to freezing.
The tempeI 없llre of the concrete shall be 2 0 C or higher from the time of grouting until job
cured 50-mm cubes of grout reach a minimum compressive strength of 5.5 MPa. Grollt shall
not be above 32 0 C during mixing or pumping. If necessary, cool the mixing water.
7.11.7 Vertical Grouting
In lieu of a positive shut-off, vertical 0 1' near vetiical tendon ducts for grouting shall terminate
in reservoirs at the upper-most point. The reservoir shall have sufficient capacity to store
excess grout bleed water. Visible grout level shall be maintained in t Ì1e reservoirs. The
reservoirs shaIl be maintained until the grout has se t.
Grout shall be injected at a rate of 5000 mm of duct per min.
7.11.8 Post - Grouting Installation
Vacuum grouting shall be used to fill any voids that expose strands discovered in the grouting
process.
Where possible, all anchorages and hi쌀l-point vents shall be drilled a싫 probed 48 11 a닫er
grollting, until the Engineer is assllred that no bleed water or subsidence (settlement) voids
exist. After the Engineer is assured that voids do not exist , only one or two anchorages per
span shall be drilled and probed to ensure quality grollting. Any voids discovered ShOllld be
filled immediately with the approved gro따.
7.11.9 Finishing
The following requirements apply:
• Valves , caps and vent pipes shall not be removed or opened until the grout has set.
• The ends of vents shall be removed at least 25 mm below the concrete surface after the
grout has set.
• The void shall be filled with epoxy grollt. All miscellaneous rnaterial used for sealing
grout caps shall be removed before caITying out further work to protect end anchorages.
7.11.10 Protection of End Anchorages
Permanent grout caps constructed from either stainless steel or fiber reinforced polymer
should be specified. The following requirements apply:
• Within seven days upon completion of the grouting, the anchorage of post-tensioning
bars and tendons shall be protected as indicated in the Contract Documents. The
application of the elastomeric coating may be delayed up to 90 days after grouting.
Plastic or stainless steel threaded caps shall be used to plug all grout inlets/outlets. A

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Prestressing - Section 8.7
sand-filled epoxy grout suitable for machinery base plate shall be used to construct all
pour- backs located at anchorages of expansion joints or other areas exposed to the
elements.
• All laitance , grease , curing compounds , surface treatments , coatings , and oils shaIl be
removed by grit blasting or water blasting using a minimum 70.0 MPa nozzle pressure.
The surface shall be f1 ushed with water and blown dry. Surfaces shaIl be clean , sound,
and without any standing water. ln case of dispute , ACI 503 shaIl be followed for
substrate testing and a minimum of 1.2 MPa tension (pull-offvalue) be developed.
• Epoxy shall be mixed and applied as per Manufacturer’s cunent standard technical
guidelines. AIl pour-backs shall be in leak proof forms creating neat lines. The pumping
of epoxy grout shall be permitted for proper installation. Forms shall be constructed to
maintain a liquid head to insure intimate contact with the concrete surface. Vents shall
be used as needed to provide for the escape of air to insure complete filling of the forms.
• The exposed surfaces of pour-backs or grout caps , except on transverse tendons , shall be
coated with an elastomeric coating system having a thickness of 760 to 1140 μm.
Concrete, grout caps or other substrates shall be structurally sound , c1 ean, and dry.
Concrete shall be minimum of 28 days old. Laitance , grease , curing compounds , surface
treatments , coatings , and oils shall be removed by grit blasting or water blasting using a
minimum 70.0 MPa nozzle pressure to establish the anchor pattem. Surfaces shall be
blown with compressed air to remove the dust or water.
11 600 x 1200 mm concrete test block shal1 be constructed with a similar surface texture to
the surfaces to be coated and a vertical face shall be coated with the elastomeric coating
system chosen. The number of coats required achieving a coating thickness between 760
to 1140 μm without runs and dlψs shal1 be determined. he elastomeric coating shal1 be
mixed and applied as per Manufacturer’s current standard technical specifications.
Spray or ro l1 er application may be permitted; spray application is preferred. Coatings
shall be applied using approved and experienced personnel with a minimum of 3 years
experience applying similar polyurethane systems. Credentials of these persons shall be
submitted to the Engineer for review and consideration for approval.
7.11.11 Construction Traffic and Operations Causing Vibrations
For the designated period of time after grouting of a tendon begins , vibrations from all sources
such as moving vehicles , jackhammers, compressors , generators , etc. , that are operating within
the affected bridge superstructure shall be eliminated and pile driving and soil compaction
time shall be taken as 4 hours for prequalified anti-bleed grout and 24 h for plain 밍‘out. The
affected bridge superstructure shall be taken as that portion of the total superstructure that is
TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.7 - 94 - of214

mVISION 8 - S1’ RtJ CTURAL WORKS Prestressing - Sectiora 8.7
100 m up or down-station of the ends of the span in which grouting is taking place.
7.12.1 Measurement
The prestressing steel in cast-in-place concrete shall be measured by weight (ton) of the stee l.
The weight of prestressing steel shall be based on the net length installed between bearing
plates of anchoring devices and the weights of materials as given in the appropriate
specifications.
The prestressing of precast concrete deck w i11 be measured by ton based on the computed
weight for each type and size of prestressing steel such as strand, wire or bars installed and
stressed in concrete. The weight of prestressing steel shall be computed by measuring the
anchor-to-anchor length along prestressing steel based on the plans or authorized by the
Engineer. No measurement shall be made for excess len암h beyond anchors required fo 1'
stressing and anchoring. Ducts , su띠ppo야rπts ， anc
이hOl
아l'ζ coup
에le
앙rsι’ stressing and grout디i띠
ng 、wo
이아l'너'k shall
no
야tb
야 e mea
잃sured separately but the costs thereof shall be deemed to be included in the weight
of prestressing stee l.
7.12.2 Payment
No separate payment shall be made for prestressing precast rnembers except precast concrete
dec k. Payment for prestressing precast members except precast concrete deck shall be
considered as included in the relevant pay items f‘or construction and completion of such
prestressing precast members , as mentioned in Section 8.5 “ Concrete Structures"
The contract unit price paid for prestressing cast-in-place conc1'ete shall include fu lI
compensation fo 1' furnishing all labor, materials , tools , equipment, anchorage system and
incidentals; and for doing all wo1'k involved in furnishing, placing, and tensioning the
prestressing steel in cast-in-place concrete structures, complete in place, as specified in the
Contract Documents and in these Speciíìcations, and as directed by the Enginεer.
Full compensation fo 1' furnishing and placing additional conc1'ete and deformed bar 1'einforCÍng
steel required by the paπicular system used; ducts , anchoring devices , distribution plates , 0 1'
assemblies and incidental palis; for furnishing samples for testing, working drawi l1 gs , and for
p1'essure groutil1g ducts shall be cO l1sidered as included in the contract unit price per kg paid
for p1'estressing cast-in-place concrete or in the contract price for furnishing precast members ,
and 110 additional compensation will be allowed therefore.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Prestressing - Sectio n, 8.7
The items ofwork payab1e under this provision a10ng with their units shall be as follows:
Unit of
Measurement
8.07-01 Prestressing ofPy1on Crossbeam ton
8.07-02 Longitudina1 Prestressing of Concrete Deck ton
8.07-03 Prestressing bar ofPy1on (d47 mm-d75 mm) ton

._--‘_.
8.07-04 Prestressing of PC Headstock of pier of Approach bridge ton
τττ，%~~τ:ε 등-ιsε←→으→ι샤←→극등 ιi융응등←드 ι 를 _æ ".,_'''' ~~，，~ ^<" .""，~ ‘‘’‘“‘~→→rι→→ι ←~→ ι=，.，，'-，，~~，.，~ "''"'~~'~'''>'V'~_ 三;시→

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WO없κs Steel Structure - Sectio Il. 8.8
SEεTION 8.8 - STEEL STRUCTURE
8.1 BRIDGE STEEL WORK
This work shaIl consist of the supply, fabrication , deIi very to the site and erection , of all steel
superstructures of bridges , in strict accordance with the Specifications and Drawings 0 1' as
estab !i shed by the Engineer.
8.2 STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings 0 1' elsewhere in this Specification, the fabrication
and erection of the steel superstructure shaIl conform to the requirements of the Specifìcation
for Bridge Design 22TCN 272-05 , AASHTO LRFD Bridge Construction Specification-2007
and AWS D1. 5-2002 “ Bridge Welding Code ".
In case of conflict between the above referenced specifications and this Specification, this
Specification shalI prevai l.
8.3 !NSPECTION A1、 PLACE OF FABR!CAT!인 N
The Engineer has authority to inspect, examine and test materials , workmanship and
performance of any part of the works at the manufacturer ’ s works or the site of fabrication.
The Contractor shall furnish alI facilities for the inspection of material and workmanship at the
place of fabrication and the Engineer and the Employer or their delegate shaIl be alI owed free
access to aIl parts ofthe premises upon request.
AIl expenses for the inspection of material and workmanship at the place of fabrication
including transportation cost, including business cIass airline ticket and per diem , shalI be paid
by the Contractor and shalI be deemed to be incIuded in unit p1'ice fo 1' 1'elevant pay items in
Bill of Quantities.
Inspection for each different fabrication process as indicated in Table 8.1 shaIl be carried out
by a 3 member team of the Engineer and the Employer. In case of same structure being
fab 1'icated in diffe1'ent fab 1'ication shop, inspection sha lI be made fo 1' such fab 1'ication shop by
same manne1' as mentioned in this clause. Each trip is typically 5-day work at the Contractor ’s
fabrication shop.
The Engineer shall certify that alI wo 1'ks up to the stage of fabrication and shop painting after
t1'ial assemblage has been carried out in accordance with this Specification and the app 1'oved
shop drawings.
The Enginee 1'’s celiificates shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his obligatiol1 s under the
Contract.
TECHNICAL SPECIHCATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.8 - 97 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 씨10RKS Steel Structure - Section 8.8
During fabrication , inspections by the Engineer and/o1' Employer shall be performed as shown
in the table below as minimum , however, when the Enginee1' may 1'equire additional
inspections in the opinion ofthe Enginee1'.
Table 8.1 Type of Inspection and Minimum Frequencies
Type of Inspection Location of Inspection Number ofTrips
Inspection prior to first fabrication fo 1'

The Contractor ’ s shop Once
QC/QA auditing
Welding of mock assembly of cable

The Cont1'acto1'’s shop Once
ancho1'age at girder and of cable anchor box
뉴---
Trial assemblage of edge girder, C1'ossbeam

The Contractor ’ s shop Twice
and cable anchor box
Shop painting of gi 1' der The Contracto1'’s shop Once
8.4 INSPECTION BY THE CONTRACTOR
Ir1'espective of the appointment of an Inspecto1', the Contractor shall himself inspect or have
inspected all materials , shop work and field work to determine that the requirements of the
Drawings and Specifications are met and that the Wo1'ks are carried out in a first class and
wo1'kmanlike manne1'.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary assistances , labor, materials , electricity, fuel , stores ,
apparatus and instruments and any other materials required by the cost borne by the
Contractor to ensure that all testing and inspection by the Engineer or the Inspector can be
carried out efficiently.
8.5 SUBCONTRACTOR
The Contractor shall not sublet the fabrication of structural steelwork 0 1' any pa1't thereof
without prior consent in writing of the Engineer. Only those workshops that have been
specifically approved by the Engineer to carry out the Work will be authorized to pe1'form the
work on the structural stee l.
8.6 SUBMITTAL OF OVERALL SCHEDULE
In advance to the submission of Method Statement, the Contractor shall submit his proposed
schedulε for all shop drawing submissions , materials submissions , fabrication processes and
reporting system including email communicationsfromfab1. icationshoptotheEnginee 1..In
or re-submittal for his reviεw.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Steel Structure - Sectio l1l 8.8
8.6.1 Necessity of Approvals

The Contractor sha Il not proceed with any purchase or fabrication of materials unt i1 the
relevant Shop Drawings have been approved by the Engineer. Prior to the use of any materials ,
the COlltractor sha l1 submit for the Engineer ’s approval , two copies of the Manufacture ’s
Certificates for:
• Bolts, nuts , washers , and filler for welding, and
• Mill test certificates for structural steel.
These shall inc1 ude the names and locations of steel mi1l s, analysis results of chemical and
physical properties, and shall be properly correlated to the various grades of structural steel to
be used in the project.
8.6.2 Submittal of QC/QA Plan and Welding Plan
Prior to fabrication , the Contractor shall submit the Quality COlltrol Plan and Quality
Assurance Plan ofthe Contractor ’s fabrication shops for the Engineers approval.
The Contractor shall 110t proceed with any welding until the Engineer has approved his
Method Statement for Welding Works which shaIl incI ude the following.
• All information on welding procedures in c1 uding equipment, additives and preheating

during the welding operations.
• Detai1 s of non-destructive testing methods to be used for specific joints.
6\ Precautions with regard to welding shrinkage.
• Possible treatment of completed welds by grinding with indication of grinding direction ...
• Procedures and program of welding sequence for each component and for welding
components together.
After the approval of the Method Statement, welding procεdüï‘es and sequences shal1 be
followed without deviation.
The Engineer wi11 require confirmation as to the suitability of the details contained in the
Method Statement for Welding Works , by tests as prescribed in the AWS D1. 5 “Stand，α rd
Qualification Procedure ".
8.6.3 Submittal of Connection Records
The Contractor shaIl maintain records of shop welding procedures, welders employed with
date of qualification and identification symb이. Records shaIl also be maintained of all bolts
tested and the corresponding torque values if torque control method is employed. These
records shall be freely available for the use ofthe Inspection Authority and shall be submitted
to the Engineer 011 completion of all shop fabrication work.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Steel Structure - Section 8.8
8.6.4 Submittal of As-built Drawings
The Cont1'actor shall submit the As-built drawings for steel structure works. These drawings
shall include details of actual camber achieved , detai1 s oftemporary b1'acing left in the work,...
8.7 MATTERS TO BE CONSIDERED BYTHE CONTRACTOR
In the preparation of shop drawings and in all his fabrication works the Contractor shall give
careful consideration to the following.
• The need fo 1' trial assemblage at the fab 1'ication shop
• The weight and size of elements for transportation between fabrication yard and the
constructíon síte
• Temperature variation between the fabrication yard and the site temperature , assumed
for the purposes of the Contract Drawings
• The need for certain dimensions of structural steel work to be verified by measurement
at slte
• Prohibition of the use of site welding, unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Document
8.8 MATERIALAND WORKMENSHIP
Steel shall be ordεred at the earliest possible time in consultation with the Suppliers and
according to the fabrication priorities. The order shall be submitted to the Suppliers with
identification note such as the name of the project for which the steel is to be used and the
nature of the work e.g. “ welding steel plate girde1'''. P1'ior to the purchase order being made,
the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a copy summary ofthe order.
StructuraJ steel shall be newly rolled and shall confonn to the 1'equirements of the following
specifications.
8.9 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS
Plate and shape shall comply with ASTM 0 1' equivalεnt Korean standard (KS) and shall be of
the g1' ades shown on the Drawings.
All steel shal1 be delivered with certificates and delivery sha J1 be in accordance with the
requi 1'ement of the cu1'1'ent edition of ASTM and equivalent KS incJuding the requirement to
produce analysis , carbon equivalent‘ tolerances , inspection , testing, and marking.
The Contractor must submit details of welding procedures , welding conditions but not limited

DIVISION 8 - STRlJCTURAL 뻐IORKS Steel St l'l.lI cture - Section 8.8
8.10 BOLTS
High stl'ength steel bolts with associated nuts and end washers shall comply with ASTM 0 1'
equivalent KS and shall incorporate load indicating devices acceptable to the Engineer.
Commercial grade bolts and screws shall comply with KS B 1002 “ High Tensioning
Hexangular Bolts, Nuts and Washers" designated as F 1OT. Nuts shall comply with KS B 1012
based on the approval from the Engineer.
8.11 FILLER METAL REQUIREMENTS
Filler metal requirements shall conform to AWS D 1. 5, Bridge Welding Code 0 1' equivalent
standard. If the base metal is not included in the group of ASTM steεI covered by TabJe 4. 1.1
of AWS D 1. 5, then the properties of the welding metal used for filler material shal1 correspond
to the properties ofthe base metal used for the parts to be welded.
The Contractor shalJ in this respect submit his proposal for the Engineer ’ s approva1.
AlI materials to be used for welding shall be of a recognized manufacture , and the Contractor
shall when requested by the Engineer furnish manufacturer ’ s celiification that the eJectrodes
and othe l' products used for welding meet tbe l'equirement ofthis Specification.
8.12 STUD SHEAR CONNECTOR
Stud shear cormector shall conform to KS B 1062, in which the minimum yield point of 235
MPa and the minimum tensile strength of 400 MPa, and to the applicable requirements of
AWS D 1. 5, Section 4 , Paπ F, Plug and Slot Welds based on the approval from the Engineer.
Stud shear connector shalJ be welded to the upper flange of the edge girders and cable anchor
box exterior. The upper 100 mm ofthe dowels sha11 be hot dip galvanized.
The method of testing and requirement of stud welding shal1 be in accordance to Section 7.2
and 7 .3 of AWS1.5D
8.13 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
AlI steel whether fabricated 0 1' not shalJ be stored above the ground upon platforms , skids , 0 1'
other supports. It shall be kept free from diπ， grease and other foreign matter, and shall be
properly protected in order to protect the material fl'om cOITosion. Excessively rusted bent 0 1'
damaged steel will be r멍 ected.
Protected 0 1' painted steel surfaces shall not be stored with the faces in contact but shall be
separated by spacers.
8.14 WO삐‘MANSHIP
Except as otherwise denoted herein 0 1' on the Drawings , all work shall be executed in
accordance with the relevant sections ofthis Specification.

DIVISION 8 - STRlJCTURAL WORKS Steel Structure - Section .8.8
The Contractor shal1 be responsible for any damage caused to other components of the
structure including the substructures , by his operations for the duration of this Contract. In
particular, he shall take all necessary precautions to minimize concrete splash onto completed
steel work or rust staÍ1iing of concrete due to erected steel work. The Contractor sha11 clean
and/or repair all stains and other damage to completed work, before acceptance.
8.15 TOLERANCES
The Contractor shall , through appropriate planning and continuous measurements in the
workshop and at the erection site ensure that the tolerances given in these Special
Specifications are strictly observed. The Engineer sha11 require any specific working
procedure changes in case such procedure appears not to afford sufficient security against
exceeding the tolerances.
The Contractor is fuJJy responsiblε for the calculation and provision of the necessary camber
in the preassembled εlements to obtain the correct levels in the completed bridge, duly
considering the applied erection procedure and the sequence in the instal1 ation of the various
dead load components.
The roadway levels given on the Drawings or defined by the given inclination and curvature
are the required roadway levels at top of asphaJt surfacing in bridge axis of the completed
bridge , when loaded only with the dead loads of the installed and completed structure. In
fixing the geometry of the superstructure, the Contractor shall make compensation for the
difference between ambient temperature and temperature of the bridge in normal condition of
24 0 C.
8.15.1 Templates and Measurements
The Contractor shall supply all templates for dri1l ing hole , jigs and other appliances necessary
to ensure the accuracy of the work.
8.15.2 Cutting of Steel
The stress of direction of major members including edge girders and floor beams shall be
same as direction ofrol l.
Edges may be cut by machining, flame cutting 01' shearing, but edges to be welded shall
comply with the welding clauses ofthis Specification. Cut edges shal1 be free of gauges , bu!TS
and other defects which are greater than 5 mm deep , or which would more than 5 111m deep on
otherwise satisfactory surfaces shall be re l11 0ved by machining or grinding. Correction to
defects shall be làired to the surface with a slope not exceeding 1 in 10.
§용걷융-‘← ιι” ‘ ‘* ιτ ‘
n、J't <Y O ，，"，
‘ γ ?iÇ;;;;~팩효~것훌 :=-'e'0ε~~ι
..... 11t+; .,.‘(T r、f' C' t(:) 1 ';U"I서
j:lo U/ ，o l 서 lYI
τι
et 1 애 311 be ‘nenrut
,:, í.e.c:Lnro:v ilÌ e lÌ ::1 <;l11 ooth ::I nlÌ 1"1>0"111 ::1 r
~ι“”“ -‘훌 ε9 흐‘’“‘ ει ι 응 τ 까
surface free frorn cracks and notches is secured , and provided that an accurate profile is
secured by the use of a mechanical guide. Free-hand oxygen cutting shall be done only where

mVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Steei Structuue - Section 8.8
In all oxygen cutting the cutting f1 ame shall be a이justed and manipulated so as to avoid cutting
inside the prescribεd lines. The surface roughness of oxygen cut surfaces shall be equivalent to
or better than the standard classes of rep Ii cas of f1 ame cut surfaces as existing 011 KS B 016.
Roughness exceeding allowable values and occasional notches or gouges not more thal1 2 mm
deep shall be removed by machining or grinding. Cut surfaces and edges shall be left free of
adhering slag. Corrections of defects shall be faired to the oxygen cut surface with a slope not
exceeding 1 in 10. Defects of oxygen cut edges sha Jl not be repaired by welding except with
the express approval of the Engineer for occasional notches or gouges less than 5 mm deep.
Such weld repair shall be made by suitably preparing the defects , welding with low hydrogen
electrodes not exceeding 4 mm in diameter, observing the applicable requirements of the
welding clauses of this Specification, and grinding the completed weld s11100th and f1 ush with
the adjacent surface to pl'O duce a work:m anlike finish.
8.15.3 Straightening of Steel
AlI material before being assembled shall be straightened or formed to the specified
configuration by methods specified below.
ε ‘
Straightening or bending of either fabricated or un-fabricated steel , if necessary, shall be done
by means of steady pressure applied by roll or press. Strai방ltening and bending shal1 not be
done by hammering or, unless the Engineer ’ s approval has been obtained by heating. If
straightening by heating is a l1 owed , the steel shall in no case be heated to a higher temperature
than 600 0 C as measured by indicating crayons , liquids 이. bimetal thermometers. After heating ,
the metal shall be cooled slowly in air without any forced coo Iing. Palts to be heat
straightened shall be substantially free of stress and fro111 external forces , except stresses
resulting from mechanical means used in co떼 unction with the application of heat.
F잉llowing the straightening of bend or buck!e , the surface of the metal shall be careful! y
inspected for evidence of fracture. Depending on the location in the Work, the Engineer shall
have the right to reject the metal or to direct that the defects be repaired in a manner that shall
be approved by the Engineer. The cost of replacement of repai l' shall be paid by the Contractor.
8.15.4 ßending
Bending of plate may be machined by cold pl'ocesses, provided that the bending outer radius is
at least ten (10) times the thi cImess of the plate
Quenched and Tempered Steel and Thermo-Mechanical Control Processed Steel shall not be
applied heat bending.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Steel Structure - Section 8.8
8.15.5 Welding
All welding shall be planned and executed using the most suitab!e materials and working
methods for the particular purpose.
Welding requirements shall in all respects conform to the following sections of AWS D 1. 5,
Bridge Welding Code
Al1 welding shall be executed by skilled, experienced welders holding valid welder
examination qualifications based on the qualification tests specified in Part B of Section 5 of
AWS D 1.5, Bridge Welding Code 0 1' similar internationally recognized qualific없ion tests. A
welder shall be qualified for εach process used.
Prior to commencement of any welding, the joint shall be careful1 y freed from rust, scale, slag,
and burrs. Where two welds for structural reasons have to cross each other the former has to
be ground flush. Where a f1 ush surface is required, the excess weld metal shall be ground.
During the assembly work, the components shall be held in position and supported in such a
manner that no unfavorable inherent stresses or deformation shall develop. Dril1 ing of holes
for temporary assembly for welding purposes shall not be accepted.
Minimum preheating and inter-pass temperature shall comply with the welding procedure in
question and shall be approved by the Engineer.
Before the fabrication of the cable anchor box and the cable anchorage at girder, the
Contractor requires demonstrate by a mock assembly for each, the adequacy of welding
method , welding conditions , welding procedures , testing including non-destructive testing
method , jig and tolerance for the Engineer ’ s approval. The mock assembly shal1 be fabricated
by same materials and in full-scale the components to be examined.
The Contractor shall submit the design for welded joints of cable anchor box and cable
anchorage at girder, welding conditions , welding procedure , and non-destructive testing
method for the Engineer ’ s approval.
Backing for welds that are left in place in the completed structure shall be a single len암h.
Backing shall be ofthe same material as the structural steel being welded.
When temporary attachments are welded on the permanent structure for fabrication and/or
erection , deta i1 s of welding conditions , removal method , and non-destructive testing method
shal1 be submitted fo l' review and approval by the Engineer. The welding requirements for the
attachments shall be same as these for the permanent structure. After removal of the
attachments , the steel surface shall be reconditioned by grinding level with the st.l11' ounding

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS St eel Structure - Section 8.8
8.15.6 Welding Tolerances

The members to be connected by welding shalI be so prepared that they fit exactiy together,
without being forced into position.
The tolerance concerning root opening between parts to be welded , eccentricity and departure
from theoreticaI aIi gnment , dimensions of the cross section of groove welded joints , etc. shall
conform to AWS 01.5 , Bridge Welding Code , except that the gap between pmis to be jointed
by fi Il et welds shaIl not exceed 1 mm for fi Il et welds cOlmecting flange to web and 5 mm for
all other fiIIet welds. Tolerances ofweld pro fiI es shaIl correspond to Section 3.6 of AWS D 1. 5.
8.16 때'ELDING PROCEDURE QUALIF‘ICA:τION1’ESTS
The Contractor shall perform test welds of the types of welding seams to be app Ii ed in the
structures except for the misceIIaneous metaI , according to a program to be agreed upon with
the Engineer. The qua Iity of the test welds shalI be approved by the Engineer prior to
execution of the welding work in question. The test welding shall be made from working
positions corresponding to the actual working positions during construction.
8.16.1 Welding Inspection
The Contractor shalI prepare a detailed prograrn for Qua!ity Control of welds in consultation
with the Engineer and the estab!i shed program must not be deviated from without the
Engineer ’ s consent.
The Contractor ’ s Quality Control program shalI ensure satisfactory inspection in the
workshops to fulfill the stipulations laid down in AWS D 1. 5. The Contractor ’s Quality ControI
shall correspond to the fo Il owing schedule:
1) Preparation for Welding
Visual inspection includes inspection of edge preparation and surface conditions by

use of penetrative dyes for cracks, gaps and other items that may cause any defect
ofwelding.
2) Visual Inspection before and after Welding
Al1 welds shall be visualIy inspected in c1 uding the use of penetrative dyes in
accordance with AWS D 1.1
3) Radiographic inspection
4) Ultrasonic inspection
5) Magnetic paπi cIe inspection
8.16.2 Radiographic and Ultrasonic Testing
The method of testing shall be either by ultrasonic or radiography and the acceptance level

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Steel St ructure - Section 8.8
shall be in accordance with AWS D 1.5.
Radiographs w i1l be made by x-ray or gamma-ray in accordance with AWS D 1. 5 or KS B0845.

The reinforcement on the weld that is to be taken radiograph shall be ground smooth and f1 ush.
Ultrasonic testing shall be carried out in accordance with AWS D 1. 5.
The minimum , extent ofthe testing as shown by percent ofweld length shall be as follows:
Transverse butt weld in top and bottom f1 ange plate (and additionally transverse butt welds in
those portions ofwebs which wilI experience 10ngitudinaI tensile stress):
• Welds subject to tens iI e stress and reversal stress 100%
• Weld su비 ect to compressive stress 25% in cI uding from the both ends
• Transverse butt weld in web plate 50%
• Other welds not mentioned above 10%
Intersections between longitudinal and transversε butt welds shall be subject to 100%
radiography for 150 mm either side of the transverse weld centerline unless otherwise agreed
with the engineer. The acceptance leveI shall be to AWS D 1. 5. The Engineer may require
additional tests if these are considεred necessary to ensure compliance with this Specification.
Where less than 100% of a weld type is inspected , the Engineer w i1l select those portions of
welds.
8.16.3 Magnetic Particle Inspection
Magnetic particle testing shall be performed to ensure that the surface is free from cracks. The
minimum , extent ofthe testing as shown by percent ofweld length shall be as follows:
• Longitudinal fillet weld:

Top and bottom f1 ange to web 25%
8.16.4 Stud Welding
After the studs have been welded to the beams a visual inspection shall be made and each stud
shall be given a light blow with a hammer. Any stud which does not have a complete end weld ,
which does not emit a ringing sound when given a light blow with a hammer, which has been
l매aired by welding, or which has less than normal hei빙1t due to welding, shall be struck with
a hammer and bent 15 degrees from the correct axis of installation, and in the case of a
defective 01" repaired weld , the stud shall be bent 15 degrees in the direction that shall place
that defective portion of the weld in the greatest tension. Studs that crack either in the weld or
in the shank shall be replaced.
Two sets ofrεports describing the inspection and comprising all the results have to be handed
over to the Engineer concurrently with the execution of the inspection. The Contractor shall

execute, at his own expense , the repair of unsatisfactory welds , and the repaired welds shall be
tested anew on the Contractor ’ s accoun t.
8.16.5 Welding for Inspection Facilities
Visual inspection before and after welding shall be carried out for the inspection facilities such
as the inspection ways , stairs, ladder, and handrai l.
8.16.6 Machining
Bearing transfèrring surfaces of cable socket and pipe anchorage in the cable anchor box and
the edge girder are machined in order to gain correct contact.
Tolerance requirements for the structural parts are presented in the specification for stay cables
(Refer Section 8.17 , Stay Cable).
8.16.7 Holes for Bolts
A l1 holes shal1 be dr i1l ed. Punching ofholes shallnot be permitted.
Reamed and fitted holes and dril1εd holes shall be made through steel templates 0 1' after
assembly or by other approved means , to enSUïe complete matching between the ply’ sof the
joínts. ;‘
AII steel templates for bolt hole drilling shall have accurately dimensioned from the
centerlines ofthe cOllilection. The centerlines shall be used to accurately locate the template.
Reaming of drilling full-size holes for field connections through templates shal1 be done after
the templates have been located with the utmost care as to position and angle , and firmly
bolted. Template used fo 1' the reaming of holes in matching membe1's, 0 1' of opposite faces of
one member, shall be exact duplicates. Templates for connections which duplicate shall be so
accurately located that like members are duplicates.
A l1 finishes holes shall be cylindrical and pe1'pendicular to the member unless othe1'wise
specified. Al1 buns and other defects shal1 be 1'emoved.
If the Contractor proposes other method than specified herein , the details of the method
including accuracy cont1'ol shall be submitted fo 1' the Engineer ’ s app 1'ova l.
The diameter of the completed hole and tole 1'ance shall be in accordance with the fo l1 owing
Table 8.3.
Table 8.3 Bolt Hole Diameter and Tolerance
Tolerances (mm)
Bolt Hole (rnm)
Typical For 20% ofGroup ofBolts
M20 22.5 +0.5 +1. 0

DlVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Steel Structure - Section 8.8
F줬뉘
24.5 +0.5 +1. 0
26.5 +0.5 +1. 0
AIl matching hoJes shaIl register with each other so that a gauge 01' drift 2 mm less in diameter
than the hole shall pass freely through the assembled contact faces at right angles to them.
Burrs, fins and other defects shall be removed. Drifting to align holes shall be done in a
manner that wil1 110t dist 0l1 the metal 01' enlarge the hole.
8.16.8 Bolted Connection
Contact surfaces in bolted joints shall be painted by System No. J as specified in Section
9.2.1.1 of these Technical Specifications. When assembled in the field , the rust on joint
surfaces , including those adjacent to bo1t head, nut and washer, shall be removed by wire
brushing. The separation between fraying surfaces of bolted connections shaIl be not greater
than 1 mm. If the separation is between 1 mm and 3 mm, the surface shall be tapered to
eliminate the separation. Over 3 mm separation shall be fi l1 ed with fiIler plate as required.
Each bolt shall be tightened to provide , when all bolts in the joint are tight, the minimum bolt
tension shown in the foIlowing Table 8 .4.
Table 8.4 Minimum Bolt Tension
Grade Bo1t size Minimum Bolt Tension (kN)
M20 179
M22 221
M253(A290M)
M24 257
-
M30 408
High strength bolts shall not be reused. Retightening of previous1y tightened bolts which may
have been loosened by the tightening bf adjacent bolts, shal1 not be considered as re-use.
All high strength bolts shall be tightened by properly ca!ibrated wrenches and their setting
shal1 be such as to induce a bo1t tension 10% in excess of the above value. These wrenches
shal1 bε calibrated at least once each working day by tightening in a device of the diameter of
each bolt to be installed. Power wrenches shall be adjusted to stall 01' cut-out at the se!ected
tension. If manua1 torque wrεnches are used the torque indication corresponding to the
tension shal1 be noted and used in the instal1 ation of al1 bo1ts ofthe tested 101. The
nut shal1 be turned in the tightening direction when torque is measured.
Average Bolt Tension in Torque Shear 1γpe High Strength B이ts in Normal Ambient

mVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Steel Structure - Sectioll 8.8
Temperature (10 to 30 oC)
Table 8.5 Average Bolt Tension in Torque Shear Type High St1'ength Bolts
Grade Bolt size Average BoIt Tension in the Lot (kN)
M20 172 to 202
S10T M22 212 to 249
M24 247 to 290
Rema1'ks: Five sets of bolt shalI be tested to measure bolt tension randomly
in one fabricated lo t.
8.17 까iARKING FOR TRIAL ASSEMBLY
Each part shalI be carefu lI y marked to facilitate fo 1' erection. Such marking shalI be durable
but shall not i띠 ure the material , defaced 0 1' removed by any pe1'son. The ma1'king of
components shall be in acco1'dance with that shown on the workshop drawings subrnitted.
8.17.1 Sbop Assemblage
The Cont1'actor shall carry out shop assemblage in his 1'egular wo1'kshop. Shop assemblage
shal1 be understood as placing of prefabricated elements together to control the fitting. The
Contractor shall submit his p1'oposal fo 1' shop assemblage fo 1' the approval of the Engineer.
The shop assemblage shall ve1'ify that the individual elements have the shape to fit exactly into
adjoining elements. Also , the shop assemblage shall verify that the camber aimed at , 0 1'
p1'escribed , actually exists , and that the geometry is generalI y correct.
The Contractor shall perform measu1'ement of the structu1'al members , and the results shall be
recorded and submitted to the Engineer. The Cont1'actor shal1 info1'm the Enginee1' that the
shop assemblage of m며 or components have been completed and measured , and the structu1'e
shall not be dismantled until the Engineer has app1'oved the shop assemblage.
8.18 TOLERANCES FOR STEEL STRUCTURES
AlI fabrication shalI be executed accurately to the shapes and dimensions shown on the
D1'awings , and, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings , shalI be within the tolerances
listed below. Whe1'e, in the opinion of the Engineer, there is evidence that the application of
the fo lI owing tole1'ances would adversely affect the serviceability of the structure, the
Enginee1' shall have the right to reduce the tolerances.
The following tolerances shalI be applied to main girders and cable anchor box:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATlONS - mVISION 8 8.8 - 109 - of214

Table 8.6 Tolerances for Main Girders and Cable Anchor Box
H :S 1 m +/-2 mm
Depth , H
H> 1 m +/- 3 mm
W :S lm +/-2 mm
Flange width , W -_.
W> 1 m +/- 3 mm
--_.-
L :S 10m +/- 3 mm
Length , L L> 10m +/-4 mm

Vz
。1
For anchor box +/-1 mm
:ω‘ε'fJ t-----
Diagonallength For box section +ι3mm
。
jE등g
Twist For box section +/- 3 mm/lO m
Bend 111 ,000

-
Flatness of plate between ribs , Web w/250
、v
-
Flange w/150
t---- --
Vertical distance measured W/200mm
Squareness of flange to web at flange edge from CL of
web
_j
End squareness For anchor box 20"
_._---
Bridge length , L +/- (1 O+L/ l 0) mm
Distance between CL girders , +/- (3+B/2) mm

B
Depth , H H<5m +/- 5 mm
￡〉i、 Veliicalness Hl3,000

〈gωc”n DI-D2 :S 10 mm
oj Diagonallengths , D l-D2
←
ιi Between a여 acent members +/- 3 mm
뉴_-
When metal touch IS 0.2mm
Gap at splice joint required
Unless otherwise specified +/- 5 mm
Cambel‘ L :S 20m +/- 5 mm

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Steei Structure - Section 8.8
20 m < L ~ 40 111 - 5 mm to + 10 m111
40111 <L ~ 80 111 -5 mm to +15 mrn

누---
80 m <L ~200 m -5 mm to +25 mm
Difference be
하t\、we
않 en 5mm
adjacent panels
L~20m 5 mrn
20 m <L ~40 111 10mm

Horizontal alignment 뉴----
40 m <L ~ 80 m 15 ml11
80111 <L ~200111 20111111
e Buttjoint in compression
Web stiffeners in bearing with flanges and cable anchor box segments shall have a full
contact. The deviation fro l11 squareness of ends of l11 embers in compression shall not
exceed 1 mm. The butting ends of two membel’ s in ιompression shall be aligned to
within 1/1 ,000 oftheir combined length.
• Deviation of web fro l11 flange centerline

The maximu1l1 deviation ofthe centerline ofthe web fì'om the flange centerline in Built-
up members shall not exceed 6 mm.
8.19 TRANSPORT FOR HANDLING AND STORAGÉ
Before shop assembly is dismantled , all a예 acent sections shall be marked with paint. The
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer drawings of the finished structure showing al1 part and
rnatch marks.
All materials shall be delivered to the Site at such time or times as they are required for
incorporation in the Works. Stacking of edge girders and floor beams will not be permitted.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to the transport of m셰 or items from the shop ,
assembly yard or other place.
Bolts and small 0 1" loose pieces shall be bagged and close crated. Bolts , nuts and washers shall
be separately bundled for each size and each bundle c1 early marked with the size and pllrpose
of the bolts. The batch nllmber of each bag of bolts shall be c1 early marked to facilitate
reference to the test certificates.
During delivery, all component materials shall be adequately protected frorn damage , and the
Contractor shall be responsible for any damage which may occur. 1n particlllar, the Contractor

shalI adequately brace the bottom f1 ange of plate girders. A lI straps and chains used in lifting
shall be adequately padded to prevent damage to the steel work and its protective coating.
No fabricated steel shall leave the Contractor ’ s works without being inspected and passed by
the Engineer at the place of fabrication 0 1' be placed in the Work without being inspected and
passed by the Engineer after delivery.
The methods of transporting and handing shall be subje따 to the approval of the Engineer.
Special care shall be taken in the packing, methods of supporting, lifting during handling and
transporting of structural steel work which is shop assembled before delivery, to ensure
protection from damage.
Immediately following delivery to the site, the Contractor shall check the material and bring
immediately to the notice of the Engineer 0 1' his representative any damage 0 1' defects therein.
He shall also report in writing to the Engineer any such damage 0 1' defects , and give his
proposals for the rectification 0 1' replacement 0 1' damaged sections.
Ma
따ter때 to be stored shall be placed on skids above the ground and shalI be kept clean and
properly drained. Girders and beams shall be placed upright and shored. Long members shall
be supported on skids places closely enough together to prevent injury from de f1 ection.
Any structural steel materials regardless of painted 0 1' unpainted shipped to the site by sea
transport, and positioned on board in such a way as to come into contact with salt water spray,
shall be thoroughly washed with clean fresh wateζ using pressure hoses and stiff bristle
brushes , prior to erection or application offinish coats ofpain t.
8.20 ERECTION PROCEDURES
Steelwork shall be stored on timber bearers, clear ofthe ground and in such a way as to permit
checking and to avoid excessive handling and damage to the steel work 0 1' its protective
coatíng.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, alI surfaces to be brought together to form a joint
or sp Ii ce shall be free of paint or any other applied finish , oiI, dht, loose rust and scale , burrs
and other defects which would prevent solid seating of the paπS 0 1' would interfere with the
development offriction between them.
8.21 FIELD ERECTION
The method and position of field splices as shown on the drawings is for information only and
the Contractor shal1 propose alternative field splice method and positionproviding they comply
with all the relevant requirements of these Technical Specifications. Thε preparation of the
responsibility and cos t. However, additionaI cost incurred by the change for his OW l1
cOl1 venience sha l1 be borne by the Contractor.

DJVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORI ‘s Steel Structure - Section 8.8
The Contractor shall provide setting drawings , tempJates , and directions for the installation of
anchor bo Jts or other items to be embedded in concrete.
During erection , the paπs shaIl be accurately assembled as shown on the approved Shop
Drawings and any match marks shall be followed.
The material shall be carefully handled so that no parts shall be bent , broken or otherwise
damaged.
Hammering which w il1 injure 0 1' distort the members shall not be done. Bearing surfaces and
surfaces to be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled.
Splices and field c01mections shall have sufficient number of bolts and cylindrical erection
pins (drifts) before boJting with high-strength bolts. The Contractor shall provide calculations
of required number of bolts and drifts according to his construction plan for the Engineer ’ s
review and approval. Fitting-up bolts shall be of the same nominaJ diameter as the high-
stren암h boJts , and cylindrical erectiol1 pins shall be 1 mm Ja1'ge1'.
The correctiol1 of minor misfits involving ha1'mless amounts of reaming, cutting and chipping
shaJl be conside1'ed .a legitimate part of the e1'ection. Howeve1', any erro1' in the shop
fabrication or deformation resülting from handling and tmnsportation which prevents thε
proper assembling and fitting up of parts by the moderate use of drift pins or by a moderate
amount of reaming and slight chipping 0 1' cutting, shall be 1'eported immediately to the
Engineer and his approval ofthe method of correction obtained. The correction shal1 be made
in his presence. The Contractor shall be responsibJe for all misfits , errors and injuries and
shall make the necessary corrections and replacements.
The straightening of plates , angles , other shapes and built-up members , then permitted by the
Engineer, shall be done by methods th없 shal1 not produce fracture 0 1' other injury. Distorted,
membe1's shal1 be straightened by mechanical means 0 1', if approved by the Engineer, by the
carefuJ planned and supervised application of a limited amount of localized heat, each
application subject to the approval ofthe Engineer.
Each joint shall be bolted up with service bolts and paral1 el drifts so that the various sections
and pl없es a.re in close contact th.roughout. Service bolts shall not remain in the completed
structure.
Drifts shal1 be parallel barrel drifts. The length of the barrels shall not be less than the
combined thickness ofthe material , plus one diameter. The ends ofthe ditt , for a length of 1. 5
barrel diameters , shal1 be tapered down to an end diameter equal to half the barrel diameter.
Heavy drifting that would dist Olt the holes shall not be carried out.
High tensile bolts shall be assembled with one hardened washer under the turned element (nut
0 1' bolt head). The washer shaIl be assembled with any convexity outwards. The insetting and

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Steel St ructure - Section 8.8
tensioning of the high tensile boJts shall be so arranged that the close contact establishεd by
the service boJts in maintained at all times. The tensioning of high tensile bolts shaIl 110t
commence until the joint has been inspected by the Engineer.
The slope of surfaces of bo Jt s parts in contact with the bolt head and nut shaJJ not exceed 1:20
with respect to a plane normaJ to the bolt axis; in cases where the shape ofthe member is such
that this slope is exceeded, taper washers sha Jl be used. The remaining height of lifting pieces
used for assembly and erection work shall be less than 10 mm.
8.22.1 Measurement
Structural steeJ shalI be measured by computed weight of the finished member comprising
plate , ro lI ed sections , stifJ능ners， cleats , packs , splice plates , fittings , stud and wind fairing. The
computed weight of finished member shalI be determined from the dimensions shown on the
drawings approved by the Engineer assuming a steeJ unit weight of 7,850 kg/m3, and
excluding the weight of weJds , bolts , nuts , washers and protective paintings and other
members are paid at separate pay items. Galvanizing and Temporary works for erection the
girder wil1 not be measured separately but shall be deemed to be included in the cost of
relevant pay item.
Additional weight to compensate the elastic shortening shaJl not be measured. No additional
weight for temporary Iugs 01' reinforcements for the proper completion ofthe works.
High stren암h boIt shall be measured by weight of bolts , nuts and washers assembled and
installed in accordance with the drawing requirements and approved by the Engineer.
The Radiographic Test shaJl be measured by each sheet. The Ultrasonic Test and the Magnetic
Parti cI e inspection shall be measured by welding len망h (as meter).
8.22.2 Payment
The amount of completed and accepted structural steel for main bridge girder, measured as
provided above , shall be paid for at the unit rate per ton for the metal in the B iII of Quantities,
which rate shall be full compensation for supplying, fabricating, dynamic test at PyJon and
anchor piers , casting, shop welding, shop and field painting, delivering , erecting, yard and
field welding, and for materials , Iabor, equipment, too1s and othεr items' necessary for the
proper compJetion ofthe work.
Payment for high stren양h boJt shal1 be full compensation for suppJying, fabricating, testing,
assembling , instal1 ing and other incidentaJs necessary for the proper compJetion ofthe works.
힌~킹~Cε
τ 찍;寶S꺼爾ftf챈rtl"fë~m한향짧함C'"않ζ채n용영TI慣짧!mF'T얹f펌딴염f폰總훌훌rn;t'rt;;'T왔ne1흥￦i쩔@한하f ‘’←강;
shall be full compensation for materials , labor, equipment , tools and other items necessary for

mVISION 8 _:STRUCTURAL WORKS Steel Stmcture - Sectio B1 8.8
the proper completion ofthe work.
Structural steel for main bridge girder excludes stay cable anchor at girder.
The payments of anchor boxes , top struts , high tension bolt for struts , stud shear c Olmector fo 1'
cable ancho1', anchor pipes , and stay cable anchor are stipu1ated in Section 8.17 , Division 8.
-
Pay Item Unit of
Description
No. Measurement
8.08-01 Structural Steel for Main Bridge Girder Ton
8.08-02 High strength Bolts TOl1
8.08-03 Radiographic Test Sheet
8.08-04 Ultrasonic Test 111
8.08-05 Magnetic Particle Inspectiol1 111
----
‘1

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Painting - Section 8.9
SECTION 8.9 - PAINTING
9.1 GENERAL
9. 1. 1 Description
This work shall consist of the painting of surfaces specified in the Contract Documents to be
painted. The work shall be taken to include , but is not Ii mited to , the preparation of surfaces to
be painted; application 뻐d curing of the paint; protection of the work; protection of existing
faci1itiεs， vehicles , and the public from damage due to this work; and the furnishing of all
labor, equipment, and materials needed to perform the work.
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in this Specification, the painting of
the steel superstructure shall conform to the requirements of “ Welding and Painting Manual
for Steel Highway Bridges" by Korea MLTM.
9. 1.2 Protection ofPublic and Property
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable environmental protection and occupational
safety and health standards, rules , regulations , and orders. Failure to comply with these
standards , rules , regulations , and orders shall be sufficient cause for suspension or
disqualification.
All reasonable precautions shall be taken to contain waste materials (used blasting material
and old paint) classified as hazardous. Disposal of hazardous waste material shall be
performed in accordance with all applicable Laws.
The Contractor shall provide protective devices such as tarps , screens, 0 1' covers as necessary
to prevent damage to the work and to other propelty or persons from a lJ cleaning and painting
operations. The Contractor shal1 be responsible for all damage caused by the painting work to
vehicJes , persons , or property.
Paint or paint stains that result in an unsightly appearance on surfaces not designated to be
painted shall be removed or obliterated by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense.
9. 1. 3 Protection ofthe Work
The Contractor shall take all precautions necessary to protect the surface from contamination
prior to or during thε application process.
The Contractor shaJl protect all pmts of the work against disfigurement by splarters , splashes ,
and smirches of paint materials.
shal1 be repaired by the Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, with materials and to a
condition equal to that ofthe coating specified herein.

DlVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Painting - Section 8.9
If traffic causes an objectionable amount of dust, the Contractor, when directed by the
Engineer, shall sprinkle the adjacent roadbed and shoulders with water or dust pa1li ative for a
sufficient distance on each side ofthe location where painting is being done.
Upon completion of all painting operations and of any other work that would cause dust ,
grease , 이. other foreign mateïials to be dεposited on the painted surfaces, the painted surfaces
shal1 be thoroughly cleaned. At the time of opening structures to public traffic , the painting
shall be completed and the surfaces shall be undamaged and clean.
9.1.4 Thickness and Color
The dry film thickness of each coat and totai thickness of the finished product shall be in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
Each coat of paint should be separately colored to ensure complete coverage, and such that the
previous coat can be hidden by a single c(표lt ofthe next application.
Painting color of the finishing coat for the exterior surface of steel girder, wind fairing and
cable anchor box exposed surface shall be instructed by thε Engineer。
The COlltractor shall subl1i it colol' sal11 ples for the fil1Ïshing coat before st2uting the work fo 1'
approval by the Engineer.
9.2 PAINTING METAL STRUεTURES
9.2.1 Coating Systems and Paints
The coating system and paints to be applied shall consist of the system in the Contract
Documents.
9.2. 1. 1 Coating System
Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or elsewhere in this 8pecification, the coating
system to be applied shall be in accordance with “ Welding and Painting Manual for 8teel
Highway Bridges" by Korea MLTM.
The dry film thickness of contact surface at bolted connection shall be not more than 90μm.
The inside surfaces of bolt holes shall be cleaned and visible rust shall be removed , and then
coated with one application of zinc rich primer.
Refer to 180 8501-1 for “ 180 Sa" in Tables 9.2 through 9.5.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.9-117 -of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 끼10RKS Painting - Section 8.9
Tab1e 9 .1 Coating System and App1ication
System No. E D G J
Applied part Exterior lnterior Exterior Contact surface of bolted

surface of surface of surface of connections, Exterior surface
stee1 gi1'dε1's， cab1e bolted in contact with conc1'ete of
cab1e ancho1' ancho1' box connection cab1e anchor box, top of top
box, wind flange of stee1 girders , py10n
fai 1'ing st1'ut
-
Total Fi1m
250 240 455 75
Thickness (μm)
Tab1e 9.2 Coating Specifications on E (Shop Painting)
Standard
Requi 1'e d
quantity by Painting
P1' ocess Type of Painting thickness
sp1'ay interva1
(μm)
(glm 2 )
Fist surface p1'eparation Blast c1 eaned (ISO Sa2.5)

Within 4 h1'.
Inorganic ZlTI C 1'ich
Prime1' coating 160 (1 5)
pnme1'
_.__._._-------_. Within 6 mo.
Second surface p1' eparation B1ast cleaned (I SO Sa2.5)

Within 4 h1's.
1st coating Inorganic zinc rich paint 600 75
2 da. -10 da.
2nd coating - mist coat Epoxy resin 160 -

1 da. - 10 da.
3띠 coatmg
•
Epoxy resin 540 120
I da. - 10 da.
4th coatmg Flourine resin 170 30
1 da. - 10 da.
5th coating Flourine resin 140 25
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.9-118-of214

DIVISJON 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Painting - Section 8.9
Table 9.3 Coating Specifications 011 D (Shop painting)
Standard Required
thickness Painting
Process Type of Painting
sqpuraanyt(itgy/m
by2) inte
히rval
(1.1111)
Fist surface preparatiol1 Blast cleaned (IS0 Sa2.5)

Within 41u‘.
Primer coating 1110rgal1 ÎC zinc rich primer 160 (1 5)

Withi l1 6 mo.
Second surface preparation Blast cleaned (1SO Sa3)

Within 4 hr.
151 coating Formulated epoxy resin 410 120
1 da. - 10 da.
2nd coating Formulated epoxy resin 410 120
Table 9 .4 Coating Specifications on G (Shop Painting)
Standard
Required
quantity by Painting
Process Type of Painting thickness
spray interval
(μ111)
(g/rn 2)
First surface preparation Blast cleaned (I SO Sa2.5)

Within 4 hr.
Primer coating Zinc rich primer 160 (1 5) ---------

-‘다~‘
bZ- Within 6 mo.
。6‘3
Second surface preparation Blast cleaned (IS0 S a2 112)
」。
ζ:L
ν3
Within 4 hr.
15t coating Zinc rich oaint 600 75
2 da. - 6 mo.
2nd coating - mist coat Epoxy resin 1,100 300
1 - 10 da.
a。
。
170 (1 40
3며 coating Epoxy resin 30 1-…-~-_._._--
α*ze‘~ by brush)
1 - 10 da.
:s!
ι;) 140 (120
4 th coating Fluorene resin 25
ι‘
by brush)
140 (1 20 1 - 10 da.
5th coating Fluorene resin 25
by brush)
TEεHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.9 - 119 - of214

Table 9.5 Coating Specifications on J (Shop painting)
Standard Required
thickness Painting
Process Type ofPainting
sqpuraanyt(itgy/nb1y2) interval
(μm)
First surface preparation Blast c1 eaned (I SO Sa2.5) Within 4

hr.
Primer coating Inorganic zinc rich primer 160 (1 5)
Within 6
mo.
Second surface preparation Blast cIeaned (ISO Sa2.5)
Within 4
1st coating Inorganic zinc rich paint 600 75 hr.
'-
1) The application of painting materials shall comply with a manufacturer’ s instruction.
2) Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall use adequate paints conforming to KS.
3) Using mix type paint , the Contractor shall comply with instructions prepared by the
supplier in the mixing procedure, mixing ratio and recommended use by time.
4) The Contractor shall not use expired paints, and term of validity as specified in a
manufacturer ’ s instruction.
5) The Contractor shall maintain labels on sealed containers of paint and carry in the
painting yard for the work. The Contractor shall submit shipping certificate and test
certificate including date ofmanufacture , lot number, color and quantity, to the Engineer
for approval before beginning of the work.
9.2. 1.2 Paint Materials
Materials used in painting of steel structures shall be as shown on the Drawings or specified
elsewhere and shall confonn to the requiremεnts of Standard of Painting Materials for Steel
Highway Bridges in “ Welding and Painting Manual for Steel Highway Bridges" or equivalent
standards.
Where paints are specified that do not compJy with any of the above specifications , they shall
be supplied only by recognized manufacturers , and samples and technical data shal1 be
submitted to the Engineer for his approval.
In paliicular this c1 ause is applicable to any coating of stabilized treatment primer or tar epoxy
resin controller appJied to hot rolled atmospheric corrosion resisting steel structures.
In any paint system , each coat of paint shall bε compatible with the other, and to ensure this ,
compatibility.

DIVISION 8 - STRUεTURALWO없영 Painting - Section 8.9
9.2.2 Weather Conditions

Paint shall be applied only on thoroughly dry surfaces. Painting shall not be pennitted under
any öfthe following circumstances:
• the atmospheric temperature , paint 0 1' the surface to be painted is at 0 1' below 40 C or
above 38 0 C,
• metal surfaces are less than 3 0 C above the dew point,
• the humidity exceeds 85 percent at the site of the work,
• freshly painted surfaces may become damaged by rain, f‘og, or dust , 0 1'
• it can be anticipated that the atmospheric temperature wilI drop below 50 C during the
drying period , except as provided he1'ein for painting in εnclosu1'es.
Metal surfaces which a1'e hot enough to cause the paint to blister, to produce a porous paint
film , 0 1' to cause the vehicle to separate from the pigment shall not be painted.
Su비 ect to app1'oval of the Engineer, the Contractor may provide a suitable enclosure to permit
painting du1'ing inclement weather. Provisions shall be made to a1'tificially control atmospheric
conditions inside the en하osure within limits suitable fo 1' painting tlu'oughout thε pail1ting
operation. Surfaces painted under cover in damp 0 1' cold weather shall remain under cover
until the paint dries 0 1' weather conditions permit open exposure. Full compensation fo 1'
p1'oviding and maintaining such enclosures shall be considered as included in the prices paid
for the various contract items of work involving painting and , therefo1'e, no additional
compensation wiJ1 be allowed.
All blast cleaning, except that performed with enclosed buildings, and all painting shall be
performed during daylight hours unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
9.2.3 Surface Preparation

A!! exposed surfaces of structura! stee! , except galvanized 0 1' metalized surfaces, shall be
cleaned and painted.
AIl surfaces of new structu1'al steel shall be cleaned by the blast-cleaning method unless
otherwise specified in the Contract Documents 0 1' approved in writing by the Engineer.
In 1'epainting existing steel st1'uctures , the method of cleaning shall be as specified in the
Contract Documents. Any damage to sound paint, on areas not designated fo l' treatment ,
resulting from the Contracto1'’s ope1'ations shall be repai 1'ed by the Contractor at the
Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction ofthe Engineer.
The methods used in the cleaning of metal surfaces shall conform to the specifications herein.
• If fabricated members to be painted will be suspected adhe 1' ing sodiul11 due to ocean
transportation 0 1' others , the Contractor shall inspect salinity determination.

• Resulting that adhesion of sodium chloride exceeds 100 mg/m 2, the Contractor shall
clear away by uti Ji zing adequate cleaning method.
• The areas for sp Ji ces by high tensile strength bolts shall be protected by masking at the
time of the fabrication shop undercoats. Immediately prior to final erection , any rust in
the joint area shall be removed by power wirε brushing to the “ Painting Manual for
Steel Highway Bridges" 0 1' equivalent standard.
• The edges and corners of plates exposed outside shall be rounded off to a 2 mm radius
or more. The other edges shall be made chamfer of 0.5 mm minimum.
9.2.3.1 Blast Cleaning

Abrasives used for blast cleaning shall be either clean dry sand , mineral grit, steel shot, or
steel grit, at the option of the Contractor, and shall have a suitable grading to produce
satisfactory results. The use of other abrasives shall not be permitted unless approved in
writing by the Engineer.
Unwashed beach sand containing salt or excessive amounts of si1 t wi1l not be allowed.
AlI diπ， mi11 scale, rust, paint, and other foreign material shal1 be removed from exposed steel
surfaces in accordance with the requirements ofthe Steel Sti:uctures Painting Counci1 Surface
Preparation Specification No. 10, SSPC-SP 10 , Near-White Blast Cleaning. Blast cleaning
shall leave all surfaces with a dense and unifonn anchor pattern of not less than 25 .4 μm or
more than 76.2 μm as measured with an approved surface profile comparator.
When blast cleaning is being performεd near machinery, all journals, bearings, motors , and
moving parts shal1 be sealed against entry of abrasive dust before bJast c1 eaning begins.
Blast-cleaned surfaces shal1 be primed or treated the same day blast cJeaning is done, unless
otherwise authorized by the Engineer. If cleaned surfaces rust or are contaminated with
foreign material before painting is accomplished , they shall be re-blast- c1 eaned by the
Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.
9.2.3.2 Steam Cleaning
AII diπ， grease , loose chalky paint, or other foreign material that has accumulated on the
previously painted or galvanized surfaces shall be removed with a steam cleaning apparatus
which shall precede all other phases of cleaning. It is not intended that sound paint be removed
by this process. Any paint which becomes loose , curled, Ji fted , 0 1' loses its bond with the
preceding coat or coats after steam cI eaning shall be rεmoved as directed by the Engineer to
sound paint or metal surface by the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.
A hi ，-，서 p. ar꺼서"， h1p ,1 pJpl'opnt <:h ", 11 hp 꺼서서 ed 10 the feed water of the steam s:renerat01' or 꺼 nn 1ip. clto
‘~，쨌“ι““ιιi씹‘“짜‘ζ 싫’‘ ε
the surface to be 이εaned. The detergent shall be of such composition and shall be added or
applied in such quantity that the cleaning as described in the above paragraph is accomplished.

DlVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Painting - Sectioll 8.9
Any residue , detergent , 0 1' other foreign material that may accumulate on cleaned surfaces
shall be removed by f1 ushing with fresh water.
Steam cleaning shallnot be performed more than two weeks prio1' to painting 0 1' other phases
of cleaning.
Subsequent painting shall not be pe 1'formed until the cleaned surfaces are thoroughly dry and
in no case in less than 24 h after cleaning and f1 ushing.
9.2.3.3 Solvent Cleaning

Unless othe1'wise prohibited by the Contract Documents, solvents shall be used to l'emove oil ,
grease , Painting Council , SSPC-SP 1, November 1982 and other soluble contaminants in
accordance with the requirements of SSPC-SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. Solvent cleaning shal1 be
pe1'fonned prior to blast cI eaning. If contamination remains afte1' blasting, the area shaIl be re-
c1 eaned with solvent.
9.2.3.4 Hand Cleaning

Wire brushes either hand 0 1' powered, hand sc1'aping too1s , power g1'inders , 0 1' sandpape1' shaIl
be used to remove all dirt, loose rust and mill scale, or paint which is not fìnnly bonded to the
metal surfaces.
Pneumatic chipping hamme1's shaIl not be used unless authorized in writing by the Enginee1'.
9.2.3.5 Power Washing

Powe1' washing shaIl utilize water at a p1'essure between 5.5 MPa to 10.3 MPa, app1ied with
the nozzle no fmther than 300 mm from the surface ofthe stee l.
9.2.4 Application ofPainting

The Contracto 1' shaIl notify the Enginee1', in w1'iting, at least fou 1' weeks in advance of the date
that cI eaning and painting operations are to begin.
Painting shaIl be done in a neat manner. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents ,
paint shall be appIi ed by brush, sp1'ay, 0 1' ro lI er, 0 1' any combination thereof peculiar to the
paint being applied.
Each application of paint shall be tho 1'oughly cured and any skips , holidays , thin a 1'eas , 0 1'
othe1' deficiencies corl'ected befo1'e the succeeding application. The SU1‘ face of the paint being
covel'ed shall be f1'ee fl'om moisture , dust , grease , 0 1' any other deletel'ious matel'iaIs that would
prevent the bond ofthe succeeding applications. ln spot painting, old paint which lifts after the
first application shalI be removed by scraping and the area repainted before the next
application.
Paints that a.re specified "formulated ready for application" and "no thinning" shall be allowed
unless othe1'wise provided in the applicable materials specification fo 1' the paint being used.

Brushes , when used , shall have sufficient body and length of bristle to spread the paint in a
uniform film. Round , oval-shaped brushes , 0 1' flat brushes not wider than 115 mm shall be
used. Paint shall be evenly spread and thoroughly brushed out.
On all surfaces that are inaccessible for painting by regular means , the paint shall be applied
by sheepskin daubers , bottle brushes , or by any other means approved by the Engineer.
Rollers , when used , shall be of types that do not leave a stippled texture in the paint film.
Rollers shall be used only on flat , even surfaces to produce a paint film of even thickness with
no skips , runs , sags , 0 1' thin areas.
Paint may be applied with airless 01‘ conventional spray equipment.
Suitable traps 0 1' separators acceptable to the Engineer shall be furnished and installed in the
airline to each spray pot to exclude oil and water from the air.
Any spray method which produces excessive paint build-up , runs , sags, or thin areas in the
paint film , 0 1' skips and holidays , shall be considered unsatisfactory and the Engineer may
require modification ofthe spray method or prohibit its use and require brushing instead.
Mechanical mixers shall be used to mix paint. Prior to application , paint shall be mixed a
sufficient length of time to thoroughly mix the pigment and vehicle together, and shall be kept
thoroughly mixed during its application.
The dry film thickness of the paint shall be measured in place with a calibrated magnetic film
thickness gage according to Steel Structures Painting Council SSPC-PA 2.
The thickness of each application shall be limited to that which will result in uniform drying
throllghollt the paint film.
Succeeding applications of paint shall be of such shade as to contrast with the paint being
covered.
Structures shall be blast-cleaned and painted with the total thickness of undεrcoats before
erection. After erection and before applying subsequent paint, all areas where paint has been
damaged 0 1' has deteriorated and all exposed unpainted surfaces shall be thoroughly cJ eaned
and spot painted with the specified lIndercoats to the specified thickness.
Surfaces exposed to the atmosphere and that would be inaccessible fo 1' painting afte1' e1'ection
shall be painted the fllll nllmber of applications prior to e1'ection.
Vinyl wash primer, if required , shall not be applied more than 12 h before application of the
succeeding coat of pain t. The vinyl wash primer shall be applied by spraying to produce a
uniform wet film on the surface. The dry filrn thickness shall be between 7.6 and 12.7
• Dry film thickness shall be measured by in accordance with Section 5.3 .6 of “ Painting
Manllal for Steel Highway Bridges" as summarized beJow: One lot size of measurement
TECHNICAL SI>ECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.9 - 124 - of214

\ '
is 200 to 500 m2 and the number of measuring points per lot shall be 25 or more. The
measurement shall be repeated for 5 times at the same locatíon and theír average shall
be used as the measured thickness. The evaluation critería of measured thickness shall
be as follows:
1) The average thickness fo l' a lot shall satisfy 90% 01' more ofthe specified thickness.
2) The minirnum dry thickness shall be 70% or more ofthe specified thickness.
3) The standard deviation of measurement values s11all not exceed 20% or more of the
specified thickness. When it exceeds 20% however, only if their average is greater
than specified thickness , then this lot is acceptable.
• Application of painting on top flange of edge girder, cross-beam and support strut shall
be covered as shown in the following tìgure.
Cast-in-place Concrete
Precast Deck Panel
빨빼
뼈-떼
때
떼-띠
!4-
’i
NOTE:
COATl NG SYSTEM NO.J
COATING SYSTEM NO.E
9.2.4.1 Application of Zinc-Rich Primers
Zinc-rich primers , which include organic and inorganic zinc primers, shall be applied by spray
methods. On areas inaccessible to spray application , the paint may be applied by brush or
daubers.
Mechanical mixers shal1 be used in mixing the primer. After mixing, zinc-rich prirners sha11 be
strained through a metal No. 30 to No. 60 (250 to 600 μ111) mesh screen 이. a double layer of
cheese c1 0th immediately prior to or during pouring into the spray po t.
TECHNICAL SPECIF‘IC A:’nONS - DIVISION 8 8.9 - 125 - of214

An agitating spray pot shalI be used in all spray application of zinc-rich primers. The agitator
or sti lTing rod shalI reach to within 50 mm of the bottom of the spray pot and shalI be in
motion at alI times during primer application. Such motion shalI be sufficient to keep the
primer welI mixed.
Spray equipment shall provide the proper pot prεssure and atomization pressure to produce a
coating, the composition of which shall comply in alI respects to the specifications for zinc
pain t. The hose from pot to nozzle in the Contract Documents shall not be more than 22 500
mm long, nor be used more than 4500 mm above or below the pot.
Cured , zinc-rich primer shall be free from dust , dirt , salt, or other deleterious deposits and
thoroughly dry before applying vinyl wash primer.
111 addition , the application of inorganic zinc paints shall conform to the following:
• Succeeding applications of inorganic zinc paints shall be applied within 24 h, but not
less than 30 min after prior application of such paint.
• ln areas where mud-cracking occurs in the inorganic zinc paint, it shall be blast-cleaned
back to soundly bonded paint and recoated to the same thickness by the same methods
specified for the original coat.
• Paint shall be cured for 48 h at a relative humidity of at least 45 percent before the
app1i cation of vinyl wash primer. The cured inorganic zi l1 c paint shall be hosed down
with water and be il1 a surface dry conditiol1 before the application of vinyl wash primer
if the vinyl wash primer is 110t applied within three weeks after the inorganic zinc paint
is applied , or if there is evidence of dust , dirt , salt, or other deleterious deposits on the
inorganïc zï l1 c pain t.
9.2.5 Measurement and Payment
CJeaning, shop and íìeld painting structural steel w i1l not be measured separately but shall be
deemed to be included in the contract unit price of Steel Structures. The cost included in the
structural steel work for clean structural steel and for paint structural steel or the cost in c1 uded
in the structural steel work for clean and paint structural steel shall include fu l1 compensation
for furnishing alI labor, materials , tools , equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work
involved in cleaning and painting structural steel as specified in the Contract Documents ,
these Specifications , and the special provisions and as directed by the Engineer.
9.3 PAINTING GALVANIZED SURFACES
AII galvanized surfaces that are to be painted shalI first be c1 eaned by washing with mineral
coatmg.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCτURALWORKS Painting - Section 8.9
After cleaning, vinyl wash primer shal1 be applied to such surfaces. The vinyl wash prÎ mer
shal1 be applied by spraying to produce a uniform wet film 011 the surface. The dry film
thickness shall be between 7.6 and 12.7 μm.
Finish paint to be applied to primed galvanized surfaces shall be specified in the Contract
Documents. If not otherwise specified, the finish paint shal1 be the same as that used on
adjacent metal work or shal1 be as directed by the Engineer.
No separate payment shall be made for preparing and painting galvanized surfaces. Full
compensation for furnishing a l1 labor, mate1'ials , too1s , equipment , and incidenta1s , and fo 1'
doing all the wo1'k involved in preparing and painting galvanized surfaces as specified in the
Cont1'act Documents , these Technical Specifications, and as di 1'ected by the Engineer will be
deemed to be included in the prices paid for the various contract items of work involving the
galvanized surfaces.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Bearing - Section 8.10
SECTION 8.10 - BRIDGE BEARING
10.1 GENERAL
10. 1. 1 Description
This Section provides 1'equirements and p1'ocedures for supply and installation of bearings
required as indicated on the Drawings.
10. 1.2 Reference Specifications

AASHTO Standard Specifications for Hi ghway Bridges and the following Standards in thei1'
latest edition shall be particularly applied to the works covered by this Specification Section.
ASTM D4014-89 Elastic bearing with core steel plate specification
ASTM D5212-03 Teclmical standards as bridge bea1'ing basins
AASHTOM183 Structu1'al Stεel
ASTMA36 Ca1'bon St1'uctu1' al Steel
ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating 011 11'O n and Steel Products
ASTMA570 Steel , Sheet and Strip, Ca1'bon , Hot-Rolled , Structu1'al Quality
ASTMA615 Defo1'med and Plain Billet-Steel Ba1's fo 1' Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C881 Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems fo 1' COl1 crete

-
ASTM C l1 07 111stallation ofLoad Bearing (T1'ansve1'se and Axial) Steel Studs
and Related Accesso1'ies
ASTM D412 Vulcal1 ized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic
Elastome1' Tension
-
ASTMD429 Rubbεr Property-Adhesion to Rigid Substrates
ASTM D518 Standa1'd Test Method fo 1' Rubber Dete1' ioration-Surface Cracking
ASTM D573 Rubber - Deterioration in an Air Oven

.
ASTM D746 Brittleness Temperature ofPlastics and Elastometers by Impact
ASTM D1149 Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber

DlVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bl'idge Bearing - Sectioll 8.10
ASTM02240 Rubber Propeliy - Durometer Hardness
ASTM 03182 Materials , Equipment , and Procedures for Mixing Standard

Compounds and Preparing Standard Vulcanized Sheets
ASTM 03183 Preparation ofPieces for Test Purposes from Products

-------
ASTM 03184 Evaluation ofNR (Natur떠 Rubber)
ASTM 03185 Evaluation of SBR (Styrene-Butadiene Rubber) Including Mixtures

With Oil
ASTM 03186 Rubber-Evaluation of SBR (Styrene-Butadiene Rubber) Mixed

With Carbon Black or Carbon Black and Oil
ASTM 03187 Evaluation ofNBR (Acrylonitrile-Butadiene Rubber)
ASTM03188 Evaluation ofIIR (I sobutene-Isoprene Rubbe1')
ASTM 03189 Evaluation of Solution BR (Poly-butadiene Rubbe1')

、
ASTM 03190 Evaluation of Chlo1'oprene Rubber (CR)
ASTM 03192 Ca1'bon Black Evaluation in NR (Natural Rubbe1')
ASD이 04014 Plain and Steei-Laminated Elastomeric Bearings fo 1' Bridges
SAE 1020 Specifications for Ro l1 ed Strip.
Specifications for Finish and Gauge
10.2 SUBMITTAL
The Contractor sha11 prepare and submit the following to the Enginee1' for his approval.
(a) Celiification by the manufactu1'e1' tl1at the elastomer in the elastomeric bearing pads to be
provided conforms to a11 of the requirements indicated in these Specifications. The
celiification shall be supported by a celiified copy of the results of tests performed by the
manufacturer upon samples ofthe elastomer to be used in the pads.
(b) Certification by the manufacturer that the bearing devices to be pro피ded have been
widely applied in other projects , Iisting the project name , country and bearing codes and
properties.

DIVISION 8 - STRlJ CT lJ RAL WORKS Bridge Bearing - Section 8.1 0
(c) Drawings for the bearings prepared according to Section 18 of the AASHTO Standard
Specifications for Highway Bridgεs Division II , Volume II , or equivalent method
approved by the Engineer. The drawings shall show all details of the bearings including
the material proposed for use and confirmation that the proposed bearings have been
designed to comply with the loading requirements detailed in the drawings.
(d) Shop drawings and calculations demonstrating the compliance of all bearings with the
schedule shown on the drawings.
(e) Detailed statement describing the procedures for packaging, handling and storage of the
bearing devices to be used for the PI‘매 ect.
(f) Detailed schedule for all the required testing of materials or bearing devices to be used
for the Project.
(g) Detailed statement of the method for construction and installation of the bearing devices
to be used for the Pr이 ect.
(h) Once the Engineer has approved these methods , they shall not be changed without prior
approval by the Engineer.
10.3 MATERIALS
10.3.1 Steel-Reinforced Elastomeric Bearing
10.3. 1. 1 Rubber Material (Natural Rubber and High Damping Rubber)
The elastol11ic materials of the cOl11 pounds shall be 100% virgin polychloroprene synthetic
rubber l11 eeting the require l11 ents of Table 10 .3.1. 1- 1. The properties of the elastol11 eric
compounds shall be determined from test specimens cOl11 plying with ASTM D3182 through
D3190 inclusive and D3192. A variation of :t 10% in tens iI e strength and ultimate elongation
undεr “ physical properties" w i1l be permitted when test specimens are cut from the finished
product.
10.3. 1.2 Iníernal Steel Laminaíes
The internal steellaminates for the laminated εlastomeric bearing pads shall be rolled carbon
steel sheets complying with ASTM A 570 or AASHTO N183 (ASTM A36).
10.3.1.3 Laminated Elastomeric Bearing Pads
Laminated elastomeric bearing pads shall be individually moulded to the required size.
Corners and edges may be rounded with a radius at the corners not exceeding 9 mm and a
radius at the edges not exceeding 6 mm. All edges ofthe steellaminations shall be covered
elastomeric bearing pads shall be within the following listed tolerances:

mVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Bearing - Sectiol1l 8.10
TABLE 10.3.1.1-1 - Requirements of Elastomeric Bearing Pads
I ASTM Standard Physical Propeliies Value
D2240 Hardness , ASTM D2240 60:!: 5.
D412 Tensile strength, min.kg/cm 2 175

Ultimate elongation , min.% 425
Heat Resistance
’---
Change in du!'ometer hardness , max.points + 15
D573 , 70 HR. Change in tensile strength , max. % 15

@ 1000 C Change in ultimate elongation, max. % - 40
Compressive Set
D395. 22 hours @ 100 Oc max. % 35

Method B
Ozone
D1 149 100 pphm ozone in air by volume , 20% strain , No

37.7 0 C:!: lC , 100 hours mounting Cracks
Procedure D 518 , Procedure A
뉴--'
Adhesion to Steel
Bond made during vulcanization 80% R(Zl)
D429 , A Bond Strength (per square cm) 2.8kg
D429 , B Peel Strength (per cm ofwidth) 7 kg
Adhesion to TFE
Bond made during vulcanization
D429 , B Peel Strength
TABLE 10.3. 1.1-2: P이ychloroprene - Synthetic 표ubber
ASTM Standard Physical Propeliies 60 Duro
Low Temperature Test-Durometer Change
. Bearing or sample to be exposed for 96 hrs. @-

28 oc , :t2 0 C. (The specimen shall have a 24 lu'.
conditioning period at room temperatUl‘e prior to
low temperature exposure). The durometer test
sha l1 be rnade at-28 oc on an unbuffed surface.
TECHNICAL SPECIFIC~τIONS - DIVISION 8 8.10 - 131 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Blidge Bearing - Section 8.10
Durometer hardness increase, Max. ASTM

D2240 , 30 second reading. Durometer to be
placed in freezer with test specimen
+ 15(Z2)
「D746 Brittleness temp. , 3 min. , at -40 oC No cracks
Structural Stee l. The intemal steel laminates for

the laminated elastomeric bearings shall be
ro l1 ed mild steel sheets conforming to SAE 1020
or AASHTOMI83.
-----,
Laminated elastomeric bearings shall be
individually moulded to the required size.
Corners and edges may be rounded with a radius
at the corners not exceeding 9 mm and radius at
the edges not exceeding 6 mm. AlI edges of the
steel laminations shall be covered with not less
than 3 mm and not more than 6 mm of
elastomer. The dimensions of the elastomeric
bearings shall be within the following listed
tolerances:
The rubber laminates shall be of uniform integral units , capable of being separated by
mechanical means into separate , well-defined elastomeric layers. The ultimate breakdown
limit of the elastomeric bearing under compressive loading shall be not less than 140
kgs/cm2 • 1n addition to the requirements of Table 10.3.1.1-3 , the stress-strain relationship
of the finished elastomeric bearings at room temperature sh 8.11 not exceed the following
li mitati ons.
TABLE 10.3. 1. 1-3: The stress-strain relationship of the finished elastomeric bearings
Stress 35 kgs/sq.cm 56 kgs./sq.cm
Strain (Percent oftotal thickness of all 5% 7%

elastomer laminations
L---
1n addition , shear resistance of the bearing shall not exceed 2.1 kg/cm2 for 60 durometer,
Table No. 1 compounds at 25% strain of the total effective rubber thickness after an
extended four-day ambiεnttεmperature of -28 oC.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a certification by the manufacturer that the
elastomer , in the elastomεric bearing pads to be furnishεd conforms to all of the above
requirements. The certification shall be supported by a certified copy of the results of

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Bl'idge Bèal'ing - Section 8.10
10.3.2 Pot Bearing
10.3.2.1 Steel
(a) Steel used for pot bearings will be in accordance with AASHTO M270M/M270 (ASTM
A709/A 709M) and stainless steel must comply with ASTM A 240 Grade 304, surface
finishing type 2B.
(b) Bearings shall have surface protecting in accordance with requirements and procedures
noted under Specification Section 8.9 - "Painting".
10.3.2.2 Rubber Plate and Seal Ring
Rubber plate and compressive seal ring shall be Chloroprene Rubber, indicated on the
drawings and as approved by the Engineer, and shall be applied in accordance with the
manufacturer ’s recommendations. The material properties shall be as shown in Table
10 .3 .2.2-1 0 1' equivalent:
Table 10.3.2.2-1 Properties ofRubber Plate and Seal Ri ng
Item Unit Rubber Plate Seal Ri ng
Shear Modulus Kgf/cm 2 8 土 1. 0 -

Tensile Strength Kgf/cm 2 - > 50
Elongation % > 400 > 200
25% elongation stress

Aging Test % -10 to +100 -
change rate
(l 000C x70hr)
Elongation change rate % Minimum of 50 -
Permanent compression deformation rate
% Maximum of 35 -
(1 000C x20hr)
l
'---
10.3.2.3 Sliding Plate
Sliding plate shall comply with PTFE , ASTM , 0 1' equivalent. The physical properties ofthe
sliding plate shall be as shown in Table 10.3.2.3-1:
Table 10.3.2.3-1 Propelties of Sliding Plate
Items Specified Values Applicable Standards
Specific Gravity (25 0C) 2.20 土 0.03 ASTM0792
Tensile strength > 14 N/mm 2 ASTM 0638 or ASTM 02256

--
Elongation > 150% ASTM 0638 0 1' ASTM 02256

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Bridge Bearing - Section 8.10
10.3.2.4 Galvanizing
Exposed surface of top and bottom bearings and side block shall be galvanized with
adhesion volume of not less than 550 g/m2. The bolts , washer and nuts sha1J be galvanized
with adhesion volume of 350 잉m2.
10.4 FABRICATION TOLERANCE
10.4.1 Steel-Reinforced Elastomeric Bearing
Fabrication tolerance for components of steel-reinforced elastomeric bearing shall be in

accordance with Table 10.4.1-1 and Table 10 .4 .1-2:
Table 10 .4 .1-1 Fabrication Tolerances for Elastomeric Bearing and Product Assembly Dimensions
Items Classifications Tolerances
a, b :S 500mm Oto +5mm

Width (a)
500mm < a, b :S 1,500mm oto +1%
Length (b)
1,500mm < a , b Oto+15mm
200mm < t :S 160mm -2.5 to + 2.5%

Thickness (t)
160mm < t -4.0 to +4.0mm
a, b :S 1,000mm lmm
Flatness *
1000mm < a , b a, b /1 ,000
A, B :S Add 土 l .5mm to the thickness

Product assembly
Length (A) 1,500mm tolerance
dimension (Bearing
Width (B) 1500mm < A, Add :l:2mm to the thickness
Overall Height)
B tolerance
Note *: The f1 atness is defined by the maximum relative height of an elastmeric bearing, t ,
measured at the four corners.
Table 10 .4 .1-2 Fabrication Tolerance for Steel Components
Items Tolerances Remarks
Connection bolt hole - Hole diameter +2mm~-Omm
Superstructure and Distance between hole Deviation measured

<: lmm
~C'양rners-~ ‘f항ηδnηTI‘ .. r ìre)'

mVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WO없영 Bl'idge Bea l'ing - Section 8.10
Distance between hole

S 1.5mm
centεrs>1000mm
+3.0mm to-
Drilling hole
1. 0111111
Anchor bolt hole ----
Distance between hole Gas cutting
土 2mm
centers dimension applied
Anchor bolt len암h 土2%
Diameter: d -1 to +Omm Measurement a잠er

Shear key
Height: h -1 to +lmm assembly
-
Dimensions for other Machining dimension 土 2mm
뉴---------
components Gas cutting dimension 土 3.5mm
10.4.2 Pot Bearing
Fabrication tolerance for components of pot bearing shall be in accordance with
Table 10 .4 .2-1 Fabrication Tolerances for Pot BearingAssembly Dimensions
It ems Tolerances Remarks

Hole diameter +0.2mm to-Omm
COIU1ection bolt
Distance between hole centers Deviation
hole - S lml11
S lOOOmm measured from
Superstructure
Distance between hole centers shear key
and Substructure S 1.5mm
>1000mm
S 100mm +3.0mm to -l. Omm
Anchor bolt hole Hole diarneter ---_.._-----
T (lnai잉 > 100mm +4.0mm to -2.낀lnm
direction) Distance between hole centers 土 2111m
-
Anchor bolt length 土 2%
Diarneter -1 to +Omm
Shear key
Height oto +lmm
Top bearing lengths (longitudinal and transverse) 土 6mm
Upper & lower surface finish 土3mm

Assembly height
F 0 1' concrete HS300mm 土3mm
(H)
structure H>300mm 土 (Hl 200+3)mIrl lfl mm
Length 土 4mm
Dimensions for Thickness 土 7mm
other
Machining dimension 土 1.2mm
components
Gas cutting dimension 士 3.5mrn
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 8 8.10 -135 - of214

DNISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Bearing - Section 8.10
10.5 PACKAGING, HANDLIN G, AND STORAGE OF POT BEARINGS
Prior to shipment from the point of manufacture , bearings shall be packaged in such
amanner to ensure that during shipment and storage the bearings will be protected
againstdamage form handling, weather, 0 1' any normal hazard.
Each completed bearing shall have its components clearly identified, be securely
bolted ,strapped 0 1' otherwise fastened to prevent any relative movement, and marked on its
top as tolocation and orientation in each structure in the project in conformity with the plans.
Dismantling at the site shall not be done unlεss absolutely necessary for inspection
orinstal1 ation.
10.6 DO찌1ELBAR
10.6.1 Dowel
(a) Steel dowels shal1 be provided and installed in accordance with requirements and with
accessories noted on the drawings.
(b) Dowels shall be smooth plain billet-steel bars conforming to requirements of ASTM A615
and shall be zinc (hot-dip galvanized) in accordance with ASTM A123. The materials shall
conform to the standards specified in the Table 10.6.1-1 or equivalent.
(c) Fabrication of Dowel bar shall conform to the applicable requirements of Part 8, Section 8
“ Steel Structures" in these Specifications.
Table 10.6.1-1 Materials for Dowel bar
Member Material Standards
Grades HPS485W
ASTM A 709M!A709M-
Dowel bar
( ~"min
,mm = 485MPa)
OOa, or equivalent
(d) Dowels may be cast-in situ as shown on the drawings 0 1' drilled and grouted with an
approved epoxy compound.
(e) If dowels are dr i1l ed and grouted:
• holes shall provide at least 10 mm in diameter greater than the largest diameter of the
dowel;
• holes shall be thoroughly cleaned with compressed air and water prior to grouting of
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VlSION 8 8.10-136-of214

mVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Bearing - Section 8.10
The epoxy compound used shall be ASTM C881 , Type IV or approved equivalent and
mixed and placed in accordance with manufacture ’ s requirements.
(f) Dowell shall be galvanized with the zinc volume of 550 g/m2.
10.6.2 Rubber
Rubber shall be natural rubber 25mm thick with hardness 53土5 ， bonded to inner and outer
sleeve.
10.7 RJGID FORMED PLASTIε SHEET
Rigid Formed Plastic Sheet indicated 011 the drawings and as approved by the Engineer, and
shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer ’ s recommendations.
10.8 INSTALLATION
The bearings shall be clearly marked with their longitudinal and transverse axes , their type
number and their intended locations in the Works.
The Contractor shall fix and bed all bearings in accordance with the manufacture ’s
reeommendations and have to submit for the Engineer ’s approvals. Proposals for the
thickness and type of bearing plinths and beds shall be submitted by the Contractor and
approved by the Engineer ’s in advance ofbearing instal1atio l1.
The C011tractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval a detailed Method Statement with
respect to the methods for installation and adjustment of the bridge bearings. Once the
Engineer has approved these methods , they shal1 not be changed without prior approval by
the Engineer.
Bearings shall l10t be dismantled. Any transit bolts , straps or other tempor‘ ary fixing shall not
be removed until the bearing is fixed in its final position and the structure immediately above
the bearing is in place. Care shall be taken to ensure that all transit bolts straps or other
temporarγ fixings are fina11y removed.
A11 bearings sha11 be set horizontal in both directions and sha11 be positioned so that the ‘
inscribed longitudinal axis is para11el to the structure axis at the point of supp01i, unless
otherwise noted in the Drawings.
An y devices such as steel packs used to hold bearings level whilst being fixed , must be
removed finally, so that the bearings seats only on its mortar bedding.
M01iar shall be non-slu'ink mortar approved by the Engineer.
Where precast beams and segments are placed on elastomeric bearings , immediately prior to
the placing of each beam and segment the top of the bearing shal1 be coated with a sufficient
thickness of approved m이‘tar to take up any irregularities between the surface of the beams
and segment and the bearings.
Bearings shall be set within the tolerances shown in Table 10.8-1:

Table 10.8-1 Setting To1erances of Bearing
E1astomeric
Item Pot Bearing
Bearing
Setting height :t 5 mm
-
Re1ative error in the longitudinal direction of a
:t5 mm
movab1e bearings
Distance between center to center of bearings

:t 5 mm
(transverse direction)
lnclination in 10ngitudina1 and transverse direction 1/100 11300
10.9 TESTING OF BEARINGS
The testing of se1εcted bεarings shall be arranged with the Engineer prior to their in c1 usion in
the Works. The testing shall be done at an independent testing fac i1ity approved by the
Enginee1'.
10.9.1 Elastomeric Bearings
(a) Long-Du1'ation Compression Tests on Bearings
Se1ected bea1'ings shall be 10aded in compression to 1.5 timεs their maximum design load for
a minimum period of 15 hours. If, during the test, the 10ad falls be10w 1.3 times the
maximum design Joad , the tεst duration shal1 be extended by the period oftime for which the
10ad is beJow this limit. The bearing shall be examined visually at the end ofthe test wh i1 e it
is sti1l under 10ad. If the bu1ging pattern suggests 1aminate paraIIelism or a layer thickness
that is outside the specified to1e1'ances , or poor 1aminate bond , the bea1'ing shall be 1'ejected.
If there are tlu'ee 01‘ mo1'e sepa1'ate su1'face c1'acks that a1'e greate 1' than 0.08 in. (2mm) wide
and 0.08 in. (2mm) deep , the bearing shall be r멍 ected.
(b) Shear Modules Tests on Materia1 f1'om Bea1'ings
The shear modu1us of the material in the finished bearing w il1 be evaluated by testing a
specimen cut f1'om the bearing using the apparatus and procedure desc1'ibed in Annεx-A of
ASTM D4014 , or, at the discretion of the Engineer, a comparab1e non-destructive stiffness
test may be conducted on a pair of finished bearings. The shear modu1us shall fall within 15
percent of the specified value 이‘ within the range for its hardness given in AASHTO
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges , Article 14.3 of Division 1, if no shear modulus
용윷앓훌응증중용증옳흥둡용§융용른융훌률융웅통융;종응을도도용융등중중용증§훌잃효융공용굶τ
is specified. lf the test is conducted on finished hearings , the material shear mûdúlùs shaIl be
computed f1'om the measu1'εd shea1' stiffness of the bea1'ings , taking due account of the
TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS - Dl VIS10N 8 8.10-138-of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCτURAL 찌'ORKS Bridge Bearing - Section 8.10
in f1 uence on shear stiffness ofbearing geometry and compressive load.
10.9.2 Mechanical Bearing Tests
(a) Vertical ProofLoad Test ofComplete Bearing

The veltical proof load sh a1 1 be 1.5 times the maximum veltical load specified in the bearing
schedule. The proofload sha l1 be maintained for a minimum period ofthree minutes.
(b) Horizontal Proof Load Test of Complete Bearing
Bearings, which a1‘ e required to resist lateral forces , shall be further tested to 1.5 times the
lateral load stated 011 the Drawings wh i1 e loaded in compression to the minimu l11 vertical
load showl1 011 the Drawings. The load shall be maintained for tlu'ee minutes.
(c) Rotation test ofComplete Bearing
o The bearings shall be tested in rotation to the value for rotation shown 011 the
Drawings while being loaded in compression to the maximum vertical load
shown 011 the Drawings. Bearings, which are required to resist Iateral forces ,
shal1 also have the specified lateral load stated on the Drawings applied during
this tes t.
• The direction of application ofthe lateral load and the axis of rotation shall be
compatible with the in-service loads and rotational requirements. The lateral
load sha11 be applied using a calibrated sliding surface to minimize any frictional
restraint. All PTFE and stainless steeI interfaces shall be Iubricated prior to the
test. The test loads shal1 be maintained for three minutes.
10.9.3 Sampling and Testing
Samp!i ng, testing, and acceptance consideration sha !l be made on a lot basis. A lot shall be the
smallest number of bearings as determined by the following criteria:
.. Sha1l not exceed a single contract document 0 1" pr이 ect quantity;
• ShaIl not exceed 25 bearing;
• Shall consist of those bearing of the same type regardless of load capacity.
Bearing types may be fixed or expansion types. Guided and non-guided
expansion bearings sha1l be considered to be a single type.
인와료: A lot shall be defined as those bearings presented for inspection at a specific
time or date.
10.9.4 Performance Criteria

If one bearing of the sample fa i! s, all the bearings of th없 lot shall be r태 ected， unless the
Manufacturer elects to test each bearing of the lot at his expense. 1n lieu of this procedure, the
Engineer may require every bearing ofthe lot to be tested.
10.9.5 Rejection ofBearings
Any bearing that, as a result ofthe testing specified , exhibits any signs offailure such as:
(a) Splitting or permanent deformation ofthe elastomer;
(b) Tearing, cracking or permanent deformation ofthe PTFE sliding surface;
(c) Cracking or permanent defonnation ofthe sealing ring or other part ofthe bearing;
(d) Abrasive marks indicating abnormal contact between the metal surfaces of the bearing
plates or piston , and the pot;
(e) or does not comply with the requirements and tolerances of this Specification Section ,
shal1 be r태 ected and shal1 be replaced immediately.
(f) Bearings damaged during transpm1 , instal1 ation or subsequent construction operations
shall also be Ii able for r태 ection and replacemen t.
10.10 MEASUREMENT
Bearing devices shall be measured by Nos. for each type ofbearing assembly installed at Site
in accordance with these Technical Specifications and accepted by the Engineer.
Dowel Bar on the top of Pier - Approach Bridge shall be measured by numbers of dowel bars
installed. Fittings (Steel Sleeve , Natural Rubber... ) w i1l not be measured separating but shall
be deemed to be included in the unit price of Dower Bar.
Rigid Formed Plastic Sheet membranes shal1 be measured for payment by square meters
actua l1 y completed in place in accordance with the Drawings and these Teclmícal
Specifications and accepted by the Engineer.
10.11 PAYMENT
Bearing devices shall be paid at the contract price per uni t. Such payment shal1 include 삐l
compensation for furnishing all labor, materials , (and Dowels bar) , tools , equipment, and
incidentals and for doing all the work involved in furnishing , testing, and instal1 ing said
bearing devices including temporary supp011 and jacking frame , adjustment of the setting
location and non-shrink mortar laying underneath bottom bearing and anchor bolts ,
completed in place , as shown in the Contract Document, as specified in this Technical
Specifications , and as directed by the Engineε1".
AJI expenses for the inspections of material and workmanship fO I" every different types of
Contractor and shaJl be deemed to be included in the unit prices for relevant pay items in

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bi'idge Bearing - Section 8.10
B iIl of Quantities. During fabrication this inspection shall be stipulated by the EngÎnee1'.
The items ofwork payable unde 1' this provision along with their units shall be as follows:
Pay Item Unit of

Description
No. Measurement
-
8.10-01 Elastomeric Bearing for Anchorage Pier P28 (APl) Each.
8.10-02 Elastomeric Bea1'ing for Anchorage Pie1' P29 (AP2) Each.
8.10-03 Elastomeric Bearing for Pylon PYl Each.
8.10-04 Elastome1'ic Bearing for Pylon PY2 Each.
8.10-05 Pot Bearing for Anchorage Pier Each.
8.10-06 Pot Bearing for Pylon Each.
8.10-07 Elastome i'Î c Bearing for Super-T Each.
8.10-08 Pot Bearing type Guided Sliding fo 1' A 1 and A2 Each.
8.10-09 Pot Bearing type Free Sliding for A1 and A2 Each.
8 .1 0-10 Pot Bearing type Guided Sliding for P7 and P47 Each.
8 .1 0-11 Pot Bearing type Free Sliding for P7 and P47 Each.
8 .1 0-12 Pot Bearing type Guided Sliding for P18 , P28 , P29 and P38 Each.
8 .1 0-13 Pot Bea1'ing type Free Sliding for P 18 and P38 Each.
Dowel Bar on the top ofPier - Approach Bridge (Galvanize

8 .1 0-14 Each
Rebars φ =60mm)
8 .1 0-15 Stopper at PY1 Set
8.10-16 Rigid Formed Plastic Sheet m2

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Deck Expansion Joints - Section 8.11
SECTION 8.11 - BRIDGE DECK EXPANSION JOINTS
11.1 GENERAL
This work shall consist of the furnishing and instaIli ng of expansion joint systems in bridge
decks ofthe types used where significant movements are expected across the joint.
The type and dimensions or movement rating for bridge deck expansion joint at each location
shall be as shown in the Contract Documents or as ordered by the Engineer.
AlI expansionjoint shall prevent the intrusion ofmaterial and w따er through the joint system.
Bridge deck expansion joint types used in the work are “ Multi-Cell Modular Type Expansion
Joint" and “ Finger Type Joint".
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be pal1icularly applied to the works
covered by this Specification Section.
AASHTOM297 Specification standard for Bridge expansionjoint
AASHTOMl83
ASTMA123 Zinc (Hot-Oip Galvanized) Coatings on 1ron and Steel Products

-
ASTMD395 Rubber Propeliy - Compression Set
Vulcanized Rubber and Thennoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic

ASTMD412
Elastomer - Tension
ASTM 0471 Rubber Property - Effect of Li quids
ASTM D994 Preformed Expansion Joint F ilI er for Concrete (Bituminous Type)
ASTM 01149 Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber
ASTM02240 Rubber Property - Ourometer Hardness
Joint and Crack Sealants, Hot Applied , for Concrete and Asphalt
ASTM 06690
Pavements
11.2 WORKING DARWINGS
11.2.1 General
installation shall be rεquired before approval to install joints in any bridge deck can be given.
TECHNICAl‘ SPECIFICATl ONS - DIVISION 8 8.11 - 142 - of 214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Decl. Expansion Joints - Sectioll 8.11
The Contractor shall submit working drawings to the Engineer showing the installation
procedure and joint assembly for bridge decks using proprietary joint systems. Shop drawings
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval for joints having a total movement of more
than 45 111m.
No work on the deck expansion joint shall be perfofmed prio1' to approval of working
drawings by the Engineer. Such approval shallnot relieve the Contractor of any responsibility
under the Contract Documents for the successful completion ofthe work.
11.2.2 The Modular Bridge Expansion Joint
11.2.2.1 Design Requirements
The modular bridge joint system shall be designed, fabricated , inspected, tested and
installedby the manufacturer in accordance with the provisions of this Specificatiol1 and
therequirements shown on the Drawings. The manufactu1"er shall provide to the Employer
awarranty guaranteeing the quality and performance of the joint system fo 1' a period of 5
years ,commencing from the date of opening of the bridge on which the joint system has
beeninsta1led.
The expansionjoint system shall be designed to aecom l11odate alI expeeted serv ic.emovements,
such as Longitudinal , Transverse , Vertical and Rotations. The design sha11incorporate strip seal
glands with a maximul11 allowable gap opening of 80 111m per seal.
The expansion joint system shall comply with fatigue design requirements as laid out in
AASHTO LRFD Construction Specifications , 1st Edition , Appendix A: “ Standard
TestMethods for Modular Bridge Joint System".
The total cross sectional area of steel anchors on each side of the joint shall not be less than
1600 mm2/meter and their spacing shal1 not be greater than 200 111111. The anchors shal1 havea
111inimurn pul1 out capacity of 120 KN/m.
The center beams shall be supported by bearings which are sliding on a SUpp Olt bar. Toprevent
uplift of the center beam, thε yoke shall be pre-stressed with sliding springs and heldin place
by yoke frame which is welded to the center beams. No bolted connection betweencenter
beams and yoke sha1l be allowed.
Preference shal1 be given to designing and fabricating the expansion joint system as
onecontinuous unit without fi!ed splices. If a field splice becomes necessary because of the
siteand/or logistic requirements , the splices shall be located in areas outside the main
trafficlanes to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
TECHNICAL SPECIFIC A:τIONS - mVISION 8 8.11-143-of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Deck ExpansiOI1 .Joints - Section 8.11
11.2.2.2 Submittals:
ln addition to the general submittal requirements , the Contractor shall also submit details of
thε following:
• Design calculations for all structural elements of Expansion Joints. The

designcalculations shall include a fatigue design and a strength design for all
structuralelements and connections in full compliance with AASHTO LRFD Bridge
DesignSpecificatio.ns, 2007.
• Plans , elevation , and section of the joint system for each movement rating
androadway width showing dimensions and tolerances;
• All ASTM , AASHTO , or other material designations;
• Test cεrtificate/ documents related to material and performance of components,

attested in original by the suppliεr， confirming all above requirements under
“ DesignRequirements"
o Method of installation including but not limited to sequence, setting relative

totemperature , anchorage during setting, and installation at curbs;
o Corrosion protection system;
• Details oftemporary supports for shipping and handling;
11.2.3 Finger 1γpe Joint
The Contractor shall propose the detailed drawings of the expansion joints to be used in the
work. The statement and compliance with requirement from design and test data giving its
properties shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
11.3 MATERIAL
11.3.1 Modular Bridge Joint Systems
Material utilized to produce profiJes holding eJastomeric seaJs shall be ASTM A588 Corrosion
Resi5tant Steel or equivalent.
The edge beams retaining the elastomeric seaJs and located at the outer frame of the
modularsystem , shall consist of a 5tεel monolithic shape with a macbined 01‘ extruded retainer
cavity.Profiles fabricated using welded steel 5hapes , or which are bent or crimped to achieve
thefinal shape , 0 1' to seal the retainer cavity will not be permitted.
All shop-welded connections that splice center beams 이‘ edge beams shall be full
wεIds asper AWS D 1.5 requirements.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 씨'ORKS Bridge Dcck Expansion Joints - Section 8.n
The support bars shall incorporate stainless steel sliding surfaces conforl11ing to ASTM 240,
ηpe 304.
The elastomeric seal matεrial shall be Chloroprene (Neoprene). The desìgn of theElastomeric
seal shall be a strip seal type that provides a maximum gap opening of 80 mm. The Elastomeric
material shall conform to ASTM D5973. The Elastomeric seal shall besupplìed and installed
in one continuous length.
Elastomeric seal shall be installed utilìzing a one-pmi moisture curing polyurethane

andaromatic hydrocarbon solvent mixture that complìes with ASTM D4070.
All miscellaneous steel plates for supp Oli boxes shall conform to ASTM A36 or equivalentand
must be a minimum 10 111m thickness. All steel plates utilized to for l11 the support boxesmust
be continuously welded together.
All steε1 surfaces shall be blast cleaned to ISO SA 2.5 standard, with a prime coat oflriter-zinc
42 primer (or equivalent) to a dry fil l11 thickness of l11 inimu l11 75 micron. Anintermediate
coating of Inter-guard 400 Epoxy (or equivalent) to a dry film thickness of 75mÎcrons, and a
top coat of another 75 microns Inter-guard 400 Epoxy to achieve a total dryfilm thickness of
miuimUlll 225 ll1iιrull.
The supplier must submit a water tightness report from an ìndependent laboratory showingno
sign of water leakage through the seal for 24 hours when joints has been opened to
fullmovement of 80 mm longitudinally and 50% of longitudinal opening in transverse
directionsimultaneously.
11.3.2 Finger 자'pe Joint
(a) The material for finger type joint shall be in accordance with Division 8 Section 8.8
“ Steel Structure" and also comply with manufacturer ’ s instruction. The Contractor shall
submit manufacturer ’s celiificates to the Engineer for his approval.
(b) Structural steel anchors shall be fabricated and hot dip galvanized in accordance with the
requirements of ASTM A123.
(c) Anchor bolts for joint seals shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153
cO l11 mercial grade bolts set in epoxy mOliar in holes cored in the deck in accordance with
approved shop drawings.
(d) The surface of holes cored in the concrete shall be carefully prepared to provide a
cleaned textured surface to which the non-shrinkage concrete can successfully bond.
Faces shall be l11 echanically tooled until surface glaze and contamination have been
removed. Bolts shall be degreased with white spirit alcohol and dried thoroughly. Coring
and setting the anchor bolts shall not be done until a l11 inimum of 7 days after concrete is
poured.
(e) The concrete shall be controlled , mixed and handed as specified in Section 5 “ Concrete
TECHNICAL SPECIFICAl‘ IONS - DIVISION 8 8.11 - 145 - of 214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 씨rORKS Bridge Deck Expansion Joints - Section 8.11
Structures" of these Specifications. Very-high-slump concrete shall not be used in the

block-out. Concrete shall not be deposited in the forms unt i1 the Engineer has inspected
and approved the placement of the reinforcements , conduits, anchorages , and prestressing
steel.
(f) Ifthere is a vertical grade , concrete shall be placed on the downh il1 side ofthe block-out
firs t. The concrete shall be vibrated thoroughly so as to adequately consolidate concrete
underneath the support boxes and edge-beams. Care should be taken to avoid
displacement of the forms and reinforcing stee l. The concrete shall not be p)aced during
extremely cold weather or during heavy rain.
11.4 MANUFACTURE AND FABRICATION
11 .4.1 Compression Seal Joints
Preformed elastomeric joint shall not be field-spliced , except when specifically permitted by
the Engineer
1 1.4.2 Modular Bridge .Joint Systems
11.4.2.1 General
The following requirements apply to both shop welds and field welds unless specificaIIy noted
otherwise. The MBEJ shall be fabricated in accordance with the dimensions , shapes, details,
material specifications, and procedures shown in the approved shop plans. F i11 et welds shall
be welded continuously. Intermittent fillet welds are not permitted.
Field-splice details shall be fatigue-tested and shall be app l'Oved by the Engineer.
Care must be taken to avoid weld metal getting into the seal retainer grooves , which can lead
to seal pullout and leaking. Li fting devices shall be provided , and devices to maintain the
preset opening of the joint shall be provided at a uniform spacing not greater than 4500 mm
along the length ofthe MBEJ. At least three devices shall be used per segment ofMBEJ.
Whεn the fabrication is completed, the Manufacturer shall perform the pre-installation
inspection described in Article 11.5.3.2 to assure that the MBEJ will pass this inspection.
11.4.2.2 Center-beam and Support ßar
The center-beams , support bars , and cOlU1 ection details shall be the same type as were used in
thε prequalification tests. Shop splices in the center-beam pro fi1 e shall be two-sided ,
complete-joint-penetration groove welds. In welded multiple-support-bar MBEJ , the weld
joint bεtween the cente
밍r-ι;내
After
ofany
supp 0l1 bars exceeding 6 mm off the surface. The subassembly may be straightened. No

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bl'idge Deck Expansio Jl Joints - 8ectio i1 8.11
more than three attempts may be made to heat-straighten the subassembly.
The support bar is indicated by “ Support Beam" in drawings for Approach Bridges.
11.4.2.3 Seals
Seals shall be installed by the Manufacturer before shipping unless center-bearn field splices
are used. lf field splices are necessary, continuous seals (without splices) shall be insta l1 ed În
the field after the construction is complete. ln eithe1' case , the same lub1'icant-adhesive that
was used in the prequalification tests shal1 be used when installing the seals. The seals shall
extend out f1'om the ends ofthe edge-beams and center-beams by at least 50 mm.
11.4.2.4 Support Boxes
Support boxes shall be made frorn steel plate or tubes at least 9 mm thick continuously welded.
Ifthe suppoli boxes are 1110re thal1 400 111m wide , the thickness ofthe top plate shall increase
so that the width-to-thickness ratio does not exceed 45 01' stiffening must be used. If the
support box is made of nested tubes, the diamete1' 01' width-to-thickness ratio of each tube shall
not exceed 45.
11.4.2.5 PTFE Sliding Su l'face
The PTFE shall be bonded under controlled conditions and in accordance with the instructions
of either the PTFE Manufacturer 01' the adhesive Manufacturer. After completion of the
bonding ope1'ation, the PTFE surface shalI be smooth and free underlying bubbles.
11.4.2.6 Stainless Steel Sliding Surface for MBEJ
The stainless steel shalI be polished to an 0.20 μm mirro1' finish.
11.4.2.7 Corrosion Protection
AII steel surfaces , except the surfaces under stainless steel or those to be bonded to PTFE,
shalI be p1'otected against cor1'osion.
11.4.3 Finger Type Joint
Expansion Joint Material delivered to the bridge site 8hall be 8tored under cover on pl없fOl‘m
above the su1'face of the ground.
It shalI be protected at alI times from damages , and when placed it shall be free from dirt , oil ,
grease 01' othe1' foreign substance. The pre-mold mate1'ial 8hall be used in a8 large pieces as
p088ible. The mate1'ial shall be cut to a clear, true edge with sharp too l. Rough 01' ragged
edges shall not be permitted. Jointing of adjacent pieces shalI be in accordance with
manufacturer ’8 in8truction.

11.5 INSTALLATION
11.5.1 General
AlI joint material and assemblies stored at the job site shall be protected from damage and
assemblies shall be supp011ed so as to maintain their true shape and alignmen t. Deck
expansion joint shall be constructed and installed to provide a smooth ride. Bridge deck joint
shall be covers over by protective material after installation until final clean-up of the bridge
deck.
After installation and p띠r to final acceptance , deck expansion joint shall be tested in the
prεsence of the Engineer for leakage of water through the join t. Any leakage of the expansion
joint shall be cause for rejection.
11.5.2 Compression Seal Joints
Joints in the roadway area ofbridge decks that are to be sealed with compression seals shall be
cast to a narrower width than required for the prefonned material. Such joints in curbs and
sidewalks may be cast to full width. Prior to installation of compression seals in joints whose
width is narrower than needed , a groove of proper width and depth to recεive the preformed
material shall be saw-cut along the top ofthe joint.
When making saw cuts into the bridge deck, spal1i ng shal1 be minimized. Both sides of a
groove shall be cut simultaneously to the proper depth and alignment as shown in the Contract
Documents. The alignment of the saw shall be controlled at all times by a rigid guide. The
width of the groove shall depend on the te l11perature and age of the concrete and shall be as
directed by the Engineer. Li p of saw cut should be bevelled to avoid later breakage. After
saw cutting, any spalls , pop outs , or cracks shall be repaired prior to installation of the
lubricant-sealant. Saw cuts are not requi 1'ed where a1'mor plates a1'e instal1 ed.
At the time of instal1 ation , the joint shal1 be c1 ean and dry, and free f1'om spalls and
irregula1'ities that l11 ight impai 1' a proper joint. Concrete or metal su1'faces shall be clean and
free of rust , laitance , o i1 s , di11 , dust, or other deleterious materials. Pre-11101ded elastomeric
compression joint shall be installed without damage to the seal by suitable hand methods or
machine tools. The lubricant-adhesive shall be applied to both faces of the joint prior to
installation and in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions. The preforl11ed elastomeric
seaI shaIl be compressed to the thickness specified in the Contract Documents or as approved
by the Engineer for the rated opening and ambient temperature at the time of instaIlation.
Loose-fitting or open points between the seal and the deck shaIl 110t be pennitted.
11.5.3 Modular Bridge Joint Systems

~느 τγτι 양:
The Contractor shall follow the Manufacturer ’ s written installation guidelines and the
following guidelines. The Engi l1 eer in the following guidelines may be the authorized

DIVISION 8 - STRUC1‘ URALWORKS Bridge Deck ExplI nsion Joints - Section 8.11
representative of the Engineer.
For the MBJSs for the main bridge , the Contractor sha11 check their bolt hole spacing with
these for the end floorbeam top flanges and confirm that both fit together.
11.5.3.1 Shipping and Handling
The MBEJ shall be delivered to the job site and stored in accordance with the Manufacturer’s
written recommendations as approved by the Engineer. Darnage to the corrosiol1 protectioll
system shall be repaired to the satisfactioll ofthe Engineer. Seals shall 110t be damaged 01' cut.
11.5.3.2 Pre-installation Inspection
Immediately prior to illstaJl atioll , the MBEJ and the block-out shall be inspected by the
Engineer for:
.. Proper alignment
.. Complete bond between the seals and the steel.
.. Proper placement and effectiveness of studs 01' other anchorage devices.
.. Proper placement of elastomeric springs and bearings.
• The proper placement ofwaterproofing membranes sha11 be verified, ifutilized.
• The clearance specified on the drawings 75 mm is recommended between the bottoms

ofthe support boxes ofMBEJ and the surface ofthe block-out should be verified.
Cutting of bridge deck reinforcing steel can compromise the structural integrity of the block-
out and req
때 띠ire
u 않sa
때pp
껴rova
떠1 아
0 fthe Eng
밍inee
밍하r’'. Tπhe En밍
gineε
하rs
얘 ha
머1때1 ver
미if
텀y th
뼈
1at1ηr‘eir
띠nforc
띠
cir
매
ngmηle
않sh or
bar.‘'s 없al'‘e at least 50 mm from the edge-bearn or anchorages and do 110t prevent the flow of
concrete around the MBEJ.
No bends 01' kinks in the MBEJ steel shall be a110wed (except as required to follow the
roadway crown and grades). Any MBEJ eYJlibiting bends or kinks shall be repaired to t Ï1 e
Engineer’s satisfaction 01' replaced at the expense ofthe Contractor.
Seals not fully connected to the steel shall be fully connected at the expense of the Contractor.
Headed concrete anchors sha11 be inspected visually and shall be given a light blow with a
ham111er. Any headed concrεte anchor that does not have a complete end weld OI‘ does not
emit a ringing sound when struck a light blow with a hammer shall be replaced. Headed
concrete anchors located more than 25 mm along the length of the edge-beam from the
location shown on the shop drawings and headed concrete anchors located more tha11 6 111m
too high in elevation (reducing cover) shall be carefully removed and a new anchor welded in
the proper location. AIl anchor replacement shall be at the expense ofthe Contractor.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATlONS - DIVISION 8 8.11 -149 - of214

D1VISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Decl{ Expansion Joints - Section 8.11
11.5.3.3 Installation
Prior to installation of the joint, the block-out and suppoliing system shall be protected from
damage and construction traffic.
11. 5.3.3.1 Setting Gap Opening
The MBEJ shall be installed at the proper gap opening corresponding to the installation
temperature , as shown on the approved shop plans. The opening devices should be removed
immediately after the concrete is placed.
11.5.3.3.2 Formwork
The Contracto1' shall ensure that fo 1'mwo1'k excludes conc1'ete entry into support boxes or in
any way impeding f1'ee movement ofthe MBEJ.
11. 5.3.3.3 Supp이‘ting MBEJ during Placing ofConcrete.
The MBEJ shall be fully suppolied during the placement of the concrete. Welds fo 1' tempo1'ary
attachments to the center-beams or supp Oli bars for erection purposes must be removed and
the surface ground smooth. The corrosion protection system shall be repai 1'ed to the
satisfaction ofthe Engineer using a method approved by the Engineer. To reduce corrosion of
the MBEJ , is should be electrically isolated by 110t c01111ecting the bridge deck reinforcement
to the MBE J.
11. 5.3.3 .4 Placing the Concrete
Thε concrete shall be controlled, mixed and handed as specified in Section 5 “ Concrete
Structurεs" of these Specifications. Very-high-slump concrete shall not be used in the block-
out. Concrete shall 110t be dεposited in the forms until the Engineer has inspected and
approved the placement ofthe reinfo 1'cements, conduits, anchoragεs， and prestressing stee l.
Ifthere is a vertical grade , concrete shall be placed 011 the downhill side ofthe block-out firs t.
The concrete shall be vibrated thoroughly so as to adequately c011solidate C011crete underneath
the suppoli boxes and edge-beams. Care should be taken to avoid displacement of the fo 1'ms
and reinfo 1'cing steel. The conc1'ete shall not be placed du1'ing ext1'emely cold weather or
during heavy rain.
11. 5.3.3.5 Finished MBEJTolerances
The MBEJ shall be inspected after installation to verify the following:
• The top surfaces of the MBEJ shall be recessed from the finished roadway profile 0 to
6mm.
centαte
리r-
‘'-내
bea없mso
야r edge.-‘ b
TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS - D1 VISION 8 8.11 - 150 - of214

i
、
DIVISION 8 - STRUεTURALWORKS Bridge Deck Expansion Joinfs - Section 8.n
line connecting the top ofthe deck profile on each side ofthe MBEJ.
c There shall be no more than 12 111m difference among gap widths at eithe1' end of a seal
01' among the multiple gaps ofMBEJ
11 ‘ 5.3.3 .6 Bridging MBEJ After 1nstallation
Construction loads shal1 not be al10wed on the MBEJ fo 1' at least 72 h after installation is
completed. If it is necessary to cross the MBEJ, the Contractor shall bridge over the MBEJ in
a manner approved by the Engineer.
11 ‘ 5.3.3.7 Removal 01 Forms and Debris
All fonns and debris shall be removed after installation.
11.5.3.3.8 Water-tightness Test
If specified in the Contract Documents, the wate1'-tightnes5 test 5hall be conducted. After the
MBEJ has been installed and completed, the MJBS sh떠1 be flooded fo 1' a minimum of 1 h to a
minimum depth of 75 mm. If leakage is observed , the MJBS shall be repaired to the
Enginee 1'’s satisfaction and 1'etested at the Cont1'acto1'’s expense. The 1'epai 1' p1'ocedu1'e shall be
l' ecommended by the Manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
11.5.3.3.9 Acceptance
An MBEJ that fails inspection 01' testing shall be replaced 01' repaired to the 5atisfaction ofthe
Engineer at the Contracto1'’ s expense. Any proposed corrective procedure shall be sub 1l1 itted
to the Engineer fo 1' approval befo1'e cor1'ective work is begun.
11.5.4 Finger Type Joint
Expansion joint shall be shaped to the section , and of a type of material as shown on the
Drawings 01' approved by the Engineer. The size of the gap shal1 be compatible with the
mean bridge temperature at the time of installation. This setting temperature shall be
dete1'1l1inεd and agreed with the Enginee1'.
Installation ofjoint shall be by the Shop Drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer ’ s
instructions and recommendations. The joint gap and presetting shall be suit to a1l1 bie11t
temperature and shall be desc 1'ibed 011 the Working Drawings to be approved by the Engineer.
Deck surface at expal1sion joint shall be cast to the shape 50 that the expansion joint can be
installed in position. Concrete surface to which the expansion joint is installed shall be dry,
sound and free from laitance. All concrete and mOliar in the gap of joint shall be carefully
removed by means of sharp chisel. Joint shall be filled with bituminous fiberboard 01' similar
approved , as shown on the drawings.
The position of al1 bolts cast into cO l1crete and all holes shall be accurately determined from
templates. The , application and curing of all proprietary shall comply with the
1l1ixing
TECHNICAL SPECIFIC A:’fI ONS - DIVISION 8 8.11 - 151 - of214

manufacturer ’ s requirements.
Al1 joints shall be constructed according to physical details shown on the Drawings or as
dirεcted by the Engineer, and strict1 y in accordance with the manufacturer ’s
recommendations.
Expansion joint shall be set in position, and reinforcement of joints shall be welded to the
anchor bars from deck slab as requirements of manufacturer.
Site traffic shall not be permitted to travel across the expansion joints until after the joint
casting has been made.
11.5.4.1 Prevention ofDamage
During the placing and hardening of concrete or mortar under expansion joint components ,
relative movement shall be prevented between them and the supports to which they are being
fixed.
When one half of the joint is being set , the other half shall be completely free from
longitudinal restrain t. 1n particular, where strongbacks 0 1' templates are used to locate the
two sides of a joint, they shall not be fixed simultaneously to both sides. Screw threads shall
be kept clean and free from rus t.
1 1. 5.4.2 Tolerance
1nstallation tolerancε shall conform to Table 11 .4.3 .2-1.
Table 11.4.3.2-1 TI이 erance of Finger ηpe Joint
Item Tolerance Remark
Length 土5mm
뉴---
Elevation 土3mm
At edges and center of
Height
carnageway
Longitudinal differential 3mm
-
Straightness of height 3mm 1n 3 m
- --~---
Differential height of fingers 2mm Between centers of finger
Longitudinal clεarance :l:2mm

At edges and center of
---------------... camageway
Transversal clearance 0- +2mm
Expansion Joints shall be measured fo 1' paymεnt by linea1' meters ofthe material installed and
approved by the Engineer, measured along the cent1'e line ofthe joint.
The length ofthe expansion joint shall be in accordance with the drawings 0 1' as shown on the
Shop Drawings.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌10RKS Bridge Deck Expansion Joi l1 ts - Section 8.11
Payment of each set of expansionjoint as measu1'ed , fo l' each type of expansionjoint fo 1' which
sepa1'ate payment is p1'ovide , shall include full compensation for the cost of labor, equipment ,
and all mate1'ial including fill concrete to furnish and install the deck expansion joint.
Pre-moulded Joint Fi1I er and Joint Sealer shall not be paid separately. They shall be deemed
to be included in the unit price of Expansion Joint with full compensation fOï all materiaJs ,
Jabour, tools , equipment and appurtenances and execution of all work and any incidentals
required for the complete finishing and installation ofpre-mouldedjoint filler andjoint sealer.
All expenses for the inspections of materiaJ and workmanship for every different types of
Bridge Deck expansion j 이 nt 없 fabrication shop by the Engineer and the 터nployer shall be
paid by the Contractor and shall be deemed to be included in the unit prices for relevant pay
items in Bill of Quantities. During fab 1'ication this inspection shall be stipulated by the
Engineer.
The items of work payable under this provision aJong with thei 1' units shall be as follows:
Unit of
Pay Item No. Descripti잉낀
Measuremel1 t
---
8 .1 1-01 Modular Bridge Joint System, type 1400mm m
Finger Type Joint at Al and A2 , type Wd-

8.11-02 m
160mm
-~.-
8.11-03 Finger Type Joint at P7 and P47 , WP-300mm m
Finger Type Joint at P18 and P38 , type WP-

8.11-04 m
550mm

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Railings - Section 8.12
SECTION 8.12 - RAILINGS
12.1 GENERAL
This work shal1 consist of furnishing al1 matεrials and constructing 1'ailings. Railings
constructed at each location shall confo1'm to the type and details specified in the Contract
Documents fo 1' that location. The wo1'k shall in c1 ude the furnishing and placing of mo1'ta1' 01'
concrete , anchor bolts , reinforcing steel dowels , or other devices used to attach the railing to
the structure.
12. 1.2 Materials
AII materials shall confonn to the requiremεnts of the applicable AASHTO , or equivalent
mate1'ial specifications.
12. 1.3 Construction
Unless othe1'wise permitted by the Engineer, railing shall not be placed until the centering 01'
falsework for the span has been released, rendering the span self-supporting.
12. 1. 4 Line and Grade
The line and g1'ade of the 1'ailing shall be true to that specified in the Contract Documents and
may include an al1 0wance for cambe1' in each span but shall not fo l1 ow any unevenness in the
superstructure.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, railings on bridges , whether super-
e!evated 01" not, shall be veliical.
12.2 METAL RAILING
12.2.1 Materials and Fabrication
12.2. 1. 1 Steel Railing
The materials and Fabrication of steε1 railings shal1 conform to the applicable requirements of
Division 8, Section 8.8 “ Steel Structures" in these Specifications. except that fonned sections
shall be of standard steel pipe. Nuts and bolts not designated as high strength shal1 conform to
the requirements of ASTM A307 , and steel tubing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM
A 500 , Grade B.
The materials shalJ conform to the standards specified in the Table 12.2.1.1-1 or equivalent.
TECHNICALSPECIFICATl ONS - DIVISION 8 8.12 - 154 - of214

‘ ;
DIVISION 8 - STRUετURALWO없(S Railings - Section 8.12
Table 12.2. 1.1 -1 Materials for Steel Railing

._-
Member Material Standards
Grade 250
Post, Horizontal beam, ASTM A709M , or
Top rail ( ‘ fv.min = 245 MPa) equivalent
M16 , M18 ,M20

AASHTO M253M
Bolts h.min = 800 MPa (ASTM A490M) 0 1"
equivalent
Note: Material for nuts shaIl be appropriate for the corresponding boIts.
12.2.1.2 Wel뼈ing
All exposed welds shall be finished by grinding or filing to give a smooth surface.
12.2.2 Installation
Metal railings sh외 1 be Cal하'u lly a예 usted prior to fixing in place to ensure proper l11 atching at
abutting joints, correct alignment , and camber throughout their length. Holes fòr field
‘ s•
connections shall be driIl ed with the raiIi ng in place 011 the structure at proper grade and
align l11ent.
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Document, installation tolerance for railing height
shall be -10 to +20 mm.
AII bolts and nuts shall be point welded to each other.
12.2.3 Finish
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Docul11 ents , bolts , nuts , and all steel portions of
railings shaIl be galvanized. Galvanizing of all steel material shall meet the requirements
shown in Table 12.2 .3 -1.
Tabìe 12.2.3-1 Gaìvanizing ofRaiì Eìement
Mini 1l1um Coating Mass

Me1l1ber SY1l1bol
(glm 2)
BoIt, Nut, Washer. HDZ35 350

-
Plate 2~3 mm thick HDZ40 400
Note: Damage to galvanized surfaces shall be repaired at the Contractor ’s expense to the
satisfaction ofthe Engineer.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.1 2 - 155 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Railings - Section 8.12
12.3.1 Measurement
Railings shall be measured by the linear meter between the ends of the railing or the outside
ends of end posts , whichever is greater. Measurement shall be made on the Drawings without
taking account of the slope of the rai1ing and no deduction shall be made for electrolier or
other small openings called for in the Contract Documents.
12.3.2 Payment
Rai1i ngs shall be paid for by the contract prices per linear meter for the various types listed in
the Contract Documents. Such payment shall in c1 ude full compensation for furnishing all
labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all work involved in constructing
the ra i1ings complete in place.
The items ofwork payable under this provision along with their units shall be as follows:
Unit of
Measurement
Metal Bridge Rai1ing at Shoulder. (for Cable

8.12-01 m
Stayed Bridge)
Metal Bridge Railing at Shoulder. (for Approach

8.12-02 m
Bridge)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - D1 VISION 8 8.12 - 156 - of 214

DIVISION 8 ":"STRUCrURAL WORKS Not Applicable - Sectioll 8.13

DfV ISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Miscellaneous ]\’ etal - Section 8.14
SECTION 8.14 - MISCELLANEOUS METAL
14.1 DESCRIPTION
This work shall consist of furnishing and instalJi ng metal items in structures which are not
otherwise provided for.
The following miscellaneous metal works shall be carried out under the provision of this
sectíon:
(1) Stairs , Ladder, Door and Access Hatch and Handrails
Stairs and ladders shall be installed inside the pylons as shown on the Drawings. Handrails
shal1 bε instalI ed on pylon crossbeam and Pylon ’ s Pile cap as shown in the Drawings. Access
hatch shal1 be provided at top of pylon and crossbeam. Ladders shall be instal1 ed at girder end
to access to the inspection way. AlI these facilities shal1 be fabricated with galvanized steel
shapes , bars and expanded metals.
(2) Inspection way, Platform for Electric Facilities, Cable Rack Support for Electric and
Communication Cables
Inspection way, platform for electric facilities , cable rack support for eJectric and
communication cables shall be furnished and installed underneath the edge girders as shown
on the Drawings. All the elements of inspection way shall be fabricated with galvanized steel
shapes, bars and expanded metals.
(3) Miscellaneous Metal
Miscel1 aneous Metal shall include anchors for roadway Ji ghting p이 es， tie-down cable fixing
structure to P28 and P29.
(4) Door for Pylon and Anchorage Pier
The inspection door shall include steel door, fixture , fittings and all other incidents to instal1
the door as shown on the Drawings.
(5) Steel Cover for Parapet and Barrier at Expansion Joints:
SteeJ Cover for Parapet and Barrier at Expansion Joints shall in c1 ude steel cover, fixture ,
fittings and all other incidents to install the cover as shown on the Drawings.
(6) Technical Box
Technical Box shal1 be stee l. Fixture , fittings and all other incidents to instal1 the technical box

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Miscellaneous Mefal- Sectio l1 8.14
14.2 MATERIALS
Miscellaneous metal items shall be constructed of materials conforming to the following

AASHTO (or ASTM) material specifìcations or equivalent:
Table 14.1 Mate1'ials
Materials Specifications
Steel bars , plates, and shapes ASTM A 36/A 36M, Grade 36 (Grade 250)
Bolts and nuts ASTMA307
High-stren휠h bolts , nuts , and AASHTO M 164 (AASHTO M164M) (ASTM

washers A 325 (ASTM A 325M))
Steel castings As per Article 11. 3.5 , "Steel Castings"

--
Grey iron castings AASHTO M 105 or ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30
Sheet metal Commercial quality
Expanded metal (with carbon steel) ASTM AI011

’‘ τ
Expanded metal (with stainless Commercial quality
steel 0 1' aluminum)
Steel tubes for piping ASTMA53(F)
B1'onze Commercial quality

_.
14.3 FABRICATION
Fabrication of miscellaneous metal items shall be performed in a manner in conformance with

the p1'actice in modern cornmercial shops. Buns , rough and sharp edges , and other flaws shall
be removed. Warped pieces sha11 be straightened after fabrication and galvanizing.
14.4 GALVANIZING
Galvanizing shall in general conform to the requirements of AASHTO M-ll 1. Material

thinner than 3.2 111m may be galvanized before fabrication in conformance with the
requirements of ASTM A653. Galvanizing of iron and steel hardware and nuts and bolts shall
conform to the specifications of AASHTO M232 or equivalent.
Except for pre-galvanized standard pipe , galvanizing of material 3.2 mm thick or thicker shall
be pe1'formed after fabrication into the la1'gest practical sections.
All welded areas shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to galvanizing to remove all sIag or other
material that would inte1'fere with the adherence of the zinc. When it is necessary to straighten
any sections after galvanizing, such work shall be performed without damage to the zinc
coatlng.

DlV ISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Miscellaneous Metal- Section 8.14
Galvanizing surfaces that are abraded 0 1' damaged at any time after the application ofthe zinc
coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing the damaged a1'eas and removing all
loose and cracked coating, afte 1' which the cleaned areas shall be painted with three
applications of zinc anticorrosive paint as approved by the Engineer.
14.5 MEASUREMENT
Measllrement ofmiscellaneolls metal shall be measllred by the scale weight (ton) or Lllmpsum.
When requested by the Engineer, each delivery shall be accompanied with a certified weigh
master’s ticket. Scale weight (mass) is not requi 1'ed when calculated weight (mass) is shown in
the Contract DOCll l11ents , in which case this weight (mass) shall be used as the basis of
paymen t.
14.6 PAYMENT
Miscellaneolls metal shall be paid fo 1' by the cont1'act unit price per ton 0 1' Lumpsum. Such
payment shall include fllll compensation fo 1' fllrnishing all labor, materials , tools , eqllipment,
and incidentals , and for doing all the work involved in furnishing and installing miscellaneous
metal , complete in place , as specified in the Contract Documents , specified in these
Specifications , and as di 1'ected by the Enginee1'.
Pay Item Unit of

Description
No. Measurement
Inspection facilities fo 1' Supe1'structu1'e: Inspection Way

(i nc1uding inspection car and Rail) , Platform for Electric
8.14-01 LS
Facilities , Cable Rack SuppOli for Electric and
Commllnication Cables , •••
8.14-02 Inspection facilities for Pylon: Stair, Ladde1', Platform LS
8.14-03 1I1 spection facilities for Anchor Pier: Ladder, Platfo1'm LS
Parapet cover plate and Barrier cover plate at Expansion

8 .1 4-04 ton
Joints
._-_.~
8.14-05 Doors 011 Pylon ton
8.14-06 Doors on Anchorage pier ton
8.14-07 Shape Steel (Parapet at pile cap ofpylon) ton
8 .1 4-08 Technical Box LS

mVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Not Applicable - Section 8.15

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Cable Stayed Bridge Construction - Section 8.16
SECTION 8.16 - CABLE STAYED BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
16.1 GIRDER CAMBER AND PYLON HORIZONTAL ADJUSTMENT
The geometric dimensions of the brìdge ìn the Plan shows the elevations after 10 years from
the bridgε completion at a reference mean air temperature of 24 oC. The Contractor shall
determìne the appropriate camber fo 1' the gìrders as well as appropriate horizontal and
vertìcal adjustments for the pylons to have the geometrìc dìmension of the bridge to be
achieved within a range of tolerances specified hereinafter.
The Contractor shall obtain the approval from the Engineer, 8 weeks before the
commencement of constructionof the cable-stayed bridge superstructure, for the ca Jc ulation ,
the plan , and the control program of the camber and the additional horizontal adjustment
prepared, considering any possible deformatìon of the girders and pylons during the
construction and after completion ofthe bridge.
16.2 GENERAL QUALITY REQUIREMENTS FOR BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION
The measurements and other characteristics ofthe completed structure shall be in accordance
wìth the Shop Drawing approved by the Engineer. Each qua1ity requirement against
theoretical shape/position of the bridge at its completion shall be met separately. These
following requirements are refered from other similar project ìn Viet Nam (Nhat Tan Bridge):
1) The location ofthe bridgε foundation in verticallevel shall be +40/-30 mm.
2) The location of pylon top in hO rÎ zontal Jevel in both longitudinal and transverse
directions shall be +70/-70 mm.
3) The allowabledeviationsin the elevation of the main spans after the installation of the
precast concrete deck panels , concrete casting, the tensioning of the stay cables, and all
other superimposed dead loads is + 170/-1 00 mm for the main spans and +100/-60 mm
for side spans.
4) The difference in the elevations between the edge girders at the same cross section shall
not exceed 30 mm.
5) The difference in the deviations of the elevations of two consecutive segment joints in
the edge girder is not exceeding 20 mm.
6) The longitudinal distance of the reference points of every installed edge girder segments
is +/- 5mm.
7) The tolεrance in pylon crossbeam position in relation to the bearing in the longitudinal
direction ofthe bridge is +ι lOmm.

mVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Cable Stayed Bl'idge Construction - Section 8.16
8) The maximum allowable deviation in longitudinal eccentricity of the edge girders in

relation to bearings in the transverse direction of the bridge is +/- 10 mm.
9) The maximurn allowable deviation in the location of the deck panels in relatioll to the
edge girders underneath in the transverse direction ofthe bridge is +/- 20 mm.
10) The maximum difference of elevations between a예 acent precast deck panels shal1 not
exceed 5 mm.
11) Tolerance of angle deviation of stay cable guide pipe shall be 25 minutes from the
designed axis for any direction.
16.3 MEASUREMENT IN THE εOURSE OF WORK
The program of measurements of all construction works should be su비 ected to the approval
of the Engineer.
During the pylon construction and the girder erection phases of the superstructure, the
Contractor has to present to the Engineer the measurements of previously constructed and
just erected stages of construction. The measurements are inspected by the Engineer before
the construction proceeds.
A deta i! ed plan should be made for the inspection survey of pylons , which takes into
consideration ofthe requirements arising from the fO I1TIwork equipment.
Plans for measurement of stay cable tensions during the erection stages should be presented
in the installation and stressing program. During and after installation of the stay cables , the
stay cable tensions should be measured with natural frequency method or equivaleηt method.
A setting points situated at support lines is presented in the Plans. These points are acting as
coordinate points for the bridge structures.
When surveying the structures , the required tolerances are to be taken into consideration. 1n
oråer to find out the standard error anà deviation , each survey is to be carried out from
another different base point.
Positioning surveys and inspection surveys ofthe completed structure shall be documented.
The positi이ling survey, the standard error and deviation in the measurements of the structure
shall be documented.
16.4 VERIFIεATION MEASUREMENTS
Possible deviations in measurements are found out in inspection surveys. 1n order to ensure
reliable results , the inspection surveys should be carried out by separate organization.
1nspection survey can be carried out by sampling.

DNISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Cable Stayed Bridge Construction - Section 8.16
16.5 DEFORMATION AND DISPLACEMENT MEASUREMENTS
Deformation and displacement of both the substmcture and superstructure shall be surveyed
during the following stages of construction.
- After pylon foundations and end piers are completed.
- After pylons are completed.
- After final tensioning of all stay cables is complεted.
- After paved and completion ofthe bridge.
The Contractor shall submit the survey plan including method of survey, establishment of
measuring points for the Engineer ’ s approval. After performing each survey, the Contractor
shall present the survey report and theoretical values after one (1) week from the survey.
16.6 ERECTION METHOD STATEMENT
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a proposal detailing the construction sequence.
The submission shall incorporate detailed methodology, shop and erection drawings of the
proposed construction sequence , together with the corresponding complete and checked
erection design calculations in every erection step to obtain the correct elevation in the
completed bridge. The package shall be submitted at least eight8 weeks prior to the
commencement of construction of the cable-stayed bridge superstructure for the Engineer’s
approval.
The erection drawings shall show all temporary works necessary for the launching including
bearings , supports and incidentals , and include detailedmethod statements for each stage of
the erection.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the detai! ed design of the erection plan, equipment
and temporary works and be responsiblε for ensuring the structural adequacy and stability of
all items when used in its chosen construction sequence or in the construction sequence
depicted on the Drawings.
1n the Working Plan for the erection works , the Contractor shall submit for the Engineer ’ s
approval a full description ofhis proposed erection method and means including:
A summary of all design loads and the assumptions made in deriving them , design
calculations , detailed shop and erection drawings , including full detai! s of the
erection cranes (travelers) and all other construction equipment, false work,
temporary bent , temporary bracing against lateral bucklingfor edge girders and
cross beams but not limited to as necessary, cable tensions in each cable at all
shims.

DIVISION 8 - SτRUCTURAL WORKS Cable Stayed Bridge Con~tructiolll - Sectioll 8.16
A step-by-step verification of the strength, stability and serviceability of the

permanent structure for gravity, and wind loads and the effects of creep , shrinkage
and temperature changes. The verification shall include the detailed calculation of
stress and defo l'mation in the permanent structure and the temporary structures by
the Contractor ’ s proposed erection method and prove no such overstress 01'
unfavorable stresses and defo l111ations including settlements in the permanent and
temporary structures.
Calculations of the required cambers on the permanent structure at each stage of

erection process taking into account the effects of creep , shrinkage and temperature
changes.
Analysis of errors of fabrication 없d erection and theirt이 erances shall be presented

for the Engineer ’s approval.
Design details of temporary structures such as temporary bent and bracing,

scaffolding and their connections. The design shall include details of stability ofthe
temporary structures and their foundations in accordance with the site conditions -
5uch as geological conditiol1s, stream f1 0ws and wind. Unbalanι배 loadings ùurillg
construction shall be considered in their design. The Contractor sha l1 submit design
criteria for the temporary structures and their foundationsincluding bearing ,
settlement and sliding for the Engineer ’ s approval.
Proposed methods for the calculation of the jacking forces and the shims plate
thickness for the stay cables.
Ongoing participation during the construction ofbridge deck and stay cable system.
Proposed method of setting and adjustment of elastomeric bearings and pot

bearings.
Method and sequence of instal1 ation of prestressìng precast deck paneÎs.
Proposed sequences and method of deck closures.
Proposed method of installation of tie-down cables.
Proposed rnethod of installation of expansion joints and casting concrete fil l.
Proposed method of wind fairing installation and the erection stage.
Countermeasures for cable vibration during erection stages.
Calculation sheets and detai! drawings of lifting lug on permanent structure and
method of removaland smooth grinding if necessary.
Detai1 s of lifting lugs , lifting locations and lifting mechanisms of all steel segments

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Cable Stayed Bridge Construction - Section 8.16
and precast deck panels.
Method ofload transfer and demolition oftemporary structures.
Protection method of temporary structures/equipment and permanent structure from

stream f1ow, f10ating debris and boats.
The Contractor ’ s Construction Engineering shall take account of all load and material effects.
It shall prescribe the theoretical vertical deck profiles for all stages of the construction, and
application of superimposed dead loads such as bridge appurtenances and deck wearing
surface. Vertical profiles shall also be predicted beyond the bridge completion and at one-
year intervals up to 10 years after completion at which all time-dependent effects can be
assumed to have taken place.
The Engineer ’ s approval of the above details shall not relieve the Contractor of his
contractual obligations 01' of his responsibility for providing proper methods , equipment,
workmanship , and safety precautions.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌rORKS Stay Cable - Section 8.17
SECTION 8.17 - STAY εABL뾰
17. 1. DESCRIPTION
This section covers the supply, fabrication , delivery, testing , installation, stressing and pel1nanent
protection ofthe stay cables and associated components.
Criteria used fo 1' design of the bridge are shown on the Drawings , including modulus of elasticity
and tens iJ e strength for the stay cables, fatigue strength in axial tension of the stay cables, drag
coefficient and exposed surface area of stay cables.
The stay cable system shall be such that re-tension or replacement of any cable can be
accomplished strand by strand at any time during the life ofthe bridge.
Stay cable installation and bridge construction procedure shall incorporate requi 1'ements and
p1'ovisions fo 1' the assessment and adjustment of stay cable tension. It shall include stipulations for
geomet1'ic control of stay cables in accordance with applicable provision of this Teclmical
Speciíications.
Tensioning operation may be accomplished strand by strand during the phases of construction with
full consideration for geomet1'ic control of stay cables in acco 1'dance with applicable provisions of
this Technical Specifications.
The adjustments of stay cables tension shall be rnade in accordance with method(s) proposed by the
Contracto1' and approved by the Engineer.
Prior to commencement of pylon construction, the Contractor shall verify all details of the stay
cable system and provide design calculations including erection stages and Working Drawings to
define the reinforcement detai! s and dimensions for concrete and steel structure detai! s to
accommodate the stay cable system. The modification of Working Drawings shall be approved by
the Enginee1'.
Before starting each work, Contractor has to prepare and submit to the Engineer for reviewing and
comment on teclmology statement which descr삐es in detail about the installation actions and
process of cable. Besides, the statement has to include the description and providing materials of
main equipment items which are proposed by contractor as well as detai! ed cable installation
p1'og1'am which prescribes cable fo 1'ces and elongation for each stay cable.
17.2. MATERIALREQUIREMENTS - STRAND STAY εABLES
17.2.1 STRAND
Strand wil1 be manufactured in accordance to the requirement of ASTM A416 with the following
characteristics:

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORl‘s Stay Cable - Section 8.17
Table-l : Strand characteristics

’_.-
I Des때tion Valæ
Nominal diameter (mm) 15.75
Nominal tensile stren망h (N/mm 2 ) 1860
Nominal mass (g/m) 1173

r-'‘
Permissible variation of diameter (mm) +0.65 , -0.15
Steel area of strand (mm 2 ) 149.2
Minimum breaking strength of strand (kN) 277 .4
Minimum load at 1% extension (kN) 249.7

----
Modulus of elasticity (N /mm2) 197 ， 000 土 5%
Minimum elongation measured over a length of min 600 mm 3.5 %
Max. relaxation after 1000 h at 20 oc 뻐d 70% breaking load 2.5%
Fatigue stress range , 2 million cycles with maximum stress of 228

45% UTS , (MPa)
When strand is Jying free on a f1 at surface , the maximum bow height ft‘ om base line of 1 meter
length , measured inside the curve , shall not exceed 25mm.
The corrosion protection barriers for the strand shall comprise ofthe following:
The first barrier (i nternal barrier) shaJJ be hot dip galvanizing of the individual steel wires , which
must cover the fulllength ofthe cable without a break.
The second barrier (external barrier) shall be a watertight HDPE sheathing extruded on the
individual strand. The space between strand wires and the sheathing shall be filled with COITosÎon
protective filler that provides airtight and wate11ight encapsulation to the strand.
The use of epoxy-coated strand is not permitted due to long term creep consideration (as discussed
in PTl 5th edition section 3.2.3) and lack of self-healíng properties in case the coating is damaged
during handlíng or installation.
accordance to ASTM A416.

D1VISION 8 ~ STRUCTURAL WORKS Stay Cable - Section 8.17
To prevent the galvanisation process from resulting in a certain reduction of the elastic Ii mit, and
ensure a smooth outer surface of the wires , the hot dip galvanizing shall be app Ii ed on the wires
before the final drawing operation. The hot dip galvanizing of the constituent wires of the strand
sha11 be done before stranding.
The hot dip galvanizing shaIl consist ofpure zinc (galvanisation) with a minimum of99.95% purity.
The mass of zinc coating per area shall be between 190 g/m2 and 350 g/rn2. The hot dip
galvanizing thickness sha11 be uniform without drops or local thickenings.
17.2. 1.1 SHEATHING
The HDPE material shalI meet the requirements ofthe PTI 5th as given in the following table
Table-2 : HDPE sheathing characteristics
각
Property ASTM Test Method Value
Density (g/cm3) D 1505 0.941 - 0.965
Melt lndex (g/l 0 min) D 1238 0 .2 - 1. 0

-
Flexural Modulus , (MPa) D790 550 - 1100
Tensile Strength at Yield (MPa) D 638 21-28
Elongation at Rupture D638 500%-700%
Hardness D2240 64-65
Low Temperature Brittleness D746 -40 0 C at 50% flexib iIi ty (min)

_-.._~- ....-
The thickness of the individual HDPE sheaths shaIl be greater than 1.5 mm.
17.2. 1.2 PRO’I'ECTIVE FILLER
Any corrosion inhibiting coating material used as protective filler between the internal barrier
(galvanized strand) and the ex
자te
리rr
‘.'na
떠i ba
없1'1‘
1끼
l
꺼he
T inhibitor shall not contain substances tha
없t are hamπmfu
비
11 to the materials it wi1l be in contact with.
The fi 1ling material sha11 cover the outer surface of the strand and fill the interstices around the
center wire and shall be applied in a sufficient quantity between 5g/m and 16g/m to ensure that
water cannot migrate along the strand.
17.2.2 ANCHORAGE
Contractor shalI submit to the Engineer the assembly drawings for the sizes and types of
anchorages used in the project, showing relevant dimensions and materials ofthe main components.
Stay cable anchorages shaIl be designed to individually anchor each strand by a reversible means
(wedges). Blocking medium using hard epoxy resin or cement grouting to anchor the strands is not

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Stay Cable - Section 8.1 7
allowed.
Corrosion protective compound i매 ected into the anchorage zone to protect the exposed galvanized
strand should always be in f1 exible form and removable. The encapsul없ion of the exposed
galvanized strand by the co1'rosion protective compound shall be watertigh t.
The anchorage head shall be capable oft1' ansmitting the full ultimate tensile force ofthe cable. AIl
other components such as bearing plates , recess tubes , steel f1 anges , deviators and tension rings
shown on the drawings shall be of suitable type and sufficient strength for the intended use.
Stressing anchorage shall be equipped with adjustment device by means of threaded ring nut with
minimum negative adjustment of 40mm as provision for force 1'eduction. Additional a이 ustments
made by installation of split shims shall be acceptable. Retensioning operations to increase the
cable force by means of individual stressing of each strand shall be acceptable.
17.2.3 HDPE STAYPIPE

The strands shall be en cJ osed within an outer stay pipe equipped with double helical ribs to
improve the aerodynamic behaviour of the cable , wh i1 st in conformance with the considered wind
drag coefficients.
HDPE stay pipe shall consist of a bi-extruded high-density polyethylene tube , with coloured
external layer RAL (to be defined) and black internal polyethylene.
HDPE pipe material shall meet the specification cell category requirements for c1 ass PE 324433
and c1 ass PE 335534 materials as defined by ASTM D 3350.
Table-3 : HDPE stay pipe characteristics
Propeliy ASTM Test Methods 'alæ 며

Density (glcm3) D 1505 0.941 - 0.96
Melt lndex (gllO min) D 1238 0.2 - 1. 0

•--
Flexural Modulus , (MPa) D790 550-1100
------
Tensile Strength at Yield (MPa) D638 21-28
Ultraviolet radiation stability D 3350 Condition E
The use of recycled p이yethylene is prohibited. The HDPE supplier must have a quality
management organisation in accordance with the NF EN IS0 9001 standard.
In addition to the above require111ents , the stay pipe thickness must be at least 0ext/32 0 1' 5 111m ,
whichever is greateζ where 0ext is the stay pipe outside dia111eter.
τ ‘ 펌 ~ι R 폈짧爾쯤ηmm:FfTδ~옆￦뼈γ짧γ m짧합擔f~영 F옆ηffl쨌f￦f혀~∞m였~쳐 mγas 함없Tη'f"ιτ
the stay cable system or during its fabrication , storage , installation and handling, and it shall be free

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Stay Cable - Section 8.17
of chloride.
Prior to commencement of stay pipe manufacturing, the supplier must submit test evidence of the
coloured HDPE stay pipe resistance against ultravi이 et degradation and colour change for a
minimum of 15 years. Accelerated ageing test shall be done in WOM machine for minimum
duration of 5,000 hours.
17.2.4 DOCUMENTATION
Materials for all component described in section 2.1 to 2 .3 shall be delivered with a certificate type
inspectiol1 report in accordance with 1S0 404. The contractor ’s representative and his scope of
work in respect of certification according to 1S0 404 are subject to acceptance by the Engineer.
For steel products the celiificate sha l1 give details and results of each test carried out in accordance
with requirements stated in the technical specification and general specification for steel work. It
shal1 appear from certificate that a l1 tests specified have been completed with a satisfactory resul t.
Copies of the celiificates shall be submirted to the Engineer.
17.3. CONSTRUCTION REQUlREMENTS - STRAND STAY CABLES
17.3.1 INSPECTION AND TES Tl NG
17.3.1.1 GENERAL
It is the Contractor’s responsibility by inspections and testing to ensure that work on the stay cables
complies with the requirements specified.
For the main stay cable materials, quality control tests shall be performed with the tests frequencies
given by FIB Bulletin 30 as indicated in the following table.
Tab le-4 : Quality control of testing of stay cable system
Material Type oftest Test frequency
Strand - Tensile strength with elongation

structure (1)
at break
- Fatigue test 2 tests every 100 T supplied
structure (1)
- De t1 ected tensile test 1 test series every 100 T
- Weight of zinc coating 1 test every 20 T (1)
‘
- Leal. tightness test 2 tests eve1'y 100 T (1)
- Geometry of ba1'e 0 1' coated strand 1 test eve1'y 20 T (1)

HDPE sheathing I - 1ìεnsilestrength , eJongation , melt I 3 tests every 10 T of sheathing

index after manufacturing. I supplied for structure
- Thickness of sheathing I 3 tests every 10 T of sheathing
뻐빼때
supplied for structure
·빠 .앉
’뼈 때
.때
뼈
빼
Fm
따
qu m
”
3 tests evεry 100 T (1) of
샤
m
i
prestressing steel
m
때
띠
πF
“n m 1 test every 100 T (1 ) of
prestressing steel
HDPE stay pipe I -Tens인ile 았stre해n뺑뺑땅h，캡삐，껴페6비long없m 3 tests every 10 T of pipe

supplied for structure but at
me
려It index afte
떼밍r‘
e manuf:없
ac따tur끼ing
least 1 test for each pipe size.
Note 1): But minimum of 3 tests per project
17.3.1.2 STRAND TESTS
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer, a test report performed in accordance with Section
3.3.9 of PTI ’ s Recommendations for Stay Cable Design , Testing and InstalIation 5th Edition,
prepared by an independent laboratory documenting compliance with items (1) to (5) below:
1. Chemical Resistance Test
2. Chloride Permeability Test
3. Impact Test
4. Abrasion Resistance Test
5. Salt Spray (fog) Test
6. Water tightness Test
Prior to the delivery of strand to Site the Contractor shall provide strand manufacture ’ s celtificates,
in duplicate , for each cast of steel , detailing the chemical analysis and the results of all tests on
samples taken from both wire and strand made from that cast and the results of all other testing.
17.3. 1. 3 STAY CABLE TESTS
The fatigue tensile strength of the stay cables shall be demonstrated by testing as a verification of
the stay cable design and fab Ii cation. The testing laboratory shall be qua1i fied and independent.
Tests witnessed by independent and qualified party done in the Specialist Contractor laboratory
shall be acceptable.
Stay specimens shall be tested with anchorage assemblies and with all corrosion protection material
in place. They shall bε in lengths not less than 5 m.
-용틀
γ →τ휴욕，!?c"'j'흥않f￦H'e'e'9'짧'!'gIi'창‘없용쟁양H썩f용폰용짧혐융영f폈fτ 행f엎~양당~액팎經영풍me~짧 업F뿔3않tt엽f;"'t짧:、?←“?ι 썼‘
smal1 est size (31 strands 0 1' 37 strands) , the mid-size (43 strands or 55 strands) , and the biggest size

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Stay Cable - Sectio l1 8.17
(61 strands 이. 73 strands) as specified on the Design Drawings.
The fàtigue specimens shall be subjectεd to cyclic axial loading for 2 million cycles. The specimens
shall be tested at an upper bound stress of 45% of the nominal tensile strength and a stress , with a
cable deviation as described in PTI 5th or FIB requirement.
During fatigue testing, not more than 2% of the number of individual wires (rounded to the nearest
whole number) may fai l. No failure shall occur in the anchorage material or in any component of
the anchorage assemblies during the fatigue tests.
After fatigue testing, the test specimen shall be reloaded and shall develop a minimum tens i1 e force
equal to 92% ofthe actual ultimate breaking load ofthe test cable 01' 95% ofthe specified minimum
breaking load of the test cable, whichever is greater. The actual ultimate breaking load of the test
cable shall be calculated fr0111 the reslllts of the tens i1 e tests calTied out on the individllal main
tensile elements. After testing, all tensile and fatiglle specimens shal1 be examined c1 0sely and the
natllre of failllre and any other damage sha l1 be rep01ied.
Failllre of any of the tensile or fatiglle test specimens to cO l11 ply with the specified acceptance
criteria is cause for rejection of stay cables with the concerned cable size. The stay cable design
shal1 be reconsideïed and i110difiεd if‘ necessary and a new test sha l1 bε carried out.
A leak tightness test shall be carried Ollt on one full-size specimen to demonstrate that the
anchorage is w없e11ight. The test procedllre and acceptance shall be as described in PTl 5th or FIB
reqllirment.
When the stay cable tests have been cOndllcted for previous tests on specimens similar in design
and details to those proposed for the project, the previous tests cOllld be used as the basis for the
stay cable approval. The anchorage hardware supplied for the pr‘이 ect shall be the sal11e design as in
the previous tests. The acceptance of anchorage design based on previOllS tests however, does not
relieve the require l11ent to perform qllalification tests for the strand as stipulated in Table-4.
17.3.1.4 ANTI-VIBRATION MEASURES (INCLUDING DAMPE묘)
Damper requirement shall be assessed by the specialist contractor. When reqllired, dampers sha l1 be
designed and fabricated by the Specialist Contractor. The damper shall be cOlli1ected to the steel
guide pipe of the deck anchorage or to an additional extension pipe bolted to the end of the gllide
pipe. Installation by providing SUpp 0l1 fro111 deck level is not permitted.
The main performance criteria should include , but not Iimited to:
• Easy installation and 111aintenance,

• Damper characteristics can be easily adjllsted during maintenance ,
• Da111per performance insensitive to temperature variations andthe frequency ofvibrations.
The cable supplier shall provide list of project using the proposed damper technology inclllde
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.17 -173 - of214

testing report to prove insensitivity to temperature and the frequency of vibrations. A minimum of
5 projects proving reliability ofthe damper technology shall be pro띠 ded.
The damping system shall provide an additional effective damping more than 0.5%.
The dampers shall bε robust with a lifetime of at least 20 years , interchangeable and easy to inspect.
17.3.2 WORKMANSHIP
17.3.2.1 PLANNING
All materials and components shall be ordered from and produced by manufacturers and suppliers
with proven and documented experience of producing materials to the codes and standards required
by this Contract.
Stay cables and associated components delivered for incorporation in the works shall be identified
by marking. The marking shall enable the material to be clearly identified and checked against the
documentation which must include dεtails of origin , methods of production, content of material ,
inspection report and test certificates.
Prior to commencement of the works and placing of final orders for the supply of temporary items
and equipment , a method statement for fabrication , transportation and erection of the stay cables
including stay cable assemblies shall be submitted for the Engineer’s approval. The fabrication ,
transportation and erection operations shaIl be documented among other things by p1'eparation of
descriptions , drawings and calculations fo 1' single strand stressing according to the programmer and
time schedule. Procedures to ensure that the stay cable components will not be damaged during
fabrication , transp Oltation and installation shall be included in the design documentation and
Method Statement.
The shop work shall be planned in such a way that the items are completed well in advance of the
erection. The Specialist Contracto 1' shall submit the following documents to the Engineer fo 1'
approval before materials are ordered:
• Description of the manufacturing procedures for strands and stay cables and proposals for
testíng.
• Full documentation for the design of the prefabricated strands and the final stay cables
including anchorages , guide system and dampers.
• Shop drawings for anchorages , guide system and dampers and general information about
proposed repair procedures.
• Shop drawings for fabricated items and general information about welding procedures.
17.3.2.2 FABRICATION

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WO없‘s StayC’able ~ Section 8.17
Approp 1'iate quaIi ty control tests shall be conducted in accordance with specified or accepted
standards fo l' all materials inco 1'porated in the cable stay, and fo 1' all procedures involved in the
fabrication ofthe cable stays.
Each strand of shall be in a continuous len앙h and free f1'om welds.
All threads on the anchorage shall be protected by metal spraying. The Specialist Contractor shall
detai! the corrosion protection system for each component of the anchorage and shall demonstrate
to the Enginee1' that the proposed corrosion protection system shall be in compliance with the
requirements fo 1' durability and protection against the environmental conditions.
17.3.2.3 HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION AND INSTALLATION
Hand Iing and transpo 1'tation of stay cable assemblies shall be done so that the assemblies a1'e not
damaged in any way.
Stay cables shall be protected from corrosives , heat, ab1'asion , salt water and othe1' harmful effects
throughout hand Iing, transportation and installation.
The stay cable materials shall not be sto1'ed in direct contact with the ground.
All steel su1'faces on anchorage assemblies shall be inspected for any physical damage 01‘ corrosion.
If any physical damage , coating defects 0 1' corrosion is observed it shal1 be repaired in a manner
proposed by the Specialist Contractor and su비 ect to app 1'oval by the Engineer.
The anchorage of the stay cables shall be centered on the anchor plate holes to a tolerance of 5 mm.
Prior to commencement of the stay cable instal1ation, the Cont1'actor shall carry out erection stage
analysis fo1' all erection stages based on the actual erection loads to determine the geometlγ ofthe
completed st1'llctu1'e. The calculations shall include tables containing values of anticipated stay
cable lengths and tensions in each stay cable at a co1'responding erection stage. The Contractor shall
submit the calculations to the Engineer for approval.
Adjustment of the stay cables in multiple steps is reqllired to prevent overioading of palis of the
structure. A p1'ocedure for multiple step adjustment shall be included in the Method Statement.
Immediately after e1'ection of a deck element the Specialist Contractor shall measu1'e the tension in
the stay cable. The Contractor shall ascertain that tension in the stay cable shall be within ::!: 5% of
the values calculated fo 1' that e1'ection stage. AII such reco 1'ds shall be submitted to the Engineer. lf
the specified tolerances are exceeded, adjustment procedu1'es shall be developed by the Cont 1'acto1'
and carried out by the Spεcialist Contractor subject to the prior approval ofthe Enginee 1'.
The erection stage calculations shall be updated after erection of a deck element based on an
updated survey of the bridge and the actual erection loads and conditions at the time of the stay
cable installation. The surveys shall comprise the bridge deck and tower. Survey points shall be
weathe1' resistant points incorporated into the structure. Surveys shall be carried out in the early
TECHNICAL SPECI FlCATl ONS ~ Dl VISION 8 8.1 7-175-of214

morning to minimize temperature effects.
Permanent records shall be established and submitted to the Engineer for each stay cable
installation stage. Such records shall include survey records (date , time , and ambient temperatures) ,
stay cable forces (cable elongation measurement, shim pack or locknut setting), deck loading
conditions and all other specific records necessary and sufficient to establish the conditions under
which the stay cable was installed.
Jacks and gauges for stay cablε installation shall be calibrated using a load cell or calibrated static
load machine within six month prior to the beginning of stay cable installation, and every six month
thereafter for the duration ofthe stay cable installation.
At completion of the erection works before application of certain permanent loads like wearing
surface , barriers lighting etc. , a check of the stay cable forces shall be made by the Specialist
Contractor and submitted to the Engineer. The stay cable forces shall be within :J: 5% of the
theoretical values when the geometry is within the specified tolerances. If the specified tolerances
are exceeded , adjustment procedures shall be developed by the Contractor and carried out by the
Specialist Contractor su비 ect to the prior approval ofthe Engineer.
At completion of the bridge , a check of the stay cable forces under the bridge reference condition
shall be made by the Specialist Contractor and submitted to the Engineer. The stay cable forces
shall be within :J: 5% of the theoretical values when the geometry is within the specified tolerances.
If the specified tolerances are exceeded , adjustment procedures shall be developed by the
Contractor and canied out by the Specialist Contractor subject to the prior approval ofthe Engineer.
Stay cable shall be stressed using procedures and equipment which assure that the individual tensile
elements of one cable have equal forces within a tolerance of 土 2.5% of the final specified stay
force according to 6.9 .4 ofPTI 5th Edition.
Permanent records shall be prepared by the Contractor and include the as-built vertical alignment of
the deck along the bridge center lines and along Ii nes adjacent to the outer sides of the road
surfacing as well as the deflection of the towers. The records shall be compared by the Contractor
with the construction vertical alignment and if the specified tolerances are exceeded adjustment
procedures shal1 be developed by the Contractor and can
‘1끼
l
su비 ec
따t to the approval ofthe Engineer.
17.4. DURABILITY AND CORROSION PROTECTION
A comprehensive approach to protection fo 1' the complete stay cable syst리n shall be developed by
the Specialist Contractor taking into account design life , material life, accessibi Jity, maintenance
and replacemen t. The supplier shall assess the durability of the conosion protection system
of
each protected component with reference to tests , previous experience , and corrosion life data.

The durability and design Ii fe ofthe corrosion protection systel11 shall be defined by considering the
environl11ental conditions characterized by the category C5 (M=Marine , or I=Industrial) of the
standard EN IS0 12944-2.
At the anchorage zone , the strands sha11 be individua11y protected by providing individual
encapsulations to guarantee continuous protection along the cable from anchorage to anchorage.
The use of cel11 entations grout as corrosion protection barrier is not permitted.
The anchorages which are not accessible for l11 aintenance operation in-situ after installation În the
bridge shall be designed with a corrosion protection system that will remain effective during the
design Ii fe without maintenance.
For the anchorages which are accessible for maintenance operation in-situ, the corrosion protection
system sha11 have a design life of 25 years. After this period of 25 years , the protection system will
be renewed in-situ at regular intervals of 15 years corresponding to the maintenance operations.
To prevent fretting corrosion and fatigue , the detailing of the anchorage must avoid steel to steel
contact between the strand and the patis at the entry point ofthe respective transition zone.
At the low point ofthe lower stay cable anchorages the Specialist Contractor sha11 design, fabricate
and install holes , groves or similar to allow for drainage of watcr built up from moisture or
condensation which otherwise wi1l be accul11 ulated in the interior ofthe stay cable anchorages. The
Specialist Contractor shall submit the proposed arrangement for the Engineer’s approva l.
Any pat1ially completed stay assemblies sl1a11 be stored in such that no damage or deterioration of
the stay cable can occur.
A detai! ed maintenance manual for the stay cables sha11 be provided after cable installation for
fac i1 itating future maintenance.
The contents ofthe l11 anual sha11 include , but not be limited to the following parts:
• Scope
• How to use the manual
• Periodic inspection and maintenance
• Exceptional inspection
• Component description
• Partial or complete replacement of a stay cable
• Re-stressing and de-stressing
.. Repair of corrosion protection
A method statement for replacement of stay cables, including a description of required temporarγ
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 8 8.1 7 -177 - of214

wo 1'ks , shall be submitted fo 1' the Enginee1's app 1'oval. Du1' ing the stay cable replacement operation
it shall be assumed that the nea1'est 3.0 m ca1'riageway on both sides ofthe stay cable being replaced
is closed to traffic. The method shall be so that no 0셰 ects can be dropped onto the caηiageway.
17.5.1 MEASUREMENT
Stay cable fatigue test , Sheathing, Protective Fi1I er, Anchorage , HDPE stay pipe , etc. will not be
measurεd separately but shalJ be deemed to be included in the contract unit price of Stay cables and
Tie-down cables.
a) Stay cables shalJ be measu1'ed by ton.
b) Measu1'ement for stay cable damping devices shall be made by number of dampers installed.
c) Tie-down cables (Cable at Anchorage Piers) shall be measured by ton.
d) Stay cable fatigue test shal1 be measured by number of test.
17.5.2 PAYMENT
The amount of completed and accepted Stay cables and Tie-down Cables including corrosion
protection system with surface treatment and coloured , and stay cable boots , buffers , boot covers
and filling material inside ancho1' pipes , anchor system etc. , will be paid by ton for the pay items in
the BilI of Quantities , which rate shall be full compensation for furnishing labou1', equipment, tools
and othe 1' items necessary fo 1' the p1'ope1' completion ofthe wo 1'k fo 1' supplying, fahricating , e1'ecting,
inspection, adjusting, and testing.
The amount of completed and accepted Stay cables damping devices , measured in numbe1's for the
pay items in the Bi1l of Quantities , which 1'ate shall be full compensation fo 1' furnishing labour,
equipment, tools and other items necessary fo 1' the prope1' completion of the work for supplying,
fabricating , e1'ecting, inspection , adjusting, and testing.
The items ofwork payable under this provision along with their units sha l1 be as follows:
Pay Item Description Unit ofMeasurement

-
8.17-01 Stay Cable ton
8 .1 7-02 Stay Cable Damping Devices each
8.17-03 Tie-down Cable ton
8.17-04 Stay cable fatigue test

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Wind Cable - Section 8. 뼈
SEετION 8.18 - WIND εABL훌E

18.1 GENERAL
During construction of cable stayed bridge , the wind cables shall be installed in order to
ensure stability wind dynamic effects at higher wind velocities such as typhoon but in
ordinary site condition.
The Contractor has to prepare and submit to Consultant for reviewing and comment on
technology statement which describes in detai! about the installation actions and p1'ocess of
cable. And the detai!ed design shall be subject to the approvaI ofthe Engineer.
18.2 MATERIALAND TESτING
Wind cables shall be PE-coated 7 wire strands. For material and testing of galvanized wi1'es ,
cable anchorage and coveζ refer Part 8, Sections 18.17 ofthese Technical Specifications ‘
18.3.1 MEASURMENT
Wind cablcs shall bc mcasured by Lump-sum
18.3.2 PAYMENT
The amount of completed and accepted cables including concrete casting, form wo1'k, rebar
for concrete block, anchor, etc. , will be paid by Lump-sum for the pay items in the Bill of
Qu없tities， which rate shall be fu11 compensation for furnishing labour, equipment, tools and
other items necessary fo 1' the proper completion of the work for supplying, fab 1'icating,
e1'ecting, inspection, adjusting, and testing.
The items ofwo1'k payable under this p1'ovision along with their units shall be as fo11ows:
Unit of
Pay Hem No. Description
Measurement
8.18-01 Wind cable L뼈-sum
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - DIVISiON 8 8.18-179-of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Not Applicable - Section 8.19

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Cable Vibr l.ll tion Test - Section 8.20
SECτION 8.20- εABLEV용BRA멀‘IONTEST
20. 1. GENERAL
The measurement of vibration characteristics of stay cables after the installation of cable damping
system shall be used as a basis for the performance confirmation of permanent damping devices.
The test shall be carried out in the presence of the Engineer.
20.2. CONTENTS OF TEST
After the installation of the cable damping system , the Contractor shall observe the vibration of
selected 3 stay cables representing the cable units , and measure and record their amplitudes , and
modes. Wind velocity and direction, and rain intensity shall be recorded during the tes t.
20.3. PROCEDURES AND SUBMITTALS
The Contractor sha11 submit the measuring plan describing a detai! ed testing plan, measuring points
and measuring method, measuring equipments and sensors, and method of analysis and evaluation
for the Engineer ’ s approval prior to the execution oftesting.
Test sha11 be carried out in the presence ofthe Engineer.
The fina1 report shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
Cable vibration Test w i1l not be measured and paid separately but shall be deemed to be included in
the unit price ofBridge Health Monitoring System in Section 8.21
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.20 - 181- of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Healtb Monitoring System - Section 8.21
SECTION 8.21 - BRIDGE HEALTH MONITORING SYSTEM
2 1. 1 INTRODUCTION
Bridge Health Monitoring System (BHMS) shall be established to secure the safety and efficient
maintenance of Vam Cong Bridge. This specification shall be applied to the installation of equipment
and development of software for the BHMS ofVam Cong Bridge.
21.2 OBJECTIVES AND WORK SCOPES
The 0비 ectives of BHMS are to secure the accur따e and safe construction process with the provision of
measurement data in construction stage , and establish the systematic and scientific management
method for evaluating structural behavior and soundness ofbridge in service stage.
The work scope ofthe Contractor shall in cI ude all works of any kind required for the execution ofthe
works defined in the specifications.
BHMS for Vam Cong Bridge shall be established as following procedure and work scope:
1) Measurements planning
2) Installation of devices and equipment under construction stage
3) Automated monitoring and reporting under construction stage
4) Instal1 ation of devices and equipment under service stage
5) Field loading test fo l' initial data acquisition
6) Establishment of monitoring system in the maintenance office
7) Handover of BHMS
2 1. 3 BHMS IN VAM CONG BRIDGE
2 1. 3.1 General
This specification shall be applied to the design , manufacture and installation of measuring equipment
'A
l :''\1___ n ____ T、 __ !...l~_ .‘ __ ...J _______ .... _____
"_~~-=>~=，~'""강~‘~="~"^'f_ _생*혔쭉f효쟁*챔-종R평'"ε없양i까용""""'"성-ειf앙환-댄용 ~휠~흥<lG'J~앙~Si'o‘’~7iI;훌“‘~V'￥-쟁mF'vdilì\lJ0，~~"'_-_，，__=ε ι ‘ ε
ι-- →- -“」 ‘1 “ - - _ ..... _ . . _ - - - -
the measurement data and information for the maintenance of bridge during the service stage within
BHMS.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORI' s ‘ Bridge Health Monitoring System - Sectio l1l 8.21
The application of improved measuring system by adjustment (types and numbers of equipment) with
higher function and quality can be possible under the approvaI of Engineer at the time of instaIl ation
of equipment. Also , the operation under severe weather condition should be considered through the
process of equipment selection, installation, and protection work.
AIl the devices and equipment shaIl be inspected at delivery and tested after completion of installation.
The copy of check list for the inspection and test from manufacture1' should be handed over to the
Enginee1' for each equipment. The Contracto 1' shall provide all the info1'mation fo 1' the regula 1'
calibration which should be perfo 1'med during the construction p1'ocess. The f1'equency of calibration
and contact information should be ma1'ked on the calib 1'ation labe l. Also , the Contracto1' shall provide
the spare pa1'ts fo 1' the p1'epa1'ation in case of equipment failu 1'e, and shall p1'ovide the vete1'an enginee1'
fo 1' the t1'aining of equipl11ent installation and maintenance.
21.3.2 Measuremenf strategies
Val11 Cong Bridge is a long span steel composite cable stayed b1' idge and the main structural members
of b1'idge a1'e pylon, cable, and girder. Therefo1'e, most sεnsors shaIl be arranged in the pylon , cable,
and girdel‘. Also , additional sensors shall be arranged fo 1' lIlonitoring the ü떠、lïc/clirnate conàitions and
envi1'onmentalloading conditions.
1) Pylon
• Strain mete1' shaIl be insta Il ed to monito1' the stress intensity in pylon induced by cable
tensíoníng.
e GPS shaIl be installed to assess the ve1'ticality and shape of pylon.
e Multi-Dil11 ensional Shape (MDS) sensor shall be installed to evaluate the shape ofpylon.
• Accelerometer shall be instaIl ed to assess the vib 1'ation characte1'istics induced bv live Load
and wind loads.
• The1'mometer shall be installed to assess the themlal behavior of pylon.
2) Cable
• Accele1'omete1' shall be installed to calculate the cable force indi1' ec t1 y, and evaluate the
dynamic characteristics of cable.
• Load cell shall beinstaIl ed to measu1'e the tension oftie-down cable.
• Dummy cable shall be installed sepa1'ately and thermometer shaIl be installed in the dU l11l11 y
cable to evaluate the the 1'mal effect on the cable.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.21 - 183 - of 21 4

DlVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL NORKS ‘ Bridge Health Monitoring System - Section 8.21
• lfnecessary , the separate device ofportable cable force measurement shall be utilized.
3) Steel girder
• GPS shall be installed to measure the displacement of steel girder.
• Strain meter shall be installed to measure the stress of steel girder.
• Accεlerometer shall be installed to assess the vibration characteristics of steel girder.
• Thermometer shall be installed to evaluate the thermal eff농ct on steel girder.
4) Traffic/Climate conditions
• lntelligent camera shall be installed to recognize the traffic f1 0w and accidental event
automatically by using image processing technology.
• Water level camera shall be installed to evaluate the water level in real time by using image
processing teclmology.
5) Environmentalloading condition
• Ultrasonic anemometer shaJl be installed to measure the wind speed and direction.
• Rain gauge shall be installed to measure the rain fal l.
• Seismometer shall be installed to measure the earthquake accelel'ation.
• Thel'momete l' shall be installed to check the air temperature.
BHMS of Vam Cong bl'idge shall be established for construction stage and service stage, respectively.
ln the construction stage , meaSUl' ement data shall be tl'ansfe l'l'ed from DAQ equipment to BHMS
servers of field office by using wireless communication technology. ln the service stage, BHMS
servers shall be located in the maintenance office and web-based monitoring software shall be
installed by using internet network.
21.3.3 Measurement items
Measurement items and locations in BHMS for Vam Cong bridge are tabuJated and shown in drawings
as follows:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - DIVlSION 8 8.21 - 184 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Bridge Health Monitoring System - Section 8.21
Table 1. Measurement items for construction stage
Sensor Quantity Location Measurement items

•_.
Top ofPY2 wind
Anemometer 2
Deck on PY2 table velocity/directions
Cable sensor 2 Longest cables cable force
Cable force measuring device Portable device cable force
2-Adjacent to pylon table ofPYl

Strain meter 4' Stress of pylon
2-Adjacent to pylon table ofPY2
2-Top cross-beam ofPYl

lntelligent Camera 4 Bridge condition
2-Top cross-beam of PY2
Water lever camera A이 acent to PY2 Water level
Top ofPY2
Deck on PY2 table AirTemp.
Thermometer 6
2-PYl inside Temp. in the pylon
2-PY2 inside
Top ofPYl
2-axis accelerometer 2 Vibration ofpylon
Top ofPY2
Total Quantity 22
Table 2. Measurement items for service stage
Sensor Quantity Location M않S뼈men쿠믿

Top ofPYl
Top ofPY2
GPS 4 Various displacements
Mid-point on deck of mid-span
Base statioll (reference)
-
Top ofPY2
Anemometer 2 Wind velocity/direction
Mid-point 011 deck of 1l1 id-span
.... _----
Raingauge Mid-point 011 deck of 1l1id-span A 1l1 0ullt of rain fall
Cable acceler01l1eter 8 Longest cables Cable force
Cable force measuring device Portable device Cable force

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Health Monitoring System - Section 8.21
2-Adjacent to pylon table ofPYl

2-Adjacent to pylon table ofPY2 Stress of pylon
Strain meter 6
2-midpoint on girder of mid- Stress of deck
span
2-Top cross-beam ofPYl

Intelligent Camera 4 Bridge conditions
2-Top cross-beam ofPY2
Water level camera Adjacent to PY2 Water level

_.-
Sεismometer Bottom ofPY2 Seismic effect
--.,--
Joint meter 2 expansion joints (P28 , P29) Thermal expansion
Top ofPY2 AirTemp.

Mid-point on deck of mid-span AirTemp.
Dummy cable inside Temp. dummy cable
Thermometer 8
2-PYl inside Temp. in the pylon
2-PY2 inside Temp. in the pylon
Mid-point on girder of mid-span Temp. in the deck
--_.-
Tie-down load cell 2 Tie-down cables Tie-down cable force
l-axis accelerometer Mid-point on girder of mid-span Vibration of deck
Mid-point on girder of mid-span

Vibration of deck
2-axis accelerometer 3 Top ofPYl
Vibration of pylon
Top ofPY2
κ1ulti-dimensional shape sensor PYl inside Shape of pylon
Total Quantity 45
‘‘’“‘‘’윷능조융
TECHNICAI‘ SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.21 -186 -of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURALWORKS Bi'idge Health Monito i'ing System - Section 8.21
Figure 1. Location of sensors in construction stage
…
째
쨌
、、、
‘‘
、
s
、
**
m、
\.Æ'!..~ .. ~_~
““n"’ι"
Figure 2. Location of sensors in service stage
TECHNICAL SPECIFIC A:τIONS - DIVISION 8 8.21 -187 - of214

DIVISION 8 _. STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Health Monitoring System - Section 8.21
2 1.3.4 Constitution of the devices and equipment in BHMS
Each sensor shall be connected to data logger with cable , and the data logger shall be installed inside
the pylon. During construction stage, data logger is connected to wireless communication equipment
and measurement data is transfeITed to field office. During service stage, the data loggers located in
each pylon are connected each other with optical cable and the BHMS servers with appropriate data
processing software is installed in the maintenance office. After the internet cOImection, BHMS is
established for user to access the system. The diagram ofBHMS is shown as follows:
1EA-Cable ac때밍om터~
l 1EA-2 axis a때lerome띤r I

ω-am
Zu익〕
Slatic dala logger
-- --~_..1
Powercable
RS232
Wireless communicalion호표그
r--- PORTABLE MEASURE 맨 NTEQ비 PMENT _-기
Cable acceleromeler
「구ERg5IZca뼈oαrc
때
c잭떼떼
em
때
때
ne
1애ea뻐
뻐
Sl미u.r띠ri띠빼
Figure 3. Constitution ofBHMS in construction stage

DIVISION 8 - Sl'RUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Bridge Health 뼈 onitoring System - Sectioll 8.21
4EA-Cable acc하 erometer

2EA-2 axis acceleromeler
’
4EA-Cable acce ef'orneter
1 EA-2 axis accelerometer
1EA-1 axis accelerometer
2EA-Anemometer
1EA-Seismometer
。ptical cable
。 ptical cable
Figure 4. Constitution ofBHMS in service stage
21.4 INSTALLATION OF THE DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT
Before instal1ation, the quaìity of device and detaiìeà instaììation shouià be approved by tÏ1 e Engineer.
All the devices should be installed in stable according to the approved installation process , and
protected against physical and electric damage.
(1) Structu1'es ofthe devices and the equipments
• General maintenance and inspection shall be ca1'ried out efficiently for the equipment.
• The joints connect이‘ shall be used fo 1' electrical connection between the equipments or the
devices.
• Plug-in units shall be applied to the housing package of the devices for the efficient
workability of maintenance.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8_21 - 189 - of214

DlVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Health Monitoring System - Section 8.21
(2) Marking/labeling
The following identification items shall be marked or labeled.
• Identification tag for the equipment with frame components shall be attached by using
acrylic tag: black letters and white background.
• Effective indications that w iII be contrasted with the Drawings shall be labeled on terminals ,
control points , joints and cables in order to contract with the Drawings.
• Classified symbols that wiII be contrasted with the wiring on the Drawings shal1 be labeled
for the components.
• The points significantly to be paid attention shall be clarified using tags with redcolored
letters.
(3) Painting
Staving paint or equivalent shalJ be performed after appropriate rust-proofing treatment

excluding galvanized parts. The Contractor shall propose the color and proper c1 ass of
painting for the Engineer ’ s approval. Where , the specifications ofthe paint shall conform to
the specification ofthe stεel deck on the cable-stayed bridge.
(4) Quality assurance
The devices to be installed shall meet experience requirements ensured by sufficient actual
results in the BHMS in order to attain the purposes ofmeasurements.
• The experience on the same model of devices shall be acceptable under the Engineer’ s
approval. The model shall be app Jiεd basεd on given se1'ies 0 1' class of identical function of
thε same type of devices.
• The experience ensured by the actual results at the identical function shall be acceptable if
the specification meets the sufficient requirements under the Engineer’ s approval.
• The system shall be proposed and provided with the contractor to ensure maintenance
ab i1 ity and compatibility.
(5) Technical requirements
o The system shall be proposed and provided with the Contractor to ensure maintenance
ability and compatibility.
• All of devices have to suit with the environment and c1 imate condition ofVietnam.
• A I1 of the devices that w i1l be imported shall comply with Vietnam law on regulation to the

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Health Monitoring System ~ Seεtio때 8.21
import goods
• The product wananty will be under warranty by manufacturer.
• The acceptance on quaIity of imp Oli goods wiIl follow the data and information of goods
provided by the manufacturer and will be decieded by Engineer.
• All of devices shall comp!y with the specifications to ensllt’ e uniformity in the installation
and operation. The equivalent specifications will be decided and instructed by the Engineer.
21.5 SPECIFICATION OF THE DEVICES AND EQUIPMENT
2 1.5.1 General Rules
AIl the devices and equipment installed and applied in BHMS shou!d be assured for equivalent or
better perfOlmance in accordance with this specification , and compatibi!ity between devices and
equipment should be considered. E!ectric SOUI‘ ce , communication and other equipments which are not
specified in this specification shou!d be se!ected for the appropriate performance and function
considering the optima! operation ofBHMS under thε approval by the Engineer.
2 1. 5.2 Sensors
(1) GPS
a. Receiver
RTK perfOlmance : 10mm+lppm (H) , 20mm+2ppm (V)
• Average time to fix : 1sec
• Accuracy after post processing : 1.8mm+0.l ppm (H) , 2.0mm+0 .4 ppm(V)
• Maximum update : 20Hz
• Measurement precision
- Very Iow noise GNSS catTier phase measurements with < 0.5mm precision
- GPS/GLONASS.GaliI eo : L 1/L2 carrier phase 0.2mm
- L lIL2 code(pseudorange) : 20mm
• Input votage : 10.5-28 VDC
" Antenna LNA power ouput voltage: 3.3-18 VDC
• Antenna LNA maximum current : 50-100mA
8 Operating temperature : -40 - 65 0C

b. Antenna (Rover station)
• Frequency
- GPS : 1575Mhz(L 1) , 1227Mhz(L2) , 1176Mhz(L5)
- Glonass : 1602-1611 Mhz(L1), 1246-1254Mhz(L2)
-Galileo:1575 , 1176 , 1207 , 1191Mhz
• Noise Figure : < 2dbi
• Amplifier: Gain : 27dbi
• Temperaturε : -40-70 0C
c. Antenna (Reference station)
• Type: Choke ring
• Frequency
- GPS : 1575Mhz(L1) , 1227Mhz(L2), 1176Mhz(L5)
- Glonass : 1602-1611 Mhz(L 1), 1246-1254Mhz(L2)
- Galileo :1575 , 1176 , 1207 , 1191Mhz
• Noise Figure : < 2dbi
• Amplifier: Gain : 29dbi
• Temperature: -40~ 70 0C
(2) Anemometer
• Type: ultrasonic
• Wind speed: range 0~60m/s ， resolution 0.0 1I11 /S , accuracy 土 1%
• Wind direction: azimuth 0~360o， elevation 土60 0 ， resolution 0.1 0 , accuracy 土 1 。
• Operating temperature range: -40 0C - 60 0C
(3) Rain gauge
• Type: tipping bucket/magnetic reed switch
• Resolution: 1 tip
• Accuracy: < 土5%

i ’
DIVISION 8 - SfRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Health Monitoring System - Sectioll 8.21
• Operating temþerature range: 0"C ~ 500 C
(4) Cable accelerometer
• 1ype: capacitive Type
• Frequency: 0 ~ 250Hz
• Acceleration r없1ge: 土 2g
• Sensitivity: 2,000mV/g
• Operating temperature range: _55 0 C - 85 0C
(5) Portable cable force measuring device
• Sensor: capacitive type accelerometer
• Components: package ofsensor, dynamic data logger, laptop, power device
• Inclusion of cable force calculation software
(6) Strain meter
• Type: electric resistance
• Range: 土 5 ，000μStrain
• Sensitivity: 1μ Strain
• Nonlinearity: 1% RO
• Operating temperature r없1ge: -20 "C ~ 80 0C

Sγ
(7) Intelligent Camera.

’‘-
• Type: infrared camera (CDS , DSS type)
• Signal system: NTSC
• Total/effective pixels: 410K 1380K
• IR visible distance: Max. 100m
• Operating temperature range: _10 oC ~ 500 C
(8) Water level camera
• Type: infrared camera (CDS , DSS type)

• Signal system: NTSC
• Total/effective pixels: 410K /380K
• IR visible distance: Max. 100m
• Operating temper따ure range: -1 OOC ~ 50 0C
(9) Seismometer
• Type: force Balance
• Range: 土 0.25~4g
• Frequency: 200 Hz
• Li nearity: <1000 μg/g2

0
(1 0) Joint meter
• Type: Position Transducer
• Range: 1,000mm
• Repeatab i1 ity: 0.05% FS
• Accuracy: 土 0.15 % FS

0
(1 1) Thermometer
• Type: RTD
• Range: _200 oC ~ 500 C 0
• Sensitivity: 0.01 oC
(12) Tie-down Joad ce lJ
• Type: EJectric resistance
• Range: 300 kN
• Nonlinearity: 0.5% RO
• Operating temperature range:

4
DNISION 8"':: STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Health Monitoring System - Section 8.21
(13) 1-없is & 2-axis accelerometer
• Type: Force Balance
• Range: 土 0.25-4g
• Frequency: 200 Hz
• Li nearity: <1000 μg/g2
• Operating temperature range: -20 "C - 70"C
(14) Multi-dimensiona1 shape sensor
• Type: distributed type based on MEMS gravity sensor
• Angular range of sensors: +/-360。
e Range of Horizontal mode: +ι60。
• Long-term repeatabi1ity relative to starting shape: +ι 1. 5 mm for 32 m
• Resolution: 2 arc-seconds
• Azimuth eπor of joints: < +ι0.25 。
• Orthogonality within segments: +/-0.1 。
• Operating temperature range: _20 oC - 70 "C
21.5.3 Data Loggers and other devices
(1) Static data logger
• ChanneI: Max. 50 CH. (with multiplexer)
• Frequency: 0.03Hz-I00Hz
• InputlOut type: voltage
• Communication: RS232 , CS 1/0
• Memory:4MB
• Operating temperature range: _25 0C - 50 "C
(2) Dynamic data logger
• Channel: Max. 100 CH .
• Frequency: 1000Hz
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 8 8.21 -195;. of214

• Input/Out type: voltage , cUITent, resistance
• Communication: RS232 , RS485 , Ethernet
• Memory: 16MB (buffer)
• Operating temperature range: _20 oC ~ 60 0C
(3) AVR
• Video standards: H.264
• Video bit rate: 56kbps~ 1OMbps
• Video size: Dl , VGA , CIF , QVGA supp Oli
• F떼ne rate: 1~30 fps
• Operating temperature range: -15 C ~ 65 C

0 0
(4) Sεrvεr (DAQ , Video , Back-up server)
• Type: Rack
• CPU: Intel Xeon E5-2603 (Quad-core , 1. 80GHz, 10MB , 80W)
• RAM: PC3-10600R-9(RDIMM)
• HDD: 2TB raid
o VGA: NVIDIA Quadro 4000
• Monitor: 19in이.1 monitor
(5) UPS
• Declared power: 3000V A
• Power capacity: 2700W
• Recharge time to 90% capacity: 3 hours
• A VR function support
(6) Monitoring PC
• CPU: Intel Quad-core Ivybridge i5
‘“‘@ ‘ ιι; 응 ’ ‘ε ‘'f't~"7J':~짤o;g;;; 찍꿋 τ;“‘ λττ
• HDD: lTB

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Br뼈geHealth 뼈 onitoring System - Section 8.21
• VGA: Geforce GT650
• Monitor: 24inch LCD
2 1.6 MEASUREMENT FREQUENCY AND INSTALLATION TIME
Measurement under construction shall be based 011 the temporarily installed automated equipmen t.
Sensors and automated measurement equipments shall be installed in appropriate stage considering
construction process. Detai! ed schedule of sensor installation for service stage maintenance sha11 be
determined based on the discussion with the Engineer. Measurement for maintenance during service
stage begins after completion of all the construction procedure. Measurement frequency shall be
determined considering the objectives and types (static/dynamic) of measurement. Measurement
frequency can be discussed and readjusted with the Engineer with respect to the types of data and site
conditions.
21.7 DATA PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS
AII the measurement data should be filtered to assure the quality and reliability of data. The filtered
data is convelted to physical quantity fo l' eva[uating the structural behavior of bridge. Data analysis
methodology for each measurement item is depicted as fo l1 ows.
1) Structural shape
- Measurement sensors: GPS and MDS sensor
- Analysis methods: absolute value analysis and trend analysis
- Analysis results: displacement, coordinates and 3D shape
2) Dynamic characteristics of structuraI members
- Measurement sensors: accelerometer and seismometer
- Analysis method: absolute value analysis
- Analysis results: vibration amplitude, natural frequency, damping ratio and mode shape
3) Stress of structural members
- Measurement sensor: strain meter

- Analysis result: stress
4) Wind characteristics
- Measurement sensor: anemometer
- Analysis results: Wind speed and direction
5) Cable force
- Measurement sensors: l-axis cable accelerometer
- Analysis methods: frequency analysis , absolute value analysis and trend analysis
- Analysis results: acceleration waveform , power spectrum and cable force
6) Thermal effects
- Measurement sensor: thermometer
- Analysis method: trend analysis
- Analysis results: temperature and temperature gradient
7) Surrounding conditions
- Measuremei1 t sensors: intelligent camera, water Jevel camera and rain gauge
- AnaJysis methods: image analysis , absolute value analysis and trend analysis
- Analysis results: traffic conditions , water level and rain fall
2 1.8 SPECIFICATIONS OF BH까1: SOFTWARE
BHM software shal1 be developed for the measurement program of construction stage and service
stage respectively. Software program of measurement in service stage should be developed before the
completion of measurement system for service stage. Detailed plan of software development should be
submitted and approved before the completion of BHMS. The language of software should be
functions.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORI.잉 Bridge 뼈 ealth Monitoring System - Section 8.21
1) User management
Authorize the person itl charge for BHMS of Vam Cong, and support the security of confidential
informatìon and responsibi1ity of data change. Management items are personal information of useζ
user 10, password , authority level , access program , and user history information.
2) Basic information ofbridge
Basic information of bridge such as locatiol1 of bridge , structural type , span , section and image
1nformation ofmanaged object and main management information.
3) Management ofraw data
Data shall be managed in the fonn ofraw data or processed data to be compatible for the analysis and
display methods. The functions of inquiry for measurement results , response analysis to event, and
analysis of natural frequency should be incJuded in the management of raw data.
4) Statistical analysis
Additional analysis fo l' the raw data 0 1' processed data shall be conducted for the extraction of more
accurate information within the objective display functions. This function supports regression analysis
(Ii near regressionlp이 ynomial regressionlARX) and uIt imate value analysis (maximum/minimul11
distribution).
5) Visual Monitoring
Video from the intelligent camera shall be displayed to check the traffic situation on the bridge , and
the alert function shall be applied considering traffic flow and acciden t.
Video from water level camera and the analyzed water level shall be displayed. Additional function
for controlling camera and pan-tilt should be appIi ed.
6) Alelt management against event
Maintenance threshold is used for the alelt function about the various events which cause the
excessive data. The alert function shall provide information about excessive data , communication error
and system stopping alarm , transfer delay and renewal history information, transmitter/receiver history
of event file and directory structure management.
7) Time series data management
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 8 8.21 -199-of214

Various analysis information shall be provided by using raw measurement data 0 1' processed data in
this function. Time series data analysis of triggering file , filtering/frequency analysis , frequency range
analysis of cable , conveliing analysis for tension force by using material propeliies , and stress-
frequεncy analysis shall be managed.
8) Constitutive information ofBHMS
Installation infonnation about the established BHMS of bridge shall be managed. Various
information such as hardware constitution , engineering conversion, hardware image (site installation
image) , and local network system shall be included.
9) Drawings management
General drawing of bridge , arrangement of equipments , and detai! ed installation information shall be
managed.
10) Extemal data support
When the information from BHM software is needed to be conveliεd to extemal data, graph images
and timε series data shall be converted to extemal data file in the form of Text Editor 0 1' Microsoft
Office Excel. Additional function about DB inquiry management is also needed to check the
application history of extemal data and protect BHM information.
11) System management
Periodic DB of measurement data shall be generated, and the various information about measurement
system constitution and data transmitter/receiver shall be displayed.
BHMS server system is composed of DAQ sever, video server and back-up server. Software fo l'
servicε stage measurement shall be installed in DAQ server. 1n DAQ servεr， the function of C/S
(Client/Server) application, database management system (DBMS) and web application shall be
established. Video server includes the appropriate software program in which the acquired video from
camera shall be image processed and stored. And , clustered system (FailOver) should be app Ji ed
between DAQ server and back-up DAQ server. Operation system and hardware architectures of
BHMS shall be established as follows.

DIVISION 8:_ STRVCTURAL WORKS Bridge 뼈 ealth Monitoring System - Sectioll1 8.21
iE‘r댄펴뜸} 월편::웰끽:
Web Serv용r
仁r빵현뀔쁘느JI
I T땐P JI
끼 • Static/dy때nic data
i: • Control data
: • Video lmage acqulsition ! Web browser

: • Image processing
L----------------------------------J
Figure 5. Operation system architecture ofBHMS
FigW' e 6. Hardware architecture of operation system
21.9 MONITORING CRITERIAAND PHASED PLAN
Monitoring criteria is required for the efficient management of BHMS and assessment of structural
condition. The monitoring criteria shall be determined cO l1sidering structural analysis results , design
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATlONS - mVISION 8 8.21 - 201 - of214

document and environmental conditions. When evaluating the structural behavior by using monitoring
criteri a, absolute value analysis and trend analysis based on measurement data shall be conducted.
Monitoring criteria shall be provided for each sensor in ahead of the establishment of BHMS , and
determined through the discussions between Contractors and Engineers. Monitoring criteria shall be
provided in different levels for Safe, Caution and Warning.
For each evaluation level , the appropriate plans and solutions shall be established. Especially, ln case
of abnormal levels such as caution and warning, SMS or e-mail shall be sent to the management agen t.
2 1. 10 REPORTING
Monthly report shall be subl11 itted during construction stage. ln monthly rep Olt , l11 easure l11 ent data
analysis for that month and comparative trend anaJysis for cUl11 ulative measurement data shall be
included. After completion of BHMS establishment , the final report shall be submitted in a month. ln
the final report , the result of field loading test for initial data acquisition , compendious description
related to BHMS establishment, manual for the operation and maintenance, and user manual of S/W
shall be included.
21.11 HANDOVER
2 1. 11.1 Handover ofthe system
Contractor should get approval from the system maintenance agent for normal operation activity. If
there exists any damage on the system , Contractor should fix or repair it.
2 1. 11.2 Training of local personnel
Contractor shall provide the training program including basic information of system design and
operation. Training program shall be provided within 15 days. On the request of the Owner, training
period can be extended.
21.12.1 MEASUREMENT
The Bridge Health Monitoring shall be measured as a lump sum.
2 1. 12.2 PAYMENT
Payment for each monitoring system shall be full compensation for provision of a fully functional
computer, associated software , and trainingltechnical sUppOJt.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Bridge Health Monitoring System - Section 8.21
The items ofwork payable under this provision along with their units shal1 be as fo l1 ows:
Description Unit of Measurement
Bridge Health Monitoring System Lump sum

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Drainage - Section 8.22
SECTION 8.22 - BRIDGE DRAINAGE
22.1 GENERAL
This work shall consist ofthe furnishing and instal1 ation of drainage system for the bridges. All
work shall be done in accordance with the Contract Documents and as directed by the Engineer.
The following Standards in their latest edition shall be particularly applied to the works covered
by this Specification Section.
Specification for pipe , steel , black and hot-dipped , zinc coated, welded I
ASTMA53
and seamless.
ASTMA48 Specification for grey iron castings.
ASTMA126 Grey Iron Castings.

-
ASTMA53 Galvanised steel pipes for ordinary piping.
ASTMA709M Ro l1 ed steels for general structures.
ASTMD3034 Class 1245-B Specification for PVC pipe and fittings.
22.2 WORKING DRAWINGS

The Contractor shall submit his method statεment and Drawings to the Engineer for his approval.
The method statement and Drawings shall include but no be limited to arrangements and detai1 s
of pipes fittings and joints , means of casting the catch pit into the structure and details of fixing
pipe brackets to concrete surfaces.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his approval manufacturer ’ s certificates
confirming that all materials meet the requirements of the relevant standards and specifications.
Certificates are required for pipes and all pipe fittings and the catch pit and grating.
22.3 MATERIALS REQUIREMENl‘S
22.3.1 Drain Pipes
Pipe and fittings shall be of the size and types indicated 011 the drawings. They shall be
galvanized and comply with the requirements ASTM A53.
22.3.1-1 , 0 1' equivalent.

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Drainage - Section 8.22
Table 22.3 .1 -1 Materials for Drain pipes
It em Material Specification Remarks
Drain Pipes PVC ASTM D3034 - LO l}.i 1245 - B
Drain Pipes Steel ASTM A709M - Grade 250 Galvanized
22.3.2 Catch pit and Grating
Catch pits and gratings shall be Gray lron Casting with reliability test greater than grade 50 as
required by AASHTO A48 for heavy items , of the shape and size and with the connection
requirements as indicated on the drawings.
The materials used for the catch pit and Grating shall conform to the Specifications as shown in
Table 22 .3 .2-1 , 0 1' equivalent.
Table 22.3.2-1 Materials fo 1' Catch pit and Grating
Item Mate1'ial Specification Remarks
Catch pit and Gray Iron ASTM A126 - CLass C Painted

Grating
-
Chain Steel ASTMA36 Galvanized
22.3.3 Fixing Brackets
The materials fo 1' fixing b1'ackets shall conform to ASTM A709M , G 1'ade 250 0 1' equivalent
standa1'ds and shall be galvanized 0 1' of othe1' rust- 1'esistance materials to the app 1'oval of the
Enginee1'.
22.3.4 Delivery, Storage and Handling
Materials delivered to site shall be inspected fo 1' damage , unloaded, and stored with the
minimum handling. Materials shall be handled in such a manner as to ensure delivery to storage
0 1' the point of installation in sound undamaged condition. Pipes shall be carried and not dragged.
Matel'떼s shall not be sto1'ed di 1'ectly on the g1'ound. The inside of pipes and fittings shall be kept
f1'ee of di 1't and deb1'is.
22 .4 FABRICATION, GALVANIZING AND PAINTING OF METAL
Fab 1'ication, galvanizing and painting of metal items shall be in accordance with the
1'equirements of Section 8.14 “ Miscellaneous metal" and Section 8.9 “ Painting", unless
otherwise specified in these specifications.
The inne1' face of the catch pit iron shall be painted with modified epoxy resin with thickness of
minimum 240μm.

DJVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Drainage - Section 8.22
22.5 ASSEMBLY OF DRAINAGE PIPES AND FITTINGS
22.5.1 General
Drainage catch pits and gratings shall be installed complete at the locations indicated on the
drawings. Catch pits shall be cast into the structure 0 1' cast into a previously formed box out as
detailed in the Contractor ’ s method statement. Where the catch pits are to be cast into a box out
all relevant details shall be su비 ect to the approval of the Engineer. Where catch pits are secured
into box outs using concrete, the concrete shall be at least equal in stren망h to the concrete in the
surrounding structure and all box out faces shall be prepared as required for construction joints.
The inside faces ofthe catch pit shall be painted in accordance with specification 8.9 - "Painting" ,
system for aggressive conditions subject to the approval ofthe Engineer.
All pipes and fittings shall be installed to the locations , lines and grades indicated in the
drawings. Cutting ofpipe shall be avoided. Where pipes are cut the cut end shall be cleaned and
trimmed and painted in accordance with specification Section 8.9 - "Painting" immediately after
cutting. All joints shall be properly and securely made to ensure no leakage ofwater.
Drainage pipes and fittings shall be assembled in accordance with the Manufacture ’ s instructions.
AlI pipes and fittings shall be unloaded and handled with reasonable care.
AlI pipe brackets shall be located and securely fixed in place before pipes are installed.
22.5.2 .Joints and Fixing Brackets
Joints of drainage pipes and fittings shall meet the requirements for watertightness. Joints and
fixing brackets shall be so installed that the connection of the pipe sections wil1 form a
continuous line free from irregularities in the flow line.
22.6 MEASUREMENT
22.6.1 Catch Pit and gratings
Drainage catch pits , frames and gratings in c1 usive of all fittings shall be measured for payment
by the number of drainage sets of each typε， constructed and installed in accordance with the
requirements ofthe drawings and approved by the Engineer.
22.6.2 Drainage Pipe
Drainage piping shall be measured for payment by Ii near meters along the centre and between
intersections ofthe centre ofthe pipe for the steel drain piping ofthe diameter and type required
by the drawings. The measurement by Jinear metre shaJJ incJude all fixtures and fittings
incJuding pipe covers , teεs ， pipe connectors ,
and all necessary fitting , supports and
braιkets
‘-- ’ “ J A 11 ~ __ • 1__ 11 ~ ___ 1
쫓용종좋좋쨌였§뚫상R양l!F~l'f_녕썽~{(없당상~댈쭉황용-흩싹-1"Ðv'~I'Y학Qifl'쩍R~짧~~￥꺼-‘~양i ￥&정짧힐￥융;‘ ιιι
coatings , and shaJJ be for all items constructed , installed and approved by the Engineer.

• I
. DIVISION 8 -'STRUCTURAL WORKS Bridge Drainage - Section 8.22
22.7 PAYMENT
Payment shaII be made in accordance with the applicable unit prices ofthe pay items ofthe Bill
of Quantities listed below, and shall include aII labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to
install all piping and fittings ...
Payment of Steel Drainage Catch Pit shall be made by set that installed , included all labor, i
.‘
equipment and incidentals necessary to install drainage catch pits, frames and gratings ,... ι
Y ι
Payltem No. Description Unit of Measurement
8.22-01 Steel Drainage Catch Pit Set
8.22-02 Pipe PVC D=150mm m
8.22-03 Pipe PVC D=200mm m :tg

‘
L
‘
li
il
’

DNISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Not Applicable - Section 8.23

DIVISroN 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Shock Transmission Units - Sect.ion 8.24
SECTION 8.24 - SHOCK TRANSMISSION UNITS
24. 1. GENERAL
This work shall consist of furnishing and installing shock transmission units (STUs) and hardware
for attaching to bridge structures‘
STUs and hardware shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown in the contract
documents and these specifications. VI새en complete detai! s are not provided, STUs and hardware shall be
furnished that conform to the limited detai1s shown in the contract documents and shall provide the
design capacities for minimum and maximum !oads and movements , and the perfonnance characteristics
specified.
24.2. WORKING DRAWINGS
Whenever complete detai1s for STUs and hardware are not shown in the contract documents , the
Contractor shall prepare 없ld submit working drawings for the STUs and hardware. Such drawings shall
show the external detai1s and dimensions of the STUs and hardware proposed for use and shall be
approved by the Engineer prior to fabrication. Such approval shall not relieve the Contractor of any
responsib i1ity under the contract documents for successfuI completion ofthe work.
The following shall be specified on the working drawings:
• The total number of STUs required, grouped according to rated capacity and rated travel
limÎts.
• The mass of each STU.
• The plan view and section elevation view showing all relative dimensions , inc1uding dimensions
for the assumed installation temperature, of each STU and atlachment hardware.
• The minimum and maximum design temperatures ofthe STUs‘
• The maximum drag force at the specified rate of movement caused by the specified temperature
changes for each STU.
rg, 1‘he total movemεnt capacitγ ofeachSTU.
• The maximum rated load capacity for each STU.
• The maximum mov히nent anticipated for each cyc1e during dynamic loadings.
• η.1e type of materials to be used for a11 STUs and at tachment hardware.
• Painting or coating materials to be applied.
• AliglUl1ent plans for the STUs showing tolerances for alignment in which the STUs must be
installed.
• Insta11ation schemes.
• Design ca1 culations for the attachment hardware verifying conformance with the loading
requirements, ifrequired by the contract documents.
• Anchorage details of the atlachment hardware.
TECHNICAL SPE Cl FICA'τIONS - DIVISION 8 8.24 - 209 - of214

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL 찌'ORKS Shock Transmission Units - Section 8.24
• The place ofmanufacture ofthe STUs and the fabricator ofthe hardware.
• The Manufacturer’s name and the name of the representative who will be responsible for
coordinating production, inspection , sampling, and testing.
24.3. MATERIALS
24.3.1 Steel
Unless noted otherwise in the contract documents , atlachment hardware shall meet the
requirements of AASHTO M 270M (ASTM A 709M), Grade 345 stee l. AlI other metal components of
the STU, except for the piston rod , shall meet the requirεments of AISI 1026, or equivalent.
The piston rod shall meet the requirements of ASTM A 240M , Type 304L, stainless stee! , or
equivalent.
Bolts shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 164M (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, unless noted
otherwise in the contract documents.
24.3.2 Internal Fluid
The Manufacturer shal1 detennine the fluid used inside the STU to provide the shock resistance
capacity of the STU. Where this material is proprietary in nature , the contract documents shall specify
that the Manufacturer demonstrate throu링1 the testing program that the design requirements of the STU
can be me t. The operating fluid used in the STU shall be OSHA approved non-toxic nonflammable
silicone-based fluid or putty. The Manufacturer shall provide a certification that the material in each STU
is the same mate1'ial as was used in the testing p1'ogram.
24.3.3 Packaging, Handling, and Storage
P1'io1' to shipment f1'om the point of manufactu1'e, STUs shall be packaged in such a manner to
ensure that during shipment and storage , the STUs wi1l be protected against damage from handling,
weather, or any normal haza1'd. Each package shall be marked to clearly note the STU identification
number, the r따ed capacity, the Manufacturer ’s name, and the project identification.
All STUs shall be stored at the work site in an area that provides protection from environmental
and physical damage. Wh en installed , STUs and hardware shall be clean and free of all foreign
substances.
Dismant1i ng of STUs at thε site shall not be done unless absolutely necessary for inspection or
installation. STUs shall not be opened or dismantled at the site , except under the direct supervision of, or
with the approval of, the Manufacturer.
24.3.4 Manufacture/Fabrication
24 .3.4 .1 GENERAL
The Manufacturer shall celiify that each STU satisfies the requirements of the contract
documents and these specifications. Each STU shall have stamped on the body the STU identificatiol1
number, thε rated capacity, the Manufacturer ’ s name , and the project identification. STUs including the
com- pleteness , tolerancεs， and geometry before shipping to the site.

24.3.4.2 CONNECTING HARDWARE

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Shock Transmission Units - Section 8.24
Hardware used to connect thε STU to the substructure and/or superstructure shall be fabricated in
accordance with Section 8.8, Steel Structures.
24 .3.4 .3 CONNECTING TOLERANCES
Differences between pin and hole diameters shall be 250 μmmaxÌ1mun.
24.4. TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE
All shock transmission units shall be tested to verify their performance and design properties
under slow movement, fast movement and cyclic loading. In general , there are three types oftests to be
perfonned on an STU:
• Prequalification test (system characterization tests) descIibed in Art icle 24 .4.1;
• 맘ototype tests , described in Article 24 .4.2;
• Proof tests (quality control tests) described in Art icle 24 .4.3
24.4.1 Prequalification Tests
The performance and fundamental properties of the STU shall be verified by testing before it can
be adapted for use. These tests include component tests of individual units, assembled units, and scaled
structure complete with STUs. At a minimum , these tests shal1 be conducted according to the testing
guidelines developed by the Highway Itmovative Technology Center (HITEC) evaluation panel.
24.4.2 P i'ototype Tests
24 .4.2.1 GENERAL
The resistance and the stroke under slow movement and the lock-up force under fast movement
of the STU used in the design and in the analysis shall be verified by prototype tests. AlI testing shall be
perfonned at an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. A l1 testing shall be performed
În the presence of the Engineer unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer. These tests can be
conducted at ambient temperature.
The prototype tests identified herein shall be perfonned on at least one STU of each type.
24 .4 .2.2 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TEST
The STU shall be tested for at least 3 minutes at 150 percent ofthe maximum computed intemal
pressure to verify the structural integrity ofthe hi힘1 pressure boundarγ. The STU shall be pressurized and
sealed for the duration ofthe tes t. lnitial and final pressure readings shall be recorded.
ACCEPTANCE: No signs of leakage under pressure. Hydrostatic pressure shall not drop more
than 5 percent during the test.
24 .4 .2.3 SLOW MOVEMENT TEST (THERMAL)
The STU shall be cycled for three complete and continuous cycles at a low velocity and a
maximum stroke specified by the Engineer to verify the operation and travel of the uni t. A continuous
plot ofthe load and deflection shall be recorded.
ACCEPTANCE: No sign of leakage under operation. No sign of structural binding under
operation. The force required to cycle the unít shallnot exceed 10 percent of the nominal rated force 0 1' as
specified by the Engineer. The STU shall not lock-up during this tes t.
24 .4 .2.4 FAST MOVEMENTTEST

The STU shall have the fu lJ nominal rated force applied to it at a fast travel rate specified by the
Engineer. The STU shall be tested in both compression and tension , but testing need not be cyclic. A
continuous plot ofload versus def1ec- tion shaJl be recorded.
ACCEPTANCE: The STU shaJl lockup within 12 mm 0 1' as specified by the Engineer of the
point of zero movement. The lock-up def1ection shaJl be taken as the def1ection at which a constant
stiffness is achieved. The def1ection from the point of lockup to the maximum test load shall not exceed
12 mm 0 1' as specified by the Engineer. Thε stiffness of each STU throughout the force range from lockup
to maximum test load sha Jl not vary by more than 10 percent. Unit shaJl show no sign of leakage 0 1'
binding.
24 .4 .2.5 SIMULATED DYNAMIC TEST
The STU shall be tested to detennine the ability ofthe unit to lockup during dynamic loads. Each
unit wiII have tension force applied in less than 0.5 seconds or as specified by the Engineer; this force
will be sustained for the period of five seconds. At the end of the five seconds of tension load, the unit
shall be put into compression within one second 0 1' as specified by the Engineer. The compression force
will be held for five seconds. The tεnsion and compression force shall be equal and will be at least three
times the lock-up force detennined in Aliicle 24 .4.3 .4, Fast Movement Test, but no more than the
nominal rated force. A continuous plot of force ve1'sus def1ection shall be 1'ecorded.
ACCEPTANCE: Def1ection between the point of zero load and the point of maximum load shall
not exceed 12 mm 0 1' as specified by the Engineer, in eithe1' the initial loading stage 0 1' in the fo 1'ce
reversal stage. Def1ection during the sustained load portion of the test shall not exceed 12 mm 0 1' as
specified by the Enginee1'.
24 .4 .2.6 OVERLOAD TEST
The STU shall be loaded by 1.5 times the nominal rated force at a rate fast enough to make the
unit lockup , then hold the load fo 1' 30 seconds 0 1' as specified by the Enginee1'.
ACCEPTANCE: Unit shall show no sign ofleakage 0 1' binding.
24 .4 .2.7 FATIGUE LOAD TEST
The STU shaJl be cy cJ ed fo 1' 100,000 complete and continuous cycles at a velocity (frequency)
specified by the Engineer and a load equal to the nominal rated force (PR) ofthe STU.
ACCEPTANCE: Unit shall show no sign ofleakage or binding.
24.4.3 Proof Testing (Quality Control)
24 .4 .3.1 GENERAL
These tests shall be conducted on every STU that is going to be incorporated into the structure.
All testing shall be perfì이'med at an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. All testing
shalJ be performed in the presence of the Engineer unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer.
These tests can be conducted at ambient temperature.
The shall consist of the
24 .4 .3.2 HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE TEST
The STU shall be tested for at least three minutes at 150 percent of the maximum computed

DIVISION 8 - STRUCTURAL WORKS Shock ’fransmission Units - Section 8.24
intemal pressure to verify the structural integrity of the high pressure boundary. The STU shal1 be
pressurized and sealed for the duration ofthe test. lnitial and final pressllre readings shal1 be recorded.
ACCEPTANCE: No signs of leakage llnder pressllre. Hydrostatic pressllre shall not drop 1l1 0re
than 5 percent during the test.

24 .4 .3 .3 SLOW MOVEMENTTEST (THERMAL)
The STU shall be cycled for three c01l1plete and continuolls cycles at a low velocity and a
maxi1l1um strok:e specified by the Engineer to verify the oper때on and travel of the uni t. A continuous
‘
plot ofthe )rce verses deflection and force verses ti1l1e shaIl be recorded.
ACCEPTANCE: No sign of leakage llnder operation. No sign of stmctllral binding llnder
operation. The force reqllired to cycI e the llnit shal1 not exceed 10 percent ofthe nominal rated force or as
specified by the Engineer. The STU shaIl not lock-llP during this test.
24 .4.3.4 FAST MOVEMENT TESr
The STU shaIl have the fllll nominal rated force applied to it at a fast travel rate specified by the
Engineer. The STU shaIl be tested in both compression and tension , but testing need not be cyc Ii c. A
continuolls plot of load verSllS deflection shall be recorded.
ACCEPTANCE: The STD shall lockup within 12mm or as specified by the Engineer ofthe point
of zero moveme따. The lock:up deflection shall be taken as the deflection at which a c잉nstant stiffness is
achieved. The deflection from the point of lock-up to the maximum test load shal1 not exceed 12 mm or
as specified by the Engineer. The stiffness of each STU throughout the force range from lockup to
maximum test load shall not vary by more than 10 percent. Unit shall show no sign of leakage or binding.
24.5. MANUALS
24.5.1 Installation Manuals
The Manufacturer shall provide an instaIIation manual which includes specific instructions to
ensure proper instal1ation procedures for the STU. The following iterns shall be included:
• N없ne of the Manufacturer’ s representative who will provide assistance and advice during
instalIation ofthe STUs.
• Aligruαlent dimensions, installation temperature, and the “ ideal" installation length ofthe device.
• Details of any required instalIation equipment and complete procεdures， including instaIIation
tolerances, as welI as insσuctions on its use.
• Shop drawings ofthe STUs and the connections to the btidge components, incI uding tolerances
for critical components and connection detai1s.
" STU job site storage requirements whiIe awaiting instaIIation.
• STU electrical isolation procedures where there is a possibility of galvanic 이. electrolytic
corroslOn occuITmg.
24.5.2 Maintenance and Inspection Manuals
The Manufacturer shaIl provide a manual that wiIl include specific instructions to ensure proper
maintenance and inspection procedures for the STUs while in service. The following Ît ems should be
included:

• Infonnation as to what to inspect, and what to look for (i. e. pull back piston rod covering, ifused,
and look f01" evidence of leakage). lnclude any precautions necess없Y to avoid damage to the
boot and device.
• lnfonnation on type of grease to apply to the exposed piston rod and frequency of application.
• InstlUctions on how to check the inspection holes , greasing points, etc.
• lnstlUctions f01" “ removal and replacement" of the STU, in cJ uding schematics of any special
equipment needed.
• When required by the conηact documents , details of any necess없y tools and equipment shall be
provided to aJ low the STU to be proof tested to ve꺼fy movement capability while on the
sÌlUct1.U"e.
• lnstlUctions for each inspection (generaJJy assumed to be at a frequency oftwo years) and after
each significant seismic event shall in cJ ude at least the following:
o PeIfonn a visual inspection ofthe anchorage system to ensure it is not damaged.
。 Detetmine need for maintenance forces to c1ean the STU and i엽 anchorages to prevent
accelerated cOlTosion.
。 Determine need for repaintinglrecoating of the device.
。 AJJ STUs on the bl띠ge shall be closely inspected for signs ofleakage. Ifleakage is noted when
inspecting the boot, notify maintenance forces to remove boot and inspect piston rod for
damage.
。 Inspect for unexpected changes in aJignment 이. condition that would indicate the STU
experienced unexpected force application; etc.
。 Evety six ye따s， or as detennined by the owneζ notify maintenance f0 1"ces to unc1asp the
prote따ive boot and examine the condition of the piston rod, as well as detennine if there is
evidence ofleakage ofthe intemal fluid.
。 Every ten years notify maintenance fOl야s to load STU(s) as se!ected by the owner, and in a
manner to ensure the STU can develop the rated load.

STUs shal1 be measured and paid for by the number of units installed and accepted as shown in
the contract documents or ordered by the Engineer.
The contract unit price paid fo 1' “ Shock Tr ansmission Units" shall in cJ ude ful1 compensation for
fumishing all labo1', materials , tools , equipment and incidentals , and f0 1" doing all the work involved in
installing STUs (including testing) , complete in place, as specified in these specifications, the contract
documents , and as directed by the Engineer.
Pay Item No. Unit of Measurement

DIVISION 9
ELECT뿔훌εA훌」 때TORKS
DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL 찌'ORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1
DIVISION 9: ELECTRICAL WORKS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GENERAL .................................................................................................................... ……… ••• - 4-
2. SCOPE OF WORK.S ................................................................................................................. - 4 -
3. QUALITY ASSURANCE ........................................................................................................ - 5-
4. DRA WINGS AND DOCUMENTS ................................................................... “ ..................... - 5-
5. STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS ......................................... …… ••.••••••••••.••••••••••••••••••••••• - 6-
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................. 서 8 -
7. 22KV/ 35KV MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER LINE AND SUBSTATIONS ......................... - 8-

7.1 Gen이·떠 ...................................................................................................................................... - 9-
7.2 Transform앉 ............................................................................................................................. - 1ι
7.3 Secondary Low Voltage 380/ 220 volts Distribution System ................................................. - 11 -
8. LIGHTING UNITS .............................................................................................................. …- 11 -
8.1 Gener떠 ....................................................................................................................................- 11 -
8.2 Type ofLighting Fixture ......................................................................................................... - 11 -
8.3 Minimum Required Characteristics of Lantem: ..................................................................... - 12 -
8.4 Submission Data ofLantem .................................................................................................... - 12-
9. ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION .................................................................................. - 13 -
9 .1 Gener외 ................................................................................................................................. …- 13 -
9.2 Standards ................................................................................................................................. - 14 -
9.3 Circuit Breakers ...................................................................................................................... - 14 -
9.4 Knife Switch ……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
..“…….…….
..“…………
..“………
..………
..……
..……... “…….…….
..“…………
..“……….
..… ……...“…“…….“…….“………
..….……
..“………
…..……’
..………
..………
..…….
.. ……
..“………
..………
..……
n..……
..…….
..“…….……
..“……...……“…….……
..“………
..………
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
.. ……
..“………
..………
..……
..……
..……...“…….“………
..….……
“..………
…..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
.. ……
..“………...… “…….……
..“……
..…………
..……...“…….“………
..….……
“••………….
.. ……
..“………
..………
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……..……...“…….“….“. - 1η7-
..……
9.5 Contro
이1 Equ
띠ipment..………
..……
..……
..…….
.. …...“…“….“….“….“…….“…….……
..“……
..…………
..…...“….“….“….“….“……....“…“….…
..“……
..……
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…….
.. …
..“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..……
..…
..…...“….“……
...“……
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..……
..…
..…….
.. “….“….“……
...“……...“….…
..“……
..…
..…...“….….“…
..“… …
..…...“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..… .. “….“.- 18 -
..…-“….
9.6 Timer Switch.“….“….“…
..… …
..….“…
.. …
..….“…
.. …
..…...“…
..……
..…
..…...“….“….“….“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
..…...“….“……’...“…”…
..……...“….“…
..… …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …...“…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
••…
..…
..…
..…
..…’
..”…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…’..”…
..……
..…
..…’..”….“….“……
...“…….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…...“….“……....“…“….…
..“……’
.. ”…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..… .. 18 -
..….“….“.-
9.7 Remo
야t않e Contro
이lDev
띠ice …
..•••.…
.•••…
…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…’
..”…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….‘
.. ….“…
..… …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“…
..……...“….…
..“……
..…
••…...“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…...“….…...“…“…-“….…..•“…“….“…….“…
...“… …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….…
..“……
..…
..…...“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….…
..“……...“…
..……
..… .... - 18 -
..….“…
.. …
9.8 Coαntro
띠1 Device for Illumi
끼1Ína없t“ions …
.....“….“…
..……
..…...“….“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
..…...“….“….“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“…...…“….…...“…“….“….“….“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …...“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…...“….“….“……
...“……
..…
..…
..…
..… .. 18 -
..….“.-
10. STREET LIGHTING POLES ................................................................................................. - 19-
1 1. CABLE, GROUNDlNG , SPLICES AND CONDUIT .................................................... …….- 20-
11.2 Grounding ............................................................................................................................... - 22 -

mVISION 9 - ELECτRICALWORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1
11.3 El ectrical Splice Materials .“………

………
••…….“…
•• ……
••……….
••“……….“……….“……….“……….……….
••“……….“……….“………“……….“……….………
••
“…………
…….••………
••
“………………
••………
••……….,………
•• ………
••……….“………
.. ………
..………
..………
..………
..………
..………
..………
..………
..……….“………
.. ………
..………
..……….
.. ……….
..“………
“……….“……….“……….“……….“……….“…………
……...“…………
..
…….……….“………
..
“……… ……….“………
.. ……….
.. “……….
………’
..“…”………………
……’
..…….“…
..
”……………….
.. “……….“……….
…..
…….“……….“………“……….“……….“……….“……….……….
..“……….“………….“……….………
..
“……….……….
..“………“……….
……….
..“…“……
……….
………
••………
..
“…………
..
……………
..………
..………
..………
..………
..…….“….“.-
.. 깅
23 -
1 1.4 Co이n띠du비
l너it 없
anc
떠dElec따tr디ic Pipe.“….“...…••••…...“…••••……
..….“….“….“….“….“…
.. …
..….“….“….“….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“…"….“….“….“….…
..
“……...“….“….“….“….“….…
..
“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….“….…….“….“….“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…
..….……
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….“….…….…
..
“……
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
••…’”…
•• …
..…
••….“….“…
.. … ..….“….“…
.. … ..… .... - 23 -
..…
1 1. 5 Cable Trays .“….“..“….“...…••••…••••…….“….“….….“….“…

..“… …..…
..….“……
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….“…….….“…
..“… ….“…
.. …
..….“….“…
.. ……..……
..….“…
.. ….“…
.. …
..…….“……
.. …
..…….“…
.. …
..….“…
.. …...“…….“….“…….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“…….“…….…...
“…“.…“….“….“….“….“…….“….“…….“….“….“….“…….“….“…….“….“….“….“…...
….“…….“….“….“…….“….“….“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….“…….….“…
..
“… …
..…
..….“….“.-
.. 23 -
1 1. 6 Pu
띠
씨
1111 Boxes ...……
..….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….….••
“…“….“….“….“….“….“….…
..
“…….“…
.. …
..….“…
.. …
..…
..….“…
.. …
..….“….“….“…
.. ….“….“….“….“…
.. …
..….“…
.. …
..…
••…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….“…….“….“….“….“….…
..“…….“…
•• …
..….“….“…
.. ….“….“….“….“…
.. … ..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..….“….“…
.. ….“….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..….“….“….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….“….…
.. ..…...“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“.- 23 -
“…….“…
.. …
12. OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS (AIR HAZARD 찌1 ARNING LlGHTS AND NAVIGATION

LIGHTS) ................................................................................................................................. - 24-
12. 1. Obsíruction Li화lts (Air Hazard Warning Li ghts as AHW니 .................................................. - 24-
12.2. Obstruction Li ghts (Ship Navigation Li ghts) .......................................................................... - 25 -
13. FLOOD LIGHT SYSTEM ..................................................................................................... - 26 -
13. 1. Flood Li ghts fo 1' Aesthetic Lighting System ........................................................................... - 26 -
14. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (LPS) FOR BRIDGE PYLON ............................... - 27 -
14.1. General requirements: ......................................................................... “ .................................. - 27-

14.2. Air Tennin떠 ............................................................................................................................ - 27-
14.3. Down condu야or ........................................................ ‘ ............................................................. - 27 -
14.4. Earthing Conductor ................................................................................................................. - 28 -
14.5. COilllection ..."........................................................................................................................... - 28 -
14.6. Earthing Electrode Rods (from Test Terminal Box to Earthing Electrode Rods) .................. - 28 -
14.7. Installation Requirements .“…….“…….……
..……
..
“…………
..…
....“…….“…….“…….“………
..
….……
..
“………….
..“…….“…….“………
..
….…….
..
“……“……....
“………
……
..…
.....
…….“…….“…….“…….“……
…..
….……
..
“……….
••
… “…….“………
..
….“……
..
…………
..…….
..“…….“……….“……
..
….“…………
..…….
.. “…….……
..“…….“……
……
.. …
.....
……
…….
..“…….“……….
..
….“…“……….“……...
….“.“…….…“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“……
…..….…….
..“……“ ….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….……
..
“…….……
..“……….
..
… “…….“………
..“…… ,…….“…….“….“.“.- 28-
….…….
..
14.8. Appli
값
ica빼
비le international standards and code …….“….“.“………
b .. …… ..…….“……
.. ……
..……
..……
..…….
..“…….“…….
……
..………
..
“………
……
..……
..………
..……
..……
..………
..……….
.. “……….“………
..
…….……
..“……….“……
..
… ……
..……….
.. “…….“………….
..
…….“…………
..
……“……
……
..…….“……
.. ……
..…….“…
.. ..“……
……
..……
..…….
..“…….“…….“…….……
“..
…….…….
..“………“…….……
..“……
..
…………
..……
..…….“……
.. ……
..…….
..“…….“……….……….
..“……
…...긴.- 갱
..“…… 29 -
15. FACILITIES IN PYLON ….“

.. ..“….“...…••••…….“….“….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
••…
..…
..….“….“…
.. ….“…
.. ….“…
.. ….“….“….“….“…
.. …
..…
..…...“….“….“….“….“….“….….“…
..
“… …
••…
••…
..…
..…...“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….…...“…“….“….“….“….“….….“….“…
..
“… … ..….“….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….…
..“…
…..…
..…
..….“….“…
.. ….“… .... - 29-
.. …
15.1. Lighting System in Pylon........................................................................................................ - 29-

15.2. Socket Power Supply System ……’
.. ...……
……
..…….“……
.. ……
..……
••……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
..“…….“…….“…….“………
..
….……
..
“…………
..……
..……
••…….“……
.. ……
..……
..…….“……
.. ……
..…….
.. “…….……
••“……
••
…………
..……
..……
..……’
•• …
••
”……
...
……
……
••……
..…….“……
.. ……
..……
..……
..……
..…….“……
.. ……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
..“…….“……….“……
..
….“……….
…..“…….“……….“……
..
….“…………
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
.. “…….……
..“……
……‘ .. - 30 -
.. ““……
… i
15.3. Door open

퍼
1피ing
피 떠 a la
없l1n syst않e밍m ….“
.. ..“….“..“….“...…….“…
.. …
..…
..…….
..“…….…
..“…
……
..…
..…
..……
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..……
..…….
..“…….“……
…...“…
…..….“….“…
.. ….“….“….“….“….“……
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..……
..…
..…...“…….“….“….“….“….“…….……
..“…….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…...“….“….“…….“…….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…
..…….
.. “….“….“….…...
“…“….“….“….“….“….“…….….“….“….“…
••“… … ..…
..…
..…….“….“….“.-
.. 30-
16. CONSTRUCTION.“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….….“….“…
..“… … ..…
..…
••…...“….“….“….“….“….…
..
“……
..…
..….“….“…
.. ….“….“….“….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“….“….“….“…
.. …
..…
..….“…
.. ….“…
.. ….“…‘
.. ”….“…
…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. ….“…
.. …
••….“….“
•• ••••…••••
…….“….“…
•• … ..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..•••••
…’
••••
…...“….“….“…’”….“….“….“….…
..
“……
..…
..…
..…
..… .... - 31 -
..….“….“…
.. …
16. 1. Gene않ra떠1..……
……
..……
..……
..……
..…….“……
•• …….“……
.. …….
..“…….……
..“……
……
..……
..……
..…….
..“…….“……….
..
….“…….…“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….……
..
“…….……
..“………
..
… ……
..…….
..“….“.“…….“…….…….
..“……“…….……
..“…….
……
..“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….…….
..
“…….“……….“…….“…….“………
..
….……
..
“…………
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
.. “…….……
..“……
……
..…….“……
.. ……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
.. “…….……
..“……
..
…………
..……
..…….“……
.. ……
..…….
..“…….“………
..
….……...
“……“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….……
..
“…….…….
.. “……“…….“……...“…“……
……
..……..“…….“…….“……...“… - 있
..……. 31 -
16.2. Excavating and Bac야kfïlling …
.....“……
…
.....
……
……
..……“
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..……
..…….“…
.. …
..…
..….“…
.. …….“……
.. ….“…
.. …
••…
..….“…
.. ……
..…
..…...“….“….“….“….“….….“…
..
“… ….“….“…
.. …..…
..…
..…...“….“….“…….“….“…….…….“….“…
..“… …...“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….…
..“…
…..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…
..…
..… .... - 31 -
..…
16.3. Foundat디iωon8.“….“..“….“...….“...….“……
..….“….“…
.. ….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….“….…...
“…“….“….“….“….“….…...
“…“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….…
..
“…….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….…
..“……
..…
..…
..…
..….“….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…
..….“….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“….“….“….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….“….“….….“….“….“….“…
..“… …
..…
..…
••…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..….“….“….“….“….“.-
.. 31 -
16.4. Conduit and Electric Pipe ……
..…
..…
..….“……
.. ….“….“….“….“……
.. ….“….“…
.. … ••….“….“….“…
.. …….“…
.. ….“…
.. …
..…
..……
..……
..……
..….“….“….“….“…
.. …
..……
..…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“…….“….“…….“….…
..“…….“….“….“…
.. … ..….“….“….“…
.. …….“….“……
.. ……
..…….“….“…
.. ……..…...“….“….“….“….“….…
..
“………
..….“….“….“….“…
.. …...“….“….“…….“….….“….“…
..“… …..…….“…
.. …….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..….“……‘
.. ….“.-
..
“… 32-
16.5. Pu11 Boxes.“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“….“….“….“….“…….“…….“….“…….“….“…….“…….“………
..
.“…….…
..“…...
… ……….
..“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“….“.“….“….“…….“…….“…….……….“….…….“….“…….“…….“…….“….“……
..
.“….“…….“……
..
… ……
..……
..…….
..“…….“…….“…
..
….“……
…..……
..……
..……
..…….“….“…
.. ….“……
.. ……
..…….
.. “…….……
..“…….
..
……“…….“…….“…….“………
..
….…….
..
“……“…….“……….
..
….“…“……….“…….“…….…….“….“……
..
“….“…… ……
..…….
..“….“….“….“….“…….“….“…….“…….“….“…….“…….“……
..
.“………
...
“………
…..……
..……
..…….
..“…….“……
..“…… - 33 -
…...
16.6. Wire않S …
..••••
….“...
….“..“….“..“….“..“….“...
……
..…...“….“….“…….…
..
“……...“….“…….“….…...
“…“…….“…….….“….“……
..“… ….“….“….“….“……
.. … ..…
..….“…
.. ….“…
.. ……
..…….
..“….“….“….“….“…….“….“…….“…….“….“….“….“….“….“……….
..
….“……“….“….…
..
“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
••….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..……
..…
..…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…….“….“…
.. ……..…
..……
..…
..….“….“…
.. … ..…...“….“….“….“….“….….“…
..
“… …
..….“….“…
.. … ..……
..….“….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…….“….“…
.. ……..…
..… “… - 33 -
..…...“….“….“……...
16.7τ. Service Point …

..…
••…
..…
..…
..…
..…
••…
••….“….“….“….“…
.. ….“….“…
.. ……..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…
••….“……
•• …
..….“….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..……
..…
..……
..….“…
.. …
..…
..….“…….“……
.. ……..…
..….“…
.. …
..….“…
.. …
..….“….“….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“…….“….“…….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“…….“….“….…
..
“….…….“…
“..
…… …….“….“…
.. … ..….“….“…
.. ….“…
.. ….“……
.. …
..…
..…
..….“……
.. …
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..… “… - 33 -
..…...“….“….“….“….“….“…...
16.8. Fie바ld Test …

..…
..…
..…
..…
••…
..….“…
.. …
••….“…
•• …
..…...“….“….“….“….“….“….“….‘……
••
.“……
..…...“….“….“….“….“….…...
“…“….“….…….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….….“….“….“…
..“… … ..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..….“….“…
.. … ..….“…
.. ….“….“….“…
.. ….“….“….“….“….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..….“….“…
.. ….“….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….…
..“……
..…
..….“…
.. ….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..….“….“…
.. ….“….“….“…
.. … ..…..…
..… .... - 34-
..…
16.9. Paint ing.“……

..….“….“….“….“…
.. … ..…
..….“…
.. …“
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. ….“….“….“…
.. ….“….. …..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“….“….“….“…
.. ….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….….“….“….“….“….“…
..“… …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….…….“….“…
.. ….“….“…
.. …..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. ….“….“….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…...“….“….“….“….“….….“…
..
“… …
..….“….“…
.. ….“….“….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…
••…
..…
..…
..….“….“….“.-
•• 34 -
16.10α. Lighting PO
이les.“….“….“….“….“….“….“……
..… ..….“…
.. …
..…
..….“….“….“….“….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. …
..….“….“….“….“…
.. … ..…
..….“…
.. …
..…
..….“….“…
.. ….“….“…
.. ….“….“…
.. ….“….“….“…
.. ….“…
.. …..….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….…
..
“……
••…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“…
.. ….“….“…
.. … ..…
..…
..….“….“…
.. ….“….“…
.. …
..…
..….“….“…
.. …-“….
•• “….“….“….“….…...
“…“….“….“….“….“….“….“….…
..
“……
..…
..…
..…
..…
..… .... - 35 -
..…
16.1 1. Coα11t1'o이lEqu
띠ipment..“….“….“….“….“….“….“…….“…
.. ….“…
•• …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“….“…
.. ….“….“…
.. …
..…
••…
••….“….“…
.. …...“….“….“….“….“….….“….“….“….“…
..“… …
..…
..…
..…...“….“….“….“….“….“….“….“….…
..“……...“….“….“….“…-“….“….“….….“….“….“…
..“… … ..…
..…
..….“….“….“….“….“…
.. ……
..….“…
•• …
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..…
..….“….“….“….“…
.. ….“….“…
.. ….“….“….“….“….“…
.. …
..….“…
.. …
..…
..…
..…
••…
..…
..…
..….“.-
.. 35 -
16.12."As운-Bu
띠
ült" Drawings.“…….“……
…….
..“…….…….
..“……“…….…….
..“……“…….“…….“……….
..
….“…“…….“.“…….“…….“…….“………
..
….……
..
“……….“……
..
… ……
..……
..…
.....
…….“…….…….
••“……“……...“…“…….“…….……
..“……
……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
..“…….“…….“…….“………
..
….……
..
“………
…..……’
.. ……
..
”……
……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
..“…….“…….“………
..
….……
..
“………….“……
.. ……
..……...“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….“…….……
..
“…….…….“……
..“…… ……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….
.. “…….……
..“……
..
…………..... - 35 -
..…
16.13.Gua없1'ante않e ……...“…….……
..“…….
……
..“…….“…….“…….“……
…..
….…….“……
..
“…… ……
..…….
..“…….“…….“……….
••
….“……….“…….“…….“………
..
….…….
..
“……“…….“…….“…….“……
…..
….…….
..
“……“…….“…….……….
••“…….…“…….“…….“……….
..
….“………….“…….“……….
..
….“……….“…….“…….“…….“…….……
“..
…….……
..
“………
..
… ….“.“…….“……
.. …… ..…….“……
.. …….“……
.. ……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..……
..…….“……
.. ……
..……
..…….
..“…….“…….“………
..
….…….
..
“……“…….“………
..
….…….“……
“..
…… ……
..…….
..“…….“…….“……….
..
….“………….“…….“………
••
….…….
..
“……“…….…….“……
••“………….
..“…….“………
..
….……
..
“………
…..……
..……
..…….
..“…….“………
..“……..“.- 35 -
….…
••

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1
17. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .................................................................................... - 36-
17. 1. Method of Measurem하 ......................................................................................................... - 36-

17.2. Basis of Paymen t. .................................................................................................................... - 38 -

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS E!ectrical Worlts - Section 9.1
SECTION 9.1 - ELECTRIεAL 쩨'ORKS
1. GENERAL
(a) The Section shall consist of funùshing and installing all materials and equipment
necessary to complete in place power supply to lighting system of roadway and bridge ,
lightning protectioll system for bridge pylons, obsttuctiOl1 lights for b1'idge pylon and
bridge navigation system, light up of bridge pylons fo 1' aesthetic , facilities in pylon, and
the modification of existing electrical powe1' and destitution systems when so specifïed,
al1 in accordance with the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted , civil engineering wor1ιs
necessary for the work ofthe Sub-section: 2 shall be executed and paid for under this Part
9, Section 9.2 , Clause 2 .4.
(b) The location of lighting , dist1'ibution panels, and appurtenances shown in the drawings
and approximate and exact location will be established by the Engineer in the field.
(c) Th e electrical works for roadway lighting sha l1 be executed in accordance with the
Specifications.
(d) Payment under this Clause for lighting cables w i11 tenninatε at the distribution panel and
cOll11ected in the hand-hole ofthe each pole.
Abbreviation Table
Description
IEC Intemational Electro technical C01mnission MDP MamDislotDrniebsugtioipndPoanllcl 1J ;
KIS Korean hldustrial Standard SS Sub Stat

BS British Standard PSS Panel SS
DlN Deutshe Normen MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker
IS0 h 1temational O1'galùzation for DB Dist1'ibution Panel
Standardization.
뉴-_.
~
AS’fM American Society fo 1' Testing and Material ATS Automatic Transfe1' Switch
NFPA National Fire P1'otection Association DEG Diesel Engine Gene1'ator
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers
Association
2. SCOPE OF WORKS
The scope of work shal1 cover the supply , delivelY to site , e1'ection, test and conunissioning of
all material and equipment in connectioll with the Elect1'ical Installation to the extent described
and ShOW11 in the Drawings and includes but is 110t necessari1y limitεd to:
(a) Preparation and submissio11 of Shop Drawings

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL 씨'ORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1
(b
비) Subm
띠lis웹
S입ion 여
0 fd
야 et때
떠iled Ma
a 없te
히r때 supply Lμists
s
t염
(c) All work associated with the removal of section of existing systems and the incorporation
of the remainil1 g section in the pennal1el1 t works.
(d) Site measurement of ambie l1 t brightness of l1atural daylight at site each sectiol1 to assist
the Engineer il1 his review ofthe lighting details showl1 il1 the Drawings.
(e) All other electrical equipment and services needed to complete a usable and operable
facility in accordance with the peliinent electric codes al1d local regulation for Electrical
lnstallation.
(f) The Contractor shall take countermeasures against phenomenal of Kannan Vortex to the
bridge lighting poles. The Contractor shall prepare and submit the related data and its
remedy to the Engineer, ifrequired.
(g) Power capacity listed in the Drawings al1d Specifications, or the Drawings or the
Specifications is for rεference only. The Contractor shall pro띠 de the necessary capacity
based on the Contractor ’ s design and submit the related data to the Engineer for approval.
(h) The Contractor shall owe the works of all equipment and devicεs for power factor
cOlTection to feed power to motors , necessaη equipment or facilities to compensate
power factor at the incoming point from the Power Company for the targeted power
factor. Alld the Contractor shall owe the related all costs. The Contractor shall negotiate
with the Power Company and decide the targeted power factor between both parties.
3. QUALITY ASSURANCE
For the actual fabrication , installation , and testing of the work described in the Clause , the
Contractor shall use only thoroughly trained and experienced personnel who are completely
fami1iar with the requirements for the work and with the installation recommendations of the
manufacturers of the spεcified items. 1n acceptance or r영 ection of the installed electrical system,
no allowance will be made fo 1' lack of skill on the part of installe1's.
Installers shall hold the releval1t veiled certificates complyil1g with the regulations of all
concemεd Vietnamese Company and Vietl1 am Power Authority.
All work shall comply with the Drawi l1 gs al1d the Specificatiol1, il1 additio l1 to complying with
the requi 1'ements oflocal Power Company , exploitation ul1its and local govemment authority.
4. DRA WINGS AND DOCUMENTS
(a) The Contractor shall refer to all releval1t drawil1gs to ascertain for himself the location
and routes of all other utility services so as to maintain adequate clearance between
electrical and other services.
Contractor shall therefore require to all under ground 0 1' under bridge cables and
conduiting 0 1' ducting , the exact run of all conduits alld trunkillg , the location of mallholes ,
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 9 9.1-5 -of41

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL 끼10RKS Electrical Works - Sectioll 9.1
draw-in and junction boxes, the l1umber and size of wires in each conduit or tnllùdng , the
final cOl1l1ection alTangements at distribution boards , the detail of ducts and the method of
fixing Main and Sub-main Distribution Boards, for the approval of the Engineer before
c01llinencing any portion ofthe work.
All such worldng drawings shall be submitted in duplicate and within the periods
stipulated below:
• Details of duct, conduit and method of fixing Main and Sub-main Distribution
Boards and cable entry into any places.
• Main working drawings shall be submitted within two months of handing over
the site ofthe Contractor.
.. A l1 other working drawings shall be submitted within a period of one month f1"Om
the date of approval of the Main and Sub- main Distribution Boards by the
Engineer.
" Should however the Contractor be obliged to install electrical conduits prior to
this period then he shall submit the relevant worldng drawings at least four weeks
prior to the proposed date for commencement of the worlc.
The Contractor shall submit a program indicating the dates on which concreting in
different sections will talce place , together with the submission of the working drawings.
(b) On completion of testing , the Contractor shall malce "as built" drawings of plans and
circuit diagrams (control circuit diagrams , and c01mected circuit diagrams) , which clearly
indicate any modifications which have beenmade to the original design.
(c) Upon completion of the work, and as a condition of its acceptance , the Contractor shall
supply to the Engineer three (3) copies of a Manual for the maintenance and operation of
all electrical installations and a parts list sufficient for the ordering ofparts.
5. STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
(a) The worlc covered by this Contract shall be calTied out in accordance with the regulations
issued by the local Electricity Authority and with the applicable standards and codes of
the following:
• QCVN 07:2010/BXD: Building code - Urban Engineering Infrastructure;

• QCVN 20:2010/BGTVT: National technical regulation 011 aids to navigation;
" TCVN 7447-5-51:2010: Instal1ation system of low voltage - Part 5-51 Selection
and installation of electric facilities - General rules;
" TCVN 7447-5-52:2010: Installation system of low voltage - Power 1ine
installation system;
• TCVN 259:2001 Design standards for artificial lighting for urban roads , streets
and squares;

• TCVN 333:2005 Desigl1 standards of artificial outdoor lighting for public

buildings and urban infrastructure;
• TCVN 5729:2007 Freeway I expressway standards for design;
• 11 TCN 18-19-20-21 :2006 Electrical installation regulatiol1s in Viet Nam;
• 22 TCN 269:2000 Regulations on Navigation signals equipped for domestic

waterways in Viet Nam;
• IALA Intemational Assocíation of Lighthouse Authorities;
• 22 TCN-208-92 Regulations on Navigation Signals Equipped for Domestic

Waterways ín Vietnam;
• TCVN 46:2007 Protection of Structures Against Li ghtníng - Guíde for design,

inspection and maintenance;
• CEGS-16670 Lighting Protection System, Department of Army (U.S.A);
• NF C17-102 Li ghtning protection system;
• lEC 62305-1 ,2,3 Intemational Standard for protection against lightning;
• TCXDVN 319:2004 Earthíng system installation for industry construction;
• TCVN 4756: 1989 Specification on grounding for electrical equipment;
• Intemational Civil Aviation OrganizationlCAO;
• GCAA: Guidance on Lighting and Marking Obstacles;

The Contractor is deemed to have satisfied himself that his selected materials and methods
of installation are in accordance with all of the Regulations issued by the local Electricity
Authority.
Regulations and requirements pertaining to navigation sigl1als for vessels shall be il1
accordance with intematio l1al rules in accordance with the “ 22 TCN 269 - 2000" and
“ IALA" requirements and recommendations.
Regulations and requirements for lightning rods and associated grounding systems , using
the rolling sphere method fo 1' lightning protection, shall be in accordance with all of the
Regulations issued by the local Electricity Authority and 1'eference:
• TCXDVN 46:2007;
• IEC 62305-1; and
• NFC 17-102.
(b) Before submitting his Bid , thε Contractor must carefully examine at his own expense all
of the Regulatio l1 s issued by the local El ectricity Authority and selected materials and
method of installation shall be in accordance with these Regulations.
끼-t，.‘ r、:--1，，1=‘ ~hnll :.‘ nl “--1 0 ;" h:o ,,,‘:“..4 .. ，、 n .Çn ‘. n.、" 。μn_πδ 【 r.._..-.....、 n ，，1 :ι': ........ +.: ..... “ . . . . ~ . . . "..,. ...... +~ ..... ""'+ ...1 ....... ‘”“""' .... ‘<
ε 파5응증;훌훌V=~4ii2;U‘"""""‘~“"""""“L:Ji_W<‘~~~‘~‘f돗‘~융--‘~~ι"...，...훌~흥AJd&nn..:;u::l‘I융
to ensure conformance with local regulations.

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WO없‘s Elecírical Works - Section 9.1
6. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) The requirεments for quality control of l11aterials and workmanship that are obligatory for
the satisfactory completion by a Contractor of the electrical works and other defined work
items requi1'ed fo 1' arterial 01' 1'oadways , shall be defined in acco1'dance with the plans and
specifications he1'ein desc1'ibed.
(b) Al1 work he1'eunde1' shall cOl11ply with the latest Bu i1ding codes , Electrical codes , and
other 1'elative codes , in case of the absence of any code in the 10cal1 y.
A11 work shal1 be done unde 1' the administrative supervisiol1 of the Engineer.
Any changes made thereofshall be with the approval in writing ofthe Engineer.
(c) The Requirements shal1 be as fo l1ows:
A l1 Electrica1 instal1 atioll shal1 be done in accordance with the app1icable ordinances ,
rules and regulatiolls of the local Power Company and with requirel11ents from Provincia1
Authority. The E1ectrica1 work shal1 be under the supervision of a licensed E1ect1'ical
Engineer.
Cables and wires conductors shall be 2.5 rmn2 minimum and st1'anded types used. All
cable shall be confonning applied specification to ASTM B-232 and TCVN 5935. 01'
equivalent.
Voltage Drop shall be Tota15 % maximum,
• Between of the supp1y point / SS panel and MDP pane1 01' DB pane1 shall be less
than 2 % any type feeder;
• Between DB pane1 and end of lighting ci1'cuit shall be 1ess than 3 % maximum
any type cab1es;
Necessary wiring devices such as pul1 boxes , junction boxes, and utility boxes of co n-ect
dimensions shall bε provided.
The Contracto1' shall secu1'e a 10t for Kiosk-type Substation and E1ectric House , 01'
specified in the D1'awings. The 10t shall be included a pa1'king space fo 1' a maintenance
truck (within width 1. 7m x 1ength 4.7m). The Cont1'actor shall decide the exact 1ocation
afte1' negotiation with Powe1' Company and the Civi1 Contracto1'. The exact 1ocation of the
10t construction, construction methods , const1'uction schedu1e and construction cost shall
be p1'epared and submit to the Engineer fo 1' approval.
7. 22KV/ 35KV MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER LINE AND SUBSTATIONS
An elect1'ica1 powe1' supp1y system to suite the project scope and substation system 1'equi1'ements
has been p1anned using branch comlections from the 22 kV/35kV medium voltage power
t1'ansmission lines.
Following intel1lationa1 standards are to be 1'efen-ed (Note: For items with *, 1'efe1' to the list in
Part 1 Genera1 It ems fo 1' the detai1);

Dl VISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1
Power cable:
BS 6622 :2008 Electric cables. Armoured cables with thermosetting
insulation for rated voltages from 3.8/6.6 kV to 19/33 kV.
Requirements and test methods
BS 7870-4.20:1999 LV and MV p이ymeric insulated cables for use by
distribution and generation utilities. Specification for
distribution cables with extruded insulation for rated
voltages of 11 kV and 33 kV. Three-core 11 kV cables
lEC 60228 Ed.3.02004 Conductors ofinsulated cables ,
lE C 60287 series* Electric cables
IEC 60364 series * Electrical installations ofbuildings
Control cables:
lEC 60708 Ed.l.0:2005 Polyethylene insulated copper conductor telecommunication
distribution cable ,
lEC 60502 series * Power cables with extruded insulatiol1 and their accessolÌ es for
rated voltages from 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36
kV)
Instrument cable;
BS 5308 series * Instrumentation cables.
The System shall also include the matεrials supply, il1stallation , and commissionil1g by the
Contractor to the performance Specification.
Payment for the Section of the W orks will be by Lump Sum incorporating the following items
of equipment and work:
7.1 General
(a) A substation εlectrical system, as shown in the Drawings , shall consist of 22 kV/ 35 KV
medium voltage switch gear , transformer, medium overhead cables , groundi l1g system,
isolators , protection devices , service metellng panel and tennination materials.
(b) Primary Medium Voltage - 22KV/ 35 KV Power Line System
A 22KV/ 35 KV cable shal1 be c Olmected to a tenninallocated at 8 m -12 m high on the

concrete pole ofthe 22 kV/ 35 KV distlibution system lines to the project area whence it
will be terminated at the substation.
The substation shall contain a 22KV/ 35KV basεd metal clad main ring unit,
discollnection switches , splicing and isolator materials. The substation shall be a Kiosk
type.
All materials shall be shown in the Drawing or equivalent or both as approved by the
Engineer.

DIVISION 9 - ELECTR1 CAL WORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1
7.2 Transformer
An oi1-cooled transfoIDler will be installed in the substation and transformer sha11 be shown in
the Drawings or equiva1ent as approved by the Engineer. The Cont1'actor sha11 submit the data
of se1ection of transforme1' capacity to the Engineer fo 1' approval. Detailed technica1 data of
t1'ansformer to be supplied sha11 be submitted by the Contractor/Manufacturer.
(a) The works of installation, commissioning and testing are to be detai1ed for Engineer’ s
approva1 before the work implementation,
(b) The insta11ation of transformers shown in the Drawings sha11 be on incoming pole , 01' in the
housing. Bus c01111ection sha11 be applied between transformer and low voltage switch gear
except fo 1' smaller capacity of 50 kva. The shown transforme1' capacity in the Document is
1'efe 1'ence only. The Cont1'actor sha11 p1'ovide the necessarγ capacitu based on his design
including 10 % spa1'e capacity as minimum.
(c) Standards and Regulation to be applied fo 1' a11 devices , materials and fabrication sha11
conform to the latest applicable IEC Standards showl1 below. Fo1' a standard with *, refer to
the 1ist shown Ì11 Part 1 General Items for the details.
IEC 62271-100 High-vo1tage s맨vitchgear and controlgear - Part 100: Altemating

Ed.2.0:2008 cunent circuit-breakers
IEC 60044 series * Instrument transfonners
IEC 60265-1 High-voltage switches - Part 1: Switches for rated voltages
Ed.3.0:1998 * above 1 kV and less than 52 kV
IEC 60282 series * High-voltage fuses

IEC 62271-200 Ed. High-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Part 200: A.C. metal-
1.0:2003 enclosed switchgear and controlgear for rated voltages above 1
kV and up to and including 52 kV
IEC 62271-105 Ed. High-voltage switchgear and contro1gear - Part 105: Alternating
1.0:2002 current switch-fuse combinations
lEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)

Ed.2.1 :2001 *
IEC 60470 High-vo1tage a1temating current contactors and contactor-based
Ed.2.0:2000 motor-starters
(d) the commissioning sha11 be as fo11ows , but not 1imited to ,
1) system commissioning to ensure the system to work completely,
2) transformer commissioning to ensure the transformer to protect devices , auxilia1'Y

devices , a1anna and t1'ips ,
3) distribution switc
야hgear commi업ss잉i띠
oning to ensure the switchgearζ‘;’ curre
며11t transfo
야rme
밍rs
instru
따
lment transfonners , metering and devices to wo1'k comp1ete1y.

(e) Commercial terms for transfonner
The Contractor/Supplìer shall subrnit proof of IS0 9001 certificate fo 1' industrial facility.
The suppliεr shall gua1'anteε all components of transfonner with validity of a period of 5
years from the date ofhandover to the Employer.
7.3 Secondary Low Voltage 380/ 220 volts Distribution System
(a) Secondary Voltage system, AC 380/220 volts , 3-phase , 4 wi1'es system and 50 Hz, shall
feed the powe 1' to the MDP of the distribution system, as detaiI s distribution system
shown in the Drawings. The distribution system at the secondary transfonner switching
gea1' shall be point of metering measure interface with the PowεrCompany.
(h) The cabling of distribution power system from the secondary low voltage switching gea1'
to the bridge facilities equipment will be installed in underground, under the pedestrian of
bridge , 01' shown in the Drawings.
(c) All distribution powe1' system will be shown in the D1'awings unless otherwise of the
equivalent method as approved by the Engineer.
8. LIGHTING lJNITS
8.1 General
Lighting units as shown in the Drawings shall consist of lighting lantem, lamps , electrical
control ballast(s) , and 1110unting accessorìes.
The Contractor shall subrnit for approval , detailed light distribution diagrams for each type
of lantem he proposes to install. Further more, calculations sheets and lighting calculation
software compatible to lantems proposed , shall be submitted showing the horizontal
luminance on road surface within the luminance distribution in candela per squa1'e-meter
(c d/m2) for every 2m roadway di 1'ection and every 1.5 m across the road.
8.2 Type of Li ghting Fixture
The type of lighting fixtu 1'e fo 1' roadway lighting shall be shown in the Drawings as typical
two double optical compa1'tmεnts
Table 8.1 Type of Li ghting Fixture
Type of Lighting
Fixtu1'e
No. of Container
of Lí ghting NO.of짧1
Comp
Lantem
L1 1 4 4
T 3 3
A
L
‘--…----------------_--
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 9 9.I-ll-of41

DIVISION 9 - ELECl’RICAL WOR.KS Electrical Works - SectJi on 9.1
Table 8.2 Applied Lighting Pole
Type of
Purpose of
Lighting Applied Lighting Pole
Lighting
Fixture
L1 1 Road Lighting Mounted on 12m Pole
•---
T pylon Li ghting Mou11ted 011 3m Pole
Leg ofPylon
A Mounted on 1.5m Pole
Lighting
Leg ofPylon
B Mounted on 1.5m Pole
Lighting
For underpass
L Attach to girder
Road Area
The housing oflighting lantem for lamps from 150 watts HPS + 150 watt HPS for double
optical compartment shaU be made of anodized extruded aluminul11, unique and εach
optical compartl11ent shall bε a protεctor made of hardened glass sealed onto a r‘ efractor
l11ade of deep drawn , polished and anodized a1uminum. The control gear shall be
removab1e. The lante111 shall be installed directly on a pole top.
8.3 Minimum Required Characteristics of Lantern:
Minimum required characteristics of 1ante111 shall be the following;
1) Optical compartment tightness level: IP 66 (/1)

2) Control gear tightness leve1: IP 43 (/1)
3) Aerodynamic resistance: 0,168m2
4) Impact resistance (Glass): IK08 (/2)
5) E1ectrical hlsulation Class: 1 of II (1 1)
6) Weight : 25Kg
7) Mounting method : twin mounting
Notes: (/1) EN 60598-1 :2004 Luminaries , Genera1 Requirements and Tests
(/2) EN50102: 1999 Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures for

Electrica1 Equipment ageist Extemal Mechanica1 Impacts (IK Code)
The out1ine dimensions of lighting lantern shall be shown in the drawings.
8.4 Submission Data of Laníern
The Contractor shall submit the all photometric data file of lantem to be required as shown in
below for approval by the Engineer.
The calculation factors for 1uminance calculation 011 the roadway shall be the following.
1) Road Condition Factor: R2

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Electrlcal Works - Section 9.1
2) Average Luminance: >2cd/m2 at 6pm to Oam (full power) as high vehi c1 e volume Average
Luminance: > 1 cd/m2 at Oam to 6am next day( power saving) as low vεhicle volume.
3) Required minimum ratio-l: The ratio between the numerical values of minimum luminance
and average luminance on the pavement with transportation activities of roads and street
shall not be smaller than 0 .4.
4) Required minimum ratio-2: The ratio between the numerical values ofminimum luminance
and average luminance on separators in parallel with road axes with transportation
activities shall not be smaller than 0.7.
5) Luminance UO : 40%
6) Maintenance Factor M: 0.8
7) Lighting calculaton Software compatible to proposed lantems for engineer to re- check
and getting an approval.
9. ELECTRIC POWER DISTRIBUTION
9.1 General
The aim of this document is to give a detail description of low voltage switch boards and sub-
distribution and components to be used for Vam Cong Bridge Construction Project.
The Distribution panels (MDP) shall be included as feeders of the power source fed each to the
Lighting panel (DB) , circuits of the roadway lighting, street lighting. The panels shall be as
shown in the Drawings or equivalent as approved by the Engineer.
The panels shall be ventilated and shall be substantial , free-standing structures mounted on a
concrete foundation with a minimum of 40 cm above ground leve l.
Thε roof of Panel house shall be double pitched, the apεx being central to the panel.
The panel and door shall be made from fully- finished steel sheet not less than 3.2 millimeters in
thicklless with the necessary steel frames. The welding for all outside joints shall be smooth
finished.
The panel shall have a bottom desigll that wil1 pennit tack welding to chalmels that shal1 be set
011 the raised concrete foundation as shown in the Drawillgs.
The panel shall be completely assembled and wired at the factory. Main and smal1 wiring shall
be easily accessible for maintenance and inspection , and small wiring shall be effectively
isolated fr0111 the main wìring. The wiring diagram, engraved or etched on an aluminum plate ,
shall be pennanently fixed to the Ìlmer door of the pane l. Each panel shall have one or more
nameplates for identificatiol1. Nameplates shall be made of laminatεd plastic with white
characters to show through a black top Iayer when cut or engraved. Panel housing shall be fitted
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS - DIVISION 9 9.1-13-of41

、 i
DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORI(S Electrical Wor!{s - Section 9.1
9.2 Standards
The Distribution panel (MDP) and lighting panels (DB) shall be as shown in the Drawings. The
components shall be designed for 3-phase , 50 Hertz operation volts at AC 380/220 volts.
The low voltage switchboa1'ψdist1'ibution boa1'd and sub-dist1'ibution boa1'd shall be facto 1'y-built
asselllhlies and shall cOlllply with thε following reconullendations and regulations. (For a
stalldard with *, refe1' to the list shown in Palt 1 General It ellls for the deta i1 s.);
IEC 60947-1 Ed. Low-voltage switchgear alld cont1'olgea1' - Part 1: Gene1'al rules
5.0:2007
IEC 60364-4-41 Ed. Low-voltage electrical installations - Pa1't 4-41: P1'otection fo 1'
5.0:2005 safety - P1'otection against εlectric shock
IEC 60439 series * Low-voltage switchgear and cont1'olgea1' asselllblies
IEC 60947-1 Low-voltage switchgear and controlgea1' - Pa 1't 1: General rules
Ed.5.0:2007
IEC 60947-2 Low-voltage switchgea1' and controlgear - Pa1't 2: Ci1'cuit-breake1's
Ed .4 .0:2006
IEC 60947-3 Low-voltage switchgea1' and cont1'olgear - Part 3: 8witches ,
Ed.2.2:2005 disc01U1ectors , swÌìch-disc OiU1ectOïs and fuse-con값nation units
IEC 60947-4 series * Low-voltage switchgea1' and cont1'olgea1' - Part 4: Contacto1's and
llloto1'-starte1's
IEC 60947-5 se1'ies * Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear - Pa1't 5: Cont1'ol circuit
devices and switching elelllents
The low voltage switch boa1'd/distribution and sub-distribution boards and components shall be
lllallufactured, illstalled, tested alld commissioned in accordance with a quality assurance and
quality control system in conformity with 180 900 1.
The manufactu1'e1', and installation, testing, and commissioning team (s) shall be
ce1'tifies by official llldependent org없uzation fo 1' ISO 9001 ce1'tificate. The low voltage
switchboa1'd shaH be mamtractured by a solita1'Y manuracturer na dit is imperative 션lat
alllow switchboard and control gear shall be a product or a solitary manuracturer as
well.
9.3 Circuit Breakers
The ci1'cuit breakers shall be molded case , ai1' break type , rated fo 1' 415volt A. C service. The
ci1'cuit breakers shall have 3-poles unless otherwise 1l0ted. Each phase shall be provided with
indepelldent circuit breakers in order to prevent total fàilure in the event that a single phase fails.
The circuit b1'eake1's shall provided inve1'se time trippillg fo 1' over1oads and illstalltaneous action
and over1oad ten times of the nO l1nal rating.
The ci1'cuit breakers shall be a1'c-resisting cOlltact type and be p1'ovided with trip-free operating
halldles al1d arc quenchers.

The ci 1'cuit breakers interrupting capacity shall be 15 ,000 ampe1'es based on , except that
breakers la1'ge than 100 amperes shall have 25 ,000 ampe1'es intelTupting capacity, 0 1' as
The breakers for the mai l1 power feeders shall be provided with auxiliary contact that wil1 close
whel1 the breakers a1'e closed al1d 380 volts ShUl1t trip coi l. They shall be wired to p1'evel1t eithe1'
b1'eake1' beil1g c! osed while the othe1' is closed.
(1) The stal1 da1'ds and 1'egulations to be applied for are as bεlow;
All devices , materials and fabrication shall confonn to the latest applicable IEC standards or
equivalel1 t , includil1 g the followings. (For a stal1dard with *, refer to the list shown in Part 1
Ge l1eral Items fo 1' the details.);
IEC 60076-1 Power t1'ansformers - Part 1: Ge l1eral

Ed.2.1 :2000
IEC 60439 series * Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies
IEC 61095 Electromechanical contacto1's fo 1' household and sirnilar purposes

Ed.2.0:2008
IEC 60044 series * Jnstrument transforme1's
IEC 60269 series * Low-voltage fuses
IEC 60947-4-1 Ed. Low-voltage switchgear al1d controlgear - Part 4-1: Contactors
2.1 :2002 and moto1'-starters - E1ect1'omechanical contactors and motor-
starte1's
IEC 60529 Degrees ofprotection p1'ovided by enclosures (IP Code)
Ed.2.1 :2001
IEC 60529 Ed.2.1 b Corrigendum 1 - Degrees of protection provided by enclosu1'es (IP
Cor.l :2003 Code)
IEC 60529 Ed.2.1 b Corrigendum 2 - Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP
Co r. 2:2003 Code)
(2) Structu1'e
The moto1' cont1' ol centers and distributîon main panels shall cO l1form to IEC stal1da1'ds al1d
be type tested, complete with certification. Minimum enc! osure wall thickness shall be 2 mm.
the degree of p1'otection for enc! osures shall be IP31 , confonning to IEC.
For reducî l1g installation space , double-ended type moto 1' control centers are acceptable.
Each compmiment shall have a hinged dooron its front side , and shall be designed to be
replaceable without affecting other compartments (feeders) which are in ope1'ation.
For safety of pers Olmel , it is essential that , should an arc develop in any one compartment, it

Horizontal and vertical bus bars , cOlillections and their insulated supports shal1 be
mechanical1 y strong , and withstand all stresses which may be imposed upon them due to
fixing , vibration, and fluctuation in temperature, short circuit or other causes.
The prÌmary power clip shall be cOlU1ected to the vertical bus bar.
Extemal power cables shall be cOlU1ected to the tenninal block on each uni t.
Control cables shal1 be connected to the control circuit termÌnals or connectors on each uni t.
A copper grounding bus bar and neutral bus bar shal1 be provided at the bottom of each
enclosure.
Grounding connection tenninals and neutral cOllnection tenninals shall be provided fo 1'
c01U1ecting the lead wi1'es f1'o m each system.
Othe1' detailed const1'uctioll requi1'ements sha l1 refe1' to IEC standards.
(3) Breaker Units
the capacity 0 1' 1'ating of molded case circuit breakers (MCCB) is fo 1' 1'eference. The Contractor
shal1 select and p1'opose the necessaη capacity to the Enginee1' based on own design.
Molded case ci1'cuit breake1's shal1 have the following rating and features;
1. Type; incoming: four (4) poles , single throw, outgoing: th1'ee (3) poles , single throw
2. Rated voltage; 600 V
3. Frequency; 50 Hz
4. Rupturing cUlTent; 30 kv
5. Rated current; as shown in the specification and drawings
Magnetic contactors shal1 have the following rating and features;
1 Type; three (3) poles, single throw
2 Rated voltage; 600 V
3 Frequency; 50 Hz
4 Mechanicallife time; 1l1ore than 5 million operation
5 Electricallifè time; more than 500 thousand operation
6 Rated current; as shown in the specification and drawings

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORI(S Electrical Works - Section 9.1
Thennal relays shall have the following rating and features:
Type; according starting time , nonnal case: 2E type , long time case lE type with
saturatíon reactor
2 Rated voltage; 600 V
3 Frequency; 50 Hz
4 Rated cU1Tent; as shown in the specification and drawings
Circuit breakers shall be molded case type. Combination with fuse type is not acceptable.
Incoming and outgoing breakers shall have ample continuous current 1'ating and shall be of
fixed type with trip capability in any position.
Fo1' ope1'ation and monitoring, the following auxiliary contacts shall be p1'ovided on each device
as a ml11unum.
Molded case circuit breaker; 1C foe alann , 1C fo 1' ope1'ation ,
Magnetic contactor; 2 NO & 2 NC
Thennal relay; 1 NO & 2 NC
Auxiliary relay; 3 NO & 3 NC
All auxiliary contacts , cont1'ol and alarm circuit requiring cOllilection to extemal circuits shall be
brought to suitable tenninal blocks ma1'ked with circuit identification in acco1'dance with the
Contracto1'’ s wiring diagram as approved by the Engineer. Thennal blocks shall be located in a
cOlmnon dust proof housing.
(4) Installation, Tεsting and C01mnissioning
Installation of he medial and/or low circuit breaker shall be calTied out according to the 1'elevant
drawings and manufactu1'er ’ s recommendation in confonnity with IEE 1'egulations and
acceptable IEC standa1'ds. The Contracto1' shal1 p1'ovide and submit testing and commissioning
plan to the Engineer fo 1' his approval. The test and commissioning shall be plalmed based on the
1'elated standards.
(5) COlmnercial Term
lt is imperatìve for the Supplier to submit proof of IS0 9001 celiified industrial facto 1'ies. The
manufacturer shall guarantee circuit b1'eaker integrity and perfonnance for the period of 5 years
f1'0111 the datε of handover to the Employer.
9.4 Knife Switch
Knife-switches shall have 4-blades and 200 amperes capacity based on IEC60947-3 , 0 1' as
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS - DIVISION 9 9. 1 - 17 - of 41

;ι
’
mVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Electrical Works - Sectiol1 9.1
9.5 Control Equipment
Multiple lighting circuits shall be controlled by a combination oftime switch and remote control
relays which shall be installed in the distribution panel (MDP).
9.6 Timer Switch
Timer switch unit shall have two cont1'ol elements , One of switch shall be fo 1' "on" cont1'ol at
evening and "off' at early moming, and the othe1' which shall be for reduced current cont1'ol at
midnight for saving ene1'gy, al1 as shown in the Drawings.
Both "on" and "off' time setting shall be available fo 1' any of the 24 hours , and the minill1ull1
setting increll1el1t shall be one minute.
Timer switches shall be ope1'atεd on single phase, 220 volts , 50 Hz. Ti ll1e1' switches installed ill
the distributioll pallel (MDP) shall have an eme1'gellcy d1'ivil1g device for 48 hou1's when the
incoming powe1' source fails.
MDP panels shall be fitted with a ll1al1ual switch-ove1' ci1'cuit to by-pass the ti ll1ing switch.
9.7 Remote Control Device
Rcmote control relays shall havc l:ontaιls rdaleù lu swilch the specified IEC 61850-6 , 01"
equìvalent international standards , al1d 5ha11 be l1Ùrmally opened unless otherwise specifiεd.
Relays 왜
s ha
때 11 be the mecha
뻐nica
떠1 alma
따turκe typ
야 e with the nU ll1ber of poles 앵
s pe
양 띠i펴
c fie
떠 d in the
D1'awing
양s.
The mechanical armature type shall consist of an opening co i1 (250 volts) , a lall1inated co1'e, a
laminated armatu1'e, and contact terrnillals , the contacts shall be silve1' alloy.
9.8 Control Device for IHuminations
(1) General
A강ditional control devices f0 1" illulninations cOlnprise an auto-controller and photo sensor. The
fo 1'll1er is to be attached to the distribution panel (MDP) and the latte1' is to be insta11ed at the
roadway and street.
The auto ll1atic cont1'oller shall be a panel mounted type provided with a built-ill time1' switches
(based on IEC62052-21 and IEC62054-21 , or approved by the Engilleer) fo 1' automatic or
ll1anual contro l. Power source requirell1ent shall be AC single phase 220 V + 10 % 50 Hz and 40
V A at maximum.
Setting of ti ll1er fo 1' basic lighting sha11 be 100 % tum on between 06:00 hou1's and 24:00 hou1's
and 50 % tUl11 on between 24:00 hou1's alld 06:00 hours.
The time1' switch shall have an ell1ergency driving device for 48 hours 01' mo 1'e when the
incoming power source fails.

The photo sensor shall consist of a light receiving window and cadmium sulfide detecting
device and relay unit.
(2) lnstallation, Testing and Commissioning
Installation of MDP , DB and sub-distribution board shall be carried out according to the
relevant drawings and manufacturer’ s recommendation in conf01mity with IEE regulations and
applicable IEC standards. The Contractor shall provide and submit testing and comnùssioning
plan to the Engineer for his approval. The test and commissioning shall be pla11l1ed based on the
related standards.
(3) Commercial Term
It is impεrative for the Supplier to submit proof of IS0 9001 certified industrial factories. The
manufacturer shall guarantee all components of MDP , DB and sub-distribution board with
validity of a period of 5 years from the date of handover to the Employer.
10. STREET LIGHTING POLES
(a) 12 meter high steel round type lighting poles shall be hot dip galvanized in accordance
with the details shown in the Drawings, as outlined herein and in accordance with the
requirements ofClause 8 ofthese Specifications.
All materials shall be in natural color and shall not be painted or coated with any other
materia1.
All pole items shall be hot dip galvanized steel and all hardware shall be galvanized stee l.
Scratches , marks , dents 0 1' othe1' damages to poles and fittings w i1l be cause for rejection.
Any marks or stains resulting from wrapping materials shall be removed.
All poles and arms shall be individually spiral wrapped and, in additiol1, shall be packed
for shipping in groups with suitable fonTI fitting wood damage between all poles and
completely around each group at a minimum of 4 locations , and held with suitable metal
strappmg.
Arms shall be wrapped , packed, and shipped to the job site with a minimum of reloading
between points of origin and destination. Packing not in conformance with this provision
shall be cause for rejection of poles or arms or both.
All loading and unloading of poles and arms shall be under the supervision of the
manufacturer or the Contractor 0 1' both.
Allmiscellaneous pole line hardware required to complete the project should be standard
material manufactured for pole line construction. All metal parts shall be hot-dip
galvanizεd.
All poles supplied shall be of the anchor base type , and shall have a cast steel anchor base
fitted over the shaft and secured with two circumferential welds.

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORI(S ElectricaR Works ~ Section 9.1
The hand hole and cover place for the tenninal cOlU1ection sha11 be 1.0 meter above
ground level.
For the Roadway and Ar terial Street, each lighting pole sha11 be fitted with a standard
identification plate.
(b) Foundations
Concrete for foundations for lighting poles and pedestals of cabinets sha11 be of c1 ass E-3
or as shown in the Drawings. The Contractor sha11 submit for the Engineer’s approval ,
construction drawings of the footings and calculations showing that the footings and the
anchor bolts are sufficiellt for their intended application under any conditions of loading.
All details of conc1'ete and reinforcement fo 1' foundations shall confonn to the applicable
requi1'ements in Division 8 Section 8 .5 “ Conc1'ete Structures" and Section 8.6
“ Reinfo1'cing Ba없1"’
11. CABLE, GROUNDING, SPLl CES AND CONDUIT
11.1 Wi1'ing fo 1' Lighting
(a) Main cables to be illstalled in the ground unde1' roadway and arte1'ial streets by pulling
shal1 be ofthe type and size shown În the D1'awings 0 1' given in the Specification.
Cables shall be pu11ed into the pole directly from unde1' ground or from the bridge parapet
through conduit prepared in the foundation ofthe pole, and shall be tenninated at a ci1'cuit
breaker installed in the pole.
For this purpose all polεs shall in c1 ude an approved molded case 2-pole circuit breaker
1'ated at 15 amperes , 250 volts , installed in the base of each pole and accessible through
the handhold of the pole.
The ci1'cuit breaker shall protect both the pole cables and elect1'ical control ballast.
Cables installed from the circuit breaker in the pole shall have two conductors of 2.5
mm2 as prescribed in "Cable and Wire" herein. Cables 8ha11 be ade낀uately attached to the
lantem so that lantem terminals shall be free from canying their weights.
Roadway and st1'eet lighting cables shall be used fou 1' (4) cores th1'ough to the last pole.
(b) Cable and Wi1'e
All cables shall be suitable for operatiol1 at the specified voltage in open, duct 0 1' conduit ,
under the cOl1l1ection of the maximum conductor ope1'ating tempe1'ature which at rated
current shall be less than 70 o C.
Cable colors shall comply with color code standards in Viet Nam.
Cables sha11 be delivered to the Site on substantial 11011 returnable wooden drums , each
bearing a securely fixed label stating gross weight , serial number, and length of cable and
other description. 。

DIVISION 9 - ELECT Rl CAL WORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1
Covers shall be provided around the periphεry of the drum in order to protect the cable in
transit and the inner cable end shall be adequately protected by a metal guard or other
approved means.
Both ends of the cable shall be sealed by a suitable mεthod to prevent the entrance of
mOlsture.
All cables inside of the lighting p이e shall have two conductors per lantem. Cables shall
be 600v /1 Kv grade "Polyvinyl Chloride In sulated and Sheathed Cable" (X-LPE /PVC
type) , or shall be of the type approved by the Engineer.
All cables for the roadway and street lighting system to be installed underground shall be
PVC insulated, Galvanized Flat Steel wire 1.6 mm armoring , and PVC sheeting type , or
equivalent approved by the Engineer.
Conductor shall have a minimum cross-sectional area of 10 mm2 for use in underground
installations.
All cables to be used shall be certified as tested , and approved by the Engineer before
installation.
(c) Standards
Following standards are to be applied. (For a standard with *, refer to the list shown in Part
1 Generalltems for the details.);
IEC 60228 Conductors of insulated cables

Ed.3.0:2004
IEC 60331 series * Tests for electric cables under fire conditions - Circuit integrity
IEC 60502 series * Power cables with εxtruded insulation and their accessories for
rated voltages fi..om 1 kV (Um = 1,2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um = 36 kV)
IEC 60811 series * Common test methods for insulating and sheathing materials of
electric cablεs and optical cables
IEC 60754-1 Test on gases evolved during combustion ofmaterials from

Ed.2.0: 1994 cables - Part 1: Determination ofthe amount ofhalogen acid gas
IEC 60840 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for
Ed.3.0:2004 rated voltages above 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) up to 150 kV (Um =
170 kV) - Test methods and requirements
DIN VDE 0888 Fiber Optic Breakout Cable

part 3: 2001-08
The wires and cables shall be manufactured, il1 stalled , tested and commissioned in
9001. The manufacturer and installation, testing and commissionil1g teams shall be
certified by official independεnt organization for IS0 9001 certificate.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS - D1 VISION 9 9. 1 - 21 - of 41

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL 씨rORKS Electrical Worl<s - Sectioll 9.1
The manufacturer sha11 pay attention for fabricatio l1 of cables and wires on the following
environment conditiol1s on site , other than climate cOl1ditions as stated in Techl1ical
Specification, Section 1;
- maximum ambient temperature: 45 Oc

design seismic coefficient: 0.12 gal
- lightning stroke expectancy: 100 thul1derstonn days per annum
(d) Color Coding
Color coding of cables and wires sha11 be as below;
- Phase (single) Brown
- PhasεR Red
- Phase S Yellow
- Phase T Bl ue
- Neutral Black
- Earth Ye11ow-green
11. 2 Grounding
Conduit, steel poles , cabinets (Electrical panels) and pull boxes sha11 be made mechanica11y and
electrica11y secure to form a continuous system, and sha11 be effectively grounded. The metal-
made stage and other related metal-made structures for the 6KV Substation ul1der the Main
Bridge located near the P14 sha11 be grounded by the Contactor. The Contactor sha11 submit
detailed necessary data for the grounding system to the Engineer for approva l.
Bonding and grounding jumpers sha11 be copper wire Of the same cross-sectional arεa for a11
systems. Bonding jumpers sha11 be used in a11 nomnetallic boxes.
Meta11ic boxes sha11 employ hubs of double lock nuts and bushes. The bonding of a11 conduits ,
lighting poles and panels to fonn a continuous ground system sha11 be in accordance with
applicable code standards.
If directed by the Engineer, each lighting pole sha11 be individua11y grounded.
Size of grounding wire sha11 be minimum 6 mm Bare Copper Conductor (BBC) or as approved
by the Engineer.
Ground rods sha11 be copper 10 mm diameter x 1.5 meter length minimum, depth 1.5 meter
below finished grade and welded or cOlU1ected using cotll1ection hardware to the 6 mm
grounding wire.
The Contractor sha11 investigate the earthing point of the sites and measure the data of ground
resistance. The Contractor sha11 submit the data and propose his appropriate earthing points to
the Engineer for approval.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVIS lO N 9 9.1-22-of41

The grounding resistance shall be 4 ohms or less for Substation, 10 ohms or less for MDP , DB
and lighting poles , or as approved by the Engineer.
11.3 Electrical Splice Materials
Splices and taps sha11 be made with pressure-type solder-less connectors to securely join the
wires both mechanically and electrically.
An epoxy resin , cast type insulation sha11 be fonned in c1 ear plastic molds. The material used
sha11 be compatible with the insulation specified in the Contract Drawings or these
Specifications. Materials to be used for the work sha11 conform to the requirements of 1IS C
2804 , JIS C 2805 and 1IS C 2806 , or shall have the quality approved by the Engineer.
Insulating tape when specified for use in splice fonnation sha11 conform to JIS C 2336. Un-
fused quick-discolmect connectors such as In-line COlmectors or Tee COlmectors sha11 be of the
quality approved by the Engineer.
11 .4 Conduit and Electric Pipe
(a) Material for conduit to be insta11ed below a bridge , above ground , in a concrete parapet or
on the sU1face of structures sha11 be steel, PVC , or specified in the Drawings.
Conduit crossings under intersections or streets and roads or both shal1 be constructed at a
minimum depth of 1.5 m beneath the fir너shed surface from steel pipe that has been
uniformly and adequately zinc- coated by a hot-dip galvanizing process , or concrete
encased PVC conduit meeting the requirements ofKS
(b) ElεctIic
pipe shall be high density polyethylene (HDPE) spεcified in KS or equivalent.
The HDPE pipes shall be insta11ed the roadway closing , rising to panels or poles as shown
in the Drawings.
1 1. 5 Cable Trays
The Contractor sha11 design and provide necessary cable trays for overall !ength of bridges and
pylon. The trays shall be supported from the bridge structures so that de f1 ection between the
supports is less than 2 meters. The cable trays shall be made ofhot dip galvanized steel.
All details regarding material and installation of cable trays sha11 be as shown in the Drawings.
11.6 Pull Boxes.
The pull box of appropriate dimensions shall be installed as shown in the Drawings.
The body of the pull box shall be fabricated from 3.2 lllin mild steel sheεt and hot-dip-
galvanized.
The cover sha11 be made either from 3mm type SUS 304 stainless steel or from 3.2 mm mild
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS - D1 VISION 9 9. 1 - 23 - of 41

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Electrical Works - Sectioll 9.1
No sharp projections from screws or other objects sha11 be pennitted within the pull box. The
covers sha11 be watertight by rubber gaske t.
Details of dimensions and pull box type will be shown in the drawings.
12. OBSTRUCTION LIGHTS (AIR HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS AND NAVIGATION

LIGHTS)
12. 1. Obstruction Lights (Ai r Hazard Warning Lights as AHWL)
The AHWL unit of medium intensity strobe waming systems sha11 consist of a complete
electrical mechanism for contro l1ing the operations of aircraft traffic and warning, including the
fo l1 owing:
(a) The number of AHWL for each pylon sha11 be instal1ed on the top ofpylon and lower part
of pylon as shown in the Drawings. The type of AHWL and locations of instal1 ation sha11
be the fo11owing.
Type of
Type Intensity of Lamp No.ofLamps AHWL Location on pylon
Signaling
Medium, Type-A, Flashing 3 for Daytime Top ofPylo11
、IVhite Strobe
Medium, Type-B , Flashing 3 for Nigh-time Top ofPylon
2
Red Strobe
，~--
Low,Type C, Red Non Strobe 2 for nigh time 37 m lower from top ofpylon
3
and night time
Low, Type C and Non Strobe l(C) for llight 74m lower from top ofpylon
4 MediuIIl, Type A, and Flash time and l(A)
White strobe for llight
Note: Refer to note below.
FAA L865 Medium Intensity Re d/ White Flashing Strobe Obstruction Light shall be
complied with the Intemational Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) Armex 14 Vo l.1,
Fourth Edition - July 2004 , Chapter 6 type NB medium intensity obstruct light.
(b) The medium illtellsity white , or red flushing strobe obstruction light 8ha11 be the
following , however not limited to:
1) Control: llltemal microprocessor based contro l1 er for power management , flash

character, daylight onJ off and fa i1ure alann control,
2) Alanns: volt free dry alann relay contact for lamp failure. Further alanns and status
information via control unit ,
3) Photoce l1: Two intemal photocells fitted in the light fixture for automatic day and
night controllight,
4) Source and Li fe expectancy: Xenon fla8h tube , over 2 year ’ s life with safe plug
fitting ,
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 9 9. 1 24 - 0[41

‘
5) Lenz diameter and c이01': P1'ecision iniunction molded 300 mm diameters Fresnel
lens. UV resistant with hinged opening; white lens with red filter for night
ope1'ation ,
6) Di ve1'gence (Beam angle): 360 deg1'ees horizontal, 3 degrees vertical at 50% peak,
7) Effective intensity: 20 ,000cd. , white 土25% in daytime mode , 2000cd red 土25% in
nighttime ,
8) Flash characte1': 40fpm, 20 - 40 (F AA) or 20 -60 fpm (ICAO) ,

9) Operation tempe1'ature: -55 oC to +55 oC , 99% relative humidity, and
10) Ingress protection: IP65
(c) The low intensity l'εd obstruction light shall be the following , however not limited to:
1) Type: ICAO type-B obstruct light (to confonn to ICAO Allnexure- 14, type-B) ,
compact, sturdy, powεr saving LED low intensity and IP 65 degree of
enviromnental protection for light;
2) Lamp: High power, high flux solid state lamp , long life more than 100,000 hours ,
very less power consumption, al1d solar powered applicatiol1s suited, ifrequired ,
3) Light characteristics: LED Cluster of light source, 1'ed for light color, minimum 32
candelas ’
4) Elect1'ical Specifications: 220V (50Hz) fo 1' input supply, and minimum 3.6 VA ,
maximum 6VA, 6W for power consumption,
5) Operation: 24hours for minimum autonomy , automatic on / off by photons
generation with LED conduction , and -40 oC to +50 oC , 80 % relative humidity at
enviromnental ,
6) Physical characteristics: Polished acrylic of Lens material , cast aluminum or fiber
of body material , and Cast aluminum of mounting , and
7) Power supply: Powe1' supply to the system: Single phase AC 220v 50Hz and power
supply to the system from the bridge transformer station will be unínterruptible
source.
12.2. Obstruction Lights (Ship Navigation Li ghts)
(a) The Standards fo 1' the navigation lights shall be complied with IALA for Signallight BH -
140H (as BH) and the Vietnam Standards of22 TCN 269-2000. The signallights shal1 be
installed them at the adequate locations on the bridge together with signal plates.
However Ìnstructions or requests or both by the Vietnam related Organization(s) shall be
high priority on the agenda.
(b) The Contractor shall supply and install six (6) navigation lights per SWW , three (3) on the
system of the BH 140A light shall be followed the Vietnam Standards of 22 TCN 269-
2000 as follow:
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 9 9. 1 - 25 - of 41

DIVISJON 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS ,
Elecírical Worl s - Section 9.1
• Port for the direction of ship: Red on her left and Green on right ,
e Center: Yellow flash on left and Yellow on right; and
• Starboard: Green on left and Red on right
(c) The Ship Navigation Li ght shall be the following , howεver not limited to:
1) Specifications ofsignallight: BH-140 A
2) Organic Optics Lens: Diameter D = 140mm
3) Light Container: Technical plastic, weather 1'esistant
4) Flashing mode: 14 1'ates according to navigation sigllal rule
5) Light onloff switch: 70/ 150Lux
6) Powe1' source: from solar ce113.6w, single c1'ystal
7) Self- operating time of combustion: 8 days and flashing F 15s 36 days

8) Lamp: light sou1'ce 8 or 10 LED lamps with high emissioll color dependent with
222x222x302 mm
9) Working tempe1'ature:-40- 60 oC
Navigation lights shall be suspendεdbεlow the bridge deck and supported on a hinged
swing ann with 1'etrieval chain and locking rod to allow the light to be swung up to deck
level fo 1' maintenance , 0 1' proposal by the Contracto1' fo 1' the Ellgineer’ s app1'ova l. The
surface of solar cell 011 the BH-140A shall be adjusted at the site to face to sun due to
charging in a battely.
13. FLOOD LIGHT SYSTEM
13. 1. Flood Lights for Aesthetic Lighting System
(a) Design of Aesthetic Li ghting Systern:
The ContractOi shall dεsign thε facilitiεs of aεsthetic lighting system based ln the
Aesthetic Design Report. The Contractor shall submit detailed drawings , specifications ,
quantities , construction cost estimate, and al1 other necessary documents for the approval
ofthe Engineer.
If the aesthetic 없cilities affect the geometric design 0 1' b1'idge structure design or both in
any way, the Contractor shall submit a modification design fo 1' the approval of the
Engineer.
The Contract Drawings show a design concept for aesthetic facilities. The Contractor
shall submit an alte111ative which is made in accordance with the design concep t. The
Contractor shall submit the proposal used by computer graphics , if required, drawings ,
specifications , quantities , construction cost estimate, and other necessaty documellts fo 1'
the altemative to the Engineer fo 1' his approval.
l'ECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - mVISION 9 9.1-26-of41

(b) Flood Li ghts to the Pylons for Aesthetic Lighting System:
The flood lights to the pylons on the part of above level of the roadway of it for the
aesthetic purpose shall be caITied out the lighting by the floodlights from the bottom of
pylons as shown in the Drawings. The lamp of the floodlights should be a lOOOw metal
halide(MH) Lamp. The lamps should be selected eighteen18)) of Blue lamps for one side
of pylon and , twenty four(24) of White lamps for color decoration on the pier base of
each pylon Anangement of floodlights for a pylon shall be shown in figures below. The
Contractor shall submit his proposal , drawings , specifications, isocurve of Lux on the
targeted 0비 ects ， quantities , construction cost estimate, and other necessary documents for
the altemative to the Engineer for his approval.
14. LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM (LPS) FOR BRIDGE PYLON
14. 1. General requirements:
The Lightning Protection System (LPS) shall comprise air terminations , down conductors and
eat1h tεnninations and performing the necessary inspection, testing, records and maintenance
upon completion of the system installation. The materials used in the system shall select
themselvεs to avoid corrosion problems.
The system shall use all means necessary to protect materials before , during and after
installations and to protest the works and materials of al1 other trades. In the event of damage ,
repairs and replacement shal1 be made to the approved ofthe Engineer and at no additional cos t. ν
Upon completion ofwork, the Contractor shall internal test all parts ofthe functional system.
Jn the presence of the Engineεr， measurement of the grounding resistance will be canied out on
the various parts of the system and should the instal1ation or any component fail to pass any test
the Contractor shall be 1'esponsible fo 1' cOITective action and subsequent test and bear any
associated costs until the instal1 ation 0 1' component is accεpted by the Enginee1'.
The lightning p1'otection system components shall be manufactured to suit the use in tropical
climatic area and shall be suitable in the service conditions mentioned below:
14.2. Air Terminal
Air tennination shall be solid copper 10 lmn diameter of the point, length minimum 400mm
long , or equivalent.
14.3. Down conductor
1) Down conductor -1 (from Air Tenninal to Rebars at the top ofpylon)
Main down-conductor cable shall be stranded, bare soft-drawn copper 38 111m2 l11inimum sizes
cross sectional area. The down conductor shal1 be connected to the air tenninal and other side to
2) Down conductor -2 (Rebars inside pylon structure)

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WO없(8 Electrical Works - Section 9.1
Two (2) rebars with a diameter 10mm (Approx. 70mm2) , or bigger inside pylon structure shall
be used fo 1' the down conductor. The two reba1's shall be laid them at the West side pylon and
the othe1' two fo 1' the Eas t. The 1'ebars shall be electrically continuous as one conductive by a
steel-made jumper between the both ends of reba1' by the Contractor. The 1'ebars used fo 1' down
conductor shal1 be treated with an antic OlTosive.
3) Down conductor-3 (f1'om Rebars to a Test Terminal Box)
The two reba1's shall be welded used a material of T -branch connecto1' at the bottom of pylon
and shal1 be pulled out a draw-out conductor to a test tenninal box for connection. One set of
the test te1'minal box shall be installed for the bottom of west side pylon and the other for the
East as shown in the D1'awings.
14.4. Earthing εonducto I'
The earthing conducto1' shall be conductor connecting a piece of equipment to an earthing

electrode provided it is not in the g1'ound or in the g1'ound but insulated.
If, the connection between a neutral 0 1' outside conducto1' and the earth electrode includes an
isolating link, a disconnecto1' or an ea1'th-fault coil , only the connection between the earth
electrode and the earth-side te1'minal of the nearest of such devices is deemed to be an earthing
conducto1'.
14.5. Connection
The c Olmection shall be by exothennal welding unless otherwise indicated.
14.6. Earthing Electrode Rods (from Test TeI'minal Bo.li. to Earthing Electrode Rods)
The earthing elect1'ode rods shall be installed inside the pie1' base of pylon, wellding specially
to steel ba1's of concrete pier as shown in indicating drawing
The down conductor shall be copper 25mmx3mm and be protected in the reinfo 1'ced concrete
pter.
The combined value of earthing resistance of foundation of the object to be protected and that
of earth electrode shall be not more than 5 n.
The earth electrode shall be a copper plate of 5mm tick, 1.0m x 1.0m with a 1.5m length of
atmealed flat copper bar 25mmx3tmn in water
14.7. Installation Requirements
A distinction shall be made between top of tower and on the bridge sectioll lightning protection
system.
(a) Top oftower
Comprise all devices p1'ovided and top of tower device at and in the p1'otected installation fo 1' the
purpose of inte1'cepting and diverting the lightning strokε cunent to the earthing system.

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Electrical Wor l<s - Section 9.1
(b) On the bridge section
Comprise the measure taken to counteract the effects of the lightning stroke current and it ’ s
electrical and magnetic fields on metal assemblies and electrical apparatus illcluded in the
bridge metal structures of the installation.
14.8. Applicable international standards and code
The materials and equipment shall be designed, constructed and tested minimum in
confonnance with following the latest standards and codes.
• IEC 364-5-54/1980; IEC 479-1/1984
• DIN VDE 0800 , part 2/07.85; DIN VDE 0151/6.86; DlN VDE014117.89
• DIN VDE 0100 , part 540/05.86; DIN VDE 0100 , part 410/11.83
15. FACILITIES IN PYLON
The facilities in Pylon shall comprise lighting system, socket power supply system and door
opening alarm system.
15. 1. Lighting System in Pylon
Lighting units as shown in the Drawings shall consist of lighting lantem , lamps , electrical
cont1'ol ballast(s) , and mounting accεssories.
The Contractor shal1 submit fo 1' approval , detailed li밟11 distribution diagrams fo 1' each type of
lantem he proposes to install. Further more , calculations shall be submitted showing the average
Illuminance (Lx) at a few points of staircase landing.
The type of lighting fixtu 1'e for lighting system in pylon shall be the fo l1owing , however not
limited to:
• Type of lighting source: Fluo1'escent lamp lx 36w,
• Power supply: single phase 2- wire , 220volts ac , 50Hz
• IP Degreε of Protection: IP 65 rating ,
• Housing oflighting fixture: ABS Housing with stainless steel clips ,
• Li ghting Diffuser: P1'ismatic diffuser with good dazzle-p1'oof,
• Cont1'ol Bal1 ast: Elect1' omagnetic ballast , and
• Ballast Holder: Nylo l1 ballast holde1'.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA Tl ONS - DJVISION 9 9.1-29-of41

Dl VISION 9 - ELEε:TRICAL WORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1
15.2. Socket Power Supply System
The Socket Power Supply System as shown in the Drawings shall consist of socket , waterproof
box and mounting accessories.
The Contractor shal1 submit date ofrelated materials for approval
The type of Socket Power Supply System in pylon shall be the following , however not limited
to:
(a) Type of socket in pylon: compact surface switched socket lOA (One-mouth socket) by
shingle phase 2-wire 220v ac 50Hz and 1P 53 rating ,
(b) Type of socket at the top ofpylon for power: compact surface switched socket 20A (One-
mouth socket) by three phases 3-wire 380v ac 50Hz for a motor and 1P 66 rating ,
Power supply: three phases 4-wire, 380/220v ac , 50Hz and
Required safety item: The socket shall be fitted with safety shutter covering behind all pin
apertures.
15.3. Door opening alarm system
Each entrance door of pylon shal1 be equipped a set of contacts of individual signal sender when
the door to be opened. The alann is triggered an alert will sent to a Alann Receiving Station in
the Road Management Office via signaling system by telephone lines of other communication
line. The operator in the office will check it immediately by radio walkie- talkie if al1 is in order.
1) Standard Specification
To supply , fit and commissioning the alarm systems , the Industry Standards of BS 4737 , and
DD243 and the configuration shal1 be usually comprised of.
2) Door Contacts
The contacts shall detect when the door is opened. The contacts shall be: one part is fixed to the
door and the other to the doorframe. Both of contacts shal1 be contact-less. When the door is
opened, the balance of contacts is br야en and the alalm is triggered.
3) TransfOlmer and Battery Backup
The systems shall be planed to ensU1‘e them in first-class working order due to 24 hour, 365 days
a year always monitoring at the office.

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL 씨'ORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1
16. CONSTRUCTION
16. 1. General
All workmanship shall be complete and in accordance with the latest accepted standards of the
industry , as detennined by the Engineer. Installation of duct, construction of manholes , and
excavation for cable or duct track, shall be in accordance the Specifications.
16.2. Exca、lating and Backfilling
Exca、rating and Backfilling required for the installation of foundations , poles and other
appliances shal1 be perfonnal1ce in accordance with the requirements of the Specification but
w i11 not be measured for payment.
The cost of such extra work shall be deemed to be included in the unit price of the pay item
being instal1ed.
16.3. Foundations
Foundation shall be constructed of POliland cεment concrete C25 unless othεrwise noted in the
Drawíngs and all detaíls shall meet the applicable requirements of Divisiol1 8 Section 8.5
“ Concrete Structures" of the Specifications.
The bottom of concrete foundations shal1 rest on firm ground.
Foundations shall be poured in one pour where practicable. The exposed portions shall be
fonned to present a neat appearance.
The footing shown in the Drawings shall be extended if conditions require additional depth, and
such additio l1al work, if ordered by the Engineer, wi1l be paid for under the applicable provision
ofPart 8 Sectiol1 8.5 “ COl1crete" of the Specifications.
Forms shall be true to line and grade. Tops of footings for p이es， except special foundations ,
shall be finíshed to ground line or sidewalk grade , unless otherwise noted in the Drawíngs or
directed by the Engíneer.
Fonns shall be rígíd and securely braced in place. Conduit ends and anchor bolts shall be placed
in proper position and to proper height, and shall be held in place by means of a template until
concrete sets.
Plumbing of poles shall be accomplishεd by adjusting levelil1 g l1uts. Shims or other simi1 ar
devíces f0 1" plumbing or raking shall not be pennitted.
Both forms and groul1 d whích will be in contact with the concrete shall be thoroughly moistened
before placing concrete. Forms shall not be removed untíl the concrete has set at least 3 days.
A "ordinary surface finísh" shall be applíed to exposed surface of concrete in accordance with
the requírements ofDívisíon 8 Sectíon 8.5 “ Concrete Structures" of these Specificatíon.
an effective foundatíon , satisfactory to the Enginεer.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 9 9. I - 31 - of 41

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Electrical 에'orks - Section 9.1
16.4. Conduit and Electric Pipe
Instal1 ation of conduit and electric pipe shall be pelfonned in accordance with these
Specifïcatiol1S and in reasonably close confonnity with the locatiol1 as specified il1 the Drawings
or as directed by the Engineer.
The size of conduit used shall be as shown in the Drawings. Conduit s111aller than 501mn
diameter electrica1 trade size, shall not be used Ulùess otherwise specified.
1t shall be the option ofthe Contractor, at his own expense , to use 1arger size conduit if desired,
and where larger size cOllduit it used , it shall be for the entire 1ength of the rU l1 fro111 out1et to
outle t.
No reducing coupli l1g shall be pennitted.
The ends of conduit shall be well reamed to remove burrs and rough edges. Field cuts shall be
made square and true so that the ends w i1l butt or come together for the full circumfcεrence
thereof. Slip joints or r Ulming threads shal1 not be pennitted for coupling condui t.
When a standard coupling camlot be used , an approved threaded union coupling shall be used.
~
The threads of all steel conduits shall be well painted with a good quality of lead or rust-
preventative paint before couplings are made up.
All steel couplings shal1 be screwed up until the ends of the conduits are brou밟1t together, so
that a good e1ectrica1 connection wi1l be made throughout the entire 1ength of the conduit run.
Where coating 011 stee1 conduit has been damaged in handling or installing, such p1aces shal1 be
thorou밟üy painted with rust- preventative paint.
All conduit el1ds shall be thrεaded al1d capped with standard conduit couplings capped with
conduit push Pelmey’s until wiri l1 g is started.
When coup1ings and push Pemley’s are removed the threaded ends shall be provided with
approved conduit bushing.
The use of any p1ugs, even though temporary , in 1ieu of the aforementioned conduit coup1ings
and push Penney’s shall be expressly prohibited.
Conduit stubs from bases shall extend at least 15 cm fì'om the face offoundations and at least 80
cm be10w the top offoundations.
Conduit bends , except factory bends , shall have a radius of not 1ess than six times the inside
diameter of the condui t.
Where factory bends are not used, conduit shall be bent , using an approved conduit bending
too1s emp10ying correctly sized dies , without crimping or tlattening, using the 10ngest radius
practicable. All PVC conduit bends shall be pre-formed.

DJVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Elect히cal Works - Section 9.1
Conduit terminating in poles or pedestals shall extend approximately 15 cm above the

foundation vertically and shall be sloped towards the handhold opening.
Conduit entering through the bottom of a pull box shall be located near the end walls to leave
the major portion ofthe box clear.
At all outlets, conduit shall enter from the direction ofthe run, terminate 15 to 20 cm below the
pul1 box lid and within 9 cm of the box wall nearest its entry location.
Suitable markers shall be set at the ends of conduits which are covered so that they may be
easily located.
A galvanized pull wire shall be installed in all conduits which are to receive future conductors.
At least 60 cm ofpull wire shall be doubled back into the conduit at each termination.
16.5. Pull Boxes
Pull boxes shall be installed at the locations shown in the Drawings, and at such additional
points as ordered by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall install, at his own expense, such additional boxes shall be desired to
facilitate the work.
16.6. Wires
Wiring shall conform to appropriate code requirements. Wiring within cabinets, manholes, etc.
shal1 be neatly arranged and within cabinets shall be laced.
Powdered soapstone, talc , or lubricant shall be used in placing conductors in conduit.
Splicing in conductors w i11 be permitted on1y at manholes , transformer leads , in p이e bases , or at
control equipment.
Sufficient signallight conductors shall be provided to conform to the functional operation ofthe
signal system as shown. Spare conductors shal1 be provided when noted in the Drawings.
16.7. Service Point
Service points shall be located within or close to the Site, normally, but not 11'δcessari1y always ,
at the substation transformer nearest the project main panel designated of the drawings by the
symbol "SS".
The cable work from the service switch (SS) to the Dist1'ibution Panel (MDP) shall be instal1ed
by the Contractor.
This work wi11 not be paid for directly but cOllsidered a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor
p1'ovided fo 1' under the unit rate for the 개1DP" service switch.

Unless otherwise .noted in the Drawings , each service point sha11 include a meter base installed
in accordance with serving ut i1ity requirements , a there wire service breaker of size noted in the
Drawings, the necess없y conduit risers and grounding assembly.
Service breakers sha11 be a standard thermal circuit breaker encased in rain-tight enclosure that
can be pad locked.
In general, a11 traffic signal seπices sha11 be at 220 volts , 50 Hz, and a11 multiple lighting sha11
be 220 volts , 50 Hz as noted in the Drawings.
The Contractor sha11 prepa.re a11 drawings required and a11 necessary documentation for the
application for the service connection, which sha11 be submitted for the Engineer.
The Engineer sha11 then, upon request of the Contractor, makε aπangements with the serving
utility to complete the service connections.
The serving uti1ity cOl111ection costs, but not the electrical, energy consumption, wil1 be charged
to the Contractor.
,“ 5
16.8. Field Test
Prior to completion of the work, the Contractor sha11 cause the fo11owing tests to be made on a11
traffic signal and lighting circuits , in the presence ofthe Engineer.
• Test for continuity of each circuit.
• Test for grounds in each circuit.
A megger test on each circuit between the conductor and ground with a11 switchboards, panel
boards , fuse holders , switches , sockets, and over current devices in place and a11 readings
recorded.
The Contractor sha11 furnish the Engineer with three copies of the t않t res띠ts identifying
observed readings with their respective circuits.
Any change in the above stated minimum readings must be approved by the Engineer. Such ‘’
approval must be in writing, fo11owing written application by the Contractor.
A functional test to be demonstrated each part of the system function and every part sha11 be as
specified or intended herein.
An y fault in any material or in any part of the installation revealed by these tests sha11 be
replaced or repaired by the Contractor in a mru.mer approved by the Engineer, and the same test
sha11 be repeated unt i1 no 없ult appears.
16.9. Painting
All painting required sh a11 be in conformance with applicable portions of the Specifications.

DIVISION 9 -- ELECTRICAL WORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1
lf the enclosure of any electrical equipment (l ess signal heads) located above ground does not
have an exterior surface of either aluminum or galvanizing, then it shall be finished with two
coast of an approved zinc based paints , plus such finishing coat as the Engineer may direc t.
The Controller cabinets shal1 be finished in accordance with the above requirements for
electrical εquipment.
Galvanized steellighting poles and lighting lantems shall not be painted.
16.10.Lighting Poles
Lighting poles shall be handled in loading , unloading and erecting in such a manner that they
will not be damaged.
Any parts that ’are damaged due to the Contractor's operation shall be repaired or replaced at the
Contractor’s expense, to the satisfaction of the Engineer
Lighting poles shall not be erected on concrete foundations until foundations have set at least 72
hours , and shall be raked sufficient1y to be plumb after a1110ad has been placed, or as otherwise
16.1 1. Control Equipment
Where specifically detailed in the Drawings , fo 1' service locations where two or more lighting
circuits a1'e operated from one time switch control device , the relays , service breakers and any
other necessary control equipment shal1 be grouped together and installed in a suitable rain-tight
enclosure of a sufficient size to accommodate all of the equipment installed therein.
Each electrical control ballast assembly shall be protected by molded circuit breakers.
16.12." As-Built" Drawings
Upon completion of the work, the Contracto1' shall submit IAs-Bui1t" 01' corrected drawings , or
any data therefore as 1'equired by the Enginee1', showing in detail all cOllstruction changes ,
especially location and depth of conduit and completed schematic circuit diagram.
The final "As-Built" drawings shall be plotted in A3 size on sheets confonning to the standard
contract Drawings and shall be supplied to the Employer within 14 days after completion of
construct lO n.
16.13.Guarantee
The Contractor shall fumish to the Employer any guarantee 01' warranty required as a normal
trade practice in connection with the purchase of any materials or items used in the cOl1struction
of the illumination or traffic signal system or system included in the Contrac t.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS - Dl VISION 9 9.1-35 -of41

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Electrical 뼈'orks - Section 9.1
17. 1. Method ofMeasurement
The quantity of each item paid for under this clause wi1l be the number of each, linear ll1eters
and lump sums of individual items as detailed below which are fumished and insta11ed in
accordance with this specification, the drawings and the instmctions of the Engineer.
An y additional works sha11 be dee ll1ed to be included in the unit 1'ated as provided Ín the Bid
Prices Schedule.
(a) Road Lighting (UnÍt: each)
The fumishing , transportation, erection of poles including lighting units , installation of

anchor bolts , nuts , washers , inlet and outlet conduit for cables , foundation concrete
materials and associated civil works 10r each type of lighting unit to be insta11ed sha11 be
the number of each lighting unit furnished , installed in place and accepted by the
Engineer.
(b) Panel MDP (Uni t: each)
The fumishing and 1l10unting of panel types MDP including Ínstal1ation of anchor bolts ,
nuts , washers , foundation concrete materials , b1'ackets , cable t1'enches , supports , site
testing with collectiol1 of data , field painting, and associated civil works for each panel
type MDP fumished , ll1ounted , and insta11ed in place and accepted by the Engineer.
(c) Panel DB (Uni t: each)
The work sha11 include as: fumishing and 1l10unting of panel type DB with anchor bolts ,
nuts , washers , conc1'ete mate1'ials, cable duct, pu11 boxes , hand-hole of cable inlet, site
testing with collection of data , field painting, and associated civil works fo 1' each panel
type DB fumished , mounted , and insta11ed in place , and accepted by the Enginεer.
(d) Panel PSS-PP and Panel PSS-AP (Unit: each)
The wo1'k sha11 include as: fumishing and mounting of panel type PSS-PP and PSS-AP
with ancho1' bolts , nuts , washe1's, conc1'ete materials , cable duct , pull boxes , handholε of
cable inlet, site testing with collection of data , field painting, and associated civil wo1'ks
fo 1' each panel type PSS-PP and PSS-AP fmnished, mounted , and installed in place , and
accepted by the Enginee1'.
(e) Cables (Uni t: Linea1' meter)
The furnishing and installing of each cable sha11 be rneasured in place by the linear meter
of the cables, including c0l111ections, splicing rnaterials , tennination materials , insulation
tapes , field test and data, relative civil wo1'ks and other requi1'e, the quantity measu1'ed fo 1'
payment sha11 be the nUll1ber of meters of cables fumished , installed in place and
accepted by the Engineer.
(f) Grounding Wire (Unit: Linear meter)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 9 9. 1 - 36 - of 41

The fumishing and ínstalling of εach wire shall be measured in place by the linear meter
of the wires , including cOlU1 ections , splicing materials , tennination materials , insulation
tapes , field test and data, relative civil works and other require , the quantity measured for
payment shall be the number of meters of wires fumished , installed in place and accepted
by the Engineer.
(g) Groundìng System (Unì t: Lump sum)
The whole system of grounding under this ìtem will be paid for as a lump sum for the
work as provided hereunder. The lump sum payment shall be full compensation for all
materials , labor, electrode rods , laying of BCC wires , c1 amps and fittìngs , PVC conduìt
and fittings , tools , testing and recording of data, incidentals including all those necessary
for requirements in full operatìonal and functìonal conditions ofthe grounding systems.
For purposes ofprogress claim a breakdown ofthis lump sum item shall be included in a
"ScheduIe of Lump Sum Items" as an annex. To the Bid Schedule wherein the Bidder
shall enter a unit price breakdown for lump sum which shall then be subject to the review
and approval of the Engineer in accordance with the Specifications and other Documents.
(h) Pipe/ Conduit and fittings (Unit: Linear meter)
The fumishing and ìnstallatìon of pìpe/conduìt shall be measured in place by the linear
meter of the pipe/ conduìt, includìng fittings
The pìpe/conduit will be paid for at the lìnear meter price as provided hereunder. Such
payment shall also be fu11 compensation for a11 materials , labor, plant, equipment, tools ,
and incidentals necessa1'y to insert and pu11 the cable through the conduit including all
pennìts fo 1' testing and other miscellaneous items that may be required to ensure the fu11
operational and functional condìtions of the elect1'ical conduiting systems.
(i) Power C01U1ection for Applìcation to Power Company (Unìt: Lump sum)
The System under the item wil1 be paid fo 1' at unit ofLump sum price and payment.
(ì) Substatìon (Uni t: Lump sum)
Lump sum pric응 and payment shall be full compensation for all necessary matεrial， labors ,
transportation for the delivery equipment, and materìals and inc1 uding flame supports ,
fixed transfonner, isolators , insulators , cOlU1ectioll cables , grounding, and all necessary
for 1'equirements in full operation and functional conditions.
(k) Obstruction Lights (Air Hazard Warníng Li ghts & Ship Navigation Li ghts) (U l1it: Set)
The system under this item wíll be paid for at unit set price as p1'ovided hereunder. Unit
set price and pay ll1ent shall bε full compensatìon for all necessa1'y material the system,
labors , t1'ansportatio l1 for the delivery equipment , and materials and including erecting of
mounted brackets , flamìng supports , fixed strobe unìts , and controlling unìts , isolators ,
ope1'ation and functional condìtìons as detaìled report
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 9 9.1-37 -of41

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAl.. WORKS Electrical Wor}{s - Section 9.1
The set of Obstruction Lights shall inc1ude main obstructionlight, subsidiary obstruction
light , control box for obstruction light , synchronised flashing strobe device , UPS and
other necessary materials or devise by the Contractor.
(1) Flood light System for Aesthetic Lighting to Pylons (Uni t: Set)
The flood lights for Light up system to Pylons , under this item "씨1 be paid for at unit set
price as provided hereunder. Unit set price and payment shall be f니11 compensation for ,
operation control panel and all necessary material , labors , transportation, fo 1' the delivery
equipment , and materials and including erecting of flaming stage by steel structures at the
l110unted main column, fixed and testing by the flood lighting control panel, supports ,
insulation, c011l1ection for cables , and al1 necessary fo 1' 1'equirements in fu11 operation and
functional conditions.
(m) Lightning Protectioll System (Uni t: Set)
The system ullde1' this item wi1l be paid for at set p1'ice as p1'ovided hereunder. Each set
price and payment shal1 be fu11 compensation fo 1' all necessary materials , labors ,
transportation, for the delivery equipment and materials and including e1'ecting of steel
pole , ai1' tennination, and framing supp01is , fixed insulators on the wa11 01' COlUl11il,
38mm2 down cOllductors , pu11 box, fou 1' (4) rebars (@ two-rebars/pylon x 2) ofminimum
diameter 10mm (Approx. 78.5mm2) as down conductors in the rebar structure of the
main bridge pylons , and 25 n:un2 BCC grounding wires , grounding electrode rods , field
testing, and all necessarγ for requirements in full operation and functional conditions in
detailed repoli
(n) Facilities in Pylon (Uni t: set)
The system under this item will be paid for at unit set price as provided hereunder. Unit
set price and payment shall be full compensation for all necessary material the system,
labors , transportation for the delivery equipment, and materials and including fluorescent
lamp fixture , its mounted brackets , flarning supports , and controlling units , isolators ,
insulations , connections, and cables , grounding, cOilllection box , MCCB box , So야et box ,
Socket box , Contact box, and all necessary for requirement in fu l1 operation and
functional conditions.
17.2. Basis ofPayment
The work items measured as described above shall pay for on the basis of each to cover all the
works ofthese items.
Such payment sha l1 be full compensation for al1 the work each shown in the Drawings or
described herein , including but not limitεd to , provision of component.
Fire fightillg System sha11 be measured and paid as Provision Sum for a11 the work shown in the
Fire Fighting System Drawings.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 9 9.1-38 -of41

Unit of
Measurement
Transformer station
9.01-01 Transforme1' 3P 400KV A 50Hz set
----
9.01-02 Cabinet set
Power
-
9.01-03 Cabinet (MDBIB , MDB2B) set
9.01-04 LV Cable CXV1Cx2401mn2 m
9.01-05 LV Cable CXV1Cx150mm2 m
9.01-06 Cable Cu 50mm2 m
9.01-07 Ea1'thíng set
-
9.01-08 Fixíng Suppo1't fo 1' cabinet set
------------------_.
9.01-09 Pipe HDPE d85/65 m
9.01-10 Manhole set
Bridge lighting (4x150W Luminary)
--
Luminaires, p 이es and utilities
HPS-T 4x150W TXN IP=66 Luminary
---_.9.01-11 sεt
9.01-12 HPS-T 250W NEOS-3 IP=66 Lumina1'Y set

9.01-13 Li ghting control cabinet set
9.01-14 Li ghting pole of 12m hi맹 (in c1ude Numeration ofpole) pole
-
9.01-15 Cabinet foundation set
-‘ --------
9.01-16 Earthing set
------
9.01-17 Piece of sheet iron for cover pole bottom set
--
Cable and Acc.
--
9.01-20 LV Cable CXV 4Cx501mn2 m
9.01-21 Cab1e Cu 25mm2 m
9.01-22 LV Cable CXV 3Cx2.5mm2 m
9.01-23 Pipe HDPE d85/65 m
9.01-24 Zinc pipe d21mm m
9.01-25 Domino 4P-60A pcs
,..., ‘ 1、 끼8
9.01-27 El ectric boa1'd (at se1'vice doo1') pcs

’ ‘、J 、 •
DIVISION 9 - ELECTRl CAL WORKS Electrical Works - Section 9.1 ‘ 1
9.01-28 MCBIP6A pcs

9.01-29 Copper lug Cu (5x25mm2) set
9.01-30 Copper lug Cu (4x50mm2) set
Pylon lighting (1xl000W Luminary)
Luminaires, poles and utilities
9.01-31 MH (Blue) 1000W OLYMPIA IP=66 Luminary set
9.01-32 MH (white) 1000W OLYMPIA IP=66 Luminary set
9.01-33 Li양lting control cabinet set
9.01-34 Junction box set
9.01-35 Lighting pole of 3m high (include Numeration of pole) pole
9.01-36 Lighting support of 1.5m high set
Cable and Acc.
9.01-37 LV Cable CXV 4Cx35mm2 m
9.01-39 LV Cable CXV 1Cx95mm2 m ‘t
9.01 -40 Cable Cu 25mm2 m f
9.01 -41 LV Cable CXV 3Cx2.5nm12 111
9.01 -42 Hosε HDPEd21mm 111
9.01 -43 Domino 4P-60A pcs

9.01 -44 lnstal1 Electric board pcs
g
z
9.01-45 MCBIP6A pcs L
9.01-46 Copper lug Cu (5x351mn2) set

9.01-47 Copper lug Cu (4xl0mm2+1 x25mm2) set
Inside Pylon lighting
9.01-48 Water proofluminaire with 2x36W FL IP65 set
9.01-49 Water proofluminaire with 1x36W FL IP65 set
9.01-50 Lighting cabinet set
9.01-51 Switch panel type A set
9.01-52 Switch panel type B set
9.01-53 Switch panel type C set
9.01-54 Switch panel type D set
9.01-56 LV Cable CXV 4Cx16mm2 ln
9.01-57 LV Cable CXV lCxl0mm2 m
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 9 9.1 .. 40-of41


-
9.01-60 LV Cable CXV 3Cx1 ,5mm2 m
9.01-61 Cable Cu 10mm2 m
9.01-62 PVC d25mm pipe m
9.01-63 HDPE d85/65mm pipe m
9.01-64 Lightning system LS
Aviation obstacle Lighting system
9.01-65 Medium intensity aviation obstacle light type"C" set
뉴---
9.01-66 Medium intensity aviation obstacle light type"A & B" set
1--.
9.01-67 A viation obstacle controller set
--
9.01-68 Pull box set
9.01-69 Reserve power supply 1OKV A set
9.01-70 Cable CXV 6x4mm2 m
-
Trunking
9.01-71 Trunking 250x150x1 ,5mm m
9.01-72 Trunking 100x50x1 ,5mm m
9.01-73 Expanding screw set
9.01-74 Support for trunking Set

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRl CAL WO R1잉 Civil WO l'ks. for Electricalltems - Sec헤on 9.2
SECTION 9.2: CIVIL WORKS FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. DESCRIPTION………………..•••……………………••.•..•••.…… •.••••…·….•••••.•.•.••••…•..•.…………•.••….- 2-
2. MATERIALS ………………“•..••………·…...…••……••••……“………•..•…...…..……….•••..•••…...…•••••.. - 2-
3. CONSTRUCTION ………………………………………………………………•.••………………...…••.•••...••••. - 2 -
3.1. ANCHORBOLTS IN CONCRETE STRUCTURES ...……………………………………••••…...... - 2-
3.2. HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE (HDPE) IN CONCRETE STRUCTURE ... - 2 -
3.3. PULL BOX IN CONCRETE STRUCTURE….•••..••…………………..•.•……..•.……...••.…..•.…… -2-

3.4. UNDER GROUND DUCT ……………………………………………………………•.••••••••...…................ - 3-
3.5. DUCT BANK……““•••••.•.••…•••••.•..•.••….•...•.…••••……………••••••...•.…………………………………….. - 3-
3.6. TERMINATION OF DUCT ……………………………………•..••••••...•.……………………………••...•••. - 4-
3.7. UNDER GROUND PIPE FO묘 BRANCH CIRCUITS ...…………………………...……………….- 4-
3.8. EXCAVATION AND BACK-FILLING …………………………………………………………………….- 4-

4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT …..••••••.…...••••.••••…••..•••••.•••.•.•..•..•.•...•••…...…•......••.•••• - 5-
4.1. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ...……...………………… ..••……….••.………•••••.•.….•..•.••••.•••••••. - 5-
4.2. BASIS OF PAYMENT ...……………...…………....•……… .•.....••………………••.•………………… ........ - 5-

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Civil Works for Electrical Items - Section 9.2
SECTION 9.2: CIVIL WORKS FOR ELECTRICAL ITEMS
1. DESCRIPTION
The work under this clause shall include anchor bolts in concrete structure , installation of pull
boxes and conducting in bridge structures or medium cable tray under the bridge , if rεquired in
the drawings , as necessary for the installation of the Bridge electrical facility as described in
Part 9 , Section 9.1 "Elεctrical Works".
2. MATERIALS
All materials used shall conform to the details given in the Drawings. In the absence of any
details in the drawings , thε work shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant sections of
the Specifications and the instruction of the Engineer. The materials for Conduit and fittings
shall be given for in Part 9, Section 9.1 “ Electrical Works".
3. CONSTRUCTION
3. 1. Anchor bolts in Concrete Structures
All details of anchor bolts shall be in accordance with the Drawings and the relevant parts of
Part 8, Section 8.14 “ Miscellaneous Meta1". Anchor bolts shall be fixed in the concrete structure
positions and he1d in place by means oftemplates until the concrete has set.
3.2. High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE) in Concrete Structure
The installation of the required pipe shall be perfonned in accordance with the Specifications
and in reasonably close confonnity with the locations as specified in the Drawings or as directed
by the Enginεer.
The size of HDPE pipe used shall be as shown in the Drawings. Pipε which smaller than 50
lmn diameter electrical trade size shall not bε used , unless otherwise specified. It shall be the
option of the Contractor, at his own expense , to use larger size conduit if desired, and where
larger size conduit is used, it shall be for the entire length of the run from pull box to pull box.
No reducing coupling will be pennitted.
3.3. Pull Box in Concrete Structure
Pull boxes shall be installed in concrete structure at the location shown in the Drawing , and, at
such additional point as ordered by the Engineer. The Contractor may install , at his own
expense , such additional boxes as may be desired to facilitate the works.
Electrical Manhole / Handhole
All details ofmanhole or Handhole or both shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
Conduit or duct endings shall be fixed in the proper position and held in place by means of
templates until the concrete has se t.
… ι 썼@섯홈영r영션1없γ혼￦'T2!풍e…rmfSrr훨폈'IT'f1용흩영'f':T뿜~영써였뺑'soo δ행mχ강응용엽하짧e慣췄혔였얹었뾰폰‘￦ffl'Ff'없 깅;
Section 8.5 “ Concrete" ofthese Specifications.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS - DIVISION 9 9. 2 - 2 - of 5

mVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Civil Works for Electrical Hems - Section 9.2
Excavation fo 1' cable installation shall be of the width necessa1'y for satísfactory lying of the
cable and shall ensure that cables are at least 600 mm below fïnished level.
The bottom of the cable t1'ack shall be levε1 and f1'ee from stones 01' othe1' sha1'p objects. The
depth of the cable may be increased if this is neceSS a1y to avoid existing obstructions.
3.4. Under Ground Duct
Afte1' cable has been laid they shall be protected by conc1'ete-made cable ma1'ker or cable
protecto1' tile of a design approved by the Vietnam Power Authority.
The location of duct wi11 be as shown in Drawings or as instIUcted by the Engineer.
Unless the Contracto1' elects at his own expense to instal1 duct by jacking 01' drilling, all work on
ducts shal1 be completed befo1'e work is started on the sub-base course.
Full details of any ducts to be instal1ed by jacking or drilling must be submitted to the Engineer
fo 1' his app1'oval.
Unless otherwise inst1'ucted, al1 ducts shall extend at least 600 lmn beyond the edge of the
pavement.
Suitable marke1' stakes shall be set at the ends of ducts which are buried so that they may be
easily located. Existing unde1'ground ducts to be inco1'porated into a new system shall be blown
out with compressed air a11d checked with a mand1'el.
A galvanized pull wi1'e shall be installed in all ducts which are to receive future cables.
At leust 600 mm of pull wirc shall bc doublcd back into the duct at each tenninatÎon.
All ducts shall be laid in st1'aight lines only, with a minill1ull1 nU ll1ber of joints throughout the
lengths of each duct lUn.
Whε1'e joints ll1ust be provided the ends of all ducts shall be well reall1ed to re ll10ve burrs and
rough edge.
Where ll1etallic conduits have been specifïed fïeld cuts shall be ll1ade squa1'e and tIUe so that the
ends w il1 butt or come together fo 1' the full circull1ference the1'eof. Slip joints 01' lUl1l1ing threads
willnot be permitted for coupling metallic ducts. When a standard coupling call11ot be used an
approved threaded union coupling shal1 be used.
The threads on all ducts shall be well painted with a good quality of lead 01' rust preventive paint
befo1'e couplings a1'e made up. All ducts shal1 be checked with a ll1andrel after cOll1pletion of
each Ìnstaìlation.
Unless othe1'wise approved by the Engineer ducts shal1 be laid to a depth of not less than 600
tnm below the curb grade in the sidewalk and all other areas and to a depth of not less than 800
lml1 below the fïnished grade in road-crossing areas.
3.5. Duct Bank
Underground duct line shal1 be constmcted of pipe encased in concrete. Excεpt where rigid
galvanized steel conduit is indicated or specifïed, the pipe shall be of HDPE pipe.
The kind of conduit used shall not be mixed Ìn anyone duct bank. Ducts shall not be smaller
than 100mm in diameter Ulùess otherwise Ìndicated.
The top of the conc1'ete envelope shall not be less than 450 lmn below grade except that under
roads and pavement, it shall be not less than 600 lmll below grade.
TECHNICAL SPECIFIεATIONS - mVISION 9 9.2-3-of5

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL 찌'ORKS Civil Works for Electrical Items - Section 9.2
Duct lines shall have a continuous slope downward toward underground structures and away
from building with a pitch ofnot less than 76 mm in 30 meters.
Except at conduit risers , changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees , either
vertical or horizontal , shall be accomplished by a long sweep bends having a minimum radius of
curvature of 7.6 meters , sweεp brands may be made up of one or more curved or straight
sections or combinations thereof.
Trenches shall be excavated along straight lines from structure to structure before ducts are laid
or structure constructed so the elevation can be adjusted , if necessary, to avoid unseen
obstruction.
3.6. Termination of Duct
Pipes shall terminate in end-bells where duct lines enter underground structures. The joints of
the pipes shall be staggered by rows and layers so as to provide a duct line having the maximum
strength. During construction, partially completed duct lines shall be protected from the
entrance of debris such as mud, sand dirt by means of suitable conduits plugs.
As each section of duct line is completed from structure to structure , a testing mandrel not less
than 300 mm long with a diameter of 6 nun less than the size of the conduit, shall be drawn
through εach conduits , after which a brush havíng the diameter of the duct, and having stíff
bristles shall be drawn through until the conduit is clear of all particles of earth , sand and gravel ,
conduít plugs shall then be immediatεly installed.
Provide a plastic pull rope , having 1 meter or spare at each end ofthe ducts.
For duct line c011l1 ections to concrete pads , break an opening 011 the pad out to the dimensions
required and preserve the steel in the pad.
Cut the steel and bend it out to the ties into the reinforCÌng of the duct line envelope. Chip out
the opening in the pad to form a key for the duct line envelope.
During construction, wherever a construction joints is necessary in a duct líne , debris such as
mud, sand and dirt shall be preventεd from enteríng into the ducts by providing suítable pipes
plugs etc.
Fit concrete envelope of a partially completed duct line with reinforcing steel for a minimum of
600 mm beyond the end of the envelope. Reinforcing bars shall be províded as shown ín the
plans.
3.7. Under Ground Pipe for Branch Circuits
Underground pipes for branch circuits shall be HDPE pípe from the panel board and líghting
pole and projections thereof, the ends of the pípes shall be protected by caps. Pípes shall be
cleaned alld plugged until conductors are installed.
The underground portion of the pipe shall be encased in a concrete envelope and shall be buried
as specified for underground ducting with conc1'ete encasement.
3.8. Excavation and Back-filling
All excavation fo 1' hand holes , ducts , and cable installation shall be calTied out so as to minimize
damage to existing su1'faces.
The Contractor will reinstate all surfaces on completion of back-filling to the o1'iginal condition
To facilities reinstatement the outline of all areas to be removed in Portland cement concrete
and asphalt concrete sidewalks and pavements shall be cut to a minimum depth of 50 mm with a

mVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Civil Works for Electrical Items - Section 9.2
saw , prior to removing the sidewalk and pavement materials.

Cut for remainber of the required depth may be made by a method satisfactory to the Engineer.
Cuts shall be neat and true and surfaces outside the removal area shal1 not be damaged.
The Engineer may waive or modify the above requirements fo1' excavation and reinstatement
when the excavation líes within an area to be over1 aid 0 1' reconstructed under othe1' clause of the
Specifications.
All backfill for manholes , duct banks , and ducts shall comply with the requirements of Section
8.1 “ Structure Excavation" of the Specifications.
4.1. Method of measurement
The quantity of each item paid for under this clause wil1 be the number of pieces , linear meter ,
and individual items as detai1ed in Section 9.1 which are fu 1'nished and installed in accordance
with the Specification, the Drawings , or the instruction by the Engineer.
The quantity, determined as provided above shall be paid at the Contract price pe1' unit of
measurement fo 1' the pay items as listed in Section 9.1. The price and payment sha l1 be fu l1
compensation for all materials , labor, equipment and othεr incidentalnecessalY to complete the
work in accordance with the Drawings , the Specifications and as instructed by the Engineer.
In particular, the unit prices for ma펴lole cover, fixing boìts , nuts , HDPE pipes and fittings , of
‘
installation and such as any repairs of civil wo1'1s ns the Engineer considcrs shall be required.
4.2. Basis of Payment
Payment for items shal1 be deemed to be in c1uded fu 1'nishing, installing, and repairing in the unit
price for these items.

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Diesel En힘 ne Generator - Section 9.3
SECTION 9.3: EMERGENCY BACK-UP DIESEL ENGINE

GENERATOR UNIT
CONTENTS
1. GENERAL ...……..........••...........….•.........•.…..……………...•.….....•.......……”…………...•..………... - 2-
2. EQUIPMENT RATING AND CAPABlLITY ……... ,………………………………...……....…•...…-2-
3. CRlTICAL SPEED …
.........……………………………….....•.......…...,.•…......•...•……..………………… -2-
4. QUALITY ASSURANCE ...……………...….......….....…...,........………•.••••••…·…………….••......... - 3 -
5. MATERIAL………........….........…………...........…………………..............……...….•.......•...••...........- 3 -
5.1 STANDARDS COMMERCIAL PRODUCT ....…………...••...….......•.........……....…………..... - 3-
5.2 AC GENERATOR UNIT ...….................….....•...••.......••......,.........……………••......…....•.…...... - 3-
5.3 DIESEL ENGINE UNITS ……… ....………………………….....…....………....…•...…….•..……”……… -4-
5.4 ENGINE CONTROL FUNCTIONS FOR OPERATION AND ALARMING ITEMS•... - 5-
6. INSTALLATION .••.……........…………………….....……….....•......…•.......…...•..•.…………...•……….- 6-
6.1. MOUNTED DIESEL ENGINE GENERATOR UNIT ..•.……....………••..•…………....••...…….- 6-
6.2. VIBRATION ISOLATORS ………………........….....…………………………...•…•.......•.....•…...….... - 6-

6.3. TREATMENT AND PAINTING …………………………...……………………………….........•.…....... - 6 ,.
6.4. GALV ANIZED STEEL PIPING AND FITTINGS …………………………•..•.....……………....…-6-
6.5. FACTORY TEST .•.……...•...……...•......••........….....…....………..•.…...........….....….....….......…... -7 -

6.6. FIELD TEST AND INSPECTION ……..........….....….............…............•…....•…...…..….......... -7 -
6.7. COMMISSIONING ………………………………………........•.…………………....…………………........…-8-
6.8. COMMERCIAL TERM •••………...….........…........…………….....……...............…..•……………….- 8-

7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT .•..….....…...............…..........•…...…•..…........…….....…... - 8-
7. 1. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT ……..........•............…......•.………•...……….....…....…............ - 8-
7.2. BASIC OF PAYMENT…....................…....….................................…..•...........................…..... - 9-
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - DIVISION 9 9.3- 1 - of9

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Diesel En핑 ne Generator - Section 9.3
SECTION 9.3: EMERGENCY BACK-UP DIESEL ENGINE

GENERATOR UNIT
1. GENERAL
The works sha11 consist of furnishing and installing diesel engine and generator with the
necess없y instruments, cables and accessories for connection, piping and fittings and a11 insta11ed
for back-up power to the fac i1ities ofthe Main bridge as shown in the Drawings.
The Contractor shall submit his drawings based on the Contract Documents 0 1' equivalent as
approval a11 detai1s.
2. EQUIPMENT RATING AND CAPABlLITY
Diesel-electric generating unit sha11 have a net continuous rating as indicated at 0.8 power factor
for 3-phases. ur꾀t. Both the engine and generator of the generator unit sha11 be capable of
satisfactorily carrying loads shown in the Drawings in express of the net continuous rated
generating capacity at 0.8 power factor for a period of two (2) continuous hours out of any 24
consecutive hours.
Gross KW rating of each diesel generating u피t sha11 be not more than the figure obtained by
multiplying the delivered shaft horse power (HP) rating ofthe engine by 0.746 and by the overall
efficiency ofthe generator at the corresponding load.
Overa11efficiency ofthe generator shall allow for power required operating the exciter, including
power consumed in losses and in windage and friction for generator and rotating exciter.
Rated net capacity of each generating unit shall be defined as gross electrical power output of
generator minus total electrical power requirements of "engine assemble" as defined in NEMA
publication "Standard Practices for Stationary Diesel Engine" , or equivalent proposed by the
Contractor for approval by the Engineer.
A11 auxili없y equipment furnished sha11 be designed for continuous duty at 11 0% of rated net
capaci양 of generating unit.
The generating wùt shall be rated for 20KVA , 0.8 power factor, 3-phases, 4wires, output voltage
380/ 220volts, frequency 50Hz.
3. CRITlCAL SPEED
Each complete diesel-electric generating unit sha11 be free of critical speeds öf either a major or
minor order that wi1l endanger satisfactory operation ofthe unit.
Contractor shall submit three (3) copies of a summary of computatìons of critical speeds to the
Engineer, if required.

DIVISION 9 - ELECTruCAL WORKS Diesel Engine Generator - Section 9.3
Engine installed shall meet all ofthe opεrating experience requirements listed below:
(a) Only εlectrical generation service is considered as equivalent experience.

(b) Only experience on the same engine model is acceptable. Engine model shall be
considered to be a given series or class ofidentical bore and stroke and ofthe same type of
engme.
(c) Only experience at the identical rotate speed, as that which is offered shall be acceptable.
(d) Only experience at the identical or higher brake mean effective pressure , as that which is
offered shall be acceptable.
(e) Only experience with fuel oil shall be acceptable.
5. MATERIAL
5.1 Standards Commercial Product
Generator unit shall , as a minimum is in accordance with the requirements of this specification,
KIS or equivalent intemational standards , and shall be the manufacturel'’s standard commercial
product with any added features needed to comply with the requirements.
Additional or better features which are not specifically prohibited by the specification, but which
are a part ofthe manufacture’s standard commercial product shall be included in the generator unit
being fumished.
The Contractor shall fumish new materials ofhigh quality , which will give long life and reliable
operation. No equipment shall be in prior service except as required by factor tests.
Materials and equipment shall be shown in the Drawings. Prior to placing any order for
equipment , the Contractor shall submit full working drawings and manufacture’s catalogues
technical data for approval by the Engilleεr.
Workmallship shall be ofhighest quality in every detai l.
5.2 AC Generator Unit
Each generator unit shall consist of a diesel engine c01mected to an altemating CUITent generator
with brush-less excitation system mounted on a steel sub base and provided with all necessary
accessories , auxiliaries , and control equipment resulting in a complete self-contained unit people
capable of operation.
Unit shall be arranged for manual starting. Generator unit must be capable of providing full rated
power within 10 seconds after starting.
The design description for the main genáil.tor unit aiid auxiliaries eqüipment shaflbe as fo l1 ow ,
but not limited to:

mVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Diesel Engine Generaíor - Section 9.3
1. Type: Outdoo1' use and sound p1'oof type
2. Capacity p1'ime: 18KVA (P1'oposed by Cont1'acto1')
3. Capacity standby: 20KVA
4. No of Phases , COllilection method: 3-Phases , 4 까ri1'es ， 4 poles
5. Output voltage: AC3801220volts
6. Frequency: 50Hz
7. Power factor: 0.8 at lagging
8. Speed: 1,500 φm
9. Starting system: Manual 0 1' Automatic functio l1 at the 12 volts I DC
10. Cooling systεm: Wate1' by Radiator
11. Coupled method: Di1'ect with SAE adapte1' flexible disc
12. Restor，ε time: Lεss than 10 second fÌ'om starting by automatic.
5.3 Diesel Engine Units
The generato 1' diesel to be furnished shall drive the NC generator and shall be base mounted.
The diesel engine shall be of soundp1'o of type , single acting, solid injection, 4-st1'oke cycle, and
cold starting.
Main parts shall process excellent properties against heat, p1'essu1'e, erosion and wear.
All parts shall be manufactu1'ed to ensure the highest accuracy and p1'ecision by means of limit
gages , special jigs , fixtu 1'es , etc. , so that they are enti1'e1y il1terchangeable with each othe1'.
Engine shall be designed 80 that the same size of cylinde1's will be used throughout the entire
engine and all pa1'ts of engines shall be of the same size and inte1'changeable.
Materials used, manufacturing and perfònnance shall be in accordance with JIS specification, 0 1'
equivalen t.
The design desc1'iptiollS for the diesel engine u11Ì t shall be as follow:
1. Type: Sound proof used outdoo1' type , 4-stroke , constant speed and radiator cooled , or
equivalent app1'oved by the Engineer
2. Engine outpu t: 25 PS
3. No , of cylinde1': 4

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Diesel Engine Generator - Section 9.3
4. Engine Speed: 1500rpm
5. Noise level: Less than 90 dB at the 1 m around ofunits.
6. Fuel consumption at fulllord: max. 5 liters/ hour approx
7. Fuel tank capacity: 80 liters
8. Starting battery and charger: 12 volts 35 Ah or equivalent
5 .4 Engine Control Functions for Operation and Al arming Items
The component list of Engine Control Functions for Ope1'ation and Alarming Items shall be
showl1 below , but not limited to:
(a) Engine Cont1'ol Functions
1. Start: Automatic 0 1' Manual at offpower main sou1'ce
2. Stop: Automatic 0 1' Manual by fuε1 cut lever of governo1' and
Emergency stop by manual operation
3. Sensing Alarm:
• High coolant temperature
• Low lube , oil pressure
• Over speed
• Starting failure
• Over current
• Over voltage , and
• Earth fault .
(b) Control Instruments
The following instruments shall be provided
• Volt meter for indicate incoming voltage with transfer switches for each phase
• Current meter for output cunent
• Volt meter for output voltage with transfer switches fo 1' each phase
• Frequency gauge (Hz) ,

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Diesel Engine Generator - Section 9.3
.. Main switch for generator output
.. Battery charger with batteries
" Almunciated push bottoms (ON I OFF) and their indicationlamps
.. Selector switches and buzzer(s) , and
• Auxiliary relays and wiring devices
6. INSTALLATION
lnstallation shall conform to the requirements NFP A 70 , 0 1' instructed by the Engineer.
6. 1. Mounted Diesel Engine Generator Unit
Diesel generating unit shall be installed on a concrete foundation (Class C) as indicates.

Vibration isolators shall be provided to isolated vibrations fi:om the diesel-generating unit to the
foundation.
Engine generator unit shall be mounted on a fabricated steel skid base suitable for supporting,
transportation, and skidding engine and generator without damage to equipment or alignment.
6.2. Vibration Isolators
Vibration’ s isolators shall be provided to isolate the engine-generator unit from the building floor ,
at least four (4) isolators, as recommended by the isolator manufacturer are required.
The isolators shall be manufactured by a finn specializing in this product and the unit shall be
specifically listed for this application and have a maximurn deflection of 25 11ml.
6.3. Treatment and Painting
All parts including engine subject to high temperature shall be treated and painted in accordance
with rnanufacturer’s standards.
The generator and all associated electrical equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and treated
prìor to paìntìng.
Color shall be rnanufacturεr’s standard.
6.4. Galvanized Steel Piping and Fittings
(a) Pipes
Pipe shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel confonning to the specific exception or additional
requirement noted in the Specification.
The pipes shall be in six (6) meter lengths without couplings (sockets) on either ends.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVIS.ION 9 9.3-6-of9

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Di esel Engine Generator - Section 9.3
Pipes shal1 be made threaded on both ends with right-hand tapped threads in accordance with ISO
R 7. Threading shall be made after zinc coating.
Pipes larger than 50 mm diameter shal1 be f1 anged.
Pipes shaJl have zinc coating inside and outside applied by hot-dipped process in accordance with
ASTM A153. Zinc coating sha11 be as required in ASTM A120.
(b) Fittings
Fittings shall confonTI to ISO/R49 subject to the specific exceptions or additional requirements
noted in these Specifications.
Fittings sha11 be made ofhot-dipped galvanized malleable iron and suitable for working pressure
of 1MPa. The chemical and physical properties of the castings sha11 conform to ASTM A197.
The castings shall have no defects that would be detrimental to the subsequent processing or to the
service for which they a1'e intended. The surfacε sha11 be reasonably smooth. No repairing,
plugging , 0 1' wielding of any kind sha11 be penllitted.
Fittings shall have zinc coating inside and outside by the hot-dipped process in accordance with
ASTM A153.
Fittings shall be designated by the size ofthe threads.
6.5. Factory Test
The engine generator unit sha11 be brand-new and is not used one time. The engine-generator
unit shall be subject to the manufacturer’s standards run-in and conditioning tests.
Following the run-Ìn tests , the engine-gene1'ator unit shall be tested at rated speed and voltage for
8 hours of continues operations with 2 hour each at 50, 74, 100 , and 110 percεnt of rated load,
consecutively, 0.8 power factor.
The Contractor shall tests rUll on the voltage regulator to detennine the variation in tenninal
voltage under conditions of constant load , and under cOl1ditions of abrupt load changes to
determine the maximum voltagε change duril1g the surging period al1d the time required.
El1 gine speed governing system shall be tested in acco1'dance with ASME-PTC26.
6.6. Field Test and Inspection
The Contractor shall perform alJ field tests and trial operations and conduct a11 field inspections ,
except final field inspection.
The Contractor shall give ample notice ofthe date and time schedule for tests , tríal operations , and
inspections , which require the presence ofthε Engineer.
1'e-tested at the Contractor’s expense.

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WO없업 Diesel Engine Generator - Section 9.3
Field tests shall include the following:
• Demonstrate proper operation of all systel11.
• Conduct 3-hours 111n utilizing Contractor-ful11ished portable load bank as follow:
1) 112 load-one hour
2) Fu1110ad-two hour
6.7. Commissioning
Continuous commissioning offour (4) hours under full rating load shall be guaranteed.
6.8. Commercial Term
It is il11perative for Supplier to submit proof oflSO 9001 certificate for industrial facility. The
Supplier shall guarantee all components of generator with validity of a period of 5 years from the
date ofhandover to the Employer.
7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYl\엠ENl‘
7.1. Mεthod ofMεasurement
The quantity to be measured for payment shall be made in set for the complete diesel engine
generating unit as stated in the Bi11 of Quantities.
The unit shall include the following items of all equipment and relative l11 aterials , form and
including the controller, for the provision of a fully operational diesel-engine generating uni t.
The outline of the diagrams for the system in the contract drawings shal1 be referenced to the
Contractor. Any additional wiring and c01mection, piping and fittings shall be deemed to be
included in the unit rates as provided in the Bid Price Schedule.
(a) Diesel Engine Genεrator Unit

The quantity of diesel-engine generating unit shall be measured and paid for by the l1umber of the
"set" supplied, instal1ed and certified by the Engineer to have passed the quality and operation test
and for full payment.
The set shall include accessories and other complimentary equipment and parts necessary for
satisfactorγ perfonnance of the above-mentioned set.
(b) Fuel Day Tank

The quality of above ground fuel tan1ι shall be inc1uded measured for by the number of set of 80
litter fuel tank and necessary fïttings approval and accepted by the Engineer.
Required materials shall inc1 ude machine foundation , fuel tatùc, plumbing equipment, of civil
works , and all valves and gauge necessary inc1uding the supply of fuel transfer pump and all the
necessary plumbing and electrical work.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISIθN9 9. 3 - 8 - of9

DJVISION 9 .- ELECTRICAL WORKS Diesel Engine Generator - Section 9.3
(c) COl1 trol Equipment

Required mate1'ials and equipment above shall include the engine starting panel , starte1' battery
unit, and furnishing materials , supp1iεs ， 1abor, equipmel1t , to01s , inc1 udil1g accessories and
complimentary electrica1 equipment and other incidentals al1d subsidiary wo1'k necessary to
completε the installatiol1, and certified fo 1' full approval by the Engineer.
7.2. ßasic of Payment
The works measured as described above shall be paid as lump sum to cover all the works ofthese
ltems.
Payment shall be full compensation for all the work shown in the Drawings or describεd he1'ein ,
in c1 uding but not limited to , p1'ovision of gene1'ator system
Unit of
Pay Item N o. I Description
Measurement
9.03-01
L . - . _ _ _ _ _ __
I Diesel Ellgine Gellerato1' Lump Sum

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Automatic Transfer Switcb - Sεction 9.4
SECTION 9.4: AUTOMATIε r표RANSFERS뼈1ITC훌훌
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GENERAL…••••…………… ••••• 0 •••••• " ............................................... …•••••…•••••…•••••…… •••••••••••….... - 2-

2. QUALITY ASSURANCE …•••••••••••.•••••••••••••••….............................. …… ••• 0 0" • • • "' • • • …•••…............ - 2-
3. TECHNIεAL REQUIREMENTS ........…••• …… ...………… .0 •• …...............…… .....…••• "… •••…....... - 2-
4. FUNCτIONAL OPERATIONS …......."… ...................................…......... …........... 41 • • 0 •••••• ……….- 3-
5. COMMERCIAL TERM …………………… •••••….....…•••••• …………………………… ...….................... - 3-
6. 1\생EASUREME이T AND PAYMENl‘ ••••••••••••••…••••••••••••••• …… ••••••••••••••…••••••….................... - 3-
6.1 Method of Measu l'ement ...… e • • o . . . . . . e.O f> . . . . . O ’ •• ". ".00 . . . . . 0 • • • • • 1' .. 0 • • … "000 ’"" ••• …. 0 ... 00 • • • • • "000.0 …… ................ - 3-
6.2 Basis of Payment ............................ “ ••••••••••••••••• “ •••••••••••••••••••••••• “ •••••••• “...
…….…….
..… ……...…….“…….……...…….“…….….“…….….“…….….“…….….“ …...
….…
… ••…….…….
••“ ••… - 4 - ð.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 9 9.4- 1 - of 4

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRl CAL WORKS Automatic Transfer Switch - Section 9.4
SECTION 9.4: AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
1. GENERAL
Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) shall be provided or supplied or both included Section: 9.3 of
these Specification. Low voltage switchgear supplier shall be integrated with the equipment.
The supplier shall be conformed to the following technical requirements for better coordination
with the Generator unit manufacturers.
The equipment installed shall meet all of the operating experience requirements listεd blow:
(a) Only electrical function and operation shall be considered as equivalent experience.
(b) The experience on the same equipment model shall be acceptable. ATS model shall be
given series or class of identical function ofthe same type of devices.
(c) The experience at the identical function as that which is offered shall be acceptable.
3. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) The ATS shall be provided and shall be coordinated with manufacturer of the standby
Engine AC generator unit to ensure maintain system compatibility for the complete
standby power system. ATS shall be manufactured as the same as diesel engine
generator manufacturer to make sure uniformity for electrical supply system.
(b) The ATS shall be breaker type , mechanically and electrically interlocked rated 3000A, AC
3 Phase, 415voltsl 240volts , 4 wires system, 65 KA symmetrical interrupting capacity
tnlmmum.
(c) The ATS shall be steel sheet and steel framing cabinet made and free-standing type
suitable for connect one of normal power 훨eder and other one emergency feeder on loads.
The ATS shall be installed in-line with the normallow voltage switchgear and emergency
low switchgear as shown in the Drawings.
The ATS system shall be cOlmected to the main source ofthe secondary MDP-3 panel for
the secondary transformer.
(d) Components of the operating mechanism shall be insulated or electrically isolated.
(e) Components of linkage and handles in operating mechanism shall be ruggedly

constructed and not su비 ect to deterioration.

‘ ’ 1 ‘;δ 、
DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL WORKS Automatic Trllnsfer Switch - Section 9.4
(f) Transfer switch shall be withstood c1 0sing and interrupting ratings sufficient for the
voltage employed and the available short circuit at the point of application.
4. FUNCTIONAL OPERATIONS
TheATS sh따1 operatè the following works:
(a) In a blackout ofnormal power so따ce or phase fai1따e， the ATS shall start immediately by
automatically. The engine-generator set (EG set) shall be controlled the starting time to
be delayed 10 seconds from the ATS starting. The ATS sha11 transfer the cOffilected loads
to standby EG set from normal power supply. The stalting timer shall be adjustable.
(b) When the nonnal power supply retums in the act of the standby power feeding to loads ,
the ATS shall maintain supply to the emergency loads from the EG set during of 60
seconds for checking out nonnal power continuously. After the normal power makes
certain of feeding power, the ATS shall transfer loads to normal power from standby EG
set. If normal power fails again, within 60 seconds durati()n, no transfer shall be
affected. %
ULlof
(c ) After transf농rring to nonnal power, EG set shal1 be stopped autornatical1y after a time r
‘”
delay of 10 to 15 minutcs ,
-
(d) The ATS sha11 be provided with capability for testing purposes by simulating power
failure condition. Selector switches of ENGINE TEST , SYSTEM and TRANSFER
TEST, and READY shall be provided
(e) The ATS circuit breaker devices shall be capable ofbeing operated manually.
(f) The ATS shall be provided with auxiliary dry contracts.
5. COMMERCIAL TERM
The Supplier shall submit proof of ISO 9001 certificate for industrial facility. The supplier shall
guar없ltee all components of the ATS with validity of a period of 5 years from the date of
handover to the Employer.
The quantity to be measured for payment shall be made in set for the complete automatic
transfer switching system stated in the Bi1l of Quantities.
The sets shall included al1 of equipment, termination cable and c011l1ections , and testing data ,
and any necessary relative works , and installationlobar, and transportation fee for the provision
of a fully operational function at on site.

DIVISION 9 - ELECTRICAL 찌'ORKS Automatic Transfer Switch - Section 9.4
The contract drawings shall be shown the outline system or details or both to be provided to
ensure the system by the Contractor.
Any additional wiring , connections , for modification circuits , fixed bolts and nuts , and relative
electrical works shall be deemed to be included in the unit rates as provided in the Bid Prices
Schedule.
The work measured as described above shal1 be paid for on the basis of each to cover all the
works ofthe items.
Such payment shall be full compensation for all the work shown in the Drawings or described
herein, illcluding but 110t limited to , provision of component system of Automatic Tra11sfer
Switch ulli t.
Unit of
Description
Measurement
Set

cν j
DIVISION 10
DAY찌rORKS
• r
“ι
‘ 2
‘
DIVISION 10-DAYWORK Daywork- Section 10.1
SECTION 10.1 - DAY찌TORK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GENERAL ………………………….....……………………………… ...…..…………”………••....……•.••…………..2

2. SUBMITTALS ……•...…………………………………...“ •••....••••••••.•••••••••••••.•••••••••••••••••..••…..•.•…..•..••••2
3. MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ……………………....………..••…….•..……… ..•.•••••……
3.1 MATERIALS ................................................................................................................................ 2
3.2 EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................... 3
4. EXECUTION OF DAYWORK ....……•••.••.•.....•••........•.....•....….•••.••••••••••••.••••••••••.•..•••••••••••…••••3

4.1 DAYWORK AUTHORIZATION ................................................................................................ 3
5. PERFORMANCE OF WORK EXECUTED ON A DAYWORK BASIS …

.......................•...3
6. DAY찌lORK PAYMENT REQUEST ……………………………….....…....……………...….........•….,•...•3
7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ...…………………....…………………………………..•.………...•••.“ 4
7.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FOR LABOR ................................................................... .4
7.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION PLANT .................................….4
7.3 MEASUREMENT ANDPAYMENTFORMATERIALS ............... ……·…… .............................. 4
7.4 PAYMENT ................................................................................................................................... 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - D1 VISION 10 10.1 -1- of7

’‘ i 、 •
t
DIVISION 10-DAYWORK Daywork - Section 10.1
SECTION 10.1 - DAYWORK
1. GENERAL
This section provides additional requirements to those shown in the General Conditions of
Contract. This Specification section describes requirements and procedures for certain
Engineer-approved operations not provided for or allowed for in tbe Bid Price Schedule but
which become apparent during construction as being necess없y for the satisfactory execution
and completion of the projec t. The operations carried out under Daywork will be as directed
and authorized by the Engineer and Employer in accordance with the following:
(a) πle Contractor shall be paid fo 1' such work and supply according to the B i1l of
Quantities and Prices or as otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer and -,‘?
Employer. ?
;;
비
l
/
r
l
Daywork measurements shall be taken jointly and recorded and agreed at the time
、
ar
such work is executed or such material is fumished. The Engineer w il1 not otherwise
recognize the Contractor's measurements. 훌‘
(c) The Engineer and Employer shall always have full access to the Contractor’ s timc
records, and may check daily with the Contractor’ s timekeeper, or otherwise, the time
taken in executing any Daywork.
(d) The Engineer and Employer’ s agreement of any time associated with Daywork shall in
no way bind the Engineer and Employer to the value ofwork.
ri
2. SUBMITTALS --,
‘ •
(a) The Contractor shall, before ordering materials , submit to the Engineer and Employer ‘
‘、
quot없ions for his approval, and subsequent to material ordering, shall fumish to the
Engineer and Employer such receipts or other vouchers as may be necessary to verify
the amounts paid.
(b) The Contractor shall submit at the end of each working day a w1'itten record of the
hours for labor and plant and the quantities of all materials used on a Daywork basis
and shall obtain the Engineer and Employer’ s signature on this record certifying his
agreement with the items and quantities claimed.
3. MA'’fERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
3.1 MATERIALS
All materials used on a Daywork basis shall meet the quality and performance p1'ovisions
given În the relevant sections of the Specifications. For materials not specified in deta i1
elsewhere in the Specification,. material quality shall be as directed 0 1' approved by the
Ellgineer.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 10 10 .1 -2- of7

3.2 EQUIPMENT
All equipment used on a Daywork basis shall meet the p1'ovisions of the 1'elevant sections of
the Specifications and shall be app1'oved fo 1' use by the Engineer before work is commenced.
4. EXECUTION OF DAYWORK
4.1 DAY찌'ORK AUTHORIZATION
(a) Daywork shall 110t be commenced until the issue by the Enginee1' and Employer of a
w1'itten Daywork Authorization , and ifnecessary, a signed Variation Order.
(b) For work to be executed as Daywork, the unit pdces established in the Bill of
Quantities and P1'ices shall be used.
(c) An authorization issued by the Enginee1' and Employer will describe the extent and
nature of the work required with attachments of drawings or revised Contract
Documents to define the details of the work, and will dεsignate method of determining
the eventual value ofthe Works ordered.
(d) For work to be executed for which new or additional Daywork Unit Prices have to be
agreed, this authorization will also be cross 1'efe1'enced to , and be accompanied by , a
Change Ordεr 01' Amendment authorizing the agreed new or additional Unit Prices.
(e) The Enginee1' and Employer will sign and date the Daywork Authorization as
autho1'ization for the Contracto1' to proceed with the work.
5. PERFORMANCE OF WORK EXECUTED ON A DAYWORK BASIS
(a) Daywork operations shall be ca11'ied out in accordance with the provisions of the
relevant Technical Specification sections goveming the placement and finishing of
materials , the testing , quality and maintenance of the work and rectification of any
unsatisfactory work.
(b) 111 the case of work required to be ca11'ied out on a Daywork basis 1s not specified in
the Specifications , the work shall be performed as directed and approved by the
Engineer and Employer.
6. DAYWORK PAYMENT REQUEST
(a) Upon completion of each instruction for work executed on a Daywork basis , the
Contractor shall prepare an itemized payment request fo 1' the labor, plant and mate1' ial
costs incurred by him in can'ying out the Daywo1'k.
(b) The Daywork payment request shall be included with all supp이ting data in the
Contractors application for interim payments.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 10 10.1 -3- of7

;‘
DlVISION 10-DAYWORK Daywork - Section 10.1
(c) The supporting data for the Daywork payment request shall include a11 of the dai1y
records approved by the EngÎneer plus any additional information requested by the
Engineer such as:
• A copy of the Engineer’ s Daywork Authorization;
• A summary of the dates and times work was perfonned, and by whom;
• A summary of hours worked, for all1abor;
‘
• A sUlllmary ofhours used for all Construction Plant and
• Where applicable , invoices and recεipts for any special materials , products or
services used 1n the Works authorized by Variation Order.
(d) The Engineer will check and certify the Contractor’ s Daywork payment request as paπ
of the application for Monthly Certificate Payment in accordance with the relevant
Articles of the General Conditions of Contract conceming certification and payment.
7.1 MEASUREMENTANDPAYMENTFORLABOR
Measurement of labor for payment under Daywork shall be made for the actual certified
hours worked at thc rates established Ì11 the Bill of Quantities and Prices for the varìous *
xψ
categories of labor. }
7.2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION PLANT

Measurement of Construction Equipment and plant for payment under Daywork, whether
hired or owned by the Contractor, shall be made for the actual certified hours worked by the
plant at the rates established in the Bi11 of Quantities and Prices.
7.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS

Measurement of materials for payment under Daywork shall be made for the actual certified
없nount of material provided and installed at the rates established in the Bill of Quantities. If
no rate exists for the material in the Bi11 of Quantities the payment shal1 be based on
submittals in accordance with Clause 2(a) ofthis Specification section.
7.4 PAYMENT
The quantities that stated Ì11 the BOQ are on1y for reference, actual qualltities and payment
shal1 be approved by the Employer and the Engineer after be carried out by the Contractor
during the construction stage.
Payment shall be based on these items and unit as following:
Pay Items Description Unit
10.0 ...01 LABOR

10.01-0 1.01 Labor (Grades 3.017) hour
10.01-0 1.02 Labor (Grades 3.2/7) hour

DIVISION 10 - DAYWORK Daywork - Section 10.1
- 10.01-01.03 Labor (Grades 3.5 /7) hour

10.01-0 1. 04 Labor (Grades 4.5 /7) hour
Korean Labour
10.01-0 1. 05 Welding Labour hour

10.01-0 1. 06 Steel Labour hour
10.01-0 1. 07 Non Skilled Labour hour
10.01-0 1. 08 Fonn Labour hour
10.01-0 1.09 Painter hour
10.01-02 CONSTRUC TlON EQUIPMENT

뉴---
10.01-02.01 Shovel 1,25m3 hour
10.01-02.02 Shove12 ,3m3 hour
10.01-02.03 Bulldozer 108cv hour
10.01-02.04 Bulldozer 140cv hour

-
10.01-02.05 Tire roller 16 T hour
10.01-02.06 Whee1 Roller 10 T hour
10.01-02.07 Drump Truck 5 T hour
10.01-02.08 Drump Truck 10 T hour

-
10.01-02.09 Trai1er Truck 240 cv hour
10.01-02.10 Concrete mixed Truck 10 ,7m3 hour
10.01-02.11 Trailer 40 T hour

--뉴--
10.01-02.12 Truck crane 10 T hour

뉴---
10.01-02.13 Crawler crane 10 T hour

1----

--- -
10.01-02 .1 6 Crawler crane 28 T hour

10.01-02.18 Tower Crane 25 T hour
10.01-02.19 Tower Crane 40 T hour

10.01-02.20 Girder lauching crane type K33-60 hour
10.01-02.21 Grantry Crane 10 T hour
10.01-02.22 Forklift 0,8T hour

i 、 i 、 ‘

. !
싸i
Forldift 3T
. ι
10.01-02.23 hour
10.01-02.24 Cage forklift 3T Lifting H is 100m hour
10.01-02.25 Electric Winch 5 T h01lr
10.01-02.26 Chain Pulley 3T h01lr
10.01-02.27 Chain Pulley 5T hour
10.01-02.28 Jack250T hour
10.01-02.29 Jack 500T hour
10.01-02 .3 0 Cable pushing Machine (DN) 15 kW hour
10.01-02.31 Cable Cutter 10Kw hour
10.01-02.32 Concrete Mixer 2501 hour
10.01-02.33
10.01-02 .3 4
Mortar Mixer 80 lít
Concrete mixing Plant 50‘ m3 1h

hour
hour
k'
10.01-02.3 5 Mortar Pump 2 m31h hour
10.01-02.36 Concrete Pump Truck 50 m3 1h hour
10.01-02.37 Needle Vibrator 1,5 kw hour
10.01-02.38 Asphalt concrete mixing Plant 80T/h hour

10.01-02.39 Asphalt Sprayer 190Cv hour
10.01-02.4 0 Asph a1t concrete Spreader 130Cv - 140Cv hour
10.01-02 .4 1 Bituminous Cooker hour
10.01-02 .42 Water Pump 20kw hour
10.01-02.4 3 . Air Compressor 600m3 1h hour

.
10.01-02 .44 Air Compressor 360m31h hour
10.01-02 .4 5 Air Compressor 10m31h hour

i j
j
AC Welding Machine (DN) 231cw

j
10.01-02 .4 6 hour l
l
i
10.01-02 .4 7 Vertical Dri1l er 2.5Kw hour
i
l
10.01-02 .4 8 Vertical Dri1ler 4.5Kw hour j
10.01-02 .49 Steam hammer 3m3/ph hour
10.01-02.50 Pipe Cutter 5Kw hour
10.01-02.51 Tole Cutter 15Kw hour
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - DIVISION 10 10 .1 -6- of7 ‘ ’

10.01-02.52 Plasma steel Cutter hour

10.01-02.53 Tole-Ro l1i ng Machinε (DN) 5Kw hour
10.01-02.54 Rebar Cutter and Bender 5Kw hour
10.01-02.55 Glinder 2.7Kw hour
Se1f- propεlled Rotating - Threshing - Driller, hour
10.01-02.56 compressed air φ105 - 110mm
10.01-02.57 Barge 200T hour
10.01-02.58 Barge 250T hour
10.01-02.59 Barge 400T hour
10.01-02.60 Barge 1000T hour

•- --t--
10.01-02.61 Stεe1 Float 200T hour
10.01-02.62 Canoe 150cv hour
10.01-02.63 Tug Boat 75cv hour
10.01-02.67 Boring machine cby-150-zub hour
10.01-02.68 Sonic test equipment hour

Hydraulic press 125T hour
--t----
10.01-02.70 Tug Boat SD 150ton (l 039Cv) hour
10.01-02.71 An chor Handing Boat 20tol1 (202Cv ) hour
10.01-02.72 Crane 550 hour
10.01-02.73 i galgg 3000T hour
1 잉 01-앙 2.74 Den‘ ick Crane 210T hour
잉 nour

Technical Specification VamCong

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Technical Specification VamCong

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

P1\CKAGE CW3A

IDDI됐{해 IDOCυ 1\'111봐협TS

Cuu Long CIPM

HOCHIMINH CITY, May 2013

DIVISION 2 - SITE WORKS

Section 2.1 Site Clearing 2.1

Section 4.1 Landscaping 4.1

DIVISION 5 - SLOPE PROTEεTION

Section 5.1 Slope Protection 5.1

DIVISION 6 - WEARING SURFAεE

Section 6.1 Prime Coat and Tack Coat 6.1

Section 6.2 Asphalt Concrete Surface Courses 6.2

Section 6.3 Waterproofing 6.3

Section 7.1 Traffic sign 7 .1

Section 7.2 Pavement Markings 8.2

DIVISION 8 - STRUεTURE 찌'0RKS

8.1 Stmcture Excavation and Backfi 낀 ~ 1

Sect lOl1 8.5 Concrete Structures 8‘ 5

Section 8.6 Reinforcing Steel 8.6

Section 8.7 Prestressing 8.7

Sectioll 8.8 Steel Structurc 8‘ g

Section 9.1 Electrical 찌10rks 9.1

2.1 - Site Clearing ............................................................................................................... 2.1

SEεT훌ON 2.1- SI멜E εLEARINGA!얘DGR윈 BBH‘g

1.2. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMEN경‘S

1.2.2. Clearing and Grubbing and 1다'ee Removal

1.2.3. Topsoil Stripping

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATl ONS - mVISION 2 2.1-1-of8

1.2.4. Protection of Areas Designated to Remain

1.2.5. Disposal of Cleared Material

1.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

1.3. 1. Method of Measurement

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 2 2.1 - 2 - of8

1.3.2. Basis of Payment

TECHNICAL SPECIFIεATIONS - mVISION 2 2.1-3-of8

SECTION 2.2 - DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING

2.2. WORK REQUIREMENTS

(d) Demolition and Removal of Exis디ng Structures íncludes salvage of materials

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 2 2.3 - 4 - of8

2.2.2. Removal of Drainage Structures

2.2.3. Removal of Curbs

TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS - Dl VISION 2 2.3 - 5 - of 8

2.2.4. Removal of Pavements, Footpaths, etc.

(b) Removal of pavement shall be carefully undertaken to avoid damage to abutting

(c) If removal of sections of old pavement, footpaths or other hard surfaces of an

2.2.5. Removal of Traffic Signs

2.2.6. Removal of Buildings and Structures

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - DIVISION 2 2.3 - 6 - of8

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 2 2.3 - 7 - of8

2.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

TECHNICAL SPECIFJCATIONS - DIVISION 2 2.3 - 8 - of8

SECTION 4.1 - LA엠합gεAPING

3. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS …....…………..• 0 ••• …………………...……… ….. 5 0 .. 0 . 0

4. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ……………………...•。……… 0 …………(1 ……….. 10

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - mVISION 4 4.1 - I - of 11

SECTION 4.1 - LANDSCAPING

2.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS

The following Standards in their latest edition shall be paπicularly applied.

• ASTM C602-07 Agricultural Lirning Materials

• 22 TCN 271-2000 Standard for Constmction ofBitumious Surface Road

• 22 TCN 334-06 Standard for Constmction and Acceptant of Aggregate in

2.2 GRASSING, TREES AND SHRUBS FOR PLANTING

(a) Grass seed

TECHNICAL SPECIFICA Tl ONS - DIVISION 4 4.1 - 2 - of 11